[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025115135A1 - Processing system, processing method, and shaping method - Google Patents

Processing system, processing method, and shaping method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025115135A1
WO2025115135A1 PCT/JP2023/042768 JP2023042768W WO2025115135A1 WO 2025115135 A1 WO2025115135 A1 WO 2025115135A1 JP 2023042768 W JP2023042768 W JP 2023042768W WO 2025115135 A1 WO2025115135 A1 WO 2025115135A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
processing
irradiation
energy beam
light
modeling
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2023/042768
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
貴行 舩津
喜雄 川辺
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Nikon Corp
Original Assignee
Nikon Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nikon Corp filed Critical Nikon Corp
Priority to PCT/JP2023/042768 priority Critical patent/WO2025115135A1/en
Publication of WO2025115135A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025115135A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/34Laser welding for purposes other than joining
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B23MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B23KSOLDERING OR UNSOLDERING; WELDING; CLADDING OR PLATING BY SOLDERING OR WELDING; CUTTING BY APPLYING HEAT LOCALLY, e.g. FLAME CUTTING; WORKING BY LASER BEAM
    • B23K26/00Working by laser beam, e.g. welding, cutting or boring
    • B23K26/34Laser welding for purposes other than joining
    • B23K26/342Build-up welding

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the technical field of, for example, a processing system and processing method capable of processing an object, and a modeling method capable of additively modeling a shaped object on an object.
  • Patent Document 1 An example of a processing system for processing an object is described in Patent Document 1.
  • One of the technical challenges of such a processing system is to process the object appropriately.
  • a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, an imaging device that images a portion whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed, and the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or the light generated by the energy beam, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the imaging results of the imaging device.
  • a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, and an imaging device that captures, on an imaging surface, the part whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed, and at least one of an image of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device and an image of the light generated by the energy beam.
  • a processing method includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam, capturing an image of a portion that is fixed in position relative to the material supply member and the energy beam or the light generated by the energy beam, and controlling the additional processing based on the image capturing result.
  • a processing method includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam, detecting a positional relationship between a portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member and the energy beam or light generated by the energy beam, and adjusting the positional relationship using the detection result.
  • a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, a detection device that detects the position of a portion whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed and the position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or the light generated by the energy beam, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the detection result of the detection device.
  • a modeling method including: supplying modeling material from a supply port of a material supply member; melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port with an energy beam to additively model a model on an object; detecting the position of a portion whose positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed during a first period; detecting the position of the portion whose positional relationship is fixed during a second period after the first period; detecting the position of the energy beam during the first period; and detecting the position of the energy beam during the second period.
  • a processing system including an irradiation device that emits a first and a second energy beam and processes a workpiece using the first and the second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, a detection device that includes a beam splitter that splits a portion of the first and the second energy beams and detects an irradiation position in a first plane that crosses the traveling direction of the first energy beam via the beam splitter and an irradiation position in a second plane that crosses the traveling direction of the second energy beam via the beam splitter, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the detection result of the detection device, the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the first plane, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the second plane, and the detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position
  • a processing method includes processing an object using first and second energy beams emitted from an irradiation device, splitting a portion of the first and second energy beams, detecting an irradiation position in a first plane intersecting the traveling direction of the first energy beam split by the splitting with a detection device, and detecting an irradiation position in a second plane intersecting the traveling direction of the second energy beam split by the splitting, the processing includes scanning the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves in the first plane, and scanning the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves in the second plane, and the detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where the scanning range of the first energy beam by scanning the first energy beam and the scanning range of the second energy beam by scanning the second energy beam do not overlap.
  • a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, and a detection device that detects light that is returned toward the irradiation device after being emitted from the irradiation device, or light that is generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device and returned toward the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device that passes through at least a part of the material supplying member.
  • a processing method includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material ejected from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device, and detecting light that is returned toward the irradiation device after being emitted from the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device that passes through at least a part of the material supply member.
  • a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams and processes a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, a light receiving device that receives light that passes through an object onto which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the light receiving result of the light receiving device, the irradiation device including a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object, and the control device provides a processing system that performs drive control of the first scanning optical system and drive control of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second deflection scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.
  • a processing system including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams and processes a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, and a detection device that detects light passing through an object onto which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident, the irradiation device including a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object, and the detection device detects that the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.
  • a processing method including: scanning an object with a first energy beam using a first scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of the first energy beam on the object; scanning the object with a second energy beam using a second scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of a second energy beam different from the first energy beam on the object; receiving light that passes through the object on which the first and second energy beams are incident; and controlling the drive of the first scanning optical system and the drive of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a machining system according to a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the machining system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the bottom surface of the material nozzle.
  • Each of Figs. 4(a) to 4(c) is a plan view showing an example of a material supply region in a material supply surface.
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an imaging device that captures an image of an object to be imaged.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system.
  • FIG. 7A is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area in a processing unit area, and FIG.
  • FIG. 7B is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface.
  • Figures 8(a) and 8(b) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area within a processing unit area
  • Figure 8(c) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface.
  • Figures 9(a) to 9(e) is a cross-sectional view showing a process of forming a structure layer by the first forming operation.
  • FIG. 10(a) to Fig. 10(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a process for forming a three-dimensional structure.
  • FIG. 11(a) to 11(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a process of forming a structure layer by the second forming operation.
  • FIG. 12 shows the processing light passing through the irradiated surface of the material.
  • Figures 13(a), 13(c), and 13(d) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area within the processing unit area
  • each of Figures 13(b) and 13(e) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface.
  • FIG. 14(a) to FIG. 14(c) is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply region and the irradiation unit region.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is a desired one.
  • Figure 17(a) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device when the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is the desired positional relationship
  • Figure 17(b) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device when the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is not the desired positional relationship.
  • FIG. 18(a) is a plan view showing a structural layer SL having an annular shape
  • FIG. 18(b) is a graph showing the height of the structural layer when the structural layer shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 18(a) is formed without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, and the height of the structural layer when the structural layer shown in FIG. 18(a) is formed after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, for each angle in the circumferential direction of the structural layer.
  • FIG. 19(a) and FIG. 19(b) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 20(a) to FIG. 20(c) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 21(a) to FIG. 21(c) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 22 is a plan view showing a plurality of partial regions where the multi-beam alignment operation is performed.
  • FIG. 23 shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an optical member on which an index is formed.
  • FIG. 25(a) to 25(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a reflective optical system that can be used in place of the refractive optical system included in the irradiation optical system.
  • FIG. 26(a) and FIG. 26(b) is a cross-sectional view showing the optical path of the imaging light CL in the fourth modified example.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system in the fifth modified example.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a processing system according to the sixth modified example.
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a machining system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system according to the second embodiment.
  • 32(a) and 32(b) are plan views showing the irradiation position of the processing light on the detection surface of the irradiation position detection device.
  • FIG. 33 is a plan view showing the amount of positional deviation between two processing beams.
  • FIG. 34(a) and FIG. 34(b) is a plan view showing the amount of positional deviation of the irradiation position of the processing light with respect to the target position.
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system of the first modified example.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system of the first modified example.
  • FIG. 37( a ) and FIG. 37 ( b ) is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system including a light reducing member.
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system according to a second modified example.
  • FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system according to a third modified example.
  • a processing system capable of processing a workpiece W
  • a processing system SYS capable of processing a workpiece W
  • processing system SYS that performs additional processing based on laser metal deposition (LMD).
  • Additional processing based on laser metal deposition is an additive processing method that melts a modeling material M supplied to the workpiece W with processing light EL (i.e., an energy beam in the form of light) to form a model that is integrated with the workpiece W or that can be separated from the workpiece W.
  • processing light EL i.e., an energy beam in the form of light
  • the rotation directions (in other words, tilt directions) around the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are referred to as the ⁇ X direction, ⁇ Y direction, and ⁇ Z direction, respectively.
  • the Z-axis direction may be the direction of gravity.
  • the XY plane may be horizontal.
  • Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view that shows a schematic configuration of the machining system SYSa of the first embodiment.
  • Fig. 2 is a block diagram that shows the configuration of the machining system SYSa of the first embodiment.
  • the processing system SYSa is capable of performing additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the processing system SYSa is capable of forming a structure that is integrated with (or separable from) the workpiece W by performing additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the additional processing performed on the workpiece W corresponds to processing that adds to the workpiece W a structure that is integrated with (or separable from) the workpiece W.
  • the structure in the first embodiment may mean any object formed by the processing system SYSa.
  • the processing system SYSa is capable of forming a three-dimensional structure ST (that is, a three-dimensional structure that has a size in all three-dimensional directions, a solid object, in other words, a structure that has a size in the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction) as an example of a structure.
  • a three-dimensional structure ST that is, a three-dimensional structure that has a size in all three-dimensional directions, a solid object, in other words, a structure that has a size in the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction
  • the processing system SYSa can perform additional processing on the stage 31.
  • the workpiece W is a mounted object, which is an object placed on the stage 31, the processing system SYSa can perform additional processing on the mounted object.
  • the mounted object placed on the stage 31 may be another three-dimensional structure ST (i.e., an existing structure) formed by the processing system SYSa.
  • the workpiece W may also be held by a holder that can be placed on the stage 31. In other words, the holder may hold the workpiece W, and the holder holding the workpiece W may be placed on the stage 31.
  • the holder may be called a jig, a holder, a holding member, a mounting member, a fixing member (holding member, mounting member), or a clamp.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example in which the workpiece W is an existing structure placed on the stage 31. In the following, we will also use an example in which the workpiece W is an existing structure placed on the stage 31.
  • the workpiece W may be an item that has a missing part and needs to be repaired.
  • the processing system SYSa may perform repair processing to repair the item that needs to be repaired by performing additional processing to create a shaped object to fill in the missing part.
  • the additional processing performed by the processing system SYSa may include additional processing to add a shaped object to the workpiece W to fill in the missing part.
  • the processing system SYSa is capable of performing additive processing based on the laser build-up welding method.
  • the processing system SYSa can be said to be a 3D printer that processes objects using additive processing technology.
  • the additive processing technology may also be called rapid prototyping, rapid manufacturing, or additive manufacturing.
  • the laser build-up welding method (LMD) may also be called DED (Directed Energy Deposition).
  • the processing system SYSa which uses additive processing technology, forms multiple structural layers SL (see FIG. 8 described below) in sequence to form a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked.
  • the processing system SYSa first sets the surface of the workpiece W as the printing surface MS on which the object is actually printed, and prints the first structural layer SL on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa then sets the surface of the first structural layer SL as a new printing surface MS, and prints the second structural layer SL on the printing surface MS. Thereafter, the processing system SYSa repeats the same operations to form a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked.
  • the processing system SYSa performs additional processing by processing the modeling material M using processing light EL, which is an energy beam.
  • the modeling material M is a material that can be melted by irradiation with processing light EL of a predetermined intensity or higher.
  • at least one of a metallic material and a resinous material can be used as the modeling material M.
  • An example of a metallic material is at least one of a material containing copper, a material containing tungsten, and a material containing stainless steel.
  • other materials different from the metallic material and the resinous material may also be used as the modeling material M.
  • the modeling material M is a powder material. In other words, the modeling material M is a powder. However, the modeling material M does not have to be a powder.
  • at least one of a wire-shaped modeling material and a gas-shaped modeling material may be used as the modeling material M.
  • the workpiece W may also be an object that includes a material that can be melted by irradiation with processing light EL of a predetermined intensity or higher.
  • the material of the workpiece W may be the same as or different from the modeling material M.
  • at least one of a metallic material and a resinous material can be used as the material of the workpiece W.
  • metallic materials include at least one of a material containing copper, a material containing tungsten, and a material containing stainless steel.
  • other materials different from metallic materials and resinous materials may also be used as the material of the workpiece W.
  • the processing system SYSa includes a material supply source 1, a processing unit 2, a stage unit 3, a light source 4, a gas supply source 5, a control unit 7, and an imaging device 8, as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
  • the processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 may be housed in a chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6.
  • the processing system SYSa may perform additional processing in the chamber space 63IN. Note that at least one of the processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 does not have to be housed in the chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6.
  • the processing unit 2 may be referred to as a processing device.
  • An apparatus including the processing unit 2 and at least one of the material supply source 1, the stage unit 3, the light source 4, the gas supply source 5, and the imaging device 8 may be referred to as a processing device.
  • the control unit 7 may be referred to as a control device.
  • the imaging device 8 may be referred to as an imaging unit.
  • the processing unit 2 processes the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 to form a model. That is, the processing unit 2 performs additive processing (additive modeling) to form a model on the workpiece W. In other words, the processing unit 2 processes the workpiece W to form a model on the workpiece W.
  • the processing unit 2 includes a processing head 21 and a head drive system 22. Furthermore, the processing head 21 includes an irradiation device 210 and a material nozzle 212. The processing head 21 may also be referred to as a processing device.
  • the processing system SYSa may be provided with a single light source 4 instead of multiple light sources 4.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 may emit a single processing light EL instead of emitting multiple processing light EL.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#1.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#2.
  • the molten pool MP#1 does not have to be formed on the printing surface MS by irradiation with the processing light EL#1.
  • the molten pool MP#2 does not have to be formed on the printing surface MS by irradiation with the processing light EL#2.
  • the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M (e.g., ejects, jets, spouts, or sprays). For this reason, the material nozzle 212 may be referred to as a material supply member.
  • the material nozzle 212 is physically connected to the material supply source 1, which is a supply source of the modeling material M, via the supply pipe 11 and the mixer 12.
  • the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 via the supply pipe 11 and the mixer 12.
  • the material nozzle 212 may pressure-feed the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 via the supply pipe 11.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M such that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#1 and PL#2, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes annular in shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#4 and PL#5, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes an annular shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#6 and PL#7, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes an annular shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121.
  • the material supply area MSA is a virtual area in which the modeling material M is supplied within a virtual material supply surface PL that intersects with the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • the material supply area MSA is a virtual area in the material supply surface PL through which the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 passes.
  • the material nozzle 212 may be considered to be supplying the modeling material M to the material supply area MSA. Since the modeling material M passes through the material supply surface PL, the material supply surface PL may be referred to as a material passing surface.
  • the amount (supply amount) of the modeling material M supplied to each position in the material supply surface PL may vary over time. For example, while the modeling material M is supplied to a position in the material supply surface PL at a first time, the modeling material M may not be supplied to the same position in the material supply surface PL at a second time different from the first time. In other words, when the modeling material M is a powdered material, the amount (passing amount) of the modeling material M passing through each position in the material supply surface PL may vary over time.
  • the material nozzle 212 can be said to supply the modeling material M with the material control point MCP located below the modeling surface MS.
  • the material nozzle 212 supplies the molding material M in a state where the material control point MCP is located inside the workpiece W, below the workpiece W, inside the already-modeled structural layer SL, and/or below the already-modeled structural layer SL.
  • the material nozzle 212 supplies the molding material M in a state where the material control point MCP is located on the molding surface MS.
  • the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as the material control point MCP is higher than the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL located away from the material control point MCP in the Z-axis direction.
  • the density of the modeling material M is highest in the material supply surface PL located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as the material control point MCP.
  • the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as one material supply surface PL that satisfies the condition that "the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL is highest.”
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the processing light EL traveling through the space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 may be irradiated onto the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a cone-shaped space whose outer edge is the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a cone-shaped space whose outer edge is the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the head drive system 22 moves the processing head 21 under the control of the control unit 7. That is, the head drive system 22 moves the irradiation optical system 211 and the material nozzle 212 under the control of the control unit 7.
  • the head drive system 22 moves the processing head 21, for example, along at least one of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, the Z-axis direction, the ⁇ X direction, the ⁇ Y direction, and the ⁇ Z direction.
  • the operation of moving the processing head 21 along at least one of the ⁇ X direction, the ⁇ Y direction, and the ⁇ Z direction may be considered equivalent to the operation of rotating the processing head 21 around at least one of the rotation axes along the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis.
  • the head drive system 22 moves the machining head 21, the relative positional relationship between the machining head 21 and the stage 31 and the workpiece W placed on the stage 31 changes. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211 equipped in the machining head 21 changes. For this reason, the head drive system 22 may be considered to function as a position change device capable of changing the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211. Furthermore, when the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the machining head 21 changes, the relative positional relationship between the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 and the workpiece W also changes.
  • each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves along at least one of the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, Z-axis direction, ⁇ X direction, ⁇ Y direction, and ⁇ Z direction on the surface of the workpiece W (more specifically, the modeling surface MS on which additional processing is performed).
  • the head drive system 22 may be considered to be moving the processing head 21 so that each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS.
  • the workpiece W is placed on the stage 31.
  • the workpiece W is placed on a stage placement surface 311, which is one surface of the stage 31 (for example, the upper surface facing the +Z side).
  • the stage 31 is capable of supporting the workpiece W placed on the stage 31.
  • the stage 31 may be capable of holding the workpiece W placed on the stage 31.
  • the stage 31 may be equipped with at least one of a mechanical chuck, an electrostatic chuck, and a vacuum suction chuck, etc., to hold the workpiece W.
  • the stage 31 may not be capable of holding the workpiece W placed on the stage 31. In this case, the workpiece W may be placed on the stage 31 without clamping.
  • the workpiece W may also be attached to a holder, or the holder to which the workpiece W is attached may be placed on the stage 31.
  • the above-mentioned irradiation optical system 211 emits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 during at least a portion of the period during which the workpiece W is placed on the stage 31.
  • the above-mentioned material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M for at least part of the time that the workpiece W is placed on the stage 31.
  • the stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31.
  • the stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31 along at least one of the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, ⁇ X direction, ⁇ Y direction, and ⁇ Z direction.
  • the operation of moving the stage 31 along at least one of the ⁇ X direction, ⁇ Y direction, and ⁇ Z direction may be considered equivalent to the operation of rotating the stage 31 around at least one of the rotation axis along the X-axis (i.e., A-axis), the rotation axis along the Y-axis (i.e., B-axis), and the rotation axis along the Z-axis (i.e., C-axis).
  • the stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31, the relative positional relationship between the processing head 21 and each of the stage 31 and workpiece W changes. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211 equipped with the processing head 21 changes.
  • the stage drive system 32 like the head drive system 22, may be considered to function as a position change device that can change the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the processing head 21 changes, the relative positional relationship between each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 and the workpiece W also changes.
  • each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves along at least one of the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, Z-axis direction, ⁇ X direction, ⁇ Y direction, and ⁇ Z direction on the surface of the workpiece W (more specifically, the printing surface MS).
  • the stage drive system 32 may be considered to be moving the stage 31 so that each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS.
  • the light source 4 emits, for example, at least one of infrared light, visible light, and ultraviolet light as the processing light EL. However, other types of light may be used as the processing light EL.
  • the processing light EL may include multiple pulse lights (i.e., multiple pulse beams).
  • the processing light EL may be laser light.
  • the light source 4 may include a laser light source (for example, a semiconductor laser such as a laser diode (LD: Laser Diode)).
  • LD Laser Diode
  • the laser light source at least one of a fiber laser, a CO2 laser, a YAG laser, and an excimer laser may be used.
  • the processing light EL does not have to be laser light.
  • the light source 4 may include any light source (for example, at least one of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) and a discharge lamp).
  • the processing system SYSa includes a plurality of light sources 4 (specifically, light sources 4#1 and 4#2).
  • the characteristics of the processing light EL#1 emitted by the light source 4#1 and the characteristics of the processing light EL#2 emitted by the light source 4#2 may be the same.
  • the wavelength of the processing light EL#1 typically, the peak wavelength, which is the wavelength at which the intensity is maximum in the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1
  • the wavelength of the processing light EL#2 typically, the peak wavelength
  • the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1 (typically, the range of wavelengths at which the intensity is equal to or greater than a certain value) and the wavelength band of the processing light EL#2 may be the same.
  • the intensity of the processing light EL#1 and the intensity of the processing light EL#2 may be the same.
  • the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#1 (or the object whose surface is the printing surface MS, the same applies below) and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#2 may be the same.
  • the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#2 may be the same.
  • the characteristics of the processing light EL#1 emitted by the light source 4#1 and the characteristics of the processing light EL#2 emitted by the light source 4#2 may be different.
  • the wavelength (typically, peak wavelength) of the processing light EL#1 and the wavelength (typically, peak wavelength) of the processing light EL#2 may be different.
  • the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1 and the wavelength band of the processing light EL#2 may be different.
  • the intensity of the processing light EL#1 and the intensity of the processing light EL#2 may be different.
  • the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#2 may be different.
  • the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#2 may be different.
  • the processing system SYSa is equipped with multiple light sources 4.
  • the processing system SYSa may be equipped with a single light source 4.
  • the processing system SYSa may be equipped with a light source that emits (supplies) light of a wide wavelength band or multiple wavelengths as the single light source 4.
  • the processing system SYSa may generate processing light EL#1 and processing light EL#2 of different wavelengths by wavelength-dividing the light emitted from this light source.
  • the processing system SYSa may perform amplitude division or polarization division of the light emitted from this light source.
  • the gas supply source 5 is a supply source of purge gas for purging the chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6.
  • the purge gas includes an inert gas. Examples of the inert gas include nitrogen gas or argon gas.
  • the gas supply source 5 is connected to the chamber space 63IN via a supply port 62 formed in the partition member 61 of the housing 6 and a supply pipe 51 connecting the gas supply source 5 and the supply port 62.
  • the gas supply source 5 supplies purge gas to the chamber space 63IN via the supply pipe 51 and the supply port 62.
  • the chamber space 63IN becomes a space purged by the purge gas.
  • the purge gas supplied to the chamber space 63IN may be exhausted from an exhaust port (not shown) formed in the partition member 61.
  • the gas supply source 5 may be a cylinder in which an inert gas is stored. When the inert gas is nitrogen gas, the gas supply source 5 may be a nitrogen gas generator that generates nitrogen gas using the air as a raw material.
  • the gas supply source 5 may supply the purge gas to the mixer 12 to which the modeling material M from the material supply source 1 is supplied.
  • the gas supply source 5 may be connected to the mixer 12 via a supply pipe 52 that connects the gas supply source 5 and the mixer 12.
  • the gas supply source 5 supplies the purge gas to the mixer 12 via the supply pipe 52.
  • the modeling material M from the material supply source 1 may be supplied (specifically, pressure-fed) through the supply pipe 11 toward the material nozzle 212 by the purge gas supplied from the gas supply source 5 via the supply pipe 52.
  • the gas supply source 5 may be connected to the material nozzle 212 via the supply pipe 52, the mixer 12, and the supply pipe 11. In that case, the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M together with the purge gas for pressure-fed the modeling material M.
  • the control unit 7 controls the operation of the processing system SYSa.
  • the control unit 7 may control the processing unit 2 (e.g., at least one of the processing head 21 and the head drive system 22) of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may control the stage unit 3 (e.g., the stage drive system 32) of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may control the material supply source 1 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may control the light source 4 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may control the gas supply source 5 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may control the imaging device 8 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the control unit 7 may include, for example, a calculation device 71 and a memory device 72.
  • Each of the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 is hardware including at least a circuit (e.g., at least one of an electronic circuit and an electric circuit). Therefore, the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 may be referred to as a calculation circuit and a memory circuit, respectively. Alternatively, each of the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 may be referred to simply as a circuit.
  • the arithmetic device 71 includes at least one processor (i.e., one processor or multiple processors) as hardware.
  • the processor may include, for example, a processor conforming to a von Neumann type computer architecture.
  • the processor conforming to a von Neumann type computer architecture may include at least one of a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit).
  • the processor may include, for example, a processor conforming to a non-von Neumann type computer architecture.
  • the processor conforming to a non-von Neumann type computer architecture may include at least one of an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) and an ASIC (Application Specific Circuit).
  • the processor may be realized by a circuit (for example, an electronic circuit).
  • the arithmetic device 71 reads a computer program 721 including at least one of computer program code and computer program instructions.
  • the arithmetic device 71 may read the computer program 321 stored in the storage device 72.
  • the arithmetic device 71 may read the computer program 721 stored in a computer-readable and non-transitory storage medium using a storage medium reading device (not shown) provided in the control unit 7.
  • the computer program 721 read from the storage medium may be stored in the storage device 72.
  • the arithmetic device 71 may obtain (i.e., download or read) the computer program 721 from a device (not shown) arranged outside the control unit 7 via a communication device (not shown).
  • the downloaded computer program 721 may be stored in the storage device 72.
  • the arithmetic device 71 executes the loaded computer program 721.
  • a logical functional block for executing the processing (operation) to be performed by the control unit 7 is realized within the arithmetic device 71.
  • the arithmetic device 71, together with the storage device 72 etc. in which the computer program 721 is recorded can function as a controller or computer for realizing a logical functional block for executing the processing to be performed by the control unit 7.
  • the memory (recording medium) and computer program 721 in the storage device 72 etc., together with at least one processor provided in the arithmetic device 71, are configured so that the control unit 7 performs the processing to be performed by the control unit 7 (for example, the robot control processing described above).
  • the storage device 72 includes at least one memory capable of storing desired data.
  • the storage device 72 includes at least one memory containing desired data.
  • the memory may be realized by a circuit (e.g., an electronic circuit).
  • the storage device 72 may store a computer program 721 executed by the arithmetic device 71.
  • the storage device 72 (memory) may be used as the above-mentioned recording medium for recording the computer program 721 executed by the arithmetic device 71.
  • the storage device 72 may temporarily store data that is temporarily used by the arithmetic device 71 when the arithmetic device 71 is executing the computer program 721.
  • the storage device 72 may store data that the control unit 7 stores for a long period of time.
  • the storage device 72 may include at least one of a RAM (Random Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a hard disk device, an optical magnetic disk device, an SSD (Solid State Drive), and a disk array device. In other words, the storage device 72 may include non-transitory recording media.
  • the control unit 7 may control the emission mode of the processing light EL by the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the emission mode may include, for example, at least one of the intensity of the processing light EL and the emission timing of the processing light EL.
  • the emission mode may include, for example, at least one of the emission time of the pulsed light, the emission cycle of the pulsed light, and the ratio of the length of the emission time of the pulsed light to the emission cycle of the pulsed light (so-called duty ratio).
  • the control unit 7 may control the movement mode of the processing head 21 by the head drive system 22.
  • the control unit 7 may control the movement mode of the stage 31 by the stage drive system 32.
  • the movement mode may include, for example, at least one of the movement amount, the movement speed, the movement direction, and the movement timing (movement time). Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the supply mode of the modeling material M by the material nozzle 212.
  • the supply mode may include, for example, at least one of the supply amount (particularly, the supply amount per unit time) and the supply timing (supply time).
  • the control unit 7 does not have to be provided inside the processing system SYSa.
  • the control unit 7 may be provided outside the processing system SYSa as a server or the like.
  • the control unit 7 and the processing system SYSa may be connected by a wired and/or wireless network (or a data bus and/or a communication line).
  • a wired network for example, a network using a serial bus type interface represented by at least one of IEEE1394, RS-232x, RS-422, RS-423, RS-485, and USB may be used.
  • a network using a parallel bus type interface may be used.
  • a network using an interface compliant with Ethernet (registered trademark) represented by at least one of 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T may be used.
  • a network using radio waves may be used.
  • An example of a network using radio waves is a network conforming to IEEE802.1x (for example, at least one of a wireless LAN and Bluetooth (registered trademark)).
  • a network using infrared rays may be used as a wireless network.
  • a network using optical communication may be used as a wireless network.
  • the control unit 7 and the machining system SYSa may be configured to be able to transmit and receive various information via the network.
  • the control unit 7 may be capable of transmitting information such as commands and control parameters to the machining system SYSa via the network.
  • the machining system SYSa may include a receiving device that receives information such as commands and control parameters from the control unit 7 via the network.
  • the machining system SYSa may include a transmitting device (i.e., an output device that outputs information to the control unit 7) that transmits information such as commands and control parameters to the control unit 7 via the network.
  • a first control device that performs part of the processing performed by the control unit 7 may be provided inside the machining system SYSa, while a second control device that performs another part of the processing performed by the control unit 7 may be provided outside the machining system SYSa.
  • a computation model that can be constructed by machine learning may be implemented in the control unit 7 by the computation device 71 executing a computer program.
  • An example of a computation model that can be constructed by machine learning is, for example, a computation model including a neural network (so-called artificial intelligence (AI)).
  • learning of the computation model may include learning of parameters of the neural network (for example, at least one of weights and biases).
  • the control unit 7 may use the computation model to control the operation of the processing system SYSa.
  • the operation of controlling the operation of the processing system SYSa may include the operation of controlling the operation of the processing system SYSa using the computation model.
  • a computation model that has already been constructed by offline machine learning using teacher data may be implemented in the control unit 7.
  • control unit 7 may be updated on the control unit 7 by online machine learning.
  • control unit 7 may control the operation of the machining system SYSa using a computational model implemented in a device external to the control unit 7 (i.e., a device provided outside the machining system SYSa) in addition to or instead of the computational model implemented in the control unit 7.
  • the recording medium for recording the computer program executed by the control unit 7 may be at least one of the following: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, flexible disk, MO, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, optical disks such as Blu-ray (registered trademark), magnetic media such as magnetic tape, magneto-optical disk, semiconductor memory such as USB memory, and any other medium capable of storing a program.
  • the recording medium may include a device capable of recording a computer program (for example, a general-purpose device or a dedicated device in which a computer program is implemented in a state in which it can be executed in at least one of the forms of software and firmware, etc.).
  • each process or function included in the computer program may be realized by a logical processing block realized in the control unit 7 by the control unit 7 (i.e., the computer) executing the computer program, or may be realized by a predetermined gate array (hardware such as an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit)) provided in the control unit 7, or may be realized in a form that combines logical processing blocks and partial hardware modules that realize some elements of the hardware.
  • a logical processing block realized in the control unit 7 by the control unit 7 (i.e., the computer) executing the computer program
  • a predetermined gate array hardware such as an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit)
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • the imaging device 8 is capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged.
  • the imaging device 8 may be capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged by receiving (in other words, detecting or capturing, the same below) light from the object to be imaged using the imaging element 81 included in the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging device 8 may be capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged by receiving light through the object to be imaged.
  • an image of the light from the object to be imaged (in other words, light through the object to be imaged, the same below) may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81).
  • the light from the object to be imaged may form an image of the object to be imaged on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging surface is a detection surface that detects light from the object to be imaged.
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the object to be imaged is captured.
  • An example of such an imaging device 8 is a camera.
  • the imaging device 8 may be called a detection device or a light receiving device.
  • the imaging element 81 may also be called a detection element, a detector, a light receiving element, or a light receiver.
  • the light from the object to be imaged may include light that passes through the object to be imaged and into which the processing light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 is incident.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include light that is emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object and then returned from the imaging target object toward the processing unit 2.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a light component of the processed light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object that is returned from the imaging target object toward the processing unit 2.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include at least a portion of the processed light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a reflected light component of the processed light EL that is reflected by the imaging target object and that is incident on the imaging target object.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a scattered light component of the processed light EL that is incident on the imaging target object and that is scattered by the imaging target object.
  • the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a transmitted light component of the processed light EL that is incident on the imaging target object and that is transmitted through the imaging target object.
  • the light passing through the image capture object on which the processed light EL is incident may include diffracted light components of the processed light EL incident on the image capture object that are diffracted by the image capture object.
  • the light passing through the object to be imaged, into which the processing light EL is incident may include light generated by the processing light EL irradiated onto the object to be imaged, in addition to or instead of the light emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the object to be imaged and then returned from the object to be imaged toward the processing unit 2.
  • the light passing through the object to be imaged, into which the processing light EL is incident may include light generated by the processing light EL from the processing unit 2 and returned toward the processing unit 2.
  • the object to be imaged may include a workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the workpiece W by receiving light from the workpiece W.
  • an image of the workpiece W may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81).
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the workpiece W is captured.
  • the image capturing target object may include a structure formed on the workpiece W.
  • the image capturing target object may include at least a portion of a structural layer SL formed as a structure on the workpiece W.
  • the image capturing target object may include at least a portion of a three-dimensional structure ST (i.e., a three-dimensional structure ST in which a plurality of structural layers SL are stacked) formed as a structure on the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the structure.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the structure by receiving light from the structure.
  • an image of the structure may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81).
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the structure is captured.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the molten pool MP as the object to be imaged.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the part of the workpiece W or the molded object where the molten pool MP is formed as the object to be imaged.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the molten pool MP by receiving light from the molten pool MP.
  • an image of the molten pool MP may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the molten pool MP is captured.
  • the object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and before the processing light EL is irradiated (i.e., the unmelted modeling material M).
  • the object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and after the processing light EL is irradiated (i.e., the molten modeling material M).
  • the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M as the object to be imaged. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving light from the modeling material M.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving the light component (e.g., the reflected light component) of the processing light EL irradiated to the modeling material M that is returned from the modeling material toward the processing unit 2.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the modeling material M by receiving light resulting from thermal radiation (e.g., blackbody radiation) of the molten modeling material M as light from the molten modeling material M.
  • the light from the molten modeling material M may be considered to be an example of the above-mentioned "light generated by the processing light EL irradiated to the imaged object."
  • an image of the modeling material M may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the modeling material M is captured.
  • the modeling material M may be melted on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling material M that has reached the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL.
  • the imaged object may include the modeling material M melted on the modeling surface MS.
  • the modeling material M melted on the modeling surface MS may be considered to be at least a part of the molten pool MP.
  • the modeling material M may be melted in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212 by irradiating the modeling material M with the processing light EL before the modeling material M reaches the modeling surface MS.
  • the imaged object may include the modeling material M melted in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212.
  • the object to be imaged may include at least a part of the processing system SYSa.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving light from the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 by receiving reflected light from the material nozzle 212 of ambient light.
  • an image of the material nozzle 212 may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 is reflected.
  • imaging light CL the light from the object to be imaged that is received by the imaging device 8 in order to image the object to be imaged.
  • FIG. 5 which is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an imaging device 8 that captures an image of an object to be imaged
  • at least a part of the optical path of the imaging light CL may overlap with at least a part of the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the irradiation device 210 includes a mirror 2192 and a beam splitter 2193.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may pass through the beam splitter 2193, and the processing light EL that has passed through the beam splitter 2193 may be irradiated onto the forming material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 to the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later).
  • the irradiation optical system 211 may emit the processing light EL toward the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) via the beam splitter 2193.
  • the beam splitter 2193 may be considered to function as an optical member that directs the processing light EL from the irradiation optical system 211 toward the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later).
  • the imaging light CL from the object to be imaged in the example shown in FIG. 5, the workpiece W or the structure layer SL whose surface is set to the printing surface MS
  • the imaging light CL reflected by the beam splitter 2193 may be incident on the imaging device 8 via the mirror 2192. That is, the imaging device 8 may receive the imaging light CL via the beam splitter 2193 through which the processing light EL passes.
  • the beam splitter 2193 may be considered to function as an optical member that directs the imaging light CL from the object to be imaged to the imaging device 8.
  • the optical path of the processing light EL between the beam splitter 2193 and the printing surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the optical path of the imaging light CL between the beam splitter 2193 and the printing surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) may overlap.
  • at least a portion of the optical path of the imaging light CL does not have to overlap with at least a portion of the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 (specifically, emitted from the f ⁇ lens 2162 described later that the irradiation optical system 211 has as the final optical element) is incident on the beam splitter 2193.
  • the beam splitter 2193 is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 (specifically, emitted from the f ⁇ lens 2162).
  • the beam splitter 2193 is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL between the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the irradiation optical system 211 (particularly the f ⁇ lens 2162).
  • the beam splitter 2193 may be arranged so that the f ⁇ lens 2162 (or a part of the irradiation optical system 211) is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL between the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the beam splitter 2193.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the beam splitter 2193 may be incident on the f ⁇ lens 2162, and the processing light EL emitted from the f ⁇ lens 2162 may be irradiated onto the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES, which will be described later).
  • the imaging light CL from the modeling material M may be incident on the beam splitter 2193 via the f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging light CL may also travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging light CL may travel through a conical space whose outer edge is the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging light CL may travel through a space sandwiched between the shaping material M supplied from the first supply port portion 2122 (see FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)) of the material supply port 2121 and the shaping material M supplied from the second supply port portion 2123 (see FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)).
  • the imaging light CL is less likely to be blocked by the modeling material M compared to when the imaging light CL travels through a space outside the space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. Therefore, the imaging device 84 can properly receive the imaging light CL without being affected by the modeling material M. In other words, the imaging device 84 can properly image the modeling material M supplied to the material irradiation surface ES without being affected by the modeling material M.
  • the imaging device 8 may be considered to be imaging the object to be imaged from the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL that passes through the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and then passes through the opening 2124 formed on the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL that passes through the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and then passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121 formed on the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging light CL may travel along an optical path that passes through the opening 2124 (i.e., passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121), and the imaging device 8 may have an imaging optical path that passes through the opening 2124 (i.e., passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121).
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212, which is another imaging target object, together with one imaging target object (e.g., the workpiece W or the structure layer SL whose surface is set to the printing surface MS) located below the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the lower end (opening 2124) of the material nozzle 212 together with the workpiece W or the structure layer SL below the material nozzle 212.
  • the beam splitter 2193 may be located closer to the f ⁇ lens 2162 side (the third optical system 216 side) than the lower end (opening 2124) of the material nozzle 212.
  • Beam splitter 2193 may be an amplitude-splitting beam splitter, a polarizing beam splitter, a dichroic mirror, or a pinhole mirror.
  • the split ratio does not need to be 1:1, and may be a split ratio in which the transmittance on the optical path side of processing light EL is higher than the reflectance on the imaging optical path side.
  • the irradiation device 210 may include an illumination device 213 that illuminates the object to be imaged with illumination light IL.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged illuminated with illumination light IL emitted from the illumination device 213.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged illuminated with illumination light IL emitted from the illumination device 213.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving, as imaging light CL, a reflected light component of the illumination light IL that illuminates the object to be imaged, reflected by the object to be imaged.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving, as imaging light CL, a scattered light component of the illumination light IL that illuminates the object to be imaged, scattered by the object to be imaged.
  • FIG. 5 shows an example in which the illumination device 213 illuminates the workpiece W or the structural layer SL, which is an example of an object to be imaged and whose surface is set as the printing surface MS, with the illumination light IL.
  • the illumination device 213 may also illuminate at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the printing material M, which are other examples of an object to be imaged, with the illumination light IL.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged before the processing system SYSa starts additional processing.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged after the processing system SYSa has finished additional processing. Note that, as described above, when the imaging device 8 images the molten pool MP, the imaging device 8 may image the molten pool MP while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. This is because the molten pool MP is formed while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.
  • the above-mentioned control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8. That is, the control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8 as the imaging result of the imaging device 8. In other words, the control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the light reception result by the imaging device 8 of light from the object to be imaged (that is, the imaging result or the detection result, the same below). For example, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the material supply source 1, the processing unit 2, the stage unit 3, the light source 4, and the gas supply source 5 provided in the processing system SYSa so as to perform additional processing on the workpiece W based on the image IMG.
  • Fig. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 includes a first optical system 214, a second optical system 215, and a third optical system 216.
  • the first optical system 214 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is incident.
  • the first optical system 214 is an optical system that outputs the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 toward the third optical system 216.
  • the second optical system 215 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is incident.
  • the second optical system 215 is an optical system that outputs the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 toward the third optical system 216.
  • the third optical system 216 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and the processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 are incident.
  • the third optical system 216 is an optical system that emits the processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and the processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 toward the printing surface MS.
  • the first optical system 214, the second optical system 215, and the third optical system 216 will be described in order.
  • the first optical system 214 includes a collimator lens 2141, a parallel plate 2142, a power meter 2143, and a galvanometer scanner 2144.
  • the galvanometer scanner 2144 includes a focus control optical system 2145 and a galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the first optical system 214 does not have to include at least one of the collimator lens 2141, the parallel plate 2142, the power meter 2143, and the galvanometer scanner 2144.
  • the galvanometer scanner 2144 does not have to include at least one of the focus control optical system 2145 and the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is incident on the collimator lens 2141.
  • the collimator lens 2141 converts the processing light EL#1 incident on the collimator lens 2141 into parallel light. Note that if the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is parallel light (i.e., the processing light EL#1, which is parallel light, is incident on the first optical system 214), the first optical system 214 does not need to be equipped with the collimator lens 2141.
  • the processing light EL#1 converted into parallel light by the collimator lens 2141 is incident on the parallel plate 2142.
  • the parallel plate 2142 is obliquely disposed with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142. A part of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142 passes through the parallel plate 2142. The other part of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142 is reflected by the parallel plate 2142.
  • the processing light EL#1 that passes through the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the galvanometer scanner 2144. Specifically, the processing light EL#1 that passes through the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the focus control optical system 2145 of the galvanometer scanner 2144.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 is an optical member that can change the focus position CP of the processing light EL#1 (hereinafter referred to as "focus position CP#1").
  • the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#1 is focused.
  • the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may mean the convergence position where the processing light EL#1 is most convergent in the irradiation direction (travel direction) of the processing light EL#1.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 can change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 is a direction in which the Z-axis direction is the main component.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 can change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the Z-axis direction.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 is a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL).
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to be able to change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL).
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to be capable of changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the direction of the optical axis AX of the irradiation optical system 211 (typically the third optical system 216).
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may mean the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the third optical system 216.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the third optical system 216.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the final optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the optical members that make up the third optical system 216.
  • the final optical member may be the f ⁇ lens 2162 described later.
  • the final optical member may be the optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 does not have to include the third optical system 216. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical member may be the optical member (Y-scanning mirror 2146MY) that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the first optical system 214. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical member may be the optical member (Y-scanning mirror 2156MY) that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the second optical system 215.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may include, for example, multiple optical elements (e.g., multiple lenses) aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1. That is, the focus control optical system 2145 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1. In this case, the focus control optical system 2145 may change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 by moving at least one of the multiple optical elements (refractive optical elements) along its optical axis direction. However, the focus control optical system 2145 may include a reflective optical element such as a mirror, and the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may be changed by moving the reflective optical element.
  • multiple optical elements e.g., multiple lenses
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may change the focus position
  • the focus control optical system 2145 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS changes.
  • the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 i.e., the Z-axis direction
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the distance between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP changes.
  • the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 i.e., the Z-axis direction
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.
  • the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.
  • the galvano scanner 2144 may not have the focus control optical system 2145. Even in this case, when the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 changes, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS changes. Therefore, even if the galvano scanner 2144 does not have the focus control optical system 2145, the processing system SYSa can change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa may change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS by moving the processing head 21 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 using the head drive system 22.
  • the processing system SYSa may use the stage drive system 32 to move the stage 31 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1, thereby changing the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS.
  • the processing light EL#1 emitted from the focus control optical system 2145 is incident on the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 deflects the processing light EL#1, thereby changing the emission direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be referred to as a deflection optical system.
  • the position from which the processing light EL#1 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 onto which the processing light EL#1 is irradiated on the printing surface MS moves.
  • the irradiation position onto which the processing light EL#1 is irradiated on the printing surface MS moves.
  • the printing surface MS is scanned by the processing light EL#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as an irradiation position moving device capable of moving the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS on the printing surface MS.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that scans the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves within the printing surface MS.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 includes, for example, an X-scanning mirror 2146MX, an X-scanning motor 2146AX, a Y-scanning mirror 2146MY, and a Y-scanning motor 2146AY.
  • the processing light EL#1 emitted from the focus control optical system 2145 is incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX.
  • the X-scanning mirror 2146MX reflects the processing light EL#1 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX toward the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY.
  • the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY reflects the processing light EL#1 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY toward the third optical system 216.
  • Each of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX and the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY may be referred to as a galvanometer mirror.
  • the X-scan motor 2146AX swings or rotates the X-scanning mirror 2146MX around a rotation axis along the Y-axis.
  • the angle of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX is changed.
  • the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the printing surface MS along the X-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#1 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the material supply surface PL along the X-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the X-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.
  • the Y-scanning motor 2146AY swings or rotates the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY around a rotation axis along the X-axis.
  • the angle of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY is changed.
  • the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the printing surface MS along the Y-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#1 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the material supply surface PL along the Y-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the Y-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#1).
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 may be considered to move on the surface of the printing surface MS that overlaps with the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed (i.e., without changing) is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#1).
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually performs additional processing using the processing light EL#1 while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually scans with the processing light EL#1 in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 indicates an area (in other words, a range) where the target irradiation area EA#1 actually moves in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. For this reason, the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered to be a virtual area located on the printing surface MS at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211).
  • the maximum area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 can move the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed may be referred to as the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the machining system SYSa can use the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the target irradiation area EA#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. Furthermore, as described above, the molten pool MP#1 is formed by irradiating the target irradiation area EA#1 with the machining light EL#1. In this case, the machining system SYSa may be considered to use the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the molten pool MP#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1.
  • the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1.
  • the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 moves on the printing surface MS.
  • the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS changes.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 determined based on the machining head 21 i.e., the processing unit area PUA#1 to which the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS
  • the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the processing unit area PUA#1 relative to the printing surface MS.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along a single scanning direction along the printing surface MS within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along a single scanning direction within a coordinate system defined based on the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth periodically along a single scanning direction within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 periodically moves back and forth on an axis along a single scanning direction within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be a rectangle whose longitudinal direction is the movement direction of the target irradiation area EA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along multiple scanning directions along the printing surface MS within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along multiple scanning directions within a coordinate system defined based on the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth periodically along each of the multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#1. That is, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 periodically moves back and forth on an axis along each of the multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • FIG. 8(a) shows an example in which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth along each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction within the processing unit area PUA#1 so that the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 is circular.
  • the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be circular.
  • FIG. 8(b) shows an example in which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth along each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction within the processing unit area PUA#1 so that the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 is mesh-shaped.
  • the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be rectangular.
  • the operation of periodically moving the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS as shown in Figures 7(a), 8(a), and 8(b), respectively, may be referred to as a wobbling operation.
  • the operation of periodically moving (in other words, deflecting) the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically on the printing surface MS may be referred to as a wobbling operation.
  • the control unit 7 may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the machining unit area PUA#1 moves on the printing surface MS during the period when the target irradiation area EA#1 is being moved within the machining unit area PUA#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the machining unit area PUA#1 moves on the printing surface MS during the period when the target irradiation area EA#1 is being moved within the machining unit area PUA#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA#1 moves along a target movement trajectory MT0 that intersects (orthogonal in some cases) with the movement direction (i.e., the scanning direction) of the target irradiation area EA#1 in the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically along a scanning direction that intersects (orthogonal in some cases) with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along the movement trajectory MT#1 shown in FIG. 7(b). Specifically, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along a scanning direction that intersects with the target movement trajectory MT0 while moving along the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along a wave-shaped (e.g., sinusoidal) movement trajectory MT#1 that oscillates around the target movement trajectory MT0.
  • a wave-shaped e.g., sinusoidal
  • control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA#1 moves along a target movement trajectory MT0 extending along at least one of a direction along the movement direction (i.e., scanning direction) of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 and a direction intersecting (orthogonal in some cases) the movement direction of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • a target movement trajectory MT0 extending along at least one of a direction along the movement direction (i.e., scanning direction) of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 and a direction intersecting (orthogonal in some cases) the movement direction of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically along each of a scanning direction along the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS and a scanning direction intersecting (orthogonal in some cases) the target movement trajectory MT0.
  • FIG. 8(c) shows the movement trajectory MT#1 of the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS when the processing unit area PUA#1 shown in FIG. 8(a) moves along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 is an area having a width in a direction intersecting with the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS (specifically, the direction in which the target movement trajectory MT0 extends).
  • a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 is molded on the printing surface MS.
  • a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.
  • a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 is scanned with the processing light EL#1 by the galvanometer mirror 2146. Therefore, compared to when the processing light EL#1 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2146, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#1 to the processing unit area PUA#1 is less likely to vary within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#1 to the processing unit area PUA#1. As a result, the processing system SYSa can form an object on the printing surface MS with relatively high printing accuracy.
  • the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the processing light EL#1 onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the processing system SYSa may irradiate the processing light EL#1 onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 may move on the printing surface MS in conjunction with the movement of at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31.
  • processing system SYSa may non-periodically move the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing light EL#1 reflected by the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the power meter 2143 can detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the power meter 2143 may include a light receiving element that detects the processing light EL#1 as light.
  • the power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 by detecting the processing light EL#1 as heat.
  • the power meter 2143 may include a heat detection element that detects the heat of the processing light EL#1.
  • the power meter 2143 detects the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected by the parallel plate 2142. Since the parallel plate 2142 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#1 between the light source 4#1 and the galvanometer mirror 2146, the power meter 2143 may be considered to detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling on the optical path between the light source 4#1 and the galvanometer mirror 2146. In this case, the power meter 2143 can stably detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 without being affected by the deflection of the processing light EL#1 by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the position of the power meter 2143 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 6.
  • the power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling along the optical path between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS.
  • the power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling along the optical path within the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection result of the power meter 2143 is output to the control unit 7.
  • the control unit 7 may control (in other words, change) the intensity of the processing light EL#1 based on the detection result of the power meter 2143 (i.e., the detection result of the intensity of the processing light EL#1).
  • the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#1 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS becomes a desired intensity.
  • the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#1 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#1 on the virtual material supply surface PL between the printing surface MS and the material nozzle 212 becomes a desired intensity.
  • control unit 7 may control the light source 4#1 so as to change the intensity of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 based on the detection result of the power meter 2143.
  • the processing system SYSa can appropriately print a model on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#1 having an appropriate intensity.
  • the processing light EL#1 has an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. Therefore, the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143 may have an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. However, when the processing light EL#1 having an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M is incident on the power meter 2143, the power meter 2143 may be damaged by the processing light EL#1. Therefore, the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 may be incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the first optical system 214 may weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143 so that the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 is incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 for the processing light EL#1 may be set to an appropriate value. Specifically, the lower the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 for the processing light EL#1, the lower the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143. For this reason, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be set to a value low enough to realize a state in which the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 is incident on the power meter 2143. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be less than 10%. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be less than a few percent. Plain glass may be used as the parallel plate 2142 with such low reflectance.
  • the first optical system 214 may cause the processing light EL#1 to be incident on the power meter 2143 via multiple parallel plates 2142.
  • the processing light EL#1 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2142 may be incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2142 is weaker than the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected once by a single parallel plate 2142. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 will be incident on the power meter 2143.
  • the surface of the parallel plate 2142 (particularly, at least one of the incident surface on which the processing light EL#1 is incident and the reflecting surface on which the processing light EL#1 is reflected) may be subjected to a desired coating treatment.
  • the surface of the parallel plate 2142 may be subjected to an anti-reflection coating (AR).
  • AR anti-reflection coating
  • the second optical system 215 includes a collimator lens 2151, a parallel plate 2152, a power meter 2153, and a galvanometer scanner 2154.
  • the galvanometer scanner 2154 includes a focus control optical system 2155 and a galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the second optical system 215 does not have to include at least one of the collimator lens 2151, the parallel plate 2152, the power meter 2153, and the galvanometer scanner 2154.
  • the galvanometer scanner 2154 does not have to include at least one of the focus control optical system 2155 and the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is incident on the collimator lens 2151.
  • the collimator lens 2151 converts the processing light EL#2 incident on the collimator lens 2151 into parallel light. Note that if the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is parallel light (i.e., the processing light EL#2, which is parallel light, is incident on the second optical system 215), the second optical system 215 does not need to be equipped with the collimator lens 2151.
  • the processing light EL#2 converted into parallel light by the collimator lens 2151 is incident on the parallel plate 2152.
  • the parallel plate 2152 is obliquely disposed with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152. A portion of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152 passes through the parallel plate 2152. The other portion of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152 is reflected by the parallel plate 2152.
  • Processing light EL#2 that passes through the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the galvanometer scanner 2154. Specifically, processing light EL#2 that passes through the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the focus control optical system 2155 of the galvanometer scanner 2154.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 is an optical member capable of changing the focus position CP of the processing light EL#2 (hereinafter referred to as "focus position CP#2").
  • the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#2 is focused.
  • the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#2 is most convergent in the irradiation direction (traveling direction) of the processing light EL#2.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 can change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 is a direction in which the Z-axis direction is the main component.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 can change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the Z-axis direction.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 is a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL).
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to be able to change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL).
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to be capable of changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the direction of the optical axis AX of the irradiation optical system 211 (typically the third optical system 216).
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may mean the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the third optical system 216.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the third optical system 216.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the final optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the optical members that make up the third optical system 216.
  • the final optical member may be the f ⁇ lens 2162 described later.
  • the final optical member may be the optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 does not have to include the third optical system 216. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical element may be the optical element (Y-scanning mirror 2156MY) that is located closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical elements that make up the second optical system 215.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may include, for example, multiple optical elements (e.g., multiple lenses) aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2. That is, the focus control optical system 2155 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2. In this case, the focus control optical system 2155 may change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 by moving at least one of the multiple optical elements (refractive optical elements) along its optical axis direction. However, the focus control optical system 2155 may include a reflective optical element such as a mirror, and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may be changed by moving the reflective optical element.
  • multiple optical elements e.g., multiple lenses
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may change the focus position
  • the focus control optical system 2155 changes the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS changes.
  • the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 i.e., the Z-axis direction
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 changes the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the material control point MCP changes.
  • the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the Z-axis direction) and the material control point MCP changes.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.
  • the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.
  • the galvano scanner 2154 may not have the focus control optical system 2155. Even in this case, when the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 changes, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS changes. Therefore, even if the galvano scanner 2154 does not have the focus control optical system 2155, the processing system SYSa can change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa may change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by moving the processing head 21 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 using the head drive system 22.
  • the processing system SYSa may use the stage drive system 32 to move the stage 31 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2, thereby changing the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS.
  • the processing light EL#2 emitted from the focus control optical system 2155 is incident on the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 deflects the processing light EL#2, thereby changing the emission direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be referred to as a deflection optical system.
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves.
  • the irradiation position on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves.
  • the irradiation position on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as an irradiation position moving device capable of moving the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that scans the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves within the printing surface MS.
  • the beam passing area PA#2 through which processing light EL#2 passes moves within the virtual material supply plane PL that intersects with the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the printing surface MS.
  • the passing position through which processing light EL#2 passes within the material supply plane PL moves.
  • the material supply plane PL is essentially scanned by processing light EL#2.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a passing position moving device that can move the passing position of processing light EL#2 within the material supply plane PL.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that essentially scans processing light EL#2 within the material supply plane PL.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 includes, for example, an X-scanning mirror 2156MX, an X-scanning motor 2156AX, a Y-scanning mirror 2156MY, and a Y-scanning motor 2156AY.
  • the processing light EL#2 emitted from the focus control optical system 2155 is incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX.
  • the X-scanning mirror 2156MX reflects the processing light EL#2 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX toward the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY.
  • the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY reflects the processing light EL#2 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY toward the third optical system 216.
  • Each of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX and the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY may be referred to as a galvanometer mirror.
  • the X-scan motor 2156AX swings or rotates the X-scanning mirror 2156MX around a rotation axis along the Y-axis.
  • the angle of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX is changed.
  • the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the printing surface MS along the X-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#2 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • the Y-scanning motor 2156AY swings or rotates the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY around a rotation axis along the X-axis.
  • the angle of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY is changed.
  • the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the printing surface MS along the Y-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#2 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the material supply surface PL along the Y-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the X-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#2).
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 may be considered to move on the surface (first surface) of the printing surface MS that overlaps with the processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed (i.e., without changing) is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#2).
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually performs additional processing using the processing light EL#2 while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed.
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually scans with the processing light EL#2 in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed.
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 indicates an area (in other words, a range) where the target irradiation area EA#2 actually moves in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. For this reason, the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered to be a virtual area located on the printing surface MS at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211).
  • the maximum area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 can move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed may be referred to as the processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the machining system SYSa can use the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the target irradiation area EA#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. Furthermore, as described above, the molten pool MP#2 is formed by irradiating the target irradiation area EA#2 with the machining light EL#2. In this case, the machining system SYSa may be considered to use the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the molten pool MP#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2.
  • the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2.
  • the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#2 within the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#2 within the processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS.
  • the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS changes.
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 determined based on the machining head 21 i.e., the processing unit area PUA#2 to which the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS
  • the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the processing unit area PUA#2 relative to the printing surface MS.
  • the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#2 may be the same as the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#1 described above.
  • the movement mode of the target irradiation area EA#2 in the processing unit area PUA#2 e.g., movement trajectory, etc.
  • the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#2 and the movement mode of the target irradiation area EA#2 in the processing unit area PUA#2 will be omitted, but an example will be briefly described below. As shown in FIG.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves along a single scanning direction along the printing surface MS in the processing unit area PUA#2 under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#2 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS.
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS may move along the movement trajectory MT#2 shown in FIG. 7B (for example, a wave-shaped movement trajectory MT#2 that vibrates around the target movement trajectory MT0).
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves along multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#2 under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#2 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS.
  • the operation of periodically moving the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS as shown in Figures 7(a), 8(a), and 8(b), respectively, may be referred to as a wobbling operation.
  • the operation of periodically moving (or deflecting) the processing light EL#2 so as to periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS may be referred to as a wobbling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa does not have to periodically move the processing light EL#2 so as to periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 and the processing unit area PUA#2 are coincident.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 is the same as the processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to be deflecting the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves within the processing unit area PUA#1.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to be deflecting the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves within the processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the processing unit area PUA#1 and the processing unit area PUA#2 may be partially different.
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 is an area having a width in a direction intersecting with the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA#2 on the printing surface MS (specifically, the direction in which the target movement trajectory MT0 extends).
  • a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#2 is molded on the printing surface MS.
  • a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.
  • a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.
  • the processing unit area PUA#2 is scanned with the processing light EL#2 by the galvanometer mirror 2156. Therefore, compared to when the processing light EL#2 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2156, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#2 to the processing unit area PUA#2 is less likely to vary within the processing unit area PUA#2. In other words, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#2 to the processing unit area PUA#2 can be made uniform. As a result, the processing system SYSa can form an object on the printing surface MS with relatively high printing accuracy.
  • the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the processing light EL#2 onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#2.
  • the processing system SYSa may irradiate the processing light EL#2 onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation.
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 may move on the printing surface MS in conjunction with the movement of at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31.
  • processing system SYSa may non-periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing light EL#2 reflected by the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the power meter 2153 is a specific example of an electrical component used to control the processing light EL#2.
  • the power meter 2153 can detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the power meter 2153 may include a light receiving element that detects the processing light EL#2 as light.
  • the higher the intensity of the processing light EL#2 the greater the amount of energy generated by the processing light EL#2. As a result, the amount of heat generated by the processing light EL#2 increases.
  • the power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 by detecting the processing light EL#2 as heat.
  • the power meter 2153 may include a heat detection element that detects the heat of the processing light EL#2.
  • the power meter 2153 detects the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected by the parallel plate 2152. Since the parallel plate 2152 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#2 between the light source 4#2 and the galvanometer mirror 2156, the power meter 2153 may be considered to detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling on the optical path between the light source 4#2 and the galvanometer mirror 2156. In this case, the power meter 2153 can stably detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 without being affected by the deflection of the processing light EL#2 by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the position of the power meter 2153 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 6.
  • the power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling along the optical path between the galvanometer mirror 2156 and the printing surface MS.
  • the power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling along the optical path within the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection result of the power meter 2153 is output to the control unit 7.
  • the control unit 7 may control (in other words, change) the intensity of the processing light EL#2 based on the detection result of the power meter 2153 (i.e., the detection result of the intensity of the processing light EL#2).
  • the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#2 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS becomes a desired intensity.
  • the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#2 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#2 on the virtual material supply surface PL between the printing surface MS and the material nozzle 212 becomes a desired intensity.
  • control unit 7 may control the light source 4#2 so as to change the intensity of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 based on the detection result of the power meter 2153.
  • the processing system SYSa can appropriately print a model on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#2 having an appropriate intensity.
  • the processing light EL#2 has an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. Therefore, the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153 may have an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. However, when the processing light EL#2 having an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M is incident on the power meter 2153, the power meter 2153 may be damaged by the processing light EL#2. Therefore, the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 may be incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the second optical system 215 may weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153 so that the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 is incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 for the processing light EL#2 may be set to an appropriate value. Specifically, the lower the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 for the processing light EL#2, the lower the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153. For this reason, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be set to a value low enough to realize a state in which the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 is incident on the power meter 2153. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be less than 10%. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be less than a few percent. Plain glass may be used as the parallel plate 2152 with such low reflectance.
  • the second optical system 215 may cause the processing light EL#2 to be incident on the power meter 2153 via multiple parallel plates 2152.
  • the processing light EL#2 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2152 may be incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2152 is weaker than the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected once by a single parallel plate 2152. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 will be incident on the power meter 2153.
  • the surface of the parallel plate 2152 may be subjected to a desired coating treatment.
  • the surface of the parallel plate 2152 may be subjected to an anti-reflection coating (AR).
  • AR anti-reflection coating
  • the third optical system 216 includes a prism mirror 2161 and an f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • Processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 each enter the prism mirror 2161.
  • the prism mirror 2161 reflects processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward the f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • the prism mirror 2161 reflects processing light EL#1 and EL#2, which enter the prism mirror 2161 from different directions, in approximately the same direction (specifically, toward the f ⁇ lens 2162).
  • the third optical system 216 does not need to be equipped with a prism mirror 2161.
  • the f ⁇ lens 2162 is an optical system for emitting each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 reflected by the prism mirror 2161 toward the printing surface MS.
  • the f ⁇ lens 2162 is an optical system for irradiating each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 reflected by the prism mirror 2161 onto the printing surface MS.
  • the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 that pass through the f ⁇ lens 2162 are irradiated onto the printing surface MS.
  • the f ⁇ lens 2162 may be an optical element capable of focusing each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 on a focusing surface.
  • the f ⁇ lens 2162 may be referred to as a focusing optical system.
  • the focusing surface of the f ⁇ lens 2162 may be set, for example, on the printing surface MS.
  • the third optical system 216 may be considered to have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is f ⁇ .
  • the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is different from f ⁇ .
  • the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is f ⁇ tan ⁇ .
  • the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is f ⁇ sin ⁇ .
  • the optical axis AX of the f ⁇ lens 2162 is an axis along the Z axis. Therefore, the f ⁇ lens 2162 emits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 approximately along the Z axis direction.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same direction.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may both be the Z axis direction.
  • the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may both be directions along the optical axis AX of the f ⁇ lens 2162. However, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 do not have to be the same direction. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be different directions from each other.
  • the processing system SYSa performs additional processing based on the laser build-up welding method to model the three-dimensional structure ST. Therefore, the processing system SYSa may perform a modeling operation conforming to the laser build-up welding method to model the three-dimensional structure ST.
  • the processing system SYSa forms a three-dimensional structure ST on the workpiece W based on three-dimensional model data (in other words, three-dimensional model information) of the three-dimensional structure ST to be formed.
  • three-dimensional model data measurement data of a solid object measured by at least one of a measuring device provided in the processing system SYSa and a three-dimensional shape measuring device provided separately from the processing system SYSa may be used.
  • the processing system SYSa sequentially forms multiple structural layers SL arranged along the Z-axis direction.
  • the processing system SYSa sequentially forms multiple structural layers SL one by one based on multiple layer data obtained by slicing the three-dimensional model of the three-dimensional structure ST along the Z-axis direction.
  • a three-dimensional structure ST that is a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked is formed.
  • the structural layers SL do not necessarily have to be objects having a layered shape.
  • the processing system SYSa may perform at least one of a first modeling operation and a second modeling operation as a modeling operation.
  • the first modeling operation and the second modeling operation may differ from each other in that a method for modeling a three-dimensional structure ST by the first modeling operation is different from a method for modeling a three-dimensional structure ST by the second modeling operation.
  • the first modeling operation and the second modeling operation may differ from each other in that a method for modeling each structural layer SL by the first modeling operation is different from a method for modeling each structural layer SL by the second modeling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing the second modeling operation without performing the first modeling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing the second modeling operation without performing the first modeling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing the first modeling operation without performing the second modeling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing the first modeling operation without performing the second modeling operation.
  • the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing both the first and second modeling operations.
  • the processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing both the first and second modeling operations.
  • the first modeling operation and the second modeling operation will be explained below in order.
  • the first modeling operation is a modeling operation in which a molten pool MP is formed on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with processing light EL, and modeling an object on the modeling surface MS by supplying modeling material M to the formed molten pool MP.
  • the first modeling operation is a modeling operation in which, in order to model an object on the modeling surface MS, a molten pool MP is formed on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with processing light EL, and modeling material M is supplied to the formed molten pool MP.
  • the processing system SYSa moves at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set in the desired area on the forming surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W or the surface of the formed structural layer SL.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 with the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, respectively.
  • the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the Z-axis direction may coincide with the forming surface MS.
  • the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the Z-axis direction may be away from the forming surface MS.
  • molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 are formed on the printing surface MS irradiated with the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, respectively.
  • the processing system SYSa supplies printing material M from the material nozzle 212 under the control of the control unit 7. As a result, printing material M is supplied to each of the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2.
  • the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#1 is melted by the processing light EL#1 irradiated onto the molten pool MP#1.
  • the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#1 is melted by the molten pool MP#1 formed by the processing light EL#1.
  • the modeling material M may be considered to be melted by the processing light EL#1 that formed the molten pool MP#1.
  • the modeling material M may be considered to be indirectly melted by the processing light EL#1 via the molten pool MP#1 formed by the processing light EL#1. In either case, the fact remains that the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL#1.
  • the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#2 is melted by the processing light EL#2 irradiated onto the molten pool MP#2.
  • the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#2 is melted by the molten pool MP#2 formed by the processing light EL#2.
  • the modeling material M may be considered to be melted by the processing light EL#2 that formed the molten pool MP#2.
  • the modeling material M may be considered to be indirectly melted by the processing light EL#2 via the molten pool MP#2 formed by the processing light EL#2. In either case, the fact remains that the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL#1.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 uses the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 to move the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively. That is, the irradiation optical system 211 uses the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 to scan the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 with the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, respectively.
  • the processing light EL#1 is no longer irradiated to the molten pool MP#1 as the target irradiation area EA#1 moves, the molten modeling material M melted in the molten pool MP#1 is cooled and solidified (i.e., solidified).
  • the processing light EL#2 is no longer irradiated to the molten pool MP#2 as the target irradiation area EA#2 moves, the molten modeling material M melted in the molten pool MP#2 is cooled and solidified (i.e., solidified). Furthermore, as the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 move, the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 also move. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9(c), within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 through which the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 move, a molded object made of solidified molding material M is deposited on the molding surface MS.
  • the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 are physically separated.
  • the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 may be integrated together.
  • the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 may be integrated together.
  • the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move on the printing surface MS. In other words, the processing system SYSa may move the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively, and move the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 on the printing surface MS in parallel.
  • the processing system SYSa may not move the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 do not move on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing head 21 and the stage 31 may be stopped.
  • the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set in another area on the printing surface MS. That is, the machining system SYSa may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move on the printing surface MS after the additional machining (i.e., printing) in the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 is completed.
  • the machining system SYSa may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set (i.e., the area where the additional machining has already been performed) and the area on the printing surface MS where the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set (i.e., the area where the additional machining is to be performed) are adjacent to each other.
  • the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set does not overlap with the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set.
  • the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set partially overlaps with the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set.
  • the machining system SYSa repeats a series of molding processes, including forming a molten pool MP#1 by irradiating the machining unit area PUA#1 with the machining light EL#1, forming a molten pool MP#2 by irradiating the machining unit area PUA#2 with the machining light EL#2, supplying the molding material M to the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2, melting the supplied molding material M, and solidifying the molten molding material M, while moving the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS, as shown in FIG. 9(d).
  • a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting the target movement trajectory MT0 is molded on the printing surface MS.
  • a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.
  • Figures 8(a) and 8(c) respectively, a structure that has a width along the X-axis direction and extends along the Y-axis direction is formed.
  • a structural layer SL is formed on the printing surface MS, which corresponds to a structure that is an aggregate of the melted and then solidified printing material M.
  • a structural layer SL is formed on the printing surface MS, which corresponds to an aggregate of objects printed in a pattern corresponding to the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2.
  • a structural layer SL having a shape corresponding to the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 is formed.
  • the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1.
  • the processing system SYSa may irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1 and stop the supply of the forming material M.
  • the processing system SYSa may supply the forming material M to the target irradiation area EA#1 and irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1 of an intensity that does not create a molten pool MP.
  • the target irradiation area EA#2 is set in an area where it is not desired to form an object.
  • the target movement trajectory MT0 of each of the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 may be referred to as a machining path (in other words, a tool path).
  • the control unit 7 may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 based on path information indicating the target movement trajectory MT0 (i.e., path information indicating the machining path) so that each of the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 moves along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa repeatedly performs operations for forming such a structural layer SL based on the three-dimensional model data under the control of the control unit 7. Specifically, first, before performing operations for forming the structural layer SL, the control unit 7 slices the three-dimensional model data at the layer pitch to create slice data. The processing system SYSa performs operations for forming the first structural layer SL#1 on the forming surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W based on the slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#1. Specifically, the control unit 7 acquires path information for forming the first structural layer SL#1, which is generated based on the slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#1.
  • the control unit 7 controls the processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 to form the first structural layer SL#1 based on the path information.
  • the structural layer SL#1 is formed on the forming surface MS, as shown in FIG. 10(a).
  • the processing system SYSa sets the surface (i.e., the upper surface) of the structure layer SL#1 as a new printing surface MS, and then forms the second structure layer SL#2 on the new printing surface MS.
  • the control unit 7 first controls at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing head 21 moves along the Z axis relative to the stage 31.
  • control unit 7 controls at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 to move the processing head 21 toward the +Z side and/or move the stage 31 toward the -Z side so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set on the surface of the structure layer SL#1 (i.e., the new printing surface MS).
  • the processing system SYSa forms a structural layer SL#2 on the structural layer SL#1 based on slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#2 in a manner similar to the operation for forming the structural layer SL#1.
  • the structural layer SL#2 is formed as shown in FIG. 10(b).
  • the same operation is repeated until all the structural layers SL constituting the three-dimensional structure ST to be formed on the workpiece W are formed.
  • the three-dimensional structure ST is formed by a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked, as shown in FIG. 10(c).
  • the processing system SYSa forms a molten pool MP on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL.
  • the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to irradiate the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL in order to form a molten pool MP on the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform the operation of forming a molten pool MP by irradiating the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL.
  • the processing system SYSa supplies the modeling material M to the molten pool MP formed on the modeling surface MS, thereby melting the modeling material M in the molten pool MP.
  • the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M on the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa does not need to melt the modeling material M on the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS before the modeling material M reaches the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS by irradiating the processing light EL onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • the modeling material M melted in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS is supplied to the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa supplies the modeling material M melted in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS to the modeling surface MS. Therefore, to summarize the above description of the second modeling operation, the second modeling operation may be an operation in which the modeling material M is melted by irradiating the processing light EL onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS, and the molten modeling material M is supplied to the modeling surface MS to form a model on the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa In order to form each structural layer SL by performing the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, moves at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that molten modeling material M is supplied to a desired area on the modeling surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W or the surface of the modeled structural layer SL. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, emits processing light EL#1 and EL#2 from the irradiation optical system 211. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, supplies modeling material M from the material nozzle 212.
  • the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is irradiated onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • the virtual material supply surface PL located at the position where at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is irradiated onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS is referred to as the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, as shown in FIG.
  • the processing system SYSa may be considered to irradiate the material irradiation surface ES with the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 and to supply the modeling material M to the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 irradiated onto the material irradiation surface ES pass through the material irradiation surface ES, and the modeling material M supplied to the material irradiation surface ES passes through the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the processing system SYSa may be considered to emit the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 so that they pass through the material irradiation surface ES, and to supply the modeling material M so that the modeling material M passes through the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the forming material M melts on the material irradiation surface ES as shown in FIG. 11(a).
  • the forming material M melted on the material irradiation surface ES is supplied from the material irradiation surface ES to the forming surface MS.
  • the forming material M melted on the material irradiation surface ES adheres to the forming surface MS.
  • the molten pool MP rarely penetrates into the interior of an object having the forming surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL).
  • the amount of penetration of the molten pool MP into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface is relatively small.
  • the object having the printing surface MS on its surface e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL
  • the molten pool MP will penetrate into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL).
  • the amount of penetration of the molten pool MP into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL
  • the depth of the molten pool MP formed is typically shallower than the depth of the molten pool MP formed in the first printing operation.
  • the modeling material M supplied to the modeling surface MS is cooled and solidified (i.e., coagulated).
  • a model made of the solidified modeling material M is deposited on the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing system SYSa repeats a series of modeling processes, including melting the modeling material M on the material irradiation surface ES by irradiating the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, supplying the molten modeling material M to the modeling surface MS, and solidifying the molten modeling material M on the modeling surface MS, while moving the processing head 21 relative to the modeling surface MS, as shown in FIG. 11(c).
  • the processing system SYSa repeats a series of modeling processes while moving the processing head 21 relative to the modeling surface MS along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.
  • a model having a width along a direction intersecting the movement direction of the processing head 21 is modeled on the modeling surface MS.
  • a structure layer SL corresponding to a model that is an aggregate of the melted and then solidified modeling material M is formed on the modeling surface MS.
  • a structure layer SL corresponding to an aggregate of the models formed on the modeling surface MS in a pattern according to the movement trajectory of the processing head 21 is formed.
  • a structural layer SL is formed that has a shape corresponding to the movement trajectory of the processing head 21 in a plan view.
  • a three-dimensional structure ST is formed by a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked.
  • the second modeling operation may be referred to as a modeling operation conforming to the extreme high speed application (EHLA).
  • the second modeling operation may be considered to be a modeling operation conforming to the extreme high speed application (EHLA).
  • the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 using the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, respectively, in the same manner as when the first modeling operation is performed.
  • the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the beam passing area PA#1 through which the processing light EL#1 passes within the virtual material irradiation surface ES intersecting the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • FIG. 12 which shows the processing light EL#1 passing through the material irradiation surface ES
  • the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the beam passing area PA#2 through which the processing light EL#2 passes within the virtual material irradiation surface ES intersecting the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k (note that k is a variable indicating 1 or 2) on the material irradiation surface ES is referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA (particularly, the irradiation unit area MUA#k).
  • the beam passing area PA#k may be considered to move on a surface of the material irradiation surface ES that overlaps with the irradiation unit area MUA#k.
  • the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed is referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA (particularly, the irradiation unit area MUA#k).
  • the irradiation unit area MUA#k indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) through which the processing light EL#k emitted from the processing head 21 actually passes while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed.
  • the irradiation unit area MUA#k indicates an area (in other words, a range) through which the beam passing area PA#k actually moves while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed. For this reason, the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be considered to be a virtual area located on the material irradiation surface ES at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211).
  • the maximum area over which the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 can move the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed may be referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA#k.
  • the processing system SYSa can move the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k using the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the processing light EL#k using the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k.
  • the beam passing area PA#k moves on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 and the material irradiation surface ES changes.
  • the irradiation unit area MUA#k determined based on the machining head 21 i.e., the irradiation unit area MUA#k where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES
  • the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the irradiation unit area MUA#k relative to the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the characteristics of the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be the same as the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#k described above.
  • the movement pattern (e.g., movement trajectory) of the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be the same as the movement pattern of the target irradiation area EA#k within the processing unit area PUA#k described above.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#k so that the beam passing area PA#k moves along a single scanning direction along the material irradiation surface ES within the irradiation unit area MUA#k.
  • the beam passing area PA#k may move along the movement trajectory MT#k shown in Fig.
  • the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#k so that the beam passing area PA#k moves along multiple scanning directions within the irradiation unit area MUA#k under the assumption that the irradiation unit area MUA#k is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the beam passing area PA#k may move along the movement trajectory MT#k shown in Figure 13(e) on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that the entire material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, as shown in FIG. 14(a), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA to which the modeling material M is supplied within the irradiation unit area MUA and the irradiation unit area MUA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that a part of the irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, while another part of the irradiation unit area MUA is not included in the material supply area MSA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that a part of the material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, while another part of the material supply area MSA is not included in the irradiation unit area MUA, as shown in FIG. 14(b), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA and the irradiation unit area MUA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that a part of the irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, while another part of the irradiation unit area MUA is not included in the material supply area MSA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that the entire irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, as shown in FIG. 14(c), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA and the irradiation unit area MUA.
  • the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that a part of the material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, while another part of the material supply area MSA is not included in the irradiation unit area MUA.
  • the machining system SYSa may perform an alignment operation based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8).
  • the control unit 7 may perform at least one of a nozzle-beam alignment operation and a multi-beam alignment operation as the alignment operation.
  • the nozzle-beam alignment operation is an operation for aligning the material nozzle 212 that supplies the modeling material M with the processing light EL (i.e., at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2) that melts the modeling material M.
  • the multi-beam alignment operation is an operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2.
  • the control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.
  • the control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation before the processing system SYSa starts additional processing.
  • the control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation after the processing system SYSa finishes additional processing.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212. That is, the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 by receiving the imaging light CL from the material nozzle 212. In this case, typically, the imaging device 8 images a part of the material nozzle 212, but the imaging device 8 may also image the entire material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 further images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 receives the imaging light CL from the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, thereby imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • typically, a portion of at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is imaged, but at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be imaged in its entirety.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS when the processing system SYSa performs the first printing operation. On the other hand, the imaging device 8 may image the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation. However, the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS in addition to or instead of the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation.
  • the above-mentioned illumination device 213 may illuminate the printing surface MS with illumination light IL. As a result, the imaging device 8 can properly image the printing surface MS.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES
  • the above-mentioned illumination device 213 may illuminate the material irradiation surface ES with illumination light IL. As a result, the imaging device 8 can properly image the printing surface MS.
  • the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL along at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL that includes at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • An example of such an illumination device 213 is a sheet light source.
  • the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL along a surface that intersects with at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the angle between the surface along the sheet-like illumination light IL and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be an acute angle.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES to actually perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES without actually performing additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing.
  • a test workpiece used for nozzle-beam alignment operation may be placed on the stage 31 in place of the workpiece W.
  • the surface of the test workpiece may be used as the printing surface MS.
  • the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, as described above, the printing material M melts on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the molten printing material M on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, in order to perform a nozzle-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and the molten printing material M on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the molten printing material M on the printing surface MS forms a molten pool MP. For this reason, imaging the molten printing material M on the printing surface MS may be considered equivalent to imaging the molten pool MP.
  • the molding material M melted on at least one of the molding surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is referred to as the molten material M_melt.
  • a beam spot of the processing light EL may be formed on the printing surface MS.
  • the intensity of the processing light EL emitted toward the printing surface MS may be weaker than the intensity that melts the printing surface MS.
  • a beam spot of the processing light EL may be formed on the printing surface MS instead of a molten pool MP.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the beam spot of the processing light EL formed on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the processing light EL on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in order to perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation.
  • the following explanation of the nozzle-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt
  • can be used as an explanation of the nozzle-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the material nozzle 212 and the beam spot of the processing light EL, by replacing "molten material M_melt" with "beam spot of processing light EL (processing light EL)."
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt to generate an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are reflected.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are reflected.
  • the image IMG may also capture the inner wall surface 2125 of the material nozzle 212 and the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212.
  • FIG. 15 shows an example of an image IMG generated when the imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt by receiving imaging light CL passing through the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 (see FIG. 5).
  • the imaging device 8 may be aligned with the material nozzle 212 so that the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 is included in the imaging field of view of the imaging device 8.
  • the control unit 7 controls the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship before the imaging device 8 captures the image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt. Specifically, the control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship. For example, when the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#1 are aligned, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#1 becomes the desired positional relationship.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2156 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#2 becomes the desired positional relationship.
  • the control unit 7 generates a drive command value (reference drive command value) for controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship.
  • the control unit 7 outputs the generated reference drive command value to at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, thereby controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship.
  • the state in which the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 is used as the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship, as shown in FIG. 16.
  • the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 in a plane that intersects with the traveling direction of the processing light EL and includes the opening 2124 (i.e., a plane that is along the XY plane and includes the opening 2124) is used as the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship.
  • the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 16.
  • the material nozzle 212 and the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL#1 passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 when the attitude (rotation angle) of the galvanometer mirror 2146 is the reference attitude (reference angle).
  • the material nozzle 212 and the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL#2 passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 when the attitude (rotation angle) of the galvanometer mirror 2156 is the reference attitude (reference angle).
  • An example of a state in which the attitude of the galvanometer mirror 2146 is the reference attitude is a state in which the rotation angles of the X-scanning mirrors 2146MX and 2146MY of the galvanometer mirror 2146 are zero degrees.
  • An example of a state in which the attitude of the galvanometer mirror 2156 is the reference attitude is a state in which the rotation angles of the X-scanning mirrors 2156MX and 2156MY of the galvanometer mirror 2156 are zero degrees.
  • at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 deflects the processing light EL with the center C of the aperture 2124 as the origin.
  • the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the +X side can be made the same as the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the -X side.
  • the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the +Y side can be made the same as the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the -Y side.
  • the controllability of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 becomes easier.
  • the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL passing through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 passes through the above-mentioned material control point MCP where the modeling material M gathers.
  • the amount of light of the light component of the processing light EL irradiated onto the modeling material M can be increased compared to when the processing light EL passing through the center C of the opening 2124 does not pass through the material control point MCP.
  • the melting efficiency of the modeling material M is improved.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt. After that, the control unit 7 aligns the material nozzle 212 with the processing light EL based on the image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are captured.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position where the printing material M is irradiated with the processing light EL.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL is irradiated or the position where the processing light EL passes on the material irradiation surface ES that is equivalent to the printing surface MS.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES that is equivalent to the printing surface MS.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is equivalent to the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL in the processing system SYSa.
  • the control unit 7 may determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL in the processing system SYSa based on the image IMG by determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. In order to determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG, the control unit 7 may detect the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 may detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG.
  • the control unit 7 can determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. Since the image IMG is used to detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) that generates the image IMG may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt.
  • the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG. For this reason, determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 corresponds to the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e. the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES). That is, the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 and the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) correspond to each other.
  • specifying the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the image IMG may be considered equivalent to specifying the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the relationship between the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 and the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) correspond to each other.
  • FIG. 17(a) which shows an example of an image IMG, shows an example in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is the desired positional relationship.
  • FIG. 17(a) shows an example in which the molten material M_melt is reflected in the image IMG at a position corresponding to the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship.
  • the processing light EL is actually passing through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.
  • FIG. 17(b) which shows an example of an image IMG, shows an example in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is not the desired one.
  • FIG. 17(b) shows an example in which the molten material M_melt is reflected in the image IMG at a position away from the position corresponding to the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is not actually the desired one.
  • the processing light EL does not actually pass through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is a desired positional relationship
  • an example of a cause of the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL not actually being the desired positional relationship is a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is a desired positional relationship
  • another example of a cause of the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL not actually being the desired positional relationship is a positional deviation (for example, a positional deviation from a designed or ideal position) of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • a positional deviation of the material nozzle 212 e.g., a positional deviation from the design or ideal position.
  • the control unit 7 may therefore calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship, based on the error between the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt and the desired positional relationship (i.e., the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL).
  • the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship is the state in which the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.
  • the positional misalignment between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL.
  • the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. Therefore, if the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt is reduced, it is expected that the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will also be reduced.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ⁇ X11 (see FIG. 17(b)) in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 in the image IMG and the molten material M_melt, and calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional deviation amount ⁇ X11 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).
  • the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. Therefore, if the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt becomes smaller, it is expected that the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will also become smaller.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ⁇ Y1 (see FIG. 17(b)) in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 in the image IMG and the molten material M_melt, and calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional deviation amount ⁇ Y1 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).
  • the control unit 7 may repeat the above-mentioned operation until at least one of the calculated positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).
  • the imaging device 8 may generate a first image IMG by imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 based on the first image IMG, and calculate a first correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 becomes small.
  • the control unit 7 may correct the drive command value (reference drive command value) using the first correction command value, and control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the corrected drive command value.
  • the imaging device 8 may generate a second image IMG by imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt again.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 based on the second image IMG.
  • the control unit 7 may end the nozzle-beam alignment operation. In this case, the first correction command value may be used as the finally determined correction command value.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate a second correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 is further reduced. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may repeat the same operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).
  • the state in which the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 are zero is the state in which the molten material M_melt is located at the center C of the opening 2124 in the image IMG, as described above.
  • the imaging device 8 moves relative to the material nozzle 212
  • the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected is fixed.
  • the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected may be registered in advance.
  • the control unit 7 may use a position registered in advance as the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 based on the position registered in advance, and may calculate a correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X1 and ⁇ Y1 is equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or is zero).
  • control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value so that the molten material M_melt is positioned at a preregistered position in the image IMG.
  • the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. For example, during the period in which the machining system SYSa performs additional machining after the correction command value is calculated, the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so as to irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position.
  • a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, even if at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled based on the generated drive command value, at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 may not be able to irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position. Therefore, the control unit 7 may correct the generated drive command value using a correction command value.
  • the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value based on the correction command value from which the influence of a control error, etc. of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is eliminated.
  • the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value based on the correction command value from which the influence of a control error, etc. of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is eliminated.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the correction command value again in the second period after the first period. In other words, even after the control unit 7 has once performed the nozzle-beam alignment operation in the first period, if a predetermined nozzle-beam alignment condition is satisfied, the control unit 7 may perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation again in the second period.
  • control unit 7 can essentially calculate the correction command value after taking into consideration the fluctuation in the position of the material nozzle 212 and the fluctuation in the position of the molten material M_melt (i.e., the fluctuation in the position of the processing light EL) between the first period and the second period.
  • the predetermined nozzle-beam alignment condition is a condition in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the nozzle-beam alignment operation was last performed.
  • the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so as to reduce (particularly eliminate) the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL by performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation. Therefore, even if a positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL occurs due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the processing system SYSa can appropriately irradiate the processing light EL at the desired position. As a result, there is a low possibility that the modeling accuracy of the processing system SYSa will deteriorate due to a positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. In other words, the processing system SYSa can accurately model a three-dimensional structure ST.
  • FIG. 18(b) is a graph showing the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, and the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, for each angle in the circumferential direction of the structural layer SL.
  • FIG. 18(b) is a graph showing the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, and the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, for each angle in the circumferential direction of the structural layer SL.
  • the variation in the height of the structural layer SL modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation is smaller than the variation in the height of the structural layer SL modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation. Therefore, the modeling accuracy of the structural layer SL modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation is higher than the modeling accuracy of the structural layer SL modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation.
  • the imaging device 8 images at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. That is, the imaging device 8 images at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by receiving imaging light CL from at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, typically, a part of at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is imaged, but at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be imaged in its entirety.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS when the processing system SYSa performs the first printing operation.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS in addition to or instead of the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with illumination light IL, similar to when a nozzle-beam alignment operation is performed.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES to actually perform additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both #1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES without actually performing additional processing on the workpiece W.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing.
  • a test workpiece to be used for multi-beam alignment operation may be placed on the stage 31 instead of the workpiece W.
  • the surface of the test workpiece may be used as the modeling surface MS.
  • the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, as described above, the printing material M melts on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the printing material M (i.e., the molten material M_melt) melted on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the molten material M_melt in order to perform a multi-beam alignment operation.
  • the processing unit 2 emits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, so that the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 are present on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 images the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2.
  • the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated at the same position on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 are integrated.
  • the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 is referred to as "molten material M_melt#1”
  • the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 is referred to as "molten material M_melt#2”.
  • molten material M_melt may mean at least one of the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2.
  • a beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and a beam spot of the processing light EL#2 may be formed on the printing surface MS.
  • the intensity of each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 emitted toward the printing surface MS may be weaker than the intensity that melts the printing surface MS.
  • a beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and a beam spot of the processing light EL#2 may be formed on the printing surface MS.
  • the imaging device 8 may image the beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of the processing light EL#2 formed on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS.
  • the imaging device 8 images the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in order to perform the multi-beam alignment operation.
  • the following explanation of the multi-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 can be used as an explanation of the multi-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the beam spot of processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of processing light EL#2 by replacing "molten material M_melt #1" with "beam spot of processing light EL#1 (processing light EL#1)" and "molten material M_melt #2" with "beam spot of processing light EL#2 (processing light EL#2)."
  • the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated to the same position on at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 are integrated as described above.
  • the integrated molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 i.e., a single molten material M_melt may appear in the image IMG.
  • the control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are captured. Specifically, as described above, since the molten material M_melt is generated by irradiating the processing light EL on the printing material M, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position where the processing light EL is irradiated on the printing material M. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt#1 is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated or where the processing light EL#1 passes on the material irradiation surface ES, which is equivalent to the printing surface MS.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt#1 is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt#2 is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated or where the processing light EL#2 passes on the material irradiation surface ES, which is equivalent to the printing surface MS.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt#2 is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may substantially identify the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the processing system SYSa by identifying the positional relationship between the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2 in the image IMG based on the image IMG.
  • the control unit 7 may detect the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the image IMG. That is, the control unit 7 may detect the position of the molten material M_melt#1 and the position of the molten material M_melt#2.
  • the control unit 7 can identify the positional relationship between the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2 in the image IMG. Since the image IMG is used to detect the positions of the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) that generates the image IMG may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the positions of the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2.
  • the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the positions (irradiation positions) of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the positions of molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in image IMG correspond to the positions where imaging light CL from molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8 that generates image IMG. Therefore, determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt #1 and molten material M_melt #2 based on image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt #1 and molten material M_melt #2 based on the positions where imaging light CL from molten material M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8.
  • the positions on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 where the imaging light CL from the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident correspond to the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES).
  • the positions on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 where the imaging light CL from the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident and the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) have a relationship in which they correspond to each other.
  • determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt#1 and molten material M_melt#2 based on image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt#1 and molten material M_melt#2 based on the relationship in which the positions where imaging light CL from molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8 correspond to the positions of molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or material irradiation surface ES).
  • the control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the positional relationship between the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the image IMG (i.e., the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2).
  • aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 may include aligning the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated, and the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#2 is irradiated.
  • Aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 may include aligning the beam passing area PA#1 on the material irradiation surface ES where the processing light EL#1 passes, and the beam passing area PA#2 on the material irradiation surface ES where the processing light EL#2 passes.
  • the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in at least one of two directions that are along at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES and are perpendicular to each other.
  • the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction.
  • the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the Y-axis direction.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 each move back and forth periodically along the Y-axis direction during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction and the X-offset amount changes during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 each move back and forth periodically along the Y-axis direction, and the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction and the X-offset amount changes.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the Y-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS, and the X-offset amount changes.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the Y-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES, and the X-offset amount changes.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES multiple times in succession.
  • FIG. 20(a) showing an example of an image IMG generated by the imaging device 8
  • the imaging device 8 generates multiple images IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated (or integrated in some cases) along the X-axis direction.
  • control unit 7 selects an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap (in other words, are integrated) along the X-axis direction from among the multiple images IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 detects the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction based on the multiple images IMG.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG.
  • detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the incident position of the processing light EL#1 and the incident position of the processing light EL#2 along the X-axis direction on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the control unit 7 may extract the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness as the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction (in other words, are integrated).
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction. Even in this case, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction.
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction, due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction.
  • the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 may not actually be spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction.
  • the control unit 7 may therefore set the X offset amount used when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap to an X reference offset amount, which is a reference value of the X offset amount.
  • the X reference offset amount is an X offset amount at which the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide in the X-axis direction.
  • the X reference offset amount is an X offset amount at which the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS and/or the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the X-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the X-reference offset amount. For example, during the period in which the processing system SYSa performs additional processing after the X-reference offset amount is calculated, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the X-reference offset amount.
  • control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the X-offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the X distance to the X-reference offset amount.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are actually separated by the desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the X offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the X distance from the X reference offset amount.
  • the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are actually separated by the desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the drive command value that controls the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is generated based on the X reference offset amount so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 are separated by a predetermined X distance (X offset amount)
  • the X reference offset amount may be considered to be a reference value for the drive command value (particularly the drive command value that specifies the X offset amount).
  • control unit 7 may select an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG, in addition to selecting the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the respective positions (particularly the positions in the X-axis direction) of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG based on each image IMG.
  • control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#1 in the X-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction.
  • the processing unit 2 may emit either one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, and then emit the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and then image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the position of either one of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and may calculate the position of the other of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted.
  • control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move back and forth periodically along the X-axis direction during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction and the Y offset amount changes during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move back and forth periodically along the X-axis direction, and the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction and the Y offset amount changes.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the X-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS, and the Y offset amount changes.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the X-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES, and the Y offset amount changes.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES multiple times in succession.
  • FIG. 21(a) showing an example of an image IMG generated by the imaging device 8
  • the imaging device 8 generates multiple images IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated (or integrated in some cases) along the Y axis direction.
  • control unit 7 selects an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap (in other words, are integrated) along the Y axis direction from among the multiple images IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 detects the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y axis direction based on the multiple images IMG.
  • the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG.
  • detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the incident position of the processing light EL#1 and the incident position of the processing light EL#2 along the Y-axis direction on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.
  • the control unit 7 may extract the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness as the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction (in other words, are integrated).
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction. Even in this case, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction.
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y axis direction, due to a positional misalignment of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 (e.g., a positional misalignment from a designed or ideal position), the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 may not actually be spaced apart by the predetermined Y offset amount along the Y axis direction.
  • the control unit 7 may therefore set the Y offset amount used when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap to a Y reference offset amount, which is a reference value of the Y offset amount.
  • the Y reference offset amount is a Y offset amount at which the irradiation position of processing light EL#1 and the irradiation position of processing light EL#2 actually coincide in the Y-axis direction.
  • the Y reference offset amount is a Y offset amount at which the target irradiation area EA#1 of processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS and/or the beam passing area PA#1 of processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the Y-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the Y reference offset amount. For example, during the period in which the processing system SYSa performs additional processing after the Y reference offset amount is calculated, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the Y reference offset amount.
  • control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the Y offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the Y distance to the Y reference offset amount.
  • the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 will actually be separated by the desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS.
  • control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using a Y offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the Y distance from the Y reference offset amount.
  • the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 will actually be separated by the desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the Y reference offset amount may be considered to be a reference value for the drive command value (particularly the drive command value that specifies the Y offset amount).
  • control unit 7 may select an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG, in addition to selecting the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the respective positions (particularly the positions in the Y-axis direction) of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG based on each image IMG.
  • control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.
  • the processing unit 2 may emit either one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, and then emit the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and then image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the position of either one of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and may calculate the position of the other of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted.
  • control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.
  • control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship even if a positional deviation occurs between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Therefore, the processing system SYSa can appropriately irradiate each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 to the desired position. As a result, the processing system SYSa can accurately form the three-dimensional structure ST.
  • the control unit 7 may perform the above-mentioned multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial regions WP obtained by virtually dividing the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • a plurality of partial regions WP is shown in FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example in which a plurality of partial regions WP are arranged regularly (for example, in a matrix).
  • the plurality of partial regions WP may be arranged in any arrangement pattern.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate a plurality of X-reference offset amounts corresponding to the plurality of partial regions WP, and/or a plurality of Y-reference offset amounts corresponding to the plurality of partial regions WP. In this case, when additional processing is performed by emitting the processing light EL toward one partial region WP, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using one X-reference offset amount corresponding to one partial region WP and/or one Y-reference offset amount corresponding to one partial region WP.
  • the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap).
  • the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the processing unit area PUA#1, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#1, and the processing unit area PUA#2, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#2, coincide (i.e., overlap).
  • control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the irradiation unit areas MUA#1 and MUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap).
  • control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the irradiation unit area MUA#1, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#1, and the irradiation unit area MUA#2, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#2, coincide (i.e., overlap).
  • the control unit 7 controls the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 (or the beam passing areas PA#1 and PA#2) move back and forth periodically along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.
  • control unit 7 does not have to control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 (or the beam passing areas PA#1 and PA#2) move back and forth periodically along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.
  • the processing unit 2 may emit the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture at least one of the forming surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are projected in a situation where the X offset amount is set to a first predetermined amount and/or the Y offset amount is set to a second predetermined amount. As a result, the imaging device 8 generates an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are captured. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may calculate the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 (e.g., positions in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction) based on the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8.
  • the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 e.g., positions in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction
  • control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amount ⁇ X2 of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction and the positional deviation amount ⁇ Y2 of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 23, based on the calculation result of the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may adjust at least one of the X offset amount and the Y offset amount so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X2 and ⁇ Y2 is small (typically, becomes zero).
  • At least one of the X offset amount and the Y offset amount that can realize a state in which at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X2 and ⁇ Y2 is minimized may be used as at least one of the X reference offset amount and the Y reference offset amount.
  • the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212.
  • the imaging device 8 may image a fixed position portion whose relative position with respect to the material nozzle 212 is fixed. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image a fixed position portion whose positional relationship with the material nozzle 212 is fixed.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be fixed during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be fixed during the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be the same during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing and the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing.
  • the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing may be the same as the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part during the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing.
  • the position fixing portion may be attached to the processing head 21.
  • the position fixing portion may be formed on the processing head 21.
  • the position fixing portion may be a part of the processing head 21.
  • the position fixing portion may be attached to the irradiation device 210.
  • the position fixing portion may be formed on the irradiation device 210.
  • the position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation device 210.
  • the position fixing portion may be attached to the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the position fixing portion may be formed on the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the position fixing portion may be attached to an optical member provided in the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the position fixing portion may be formed on an optical member included in the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • An example of a positionally fixed portion is an index IDX that can be imaged by the imaging device 8.
  • the index IDX may be an index having a predetermined pattern shape.
  • Such an index IDX may be formed on an optical member 2110 of the irradiation optical system 211 that is arranged in the optical path of the processing light EL.
  • FIG. 24 which is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an optical member 2110 on which the index IDX is formed
  • the index IDX may be formed on an optical member 2110 that is arranged in the optical path of the processing light EL between the irradiation device 210 (particularly, the f ⁇ lens 2162 of the irradiation optical system 211) and the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES).
  • the index IDX may be located on the optical axis of the irradiation optical system 211, or off the optical axis. When the index IDX is located off the optical axis, the index IDX may be located outside the range scanned by the processing light EL by the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. In this case, the index IDX may be located within the imaging range of the imaging device 8.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) that will result in a desired positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL based on the position of the fixed position part. Specifically, since the position of the fixed position part relative to the material nozzle 212 is fixed, the control unit 7 can calculate the position of the material nozzle 212 based on the position of the fixed position part and information on the position of the fixed position part relative to the material nozzle 212.
  • the control unit 7 can specify the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt (i.e., the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL). Therefore, even when the imaging device 8 images a fixed position part, the control unit 7 can appropriately calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) that will result in a desired positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL, just as when the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212. Therefore, even when the imaging device 8 images a fixed position part, the same effect as that which can be obtained by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above can be obtained, just as when the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212.
  • the material nozzle 212 itself i.e., at least a part of the material nozzle 212 may be considered to be a fixed position part whose relative position with respect to the material nozzle 212 is fixed.
  • control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated) by performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation.
  • control unit 7 moves the processing light EL relative to the material nozzle 212 so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated).
  • the control unit 7 may move the material nozzle 212 relative to the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). Even in this case, it is possible to enjoy the same effect as that which can be enjoyed by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above.
  • control unit 7 moves at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated).
  • control unit 7 adjusts the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated).
  • the operator (person) of the processing system SYSa may manually move at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL.
  • the operator of the processing system SYSa may manually adjust the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). Even in this case, it is possible to enjoy the same effect as that which can be enjoyed by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above.
  • the first optical system 214 converts the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 into parallel light using the collimator lens 2141, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the first optical system 214 may convert the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 into parallel light using a collimator mirror 2141-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the collimator lens 2141, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the collimator mirror 2141-3 may have any configuration as long as it can reflect the processing light EL#1 incident on the collimator mirror 2141-3 and emit the processing light EL#1 converted into parallel light.
  • the collimator mirror 2141-3 includes two mirrors 21411-3 and 21412-3.
  • the incident side mirror 21411-3 may be a concave mirror
  • the exit side mirror 21412-3 may be a convex mirror.
  • the mirror 21412-3 may be a plane mirror.
  • the incident side mirror 21411-3 may be a convex mirror or a plane mirror
  • the exit side mirror 21412-3 may be a concave mirror.
  • the second optical system 215 may also use a reflective optical system (for example, a collimator mirror that is a reflective optical system similar to the collimator mirror 2141-3) instead of the collimator lens 2151, which is a refractive optical system, to convert the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 into parallel light.
  • a reflective optical system for example, a collimator mirror that is a reflective optical system similar to the collimator mirror 2141-3
  • the collimator lens 2151 which is a refractive optical system
  • the first optical system 214 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 using the focus control optical system 2145, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the first optical system 214 may change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 using the focus control optical system 2145-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the focus control optical system 2145, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the focus control optical system 2145-3 may have any configuration as long as it is capable of changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 by reflecting the processing light EL#1 incident on the focus control optical system 2145-3. In the example shown in FIG.
  • the focus control optical system 2145-3 includes four mirrors 21451-3, 21452-3, 21453-3, and 21454-3.
  • the first mirror 21451-3 and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be concave mirrors
  • the second mirror 21452-3 and the third mirror 21453-3 may be convex mirrors.
  • the focus position CP of the processing light EL can be changed by changing the position of the second mirror 21452-3 in the traveling direction of the processing light EL.
  • the inclination (for example, the inclination in the paper) of at least one of the second mirror 21452-3, the third mirror 21453-3, and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be changed according to the change in the position of the second mirror 21452-3.
  • the first mirror 21451-3 and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be convex mirrors
  • the second mirror 21452-3 and the third mirror 21453-3 may be concave mirrors.
  • at least one of the first mirror 21451-3 to the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be a plane mirror.
  • the second optical system 215 may also change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 by using a reflective optical system (for example, a focus control optical system that is a reflective optical system having a configuration similar to that of the focus control optical system 2145-3) instead of the focus control optical system 2155, which is a refractive optical system.
  • a reflective optical system for example, a focus control optical system that is a reflective optical system having a configuration similar to that of the focus control optical system 2145-3
  • the focus control optical system 2155 which is a refractive optical system.
  • the third optical system 216 focuses the processing light EL using the f ⁇ lens 2162, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the third optical system 216 may focus the processing light EL using a focusing optical system 2162-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the f ⁇ lens 2162, which is a refractive optical system.
  • the focusing optical system 2162-3 may have any configuration as long as it is capable of focusing the processing light EL by reflecting the processing light EL incident on the focusing optical system 2162-3. In the example shown in FIG.
  • the focusing optical system 2162-3 includes a concave mirror 21621-3 that focuses the processing light EL, a mirror 21622-3 that reflects the processing light EL#1 from the first optical system 214 toward the concave mirror 21621-3, and a mirror 21623-3 that reflects the processing light EL#2 from the second optical system 215 toward the concave mirror 21621-3. Note that, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the third optical system 216 includes the focusing optical system 2162-3 shown in FIG. 25(c), the third optical system 216 does not need to include a prism mirror 2161.
  • the processing light EL is less likely to be affected by the thermal expansion of the lens compared to when a refractive optical system is used. Therefore, when a reflective optical system is used, the modeling accuracy of the processing system SYSa is improved compared to when a refractive optical system is used.
  • the imaging device 8 captures an image of an object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL reflected by the beam splitter 2193.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of an object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (opening) 2161AP formed in the prism mirror 2161 and a through hole (opening) 2162AP formed in the f ⁇ lens 2162.
  • the through hole 2161AP may be formed in a portion of the prism mirror 2161 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL.
  • the through hole 2162AP may be formed in a portion of the f ⁇ lens 2162 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL.
  • the irradiation device 210 may not include the beam splitter 2193 (and further the mirror 2192).
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the imaging target object by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (aperture) formed in an optical member of the focusing optical system 2162-3.
  • a through hole (aperture) formed in an optical member of the focusing optical system 2162-3.
  • FIG. 26(b) which is a cross-sectional view showing the optical path of the imaging light CL in the fourth modified example
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the imaging target object by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (aperture) 2163AP formed in the concave mirror 21621-3 of the focusing optical system 2162-3.
  • the through hole 2163AP may be formed in a part of the concave mirror 21621-3 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL.
  • the first optical system 214 may be provided with a melt pool monitor 2147, and/or the second optical system 215 may be provided with a melt pool monitor 2157.
  • the melt pool monitor 2147 may be an imaging device capable of imaging the molten pool MP#1. Return light RL (e.g., the imaging light CL described above) from the molten pool MP#1 may be incident on the melt pool monitor 2147 via the third optical system 216, the galvanometer scanner 2144, and the parallel plate 2142. The imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147 may be output to the control unit 7. The control unit 7 may calculate the size of the molten pool MP#1 based on the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147, and may control the processing unit 2, etc. based on the calculation result of the size of the molten pool MP#1 so that the size of the molten pool MP#1 becomes the desired size.
  • Return light RL e.g., the imaging light CL described above
  • the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147 may be output to the control unit 7.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the size of the molten pool MP#1 based on the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147, and may control the processing unit 2, etc
  • the melt pool monitor 2157 may be an imaging device capable of imaging the molten pool MP#2.
  • Return light RL e.g., the imaging light CL described above
  • the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2157 may be output to the control unit 7.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the size of the molten pool MP#2 based on the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2157, and may control the processing unit 2, etc. based on the calculation result of the size of the molten pool MP#2 so that the size of the molten pool MP#2 becomes the desired size.
  • the imaging device 8 may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed.
  • the imaging device 8 may capture an image of an object to be imaged (e.g., the molten pool MP) by receiving the imaging light CL through at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system.
  • the imaging light CL from the molten pool MP may be incident on the third optical system 216.
  • the third optical system 216 may emit the imaging light CL toward at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system 215.
  • the imaging light CL incident on the first optical system 214 may pass through the galvanometer scanner 2144 and be reflected by the parallel plate 2142 toward the imaging device 8.
  • the imaging light CL incident on the second optical system 215 may also pass through the galvanometer scanner 2154 and be reflected by the parallel plate 2152 toward the imaging device 8. As a result, the imaging device 8 can capture an image of the molten pool MP.
  • a temperature detector capable of detecting the temperature of an object using a two-color method may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed.
  • the temperature detector may detect the temperature of the object by receiving light from the object whose temperature is to be detected via at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system.
  • the temperature detector described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2021/0268586 may be used as a temperature detector capable of detecting the temperature of an object using a two-color method.
  • an irradiation position detector capable of detecting the irradiation position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed.
  • the irradiation position detector may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL by receiving light (e.g., at least one of reflected light and scattered light of the processing light EL) from the irradiation position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL is irradiated.
  • An example of the irradiation position detector is a light position sensor (PSD: Position Sensitive Detector) capable of detecting the center of gravity of the light amount of the spot of the processing light EL.
  • PSD Position Sensitive Detector
  • the processing system SYSa forms the three-dimensional structure ST by performing additive processing based on the laser build-up welding method.
  • the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing additive processing in accordance with other methods capable of forming the three-dimensional structure ST.
  • other methods capable of forming the three-dimensional structure ST include at least one of powder bed fusion methods such as selective laser sintering (SLS), binder jetting, material jetting, stereolithography, and laser metal fusion (LMF).
  • the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST using multiple processing lights EL.
  • the processing system SYSa may perform a multi-beam alignment operation to align the multiple processing lights EL.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a processing system SYSa (hereinafter referred to as processing system SYS-6) that performs additive processing in accordance with the powder bed fusion method.
  • the processing system SYSa-6 includes a processing unit 2-6, the above-mentioned control unit 7, and the above-mentioned imaging device 8.
  • FIG. 28 does not show a cross section of the control unit 7.
  • the processing unit 2-6 is a device that can form a three-dimensional structure by performing additive processing, similar to the processing unit 2.
  • the processing unit 2-6 differs from the processing unit 2 that performs additive processing in accordance with the laser build-up welding method in that it performs additive processing in accordance with the powder bed fusion method.
  • the processing unit 2-6 includes a material supply tank 24-6, a recoater 25-6, a modeling tank 26-6, and a processing head 27-6.
  • the material supply tank 24-6 is a container for containing the modeling material M for forming a three-dimensional structure.
  • the bottom surface 241-6 of the material supply tank 24-6 moves in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) by a drive mechanism (not shown) under the control of the control unit 7.
  • the modeling material M is, for example, a powder.
  • the modeling material M may be at least one of a metal powder and a resin powder. However, the modeling material M does not have to be a powder.
  • the recoater 25-6 supplies the modeling material M contained in the material supply tank 24-6 to the modeling tank 26-6.
  • the recoater 25-6 flattens the surface of the modeling material M supplied to the modeling tank 26-6 to form a material layer ML, which is a layer of the modeling material M.
  • the bottom surface of the modeling tank 26-6 is the lifting stage 261-6. Under the control of the control unit 7, the lifting stage 261-6 moves in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) by a drive mechanism (not shown).
  • the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL to at least a portion of the material layer ML formed in the modeling tank 26-6. Specifically, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL to a processing surface MLs, which is at least a portion of the surface of the material layer ML formed in the modeling tank 26-6.
  • a processing surface MLs which is at least a portion of the surface of the material layer ML formed in the modeling tank 26-6.
  • the structural layer SL may be equivalent to a sintered layer formed by sintering the modeling material M.
  • the structural layer SL may be equivalent to a solidified layer formed by solidifying the molten modeling material M.
  • the processing head 27-6 selectively irradiates the material layer ML with the processing light EL in order to selectively solidify the material layer ML.
  • the processing head 27-6 uses a galvanometer mirror to deflect the processing light EL.
  • the lifting stage 261-6 descends. After the lifting stage 261-6 descends (in the example shown in FIG. 28, the lifting stage 261-6 moves toward the -Z side), the recoater 25-6 forms a new material layer ML on the lifting stage 261-6 (more specifically, on the already formed structural layer SL and the already formed old material layer ML).
  • the processing head 27-6 then irradiates the newly formed material layer ML with the processing light EL. In other words, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the processing surface MLs, which is at least a part of the surface of the newly formed material layer ML. In other words, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the uppermost material layer ML.
  • the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the processing surface MLs, which is at least a part of the surface of the uppermost material layer ML.
  • a new structural layer SL is formed on the already-formed structural layer SL.
  • the new structural layer SL is stacked on the already-formed structural layer SL.
  • the processing unit 2-6 repeats the same operations under the control of the control unit 7. That is, the processing unit 2-6 alternately repeats an operation of forming a material layer ML mainly using the recoater 25-6, an operation of solidifying at least a portion of the material layer ML to form a structural layer SL mainly using the processing head 27-6, and an operation of lowering the lifting stage 261-6. As a result, a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked is formed on the lifting stage 261-6.
  • the processing system SYSa-6 may be equipped with multiple processing heads 27-6 that each emit multiple processing beams EL.
  • the control unit 7 may perform the above-mentioned multi-beam alignment operation to align the multiple processing beams EL emitted by the multiple processing heads 27-6.
  • the machining system SYSb of the second embodiment may differ from the machining system SYSb of the first embodiment described above in that it includes a machining unit 2b instead of the machining unit 2. Furthermore, the machining system SYSb of the second embodiment may differ from the machining system SYSb of the first embodiment described above in that it does not need to include an imaging device 8. Other features of the machining system SYSb may be the same as other features of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the machining unit 2b may differ from the machining unit 2 in that it includes an irradiation device 210b instead of the irradiation device 210.
  • the irradiation device 210b may differ from the irradiation device 210 in that it includes an irradiation optical system 211b instead of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • Other features of the illumination device 210b may be the same as those of the illumination device 210.
  • Fig. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of irradiation optical system 211b.
  • the irradiation optical system 211b differs from the irradiation optical system 211 in that it includes a dichroic mirror 217b and two irradiation position detection devices 218b (specifically, irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and irradiation position detection device 218b#2). Other features of the irradiation optical system 211b may be the same as other features of the irradiation optical system 211.
  • the dichroic mirror 217b is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL (processing light EL#1 and EL#2) emitted from the third optical system 216.
  • the dichroic mirror 217b passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the dichroic mirror 217b has an optical surface (e.g., a dichroic surface on which a thin film having wavelength selectivity is formed) that passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2
  • the dichroic mirror 217b that passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 reflects a portion of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the dichroic mirror 217b reflects about 1% of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 that is incident on the dichroic mirror 217b. In this way, the dichroic mirror 217b functions as a beam splitter that splits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the portion of the processed light EL#1 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b is referred to as "processed light EL#31”
  • the portion of the processed light EL#2 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b is referred to as "processed light EL#32.”
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#31 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 detects (specifically, receives) the processing light EL#31 incident on the irradiation position detection device 218b#1.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 has a detection surface 2181b#1 that crosses (in other words, intersects) the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31, and detects the processing light EL#31 using the detection surface 2181b#1.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 By detecting the processing light EL#31, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 detects the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 within the detection surface 2181b#1 that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31. However, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 within any plane that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31 by detecting the processing light EL#31.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#32 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 detects (specifically, receives) the processing light EL#32 incident on the irradiation position detection device 218b#2.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 has a detection surface 2181b#2 that crosses (in other words, intersects) the traveling direction of the processing light EL#32, and detects the processing light EL#32 using the detection surface 2181b#2.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 detects the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 within the detection surface 2181b#2 by detecting the processing light EL#32. However, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 within any plane that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#32 by detecting the processing light EL#32.
  • An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is an optical position sensor (PSD: Position Sensitive Detector) that can determine the irradiation position of the processing light EL by detecting the center of gravity of the light amount of the spot of the processing light EL.
  • An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is a photodetector with a detection surface divided into four parts that detects the processing light EL.
  • An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is a beam profiler that can determine the irradiation position of the processing light EL by receiving the processing light EL through a slit.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the processed light EL#31 but not necessarily detect the processed light EL#32.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the processed light EL#32 but not necessarily detect the processed light EL#31.
  • each of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 selectively detects either the processed light EL#31 or EL#32.
  • the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 deflect the processing light EL#1 and #2, respectively, the processing light EL#31 and EL#32 are also deflected, as shown in FIG. 31.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may be arranged at a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is positioned at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 does not overlap with the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 can detect the processing light EL#31 without detecting the processing light EL#32.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may be arranged at a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 can detect the processed light EL#32 without detecting the processed light EL#31.
  • the processing system SYSb (particularly, the control unit 7) may perform a multi-beam alignment operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2, similar to the above-mentioned processing system SYSa.
  • the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2, instead of based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8).
  • the multi-beam alignment operation in the second embodiment will be described below by mainly describing the difference between the multi-beam alignment operation in the first embodiment and the multi-beam alignment operation in the second embodiment.
  • an operation similar to the multi-beam alignment operation in the first embodiment may be performed.
  • the processing light EL#31 detected by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is a part of the processing light EL#1, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 on the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1. For example, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and information on the positional relationship between the detection surface 2181b#1 and the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the processing light EL#32 detected by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is a part of the processing light EL#2, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 on the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2. For example, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 and information on the positional relationship between the detection surface 2181b#2 and the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the calculation results of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value (reference drive command value) for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated at the same position on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.
  • the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 may detect the processing light EL#31 and EL#32, respectively, while the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are deflecting the processing light EL#31 and EL#32, respectively, according to this reference drive command value.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, respectively, based on the detection results of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#31 and EL#32. Then, as shown in FIG. 33, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ⁇ X3 of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 in the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, as shown in FIG.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ⁇ Y3 of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 in the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Then, the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X3 and ⁇ Y3 becomes small (typically becomes zero).
  • control unit 7 may repeat the multi-beam alignment operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X3 and ⁇ Y3 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined second allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).
  • the control unit 7 may first perform an initial calibration operation before performing the multi-beam alignment operation.
  • the initial calibration operation is an operation in which an irradiation position detection device capable of detecting the irradiation position of the processing light EL is disposed on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, and the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are calibrated based on the detection result of the processing light EL by the irradiation position detection device so as to satisfy the condition that "when the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated to the desired position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are actually irradiated to the desired position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.”
  • the control unit 7 may generate drive command
  • the first target position and the second target position may be the same or different.
  • the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 may detect the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32 while the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are deflecting the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32 according to the reference drive command values.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation positions of the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection results of the irradiation positions of the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32. Thereafter, as shown in Fig.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 relative to the desired first target position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Specifically, as shown in Fig.
  • control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amount ⁇ X4 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 in the X-axis direction and the first target position, and the positional deviation amount ⁇ Y4 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 in the Y-axis direction and the first target position. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of calculating at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X4 and ⁇ Y4, as shown in Fig.
  • control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 relative to the desired second target position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Specifically, as shown in FIG.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of a positional deviation amount ⁇ X5 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction and the second target position, and a positional deviation amount ⁇ Y5 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 in the Y-axis direction and the second target position. After that, the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X4, ⁇ Y4, ⁇ X5, and ⁇ Y5 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).
  • the control unit 7 may repeat the multi-beam alignment operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ⁇ X4, ⁇ Y4, ⁇ X5, and ⁇ Y5 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined third allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).
  • the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, in the same manner as when the correction command value is calculated in the nozzle-beam alignment operation.
  • the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship.
  • control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Therefore, the processing system SYSb can appropriately irradiate each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 at a desired position. As a result, the processing system SYSb can accurately model the three-dimensional structure ST.
  • the irradiation optical system 211b includes two irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2.
  • the irradiation optical system 211b may include a single irradiation position detection device 218b.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 and also detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32.
  • the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. Furthermore, the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 overlap (overlap).
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 during a first period in which the processing light EL#31 is irradiated to the detection surface 2181b, while the processing light EL#32 is not irradiated to the detection surface 2181b. Furthermore, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 during a second period in which the processing light EL#32 is irradiated to the detection surface 2181b, while the processing light EL#31 is not irradiated to the detection surface 2181b. Note that the second period is typically a period different from the first period.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b may selectively detect either the processing light EL#31 or EL#32.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b can detect the irradiation positions of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, just as in the case where the irradiation optical system 211b includes two irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2. Therefore, even in the first modified example, the control unit 7 can appropriately perform the multi-beam alignment operation described above.
  • the irradiation optical system 211b may include a dimming member 2182b so that the irradiation position detection device 218b can selectively detect either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32.
  • the dimming member 2182b is an optical member that can dim either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32. When the dimming member 2182b dims either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, the dimming member 2182b does not need to dim the other one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32.
  • the dimming member 2182b may be disposed at a position on the optical path of the processing light EL#31 but away from the optical path of the processing light EL#32. In this case, the dimming member 2182b dims the processing light EL#31 but does not dim the processing light EL#32. As a result, the non-dimmed processing light EL#32 may be incident on the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b, but the dimmed processing light EL#31 may not be incident thereon. As a result, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the non-dimmed processing light EL#32 but may not detect the dimmed processing light EL#31.
  • the dimming member 2182b may be disposed at a position on the optical path of the processing light EL#32 but away from the optical path of the processing light EL#31. In this case, the dimming member 2182b dims the processing light EL#32 but does not dim the processing light EL#31.
  • the non-dimmed processing light EL#31 may be incident on the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b, but the dimmed processing light EL#32 may not be incident thereon.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the non-dimmed processing light EL#31 but may not detect the dimmed processing light EL#32.
  • the state of the dimming member 2182b may be switched between the state shown in FIG. 37(a) and the state shown in FIG. 37(b).
  • the dimming member 2182b may be movable relative to the optical paths of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32. By moving the dimming member 2182b relative to the optical paths of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, the state of the dimming member 2182b may be switched between the state shown in FIG. 37(a) and the state shown in FIG. 37(b).
  • the irradiation optical system 211b may be provided with any beam splitter that splits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 instead of the dichroic mirror 217b.
  • the irradiation optical system 211b may be provided with any beam splitter that splits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 instead of the dichroic mirror 217b so that a part of the processing light EL#1 is directed to the irradiation position detection device 218b as processing light EL#31, and a part of the processing light EL#2 is directed to the irradiation position detection device 218b as processing light EL#32.
  • the processing system SYSb may further include the imaging device 8 included in the processing system SYSa of the first embodiment.
  • a dichroic mirror 217b may be used as a beam splitter 2193 that guides imaging light CL from an object to be imaged toward the imaging device 8.
  • the control unit 7 may perform at least one of the nozzle-beam alignment operation and the multi-beam alignment operation described in the first embodiment in addition to or instead of the multi-beam alignment operation described in the second embodiment.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the processing light EL#33, which is a light component of the processing light EL#1 that has passed through the prism mirror 2161, in addition to or instead of detecting the processing light EL#31.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 by detecting the processing light EL#33.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the processing light EL#34, which is a light component of the processing light EL#2 that has passed through the prism mirror 2161, in addition to or instead of detecting the processing light EL#32.
  • the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#34 by detecting the processing light EL#34.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may be arranged in a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may be arranged in a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146.
  • the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap.
  • the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 on the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1.
  • the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#34 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2. As a result, even in the third modified example, the control unit 7 can properly align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2.
  • the processing unit 2 changes the emission direction of the processing light EL using the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using an optical system (optical member) different from the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.
  • the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using at least one of a polygon mirror and a resonant mirror.
  • the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using a resonant scanner that resonates and vibrates a mirror supported from both ends by a pair of torsion bars.
  • the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using an acousto-optical deflector (AOD).
  • AOD acousto-optical deflector
  • the processing unit 2 is equipped with multiple galvanometer mirrors to change the irradiation positions of the multiple processing light beams EL, respectively.
  • the processing unit 2 may use one galvanometer mirror to change the emission directions of the multiple processing light beams EL collectively.
  • multiple processing light beams EL may be incident on one galvanometer mirror.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 of the processing unit 2 may also be equipped with one galvanometer mirror (one X-scanning mirror and one Y-scanning mirror) to change the irradiation position of the single processing light EL.
  • the irradiation optical system 211 of the processing unit 2 may not be equipped with the second optical system 215, and may not be equipped with the second and third optical systems 215 and 216.
  • the irradiation optical system of the processing unit 2 may also be equipped with one X-scanning mirror or one Y-scanning mirror to change the irradiation position of the single processing light EL.
  • control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA moves within the processing unit area PUA set on the printing surface MS, while controlling at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA moves on the printing surface MS, thereby forming an object on the printing surface MS that extends along the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA on the printing surface MS.
  • control unit 7 may also control the processing unit 2 so that an object having a desired shape pattern is formed within the processing unit area PUA.
  • the processing unit 2 melts the modeling material M by irradiating the modeling material M with the processing light EL.
  • the processing unit 2 may melt the modeling material M by irradiating the modeling material M with any energy beam.
  • An example of the any energy beam is at least one of a charged particle beam and an electromagnetic wave.
  • An example of a charged particle beam is at least one of an electron beam and an ion beam.
  • the processing system SYS may perform both additive processing and removal processing.
  • the processing system SYS may perform additive processing using one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, and perform removal processing using the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the processing system SYS can perform additive processing and removal processing simultaneously. Note that, in cases where the processing system SYS does not need to perform additive processing and removal processing simultaneously, the processing system SYS may perform additive processing and removal processing using the same processing light EL.
  • the processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing, as well as a remelt processing to reduce the flatness of the surface of the workpiece W (or a molded object formed on the workpiece W) processed by the additive processing or the subtractive processing (i.e., to reduce the surface roughness, to make the surface closer to a flat surface).
  • the processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing using one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, and may perform the remelt processing using the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2.
  • the processing system SYS can perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing and the remelt processing simultaneously.
  • the processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing and the remelt processing using the same processing light EL.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 2 may be attached to a robot (typically, a multi-joint robot).
  • the head drive system 22 may be a robot.
  • the processing unit 2 may be attached to a welding robot for performing welding.
  • the processing unit 2 may be attached to a self-propelled mobile robot, typically a self-propelled device such as an AGV (Automatic Guided Vehicle) or an AMR (Autonomous Mobile Robot), and a robot arm provided on the self-propelled device.
  • AGV Automatic Guided Vehicle
  • AMR Autonomous Mobile Robot
  • [Appendix 1] a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
  • a processing system comprising: a first detection device that detects the position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device; a second detection device that detects light generated by the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material; and a detection device comprising a light dividing member that guides at least a portion of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device to the first detection device and guides at least a portion of the light generated by the energy beam being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material to the second detection device.
  • Appendix 2 performing additional processing to form a model on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device; Detecting a position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device using a first detection device; Detecting light generated by irradiation of at least one of the object and the building material with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device using a second detection device; A processing method comprising: using a light dividing member to guide at least a portion of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device to the first detection device, and to guide at least a portion of the light generated by the energy beam being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material to the second detection device.
  • a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams, the processing device processing an object using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device; a detection device including a light splitting member that splits a portion of the first and second energy beams, and that detects an irradiation position in a plane that crosses a traveling direction of the first energy beam via the light splitting member and an irradiation position in a plane that crosses a traveling direction of the second energy beam via the light splitting member; a control device that controls the processing device based on a detection result of the detection device, the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the plane, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the plane, The detection device detects the irradiation position of the first energy beam when the second energy beam
  • Appendix 6 The processing system according to any one of appendixes 3 to 5, wherein a detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where at least a portion of a scanning range of the first energy beam by the first scanning optical system and a scanning range of the second energy beam by the second scanning optical system overlap with each other.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Plasma & Fusion (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)

Abstract

This processing system includes: a processing device for performing additive processing for forming a shaped matter on an object by melting a shaping material supplied from a material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device; an imaging device for imaging a site where the positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed and the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam; and a control device for controlling the processing device on the basis of an imaging result from the imaging device.

Description

加工システム、加工方法、造形方法Processing system, processing method, modeling method

 本発明は、例えば、物体を加工可能な加工システム及び加工方法、並びに、物体上に造形物を付加造形可能な造形方法の技術分野に関する。 The present invention relates to the technical field of, for example, a processing system and processing method capable of processing an object, and a modeling method capable of additively modeling a shaped object on an object.

 物体を加工する加工システムの一例が、特許文献1に記載されている。このような加工システムの技術的課題の一つとして、物体を適切に加工することがあげられる。 An example of a processing system for processing an object is described in Patent Document 1. One of the technical challenges of such a processing system is to process the object appropriately.

米国特許出願公開第2016/0311059号明細書US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0311059

 第1の態様によれば、供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と、前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光とを撮像する撮像装置と、前記撮像装置の撮像結果に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する制御装置とを備える加工システムが提供される。 According to the first aspect, there is provided a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, an imaging device that images a portion whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed, and the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or the light generated by the energy beam, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the imaging results of the imaging device.

 第2の態様によれば、供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位と、前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームの像及び前記エネルギビームにより発生する光の像のうち少なくとも一方の像とを撮像面で撮像する撮像装置とを備える加工システムが提供される。 According to the second aspect, there is provided a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, and an imaging device that captures, on an imaging surface, the part whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed, and at least one of an image of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device and an image of the light generated by the energy beam.

 第3の態様によれば、材料供給部材の供給口から供給された造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光とを撮像することと、前記撮像することによる撮像結果に基づいて、前記付加加工を制御することとを含む加工方法が提供される。 According to a third aspect, a processing method is provided that includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam, capturing an image of a portion that is fixed in position relative to the material supply member and the energy beam or the light generated by the energy beam, and controlling the additional processing based on the image capturing result.

 第4の態様によれば、材料供給部材の供給口から供給された造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光との間の位置関係を検出することと、前記検出することによる検出結果を用いて、前記位置関係を調整することとを含む加工方法が提供される。 According to a fourth aspect, a processing method is provided that includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam, detecting a positional relationship between a portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member and the energy beam or light generated by the energy beam, and adjusting the positional relationship using the detection result.

 第5の態様によれば、供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位の位置と前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光の位置とを検出する検出装置と、前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する制御装置とを備える加工システムが提供される。 According to the fifth aspect, there is provided a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, a detection device that detects the position of a portion whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed and the position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or the light generated by the energy beam, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the detection result of the detection device.

 第6の態様によれば、材料供給部材の供給口から造形材料を供給することと、前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融して、物体上に造形物を付加造形することと、第1の期間において、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位の位置を検出することと、前記第1の期間の後の第2の期間において、前記位置関係が固定された前記部位の位置を検出することと、前記第1の期間において前記エネルギビームの位置を検出することと、前記第2の期間において前記エネルギビームの位置を検出することとを含む造形方法が提供される。 According to a sixth aspect, there is provided a modeling method including: supplying modeling material from a supply port of a material supply member; melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port with an energy beam to additively model a model on an object; detecting the position of a portion whose positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed during a first period; detecting the position of the portion whose positional relationship is fixed during a second period after the first period; detecting the position of the energy beam during the first period; and detecting the position of the energy beam during the second period.

 第7の態様によれば、第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割するビームスプリッタを備え、前記ビームスプリッタを介した前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第1面内での照射位置と、前記ビームスプリッタを介した前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第2面内での照射位置とを検出する検出装置と、前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する制御装置とを備え、前記照射装置は、前記第1面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記第2面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、前記検出装置の検出面は、前記第1走査光学系による前記第1エネルギビームの走査範囲と前記第2走査光学系による前記第2エネルギビームの走査範囲とが重畳しない位置に設けられる加工システムが提供される。 According to the seventh aspect, there is provided a processing system including an irradiation device that emits a first and a second energy beam and processes a workpiece using the first and the second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, a detection device that includes a beam splitter that splits a portion of the first and the second energy beams and detects an irradiation position in a first plane that crosses the traveling direction of the first energy beam via the beam splitter and an irradiation position in a second plane that crosses the traveling direction of the second energy beam via the beam splitter, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the detection result of the detection device, the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the first plane, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the second plane, and the detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where the scanning range of the first energy beam by the first scanning optical system and the scanning range of the second energy beam by the second scanning optical system do not overlap.

 第8の態様によれば、照射装置から射出された第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて物体を加工することと、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割することと、前記分割することによって分割された前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第1面内での照射位置を検出装置で検出することと、前記分割することによって分割された前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第2面内での照射位置を検出することとを含み、前記加工することは、前記第1面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査することと、前記第2面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査することとを含み、前記検出装置の検出面は、前記第1エネルギビームを走査することによる前記第1エネルギビームの走査範囲と前記第2エネルギビームを走査することによる前記第2エネルギビームの走査範囲とが重畳しない位置に設けられる加工方法が提供される。 According to the eighth aspect, a processing method is provided that includes processing an object using first and second energy beams emitted from an irradiation device, splitting a portion of the first and second energy beams, detecting an irradiation position in a first plane intersecting the traveling direction of the first energy beam split by the splitting with a detection device, and detecting an irradiation position in a second plane intersecting the traveling direction of the second energy beam split by the splitting, the processing includes scanning the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves in the first plane, and scanning the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves in the second plane, and the detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where the scanning range of the first energy beam by scanning the first energy beam and the scanning range of the second energy beam by scanning the second energy beam do not overlap.

 第9の態様によれば、供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、前記照射装置から射出された後に前記照射装置に向かって戻される光又は前記照射装置からの前記エネルギビームによって生じて前記照射装置に向かって戻される光と、前記材料供給部材の少なくとも一部を介した前記照射装置からの光とを検出する検出装置とを備える加工システムが提供される。 According to the ninth aspect, there is provided a processing system including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port, and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device, and a detection device that detects light that is returned toward the irradiation device after being emitted from the irradiation device, or light that is generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device and returned toward the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device that passes through at least a part of the material supplying member.

 第10の態様によれば、材料供給部材の供給口から噴出された造形材料を照射装置から射出されたエネルギビームで溶融して、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、前記照射装置から射出された後に前記照射装置に向かって戻される光又は前記照射装置からの前記エネルギビームによって生じる光と、前記材料供給部材の少なくとも一部を介した前記照射装置からの光とを検出することとを含む加工方法が提供される。 According to a tenth aspect, a processing method is provided that includes performing additional processing to form a shaped object on an object by melting a modeling material ejected from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device, and detecting light that is returned toward the irradiation device after being emitted from the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device that passes through at least a part of the material supply member.

 第11の態様によれば、第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する物体を介した光を受光する受光装置と、前記受光装置の受光結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する制御装置とを備え、前記照射装置は、前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記物体上内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、前記制御装置は、前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったときの前記第1及び第2偏向走査光学系への駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行う加工システムが提供される。 According to an eleventh aspect, there is provided a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams and processes a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, a light receiving device that receives light that passes through an object onto which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident, and a control device that controls the processing device based on the light receiving result of the light receiving device, the irradiation device including a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object, and the control device provides a processing system that performs drive control of the first scanning optical system and drive control of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second deflection scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.

 第12の態様によれば、第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する物体を介した光を検出する検出装置とを備え、前記照射装置は、前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記物体上内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、前記検出装置は、前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったことを検出する加工システムが提供される。 According to the twelfth aspect, there is provided a processing system including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams and processes a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device, and a detection device that detects light passing through an object onto which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident, the irradiation device including a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that the irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that the irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object, and the detection device detects that the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.

 第13の態様によれば、物体上で第1エネルギビームの照射位置を移動させる第1走査光学系を用いて、前記第1エネルギビームを前記物体上で走査することと、前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームとは異なる第2エネルギビームの照射位置を移動させる第2走査光学系を用いて、前記第2エネルギビームを前記物体上で走査することと、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する前記物体を介した光を受光することと、前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったときの前記第1及び第2走査光学系への駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行うこととを含む加工方法が提供される。 According to the thirteenth aspect, there is provided a processing method including: scanning an object with a first energy beam using a first scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of the first energy beam on the object; scanning the object with a second energy beam using a second scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of a second energy beam different from the first energy beam on the object; receiving light that passes through the object on which the first and second energy beams are incident; and controlling the drive of the first scanning optical system and the drive of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.

 本発明の作用及び他の利得は次に説明する実施するための形態から明らかにされる。 The operation and other advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed description of the embodiment.

図1は、第1実施形態の加工システムの構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a machining system according to a first embodiment. 図2は、第1実施形態の加工システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the machining system according to the first embodiment. 図3は、材料ノズルの下面を示す平面図である。FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the bottom surface of the material nozzle. 図4(a)から図4(c)のそれぞれは、材料供給面内の材料供給領域の一例を示す平面図である。Each of Figs. 4(a) to 4(c) is a plan view showing an example of a material supply region in a material supply surface. 図5は、撮像対象物体を撮像する撮像装置の一例を示す断面図である。FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an imaging device that captures an image of an object to be imaged. 図6は、照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system. 図7(a)は、加工単位領域内での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図であり、図7(b)は、造形面上での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図である。FIG. 7A is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area in a processing unit area, and FIG. 7B is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface. 図8(a)及び図8(b)のそれぞれは、加工単位領域内での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図であり、図8(c)は、造形面上での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図である。Each of Figures 8(a) and 8(b) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area within a processing unit area, and Figure 8(c) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface. 図9(a)から図9(e)のそれぞれは、第1造形動作によって構造層を造形する過程を示す断面図である。Each of Figures 9(a) to 9(e) is a cross-sectional view showing a process of forming a structure layer by the first forming operation. 図10(a)から図10(c)のそれぞれは、三次元構造物を造形する過程を示す断面図である。Each of Fig. 10(a) to Fig. 10(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a process for forming a three-dimensional structure. 図11(a)から図11(d)のそれぞれは、第2造形動作によって構造層を造形する過程を示す断面図である。Each of Figures 11(a) to 11(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a process of forming a structure layer by the second forming operation. 図12は、材料照射面を通過する加工光を示す。FIG. 12 shows the processing light passing through the irradiated surface of the material. 図13(a)、図13(c)及び図13(d)のそれぞれは、加工単位領域内での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図であり、図13(b)及び図13(e)のそれぞれは、造形面上での目標照射領域の移動軌跡を示す平面図である。Each of Figures 13(a), 13(c), and 13(d) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area within the processing unit area, and each of Figures 13(b) and 13(e) is a plan view showing the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area on the printing surface. 図14(a)から図14(c)のそれぞれは、材料供給領域と照射単位領域との関係を示す平面図である。Each of FIG. 14(a) to FIG. 14(c) is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply region and the irradiation unit region. 図15は、撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。FIG. 15 shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device. 図16は、材料ノズルと加工光との位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態を示す断面図である。FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is a desired one. 図17(a)は、材料ノズルと加工光との位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態で撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示し、図17(b)は、材料ノズルと加工光との位置関係が所望の位置関係とならない状態で撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。Figure 17(a) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device when the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is the desired positional relationship, and Figure 17(b) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device when the positional relationship between the material nozzle and the processing light is not the desired positional relationship. 図18(a)は、環状の形状を有する構造層SLを示す平面図であり、図18(b)は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことなく図18(a)に示す構造層を造形した場合の構造層の高さと、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行った上で図18(a)に示す構造層を造形した場合の構造層の高さとを、構造層の円周方向における角度毎に示すグラフである。FIG. 18(a) is a plan view showing a structural layer SL having an annular shape, and FIG. 18(b) is a graph showing the height of the structural layer when the structural layer shown in FIG. 18(a) is formed without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, and the height of the structural layer when the structural layer shown in FIG. 18(a) is formed after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, for each angle in the circumferential direction of the structural layer. 図19(a)及び図19(b)のそれぞれは、撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。Each of FIG. 19(a) and FIG. 19(b) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device. 図20(a)から図20(c)のそれぞれは、撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。Each of FIG. 20(a) to FIG. 20(c) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device. 図21(a)から図21(c)のそれぞれは、撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。Each of FIG. 21(a) to FIG. 21(c) shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device. 図22は、マルチビームアライメント動作が行われる複数の部分領域を示す平面図である。FIG. 22 is a plan view showing a plurality of partial regions where the multi-beam alignment operation is performed. 図23は、撮像装置が生成した画像の一例を示す。FIG. 23 shows an example of an image generated by the imaging device. 図24は、指標が形成される光学部材の一例を示す断面図である。FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an optical member on which an index is formed.

を示す断面図である。
図25(a)から図25(c)のそれぞれは、照射光学系が備える屈折光学系の代わりに用いることが可能な反射光学系を示す断面図である。 図26(a)及び図26(b)のそれぞれは、第4変形例における撮像光CLの光路を示す断面図である。 図27は、第5変形例における照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図28は、第6変形例の加工システムの構成を示す断面図である。 図29は、第2実施形態の加工システムの構成を示す断面図である。 図30は、第2実施形態の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図31は、第2実施形態の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図32(a)及び図32(b)のそれぞれは、照射位置検出装置の検出面における加工光の照射位置を示す平面図である。 図33は、二つの加工光の位置ずれ量を示す平面図である。 図34(a)及び図34(b)のそれぞれは、目標位置に対する加工光の照射位置の位置ずれ量を示す平面図である。 図35は、第1変形例の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図36は、第1変形例の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図37(a)及び図37(b)のそれぞれは、減光部材を備える照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図38は、第2変形例の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。 図39は、第3変形例の照射光学系の構成を示す断面図である。
FIG.
Each of FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a reflective optical system that can be used in place of the refractive optical system included in the irradiation optical system. Each of FIG. 26(a) and FIG. 26(b) is a cross-sectional view showing the optical path of the imaging light CL in the fourth modified example. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system in the fifth modified example. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a processing system according to the sixth modified example. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a machining system according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system according to the second embodiment. 32(a) and 32(b) are plan views showing the irradiation position of the processing light on the detection surface of the irradiation position detection device. FIG. 33 is a plan view showing the amount of positional deviation between two processing beams. Each of FIG. 34(a) and FIG. 34(b) is a plan view showing the amount of positional deviation of the irradiation position of the processing light with respect to the target position. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system of the first modified example. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system of the first modified example. Each of FIG. 37( a ) and FIG. 37 ( b ) is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system including a light reducing member. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system according to a second modified example. FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system according to a third modified example.

 以下、図面を参照しながら、加工システム、加工方法及び造形方法の実施形態について説明する。以下では、物体の一例であるワークWを加工可能な加工システムSYSを用いて、加工方法及び造形方法の実施形態を説明する。特に、以下では、レーザ肉盛溶接法(LMD:Laser Metal Deposition)に基づく付加加工を行う加工システムSYSを用いて、加工装置及び加工方法の実施形態を説明する。レーザ肉盛溶接法に基づく付加加工は、ワークWに供給した造形材料Mを加工光EL(つまり、光の形態を有するエネルギビーム)で溶融することで、ワークWと一体化された又はワークWから分離可能な造形物を造形する付加加工である。 Below, embodiments of a processing system, a processing method, and a modeling method will be described with reference to the drawings. Below, embodiments of a processing method and a modeling method will be described using a processing system SYS capable of processing a workpiece W, which is an example of an object. In particular, below, embodiments of a processing device and a processing method will be described using a processing system SYS that performs additional processing based on laser metal deposition (LMD). Additional processing based on laser metal deposition is an additive processing method that melts a modeling material M supplied to the workpiece W with processing light EL (i.e., an energy beam in the form of light) to form a model that is integrated with the workpiece W or that can be separated from the workpiece W.

 また、以下の説明では、互いに直交するX軸、Y軸及びZ軸から定義されるXYZ直交座標系を用いて、加工システムSYSを構成する各種構成要素の位置関係について説明する。尚、以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、X軸方向及びY軸方向のそれぞれが水平方向(つまり、水平面内の所定方向)であり、Z軸方向が鉛直方向(つまり、水平面に直交する方向であり、実質的には上下方向)であるものとする。また、X軸、Y軸及びZ軸周りの回転方向(言い換えれば、傾斜方向)を、それぞれ、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向と称する。ここで、Z軸方向を重力方向としてもよい。また、XY平面を水平方向としてもよい。 Furthermore, in the following explanation, the positional relationships of the various components that make up the machining system SYS will be explained using an XYZ Cartesian coordinate system defined by mutually orthogonal X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction are horizontal (i.e., a specific direction within a horizontal plane), and the Z-axis direction is vertical (i.e., a direction perpendicular to the horizontal plane, essentially an up-down direction). Furthermore, the rotation directions (in other words, tilt directions) around the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are referred to as the θX direction, θY direction, and θZ direction, respectively. Here, the Z-axis direction may be the direction of gravity. Furthermore, the XY plane may be horizontal.

 (1)第1実施形態の加工システムSYSa
 はじめに、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSについて説明する。尚、以下の説明では、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSを、“加工システムSYSa”と称する。
(1) Machining system SYSa according to the first embodiment
First, a machining system SYS according to a first embodiment will be described. In the following description, the machining system SYS according to the first embodiment will be referred to as a "machining system SYSa."

 (1-1)加工システムSYSaの全体構成
 初めに、図1から図2を参照しながら、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSaの構成について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSaの構成を模式的に示す断面図である。図2は、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSaの構成を示すブロック図である。
(1-1) Overall Configuration of Machining System SYSa First, the configuration of the machining system SYSa of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 1 and Fig. 2. Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view that shows a schematic configuration of the machining system SYSa of the first embodiment. Fig. 2 is a block diagram that shows the configuration of the machining system SYSa of the first embodiment.

 加工システムSYSaは、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うことが可能である。加工システムSYSaは、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うことで、ワークWと一体化された(或いは、分離可能な)造形物を造形可能である。この場合、ワークWに対して行われる付加加工は、ワークWと一体化された(或いは、分離可能な)造形物をワークWに付加する加工に相当する。尚、第1実施形態における造形物は、加工システムSYSaが造形する任意の物体を意味していてもよい。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、造形物の一例として、三次元構造物(つまり、三次元方向のいずれの方向においても大きさを持つ三次元の構造物であり、立体物、言い換えると、X軸方向、Y軸方向及びZ軸方向において大きさを持つ構造物)STを造形可能である。 The processing system SYSa is capable of performing additional processing on the workpiece W. The processing system SYSa is capable of forming a structure that is integrated with (or separable from) the workpiece W by performing additional processing on the workpiece W. In this case, the additional processing performed on the workpiece W corresponds to processing that adds to the workpiece W a structure that is integrated with (or separable from) the workpiece W. Note that the structure in the first embodiment may mean any object formed by the processing system SYSa. For example, the processing system SYSa is capable of forming a three-dimensional structure ST (that is, a three-dimensional structure that has a size in all three-dimensional directions, a solid object, in other words, a structure that has a size in the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction) as an example of a structure.

 ワークWが後述するステージ31である場合には、加工システムSYSaは、ステージ31に対して付加加工を行うことが可能である。ワークWがステージ31に載置されている物体である載置物である場合には、加工システムSYSaは、載置物に対して付加加工を行うことが可能である。ステージ31に載置される載置物は、加工システムSYSaが造形した別の三次元構造物ST(つまり、既存構造物)であってもよい。また、ワークWは、ステージ31に載置可能な保持具によって保持されていてもよい。つまり、保持具がワークWを保持し、ワークWを保持した保持具がステージ31に載置されてもよい。保持具は、治具(jig)、ホルダー(holder)、保持部材、取付部材、固定部材(holding member、mounting member)又はクランプと称されてもよい。尚、図1は、ワークWが、ステージ31に載置されている既存構造物である例を示している。また、以下でも、ワークWがステージ31に載置されている既存構造物である例を用いて説明を進める。 When the workpiece W is the stage 31 described later, the processing system SYSa can perform additional processing on the stage 31. When the workpiece W is a mounted object, which is an object placed on the stage 31, the processing system SYSa can perform additional processing on the mounted object. The mounted object placed on the stage 31 may be another three-dimensional structure ST (i.e., an existing structure) formed by the processing system SYSa. The workpiece W may also be held by a holder that can be placed on the stage 31. In other words, the holder may hold the workpiece W, and the holder holding the workpiece W may be placed on the stage 31. The holder may be called a jig, a holder, a holding member, a mounting member, a fixing member (holding member, mounting member), or a clamp. Note that FIG. 1 shows an example in which the workpiece W is an existing structure placed on the stage 31. In the following, we will also use an example in which the workpiece W is an existing structure placed on the stage 31.

 ワークWは、欠損箇所がある要修理品であってもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、欠損個所を補填するための造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことで、要修理品を補修する補修加工を行ってもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaが行う付加加工は、欠損箇所を補填するための造形物をワークWに付加する付加加工を含んでいてもよい。 The workpiece W may be an item that has a missing part and needs to be repaired. In this case, the processing system SYSa may perform repair processing to repair the item that needs to be repaired by performing additional processing to create a shaped object to fill in the missing part. In other words, the additional processing performed by the processing system SYSa may include additional processing to add a shaped object to the workpiece W to fill in the missing part.

 上述したように、加工システムSYSaは、レーザ肉盛溶接法に基づく付加加工を行うことが可能である。つまり、加工システムSYSaは、積層加工技術を用いて物体を加工する3Dプリンタであるとも言える。尚、積層加工技術は、ラピッドプロトタイピング(Rapid Prototyping)、ラピッドマニュファクチャリング(Rapid Manufacturing)、又は、アディティブマニュファクチャリング(Additive Manufacturing)とも称されてもよい。尚、レーザ肉盛溶接法(LMD)は、DED(Directed Energy Deposition)と称されてもよい。 As described above, the processing system SYSa is capable of performing additive processing based on the laser build-up welding method. In other words, the processing system SYSa can be said to be a 3D printer that processes objects using additive processing technology. The additive processing technology may also be called rapid prototyping, rapid manufacturing, or additive manufacturing. The laser build-up welding method (LMD) may also be called DED (Directed Energy Deposition).

 積層加工技術を用いる加工システムSYSaは、複数の構造層SL(後述する図8参照)を順に形成することで、複数の構造層SLが積層された三次元構造物STを造形する。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、まず、ワークWの表面を、造形物を実際に造形する造形面MSに設定し、当該造形面MS上に、1層目の構造層SLを造形する。その後、加工システムSYSaは、1層目の構造層SLの表面を新たな造形面MSに設定し、当該造形面MS上に、2層目の構造層SLを造形する。以降、加工システムSYSaは、同様の動作を繰り返すことで、複数の構造層SLが積層された三次元構造物STを造形する。 The processing system SYSa, which uses additive processing technology, forms multiple structural layers SL (see FIG. 8 described below) in sequence to form a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked. In this case, the processing system SYSa first sets the surface of the workpiece W as the printing surface MS on which the object is actually printed, and prints the first structural layer SL on the printing surface MS. The processing system SYSa then sets the surface of the first structural layer SL as a new printing surface MS, and prints the second structural layer SL on the printing surface MS. Thereafter, the processing system SYSa repeats the same operations to form a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked.

 加工システムSYSaは、エネルギビームである加工光ELを用いて造形材料Mを加工することで付加加工を行う。造形材料Mは、所定強度以上の加工光ELの照射によって溶融可能な材料である。このような造形材料Mとして、例えば、金属性の材料及び樹脂性の材料の少なくとも一方が使用可能である。金属性の材料の一例として、銅を含む材料、タングステンを含む材料、及び、ステンレスを含む材料の少なくとも一つがあげられる。但し、造形材料Mとして、金属性の材料及び樹脂性の材料とは異なるその他の材料が用いられてもよい。造形材料Mは、粉状の材料である。つまり、造形材料Mは、粉体である。但し、造形材料Mは、粉体でなくてもよい。例えば、造形材料Mとして、ワイヤ状の造形材料及びガス状の造形材料の少なくとも一方が用いられてもよい。 The processing system SYSa performs additional processing by processing the modeling material M using processing light EL, which is an energy beam. The modeling material M is a material that can be melted by irradiation with processing light EL of a predetermined intensity or higher. For example, at least one of a metallic material and a resinous material can be used as the modeling material M. An example of a metallic material is at least one of a material containing copper, a material containing tungsten, and a material containing stainless steel. However, other materials different from the metallic material and the resinous material may also be used as the modeling material M. The modeling material M is a powder material. In other words, the modeling material M is a powder. However, the modeling material M does not have to be a powder. For example, at least one of a wire-shaped modeling material and a gas-shaped modeling material may be used as the modeling material M.

 ワークWもまた、造形材料Mと同様に、所定強度以上の加工光ELの照射によって溶融可能な材料を含む物体であってもよい。ワークWの材料は、造形材料Mと同一であってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。ワークWの材料として、例えば、金属性の材料及び樹脂性の材料の少なくとも一方が使用可能である。金属性の材料の一例として、銅を含む材料、タングステンを含む材料、及び、ステンレスを含む材料の少なくとも一つがあげられる。但し、ワークWの材料として、金属性の材料及び樹脂性の材料とは異なるその他の材料が用いられてもよい。 Like the modeling material M, the workpiece W may also be an object that includes a material that can be melted by irradiation with processing light EL of a predetermined intensity or higher. The material of the workpiece W may be the same as or different from the modeling material M. For example, at least one of a metallic material and a resinous material can be used as the material of the workpiece W. Examples of metallic materials include at least one of a material containing copper, a material containing tungsten, and a material containing stainless steel. However, other materials different from metallic materials and resinous materials may also be used as the material of the workpiece W.

 付加加工を行うために、加工システムSYSaは、図1から図2に示すように、材料供給源1と、加工ユニット2と、ステージユニット3と、光源4と、気体供給源5と、制御ユニット7と、撮像装置8を備える。加工ユニット2と、ステージユニット3とは、筐体6の内部のチャンバ空間63INに収容されていてもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、チャンバ空間63INにおいて付加加工を行ってもよい。尚、加工ユニット2と、ステージユニット3との少なくとも一方は、筐体6の内部のチャンバ空間63INに収容されていなくてもよい。 To perform additional processing, the processing system SYSa includes a material supply source 1, a processing unit 2, a stage unit 3, a light source 4, a gas supply source 5, a control unit 7, and an imaging device 8, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. The processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 may be housed in a chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6. In this case, the processing system SYSa may perform additional processing in the chamber space 63IN. Note that at least one of the processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 does not have to be housed in the chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6.

 尚、加工ユニット2は、加工装置と称されてもよい。材料供給源1、ステージユニット3、光源4、気体供給源5及び撮像装置8の少なくとも一つと加工ユニット2とを含む装置が、加工装置と称されてもよい。制御ユニット7は、制御装置と称されてもよい。撮像装置8は、撮像ユニットと称されてもよい。 The processing unit 2 may be referred to as a processing device. An apparatus including the processing unit 2 and at least one of the material supply source 1, the stage unit 3, the light source 4, the gas supply source 5, and the imaging device 8 may be referred to as a processing device. The control unit 7 may be referred to as a control device. The imaging device 8 may be referred to as an imaging unit.

 材料供給源1は、加工ユニット2に造形材料Mを供給する。材料供給源1は、付加加工を行うために単位時間あたりに必要とする分量の造形材料Mが加工ユニット2に供給されるように、当該必要な分量に応じた所望量の造形材料Mを供給する。 The material supply source 1 supplies the modeling material M to the processing unit 2. The material supply source 1 supplies a desired amount of modeling material M according to the required amount so that the amount of modeling material M required per unit time for performing additional processing is supplied to the processing unit 2.

 加工ユニット2は、材料供給源1から供給される造形材料Mを加工して造形物を造形する。つまり、加工ユニット2は、ワークW上に造形物を造形する付加加工(付加造形)を行う。言い換えれば、加工ユニット2は、ワークWを加工してワークW上に造形物を造形する。造形物を造形するために、加工ユニット2は、加工ヘッド21と、ヘッド駆動系22とを備える。更に、加工ヘッド21は、照射装置210と、材料ノズル212とを備えている。尚、加工ヘッド21は、加工装置と称されてもよい。 The processing unit 2 processes the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 to form a model. That is, the processing unit 2 performs additive processing (additive modeling) to form a model on the workpiece W. In other words, the processing unit 2 processes the workpiece W to form a model on the workpiece W. To form the model, the processing unit 2 includes a processing head 21 and a head drive system 22. Furthermore, the processing head 21 includes an irradiation device 210 and a material nozzle 212. The processing head 21 may also be referred to as a processing device.

 照射装置210は、加工光ELを射出するための装置である。加工光ELを射出するために、照射装置210は、照射光学系211を備えている。照射光学系211は、加工光ELを射出するための光学系である。具体的には、照射光学系211は、加工光ELを射出する(生成する)光源4と、光伝送部材41を介して光学的に接続されている。光伝送部材41の一例として、光ファイバ及びライトパイプの少なくとも一つがあげられる。 The irradiation device 210 is a device for emitting the processed light EL. In order to emit the processed light EL, the irradiation device 210 is equipped with an irradiation optical system 211. The irradiation optical system 211 is an optical system for emitting the processed light EL. Specifically, the irradiation optical system 211 is optically connected to the light source 4 that emits (generates) the processed light EL via a light transmission member 41. An example of the light transmission member 41 is at least one of an optical fiber and a light pipe.

 図1から図2に示す例では、加工システムSYSaが二つの光源4(具体的には、光源4#1及び4#2)を備えており、照射光学系211は、光伝送部材41#1及び41#2を介して、それぞれ、光源4#1及び4#2と光学的に接続されている。照射光学系211は、光伝送部材41#1を介して光源4#1から伝搬してくる加工光ELと、光伝送部材41#2を介して光源4#2から伝搬してくる加工光ELとの双方を射出する。尚、以下の説明では、照射光学系211が射出する二つの加工光ELを区別する必要がある場合には、必要に応じて、光源4#1が生成した加工光ELを、“加工光EL#1”と称し、且つ、光源4#2が生成した加工光ELを、“加工光EL#2”と称する。一方で、二つの加工光ELを区別する必要がない場合には、“加工光EL”は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2の少なくとも一方を意味していてもよい。 1 and 2, the processing system SYSa includes two light sources 4 (specifically, light sources 4#1 and 4#2), and the irradiation optical system 211 is optically connected to the light sources 4#1 and 4#2 via the optical transmission members 41#1 and 41#2, respectively. The irradiation optical system 211 emits both the processed light EL propagating from the light source 4#1 via the optical transmission member 41#1 and the processed light EL propagating from the light source 4#2 via the optical transmission member 41#2. In the following description, when it is necessary to distinguish between the two processed lights EL emitted by the irradiation optical system 211, the processed light EL generated by the light source 4#1 is referred to as "processed light EL#1" and the processed light EL generated by the light source 4#2 is referred to as "processed light EL#2" as necessary. On the other hand, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the two processed lights EL, the "processed light EL" may mean at least one of the processed lights EL#1 and EL#2.

 但し、加工システムSYSaは、複数の光源4に代えて、単一の光源4を備えていてもよい。照射光学系211は、複数の加工光ELを射出することに代えて、単一の加工光ELを射出してもよい。 However, the processing system SYSa may be provided with a single light source 4 instead of multiple light sources 4. The irradiation optical system 211 may emit a single processing light EL instead of emitting multiple processing light EL.

 照射光学系211は、照射光学系211から下方(つまり、-Z側)に向けて加工光ELを射出する。図1に示す例では、照射光学系211は、照射光学系211からZ軸に沿った照射方向(言い換えれば、進行方向)に沿って加工光ELが進行するように、加工光ELを射出している。照射光学系211の下方には、ステージ31が配置されている。ステージ31にワークWが載置されている場合には、照射光学系211は、射出した加工光ELを造形面MSに照射する。具体的には、照射光学系211は、加工光ELが照射される(典型的には、集光される)領域として造形面MSに設定される目標照射領域(目標照射位置)EAに加工光ELを照射してもよい。更に、照射光学系211の状態は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、目標照射領域EAに加工光ELを照射する状態と、目標照射領域EAに加工光ELを照射しない状態との間で切替可能である。尚、以下の説明では、照射光学系211が二つの加工光ELをそれぞれ照射する二つの目標照射領域EAを区別する必要がある場合には、必要に応じて、照射光学系211が加工光EL#1を照射する目標照射領域EAを、“目標照射領域EA#1”と称し、且つ、照射光学系211が加工光EL#2を照射する目標照射領域EAを、“目標照射領域EA#2”と称する。一方で、二つの目標照射領域EAを区別する必要がない場合には、“目標照射領域EA”は、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2の少なくとも一方を意味していてもよい。 The irradiation optical system 211 emits the processing light EL downward (i.e., toward the -Z side) from the irradiation optical system 211. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the irradiation optical system 211 emits the processing light EL so that the processing light EL travels from the irradiation optical system 211 along the irradiation direction (in other words, the traveling direction) along the Z axis. A stage 31 is arranged below the irradiation optical system 211. When a workpiece W is placed on the stage 31, the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the emitted processing light EL to the printing surface MS. Specifically, the irradiation optical system 211 may irradiate the processing light EL to a target irradiation area (target irradiation position) EA that is set on the printing surface MS as an area to be irradiated (typically, focused) with the processing light EL. Furthermore, the state of the irradiation optical system 211 can be switched between a state in which the processing light EL is irradiated to the target irradiation area EA and a state in which the processing light EL is not irradiated to the target irradiation area EA under the control of the control unit 7. In the following description, when it is necessary to distinguish between the two target irradiation areas EA to which the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the two processing lights EL, the target irradiation area EA to which the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing light EL#1 is referred to as the "target irradiation area EA#1" as necessary, and the target irradiation area EA to which the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing light EL#2 is referred to as the "target irradiation area EA#2". On the other hand, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the two target irradiation areas EA, the "target irradiation area EA" may mean at least one of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2.

 照射光学系211は、造形面MSに加工光ELを照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成してもよい。例えば、照射光学系211は、造形面MSに加工光EL#1を照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成してもよい。例えば、照射光学系211は、造形面MSに加工光EL#2を照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成してもよい。尚、以下の説明では、二つの加工光EL#1及びEL#2を用いてそれぞれ形成される二つの溶融池MPを区別する必要がある場合には、必要に応じて、加工光EL#1を用いて形成される溶融池MPを、“溶融池MP#1”と称し、且つ、加工光EL#2を用いて形成される溶融池MPを、“溶融池MP#2”と称する。一方で、二つの溶融池MPを区別する必要がない場合には、“溶融池MP”は、溶融池MP#1及びMP#2の少なくとも一方を意味していてもよい。溶融池MP#1と溶融池MP#2とは、一体化されていてもよい。或いは、溶融池MP#1と溶融池MP#2とは、互いに離れていてもよい。但し、加工光EL#1の照射によって造形面MSに溶融池MP#1が形成されなくてもよい。加工光EL#2の照射によって造形面MSに溶融池MP#2が形成されなくてもよい。 The irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL. For example, the irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#1. For example, the irradiation optical system 211 may form a molten pool MP on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#2. In the following description, when it is necessary to distinguish between the two molten pools MP formed using the two processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, the molten pool MP formed using the processing light EL#1 is referred to as "molten pool MP#1" and the molten pool MP formed using the processing light EL#2 is referred to as "molten pool MP#2" as necessary. On the other hand, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the two molten pools MP, "molten pool MP" may mean at least one of the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2. The molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 may be integrated. Alternatively, the molten pool MP#1 and the molten pool MP#2 may be separated from each other. However, the molten pool MP#1 does not have to be formed on the printing surface MS by irradiation with the processing light EL#1. The molten pool MP#2 does not have to be formed on the printing surface MS by irradiation with the processing light EL#2.

 後に詳述するように、照射光学系211は、材料照射面ESに加工光ELを照射してもよい。材料照射面ESは、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの間に位置する仮想的な光学面である。照射光学系211は、材料照射面ESに加工光ELを照射することで、材料照射面ESを通過する造形材料Mを溶融させてもよい。 As described in detail later, the irradiation optical system 211 may irradiate the material irradiation surface ES with the processing light EL. The material irradiation surface ES is a virtual optical surface located between the irradiation optical system 211 and the modeling surface MS. The irradiation optical system 211 may melt the modeling material M passing through the material irradiation surface ES by irradiating the material irradiation surface ES with the processing light EL.

 材料ノズル212は、造形材料Mを供給する(例えば、射出する、噴射する、噴出する、又は、吹き付ける)。このため、材料ノズル212は、材料供給部材と称されてもよい。材料ノズル212は、供給管11及び混合装置12を介して造形材料Mの供給源である材料供給源1と物理的に接続されている。材料ノズル212は、供給管11及び混合装置12を介して材料供給源1から供給される造形材料Mを供給する。材料ノズル212は、供給管11を介して材料供給源1から供給される造形材料Mを圧送してもよい。即ち、材料供給源1からの造形材料Mと搬送用の気体(つまり、圧送ガスであり、例えば、窒素やアルゴン等の不活性ガス)とは、混合装置12で混合された後に供給管11を介して材料ノズル212に圧送されてもよい。その結果、材料ノズル212は、搬送用の気体と共に造形材料Mを供給する。搬送用の気体として、例えば、気体供給源5から供給されるパージガスが用いられる。但し、搬送用の気体として、気体供給源5とは異なる気体供給源から供給される気体が用いられてもよい。 The material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M (e.g., ejects, jets, spouts, or sprays). For this reason, the material nozzle 212 may be referred to as a material supply member. The material nozzle 212 is physically connected to the material supply source 1, which is a supply source of the modeling material M, via the supply pipe 11 and the mixer 12. The material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 via the supply pipe 11 and the mixer 12. The material nozzle 212 may pressure-feed the modeling material M supplied from the material supply source 1 via the supply pipe 11. That is, the modeling material M from the material supply source 1 and the conveying gas (i.e., a pressure-feeding gas, for example, an inert gas such as nitrogen or argon) may be mixed in the mixer 12 and then pressure-feed to the material nozzle 212 via the supply pipe 11. As a result, the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M together with the conveying gas. For example, a purge gas supplied from the gas supply source 5 is used as the conveying gas. However, the gas used for transport may be supplied from a gas supply source other than gas supply source 5.

 材料ノズル212は、材料ノズル212から下方(つまり、-Z側)に向けて造形材料Mを供給する。材料ノズル212の下方には、ステージ31が配置されている。ステージ31にワークWが搭載されている場合には、材料ノズル212は、造形面MSに向けて造形材料Mを供給する。 The material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M downward (i.e., toward the -Z side) from the material nozzle 212. The stage 31 is disposed below the material nozzle 212. When a workpiece W is mounted on the stage 31, the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M toward the modeling surface MS.

 材料ノズル212の下面には、材料供給口2121が形成されている。例えば、材料ノズル212の下面を示す平面図である図3に示すように、材料ノズル212の下面2120には、環状の材料供給口2121が形成されている。図3に示す例では、Z軸に交差する面に沿った材料供給口2121の外縁の形状は、円形であるが、円形とは異なる形状であってもよい。例えば、Z軸に交差する面に沿った材料供給口2121の外縁の形状は、楕円形であってもよいし、多角形であってもよい。また、図3に示す例では、材料ノズル212の下面2120には、円環状の又は輪帯状のひとつながりの開口部である材料供給口2121が形成されている。しかしながら、材料ノズル212の下面には、円弧状、円形状、楕円形状又は矩形状の開口部である材料供給口2121が複数形成されていてもよい。 The material nozzle 212 has a material supply port 2121 formed on its lower surface. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, which is a plan view showing the lower surface of the material nozzle 212, a ring-shaped material supply port 2121 is formed on the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the shape of the outer edge of the material supply port 2121 along the plane intersecting the Z axis is circular, but it may have a shape other than circular. For example, the shape of the outer edge of the material supply port 2121 along the plane intersecting the Z axis may be elliptical or polygonal. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the material nozzle 212 has a material supply port 2121, which is a continuous opening in the shape of a ring or annular zone, formed on its lower surface 2120. However, the material nozzle 212 may have a plurality of arc-shaped, circular, elliptical, or rectangular openings formed on its lower surface.

 材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121から造形材料Mを供給する。このように材料供給口2121が形成されている場合、材料ノズル212は、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料供給面PL内の材料供給領域MSAの形状が材料供給口2121に応じた形状となるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。例えば、材料供給面PL内の材料供給領域MSAの一例を示す平面図である図4(a)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給面PLの一例である材料供給面PL#1及びPL#2のそれぞれ内の材料供給領域MSAの形状が、環状の材料供給口2121に応じた環状の形状となるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。例えば、材料供給面PL内の材料供給領域MSAの一例を示す平面図である図4(b)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給面PLの一例である材料供給面PL#4及びPL#5のそれぞれ内の材料供給領域MSAの形状が、環状の材料供給口2121に応じた環状の形状となるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。例えば、材料供給面PL内の材料供給領域MSAの一例を示す平面図である図4(c)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給面PLの一例である材料供給面PL#6及びPL#7のそれぞれ内の材料供給領域MSAの形状が、環状の材料供給口2121に応じた環状の形状となるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。 The material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M from the material supply port 2121. When the material supply port 2121 is formed in this manner, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M such that the shape of the material supply area MSA in a virtual material supply surface PL that intersects the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS becomes a shape corresponding to the material supply port 2121. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), which is a plan view showing an example of a material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M such that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#1 and PL#2, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes annular in shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121. For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, which is a plan view showing an example of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#4 and PL#5, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes an annular shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121. For example, as shown in FIG. 4C, which is a plan view showing an example of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that the shape of the material supply area MSA in each of the material supply surfaces PL#6 and PL#7, which are examples of the material supply surface PL, becomes an annular shape corresponding to the annular material supply port 2121.

 尚、材料供給領域MSAは、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料供給面PL内で造形材料Mが供給される仮想的な領域である。つまり、材料供給領域MSAは、材料供給面PL内で、材料ノズル212から供給された造形材料Mが通過する仮想的な領域である。この場合、材料ノズル212は、材料供給領域MSAに造形材料Mを供給しているとみなしてもよい。尚、造形材料Mが材料供給面PLを通過するがゆえに、材料供給面PLは、材料通過面と称されてもよい。 The material supply area MSA is a virtual area in which the modeling material M is supplied within a virtual material supply surface PL that intersects with the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS. In other words, the material supply area MSA is a virtual area in the material supply surface PL through which the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 passes. In this case, the material nozzle 212 may be considered to be supplying the modeling material M to the material supply area MSA. Since the modeling material M passes through the material supply surface PL, the material supply surface PL may be referred to as a material passing surface.

 但し、造形材料Mが粉状の材料である場合には、材料供給面PL内の各位置に対して供給される造形材料Mの量(供給量)は、時間によって変動する可能性がある。例えば、第1時刻において、材料供給面PL内の一の位置に対して造形材料Mが供給される一方で、第1時刻とは異なる第2時刻において、材料供給面PL内の同じ一の位置に対して造形材料Mが供給されない可能性がある。つまり、造形材料Mが粉状の材料である場合には、材料供給面PL内の各位置を通過する造形材料Mの量(通過量)は、時間によって変動する可能性がある。例えば、第1時刻において、材料供給面PL内の一の位置を造形材料Mが通過する一方で、第1時刻とは異なる第2時刻において、材料供給面PL内の同じ一の位置を造形材料Mが通過しない可能性がある。なぜならば、材料ノズル212から供給される粉状の造形材料Mの軌道が常に同じになることは考えにくいからである。このため、第1実施形態では、材料供給領域MSAとして、「材料供給面PL内での単位時間当たりの造形材料Mの供給量(通過量)の積算値が、材料供給面PL内での単位時間当たりの造形材料Mの供給量(通過量)の積算値の最大値の所定割合と一致する」という条件を満たす複数の位置をつなぐ線が外縁(言い換えれば、境界)となる仮想的な領域が用いられてもよい。所定割合の一例として、5割又は5割よりも大きい割合があげられる。所定割合の他の一例として、6割又は6割よりも大きい割合があげられる。所定割合の他の一例として、7割又は7割よりも大きい割合があげられる。所定割合の他の一例として、8割又は8割よりも大きい割合があげられる。所定割合の他の一例として、9割又は9割よりも大きい割合があげられる。 However, when the modeling material M is a powdered material, the amount (supply amount) of the modeling material M supplied to each position in the material supply surface PL may vary over time. For example, while the modeling material M is supplied to a position in the material supply surface PL at a first time, the modeling material M may not be supplied to the same position in the material supply surface PL at a second time different from the first time. In other words, when the modeling material M is a powdered material, the amount (passing amount) of the modeling material M passing through each position in the material supply surface PL may vary over time. For example, while the modeling material M passes through a position in the material supply surface PL at a first time, the modeling material M may not pass through the same position in the material supply surface PL at a second time different from the first time. This is because it is unlikely that the trajectory of the powdered modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 will always be the same. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the material supply area MSA may be a virtual area whose outer edge (in other words, boundary) is a line connecting multiple positions that satisfy the condition that "the integrated value of the supply amount (passing amount) of the modeling material M per unit time in the material supply surface PL coincides with a predetermined ratio of the maximum integrated value of the supply amount (passing amount) of the modeling material M per unit time in the material supply surface PL." One example of the predetermined ratio is 50% or a ratio greater than 50%. Another example of the predetermined ratio is 60% or a ratio greater than 60%. Another example of the predetermined ratio is 70% or a ratio greater than 70%. Another example of the predetermined ratio is 80% or a ratio greater than 80%. Another example of the predetermined ratio is 90% or a ratio greater than 90%.

 更に、図1に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121から、Z軸に対して傾斜した材料供給方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給されるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる材料供給方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給されるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。つまり、材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121内の複数の供給位置からそれぞれ異なる材料供給方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給されるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。一例として、図3及び図4(a)から図4(c)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121の第1供給口部分2122から、Z軸に対して傾斜した第1の材料供給方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給され、第1供給口部分2122とは異なる材料供給口2121の第2供給口部分2123から、Z軸に対して傾斜し且つ第1の材料供給方向とは異なる第2の材料供給方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給されるように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、図4(a)から図4(c)に示すように、典型的には、Z軸に沿った材料供給面PLと材料ノズル212(特に、材料供給口2121)との間の距離に応じて、材料供給面PL内での材料供給領域MSAのサイズ(例えば、外径)が変わる。 1, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M from the material supply port 2121 in a material supply direction inclined with respect to the Z-axis. In this case, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M from multiple locations in the material supply port 2121 in a material supply direction that is different from each other. In other words, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M from multiple supply positions in the material supply port 2121 in a material supply direction that is different from each other. As an example, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c), the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M from the first supply port portion 2122 of the material supply port 2121 along a first material supply direction inclined with respect to the Z axis, and from the second supply port portion 2123 of the material supply port 2121 different from the first supply port portion 2122 along a second material supply direction inclined with respect to the Z axis and different from the first material supply direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c), the size (e.g., outer diameter) of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL typically changes depending on the distance between the material supply surface PL along the Z axis and the material nozzle 212 (particularly the material supply port 2121).

 図4(a)から図4(c)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、Z軸に沿った材料供給面PLと材料ノズル212(特に、材料供給口2121)との間の距離が長くなるほど、材料供給面PL内での材料供給領域MSAのサイズが小さくなるように、造形材料Mを供給している。つまり、材料ノズル212は、材料ノズル212から供給された造形材料Mが徐々に収束するように、造形材料Mを供給している。一例として、図4(a)に示す例では、材料供給面PL#2における材料供給領域MSAのサイズ(例えば、外径)は、材料供給面PL#2と材料ノズル212との間に位置する(つまり、材料供給面PL#2よりも材料ノズル212に近い)材料供給面PL#1における材料供給領域MSAのサイズ(例えば、外径)よりも小さくなっている。 In the example shown in FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c), the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M so that the size of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL becomes smaller as the distance between the material supply surface PL and the material nozzle 212 (particularly the material supply port 2121) along the Z axis becomes longer. In other words, the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M so that the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 gradually converges. As an example, in the example shown in FIG. 4(a), the size (e.g., outer diameter) of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL#2 is smaller than the size (e.g., outer diameter) of the material supply area MSA in the material supply surface PL#1 located between the material supply surface PL#2 and the material nozzle 212 (i.e., closer to the material nozzle 212 than the material supply surface PL#2).

 材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる方向に沿って造形材料Mが供給される場合、材料ノズル212は、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。例えば、図4(a)から図4(c)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、材料供給口2121の第1供給口部分2122から供給される造形材料Mの材料供給方向に沿って延びる仮想的な材料供給軸SX#1と、材料供給口2121の第2供給口部分2123から供給される造形材料Mの材料供給方向に沿って延びる仮想的な材料供給軸SX#2とが交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。 When the modeling material M is supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different directions, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that multiple virtual material supply axes SX extending along multiple material supply directions intersect. For example, as shown in Figures 4(a) to 4(c), the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that a virtual material supply axis SX#1 extending along the material supply direction of the modeling material M supplied from the first supply port portion 2122 of the material supply port 2121 and a virtual material supply axis SX#2 extending along the material supply direction of the modeling material M supplied from the second supply port portion 2123 of the material supply port 2121 intersect.

 一例として、図4(a)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが、造形面MSの上方において交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。つまり、材料ノズル212は、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の空間において交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、造形面MSの上方において交差してもよい。つまり、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の空間において交差してもよい。この場合、図4(a)に示すように、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが交差する位置に位置する材料供給面PL(図4(a)に示す例では、材料供給面PL#3)内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、環状の形状とは異なる形状であってもよい。例えば、図4(a)に示すように、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、円形又は円形とみなすことが可能な形状であってもよい。 As an example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M such that multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect above the modeling surface MS. In other words, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M such that multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212. In this case, the modeling material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different material supply directions may intersect above the modeling surface MS. In other words, the modeling material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different material supply directions may intersect in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212. In this case, as shown in FIG. 4(a), within the material supply surface PL (in the example shown in FIG. 4(a), material supply surface PL#3) located at the position where the modeling material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different material supply directions intersects, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be a shape other than annular. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), the shape of the material supply area MSA may be circular or a shape that can be regarded as circular.

 他の一例として、図4(b)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが、造形面MSの下方において交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、交差しなくてもよい。材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ異なる方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、互いに交差する前に、造形面MSに到達してもよい。この場合、図4(b)に示すように、材料供給面PLとみなしてもよい造形面MS内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、環状の形状であってもよい。但し、材料供給面PLとみなしてもよい造形面MS内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、環状の形状とは異なる形状であってもよい。例えば、造形面MS内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、円形又は円形とみなすことが可能な形状であってもよい。 As another example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M so that multiple virtual material supply axes SX extending along multiple material supply directions intersect below the modeling surface MS. In this case, the modeling material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different directions may not intersect. The modeling material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along different directions may reach the modeling surface MS before intersecting with each other. In this case, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the modeling surface MS that may be considered as the material supply surface PL, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be annular. However, in the modeling surface MS that may be considered as the material supply surface PL, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be different from the annular shape. For example, in the modeling surface MS, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be circular or a shape that can be considered as circular.

 他の一例として、図4(c)に示すように、材料ノズル212は、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが、造形面MS上で交差するように、造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、材料供給口2121の複数箇所からそれぞれ複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、造形面MS上で交差してもよい。この場合、図4(c)に示すように、材料供給面PLとみなしてもよい造形面MS内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、環状の形状とは異なる形状であってもよい。例えば、造形面MS内において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、円形又は円形とみなすことが可能な形状であってもよい。 As another example, as shown in FIG. 4(c), the material nozzle 212 may supply the printing material M such that multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect on the printing surface MS. In this case, the printing material M supplied from multiple locations of the material supply port 2121 along multiple different material supply directions may intersect on the printing surface MS. In this case, as shown in FIG. 4(c), within the printing surface MS, which may be regarded as the material supply surface PL, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be a shape other than annular. For example, within the printing surface MS, the shape of the material supply area MSA may be circular or a shape that can be regarded as circular.

 以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差する位置(点)を、材料制御点MCPと称する。尚、造形材料Mが粉体である場合には、材料制御点MCPは、粉体制御点と称されてもよい。この場合、図4(a)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、材料制御点MCPが造形面MSの上方に位置する状態で、造形材料Mを供給しているとも言える。図4(a)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、材料制御点MCPが造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の空間に位置する状態で、造形材料Mを供給しているとも言える。一方で、図4(b)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、材料制御点MCPが造形面MSの下方に位置する状態で、造形材料Mを供給しているとも言える。言い換えれば、図4(b)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、材料制御点MCPが、ワークWの内部(内側)、ワークWの下方、造形済みの構造層SLの内部(内側)及び/又は造形済みの構造層SLの下方に位置する状態で供給しているとも言える。他方で、図4(c)に示す例では、材料ノズル212は、材料制御点MCPが造形面MSに位置する状態で、造形材料Mを供給しているとも言える。 In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the position (point) where multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect is referred to as the material control point MCP. Note that, when the modeling material M is a powder, the material control point MCP may be referred to as a powder control point. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 4(a), the material nozzle 212 can be said to supply the modeling material M with the material control point MCP located above the modeling surface MS. In the example shown in FIG. 4(a), the material nozzle 212 can be said to supply the modeling material M with the material control point MCP located in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 4(b), the material nozzle 212 can be said to supply the modeling material M with the material control point MCP located below the modeling surface MS. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 4(b), the material nozzle 212 supplies the molding material M in a state where the material control point MCP is located inside the workpiece W, below the workpiece W, inside the already-modeled structural layer SL, and/or below the already-modeled structural layer SL. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 4(c), the material nozzle 212 supplies the molding material M in a state where the material control point MCP is located on the molding surface MS.

 材料ノズル212からの材料供給方向は、典型的には、材料ノズル212に固有の方向である。このため、材料制御点MCPは、材料ノズル212に固有の点であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、材料制御点MCPは、材料ノズル212を基準に定まる点であるとみなしてもよい。尚、材料制御点MCPが材料ノズル212を基準に定まる点である限りは、複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差する位置(点)とは異なる位置(点)が、材料制御点MCPとして用いられてもよい。尚、材料制御点MCPが材料ノズル212を基準に定まる点である場合には、材料制御点MCPと材料ノズル212との位置関係が固定されているとみなしてもよい。 The material supply direction from the material nozzle 212 is typically a direction specific to the material nozzle 212. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point specific to the material nozzle 212. In other words, the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point determined based on the material nozzle 212. Note that, as long as the material control point MCP is a point determined based on the material nozzle 212, a position (point) other than the position (point) where multiple virtual material supply axes SX intersect may be used as the material control point MCP. Note that, when the material control point MCP is a point determined based on the material nozzle 212, the positional relationship between the material control point MCP and the material nozzle 212 may be considered to be fixed.

 材料制御点MCPにおいて複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するがゆえに、造形材料Mを遮る物体(例えば、造形面MSを表面に含むワークW、以下同じ)が存在しない状況下では、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mは、材料制御点MCPに供給される。このため、材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下において、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが供給される点であるとみなしてもよい。材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下において、材料ノズル212から造形材料Mを供給可能な空間に位置する点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect at the material control point MCP, in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M (for example, a workpiece W having a modeling surface MS on its surface, the same applies below), the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions is supplied to the material control point MCP. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point to which the modeling material M is supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M. The material control point MCP may be considered to be a point located in a space where the modeling material M can be supplied from the material nozzle 212 in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M.

 尚、実際には、造形材料Mを遮る物体(例えば、造形面MS)が存在する状況では、上述したように材料制御点MCPが造形面MSの下方に位置する場合において、材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体(典型的には、ワークW)が占有する空間に位置していてもよい。材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体(典型的には、ワークW)の内部に位置していてもよい。 In practice, in a situation where an object (e.g., the printing surface MS) that blocks the modeling material M is present, when the material control point MCP is located below the printing surface MS as described above, the material control point MCP may be located in the space occupied by the object (typically, the workpiece W) that blocks the modeling material M. The material control point MCP may be located inside the object (typically, the workpiece W) that blocks the modeling material M.

 材料制御点MCPにおいて複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するがゆえに、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下では、材料制御点MCPにおいて、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが交差する。このため、材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下において、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが交差する点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect at the material control point MCP, in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M, the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions intersects at the material control point MCP. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be the point where the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions intersect in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M.

 材料制御点MCPにおいて複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するがゆえに、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下では、材料制御点MCPにおいて、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが収束する。このため、材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下において、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが収束する点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect at the material control point MCP, in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M, the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions converges at the material control point MCP. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be the point where the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions converges in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M.

 材料制御点MCPにおいて複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するがゆえに、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下では、材料制御点MCPにおいて、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが集中する。このため、材料制御点MCPは、造形材料Mを遮る物体が存在しない状況下において、材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが集中する点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect at the material control point MCP, in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M, the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions is concentrated at the material control point MCP. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point where the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions is concentrated in a situation where there is no object blocking the modeling material M.

 材料ノズル212から複数の異なる材料供給方向に沿って供給される造形材料Mが材料制御点MCPにおいて交差する(収束する又は集中する)がゆえに、Z軸方向において材料制御点MCPと同じ位置に位置する材料供給面PL内での造形材料Mの密度は、材料制御点MCPからZ軸方向に沿って離れた位置に位置する材料供給面PL内での造形材料Mの密度よりも高くなる。典型的には、造形材料Mの密度は、材料制御点MCPとZ軸方向における位置が同じ材料供給面PL内で最も高くなる。このため、材料制御点MCPは、「材料供給面PL内での造形材料Mの密度が最も高くなる」という条件を満たす一の材料供給面PLとZ軸方向における位置が同じになる点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 along multiple different material supply directions intersect (converge or concentrate) at the material control point MCP, the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as the material control point MCP is higher than the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL located away from the material control point MCP in the Z-axis direction. Typically, the density of the modeling material M is highest in the material supply surface PL located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as the material control point MCP. For this reason, the material control point MCP may be considered to be a point located at the same position in the Z-axis direction as one material supply surface PL that satisfies the condition that "the density of the modeling material M in the material supply surface PL is highest."

 材料制御点MCPにおいて複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の仮想的な材料供給軸SXが交差するがゆえに、図4(a)から図4(c)を参照しながら説明したように、材料制御点MCPの位置において、材料供給領域MSAの形状は、円形又は円形とみなすことが可能な形状(つまり、環状の形状とは異なる形状)となる可能性が相対的に高くなる。この場合、材料制御点MCPは、「材料供給面PL内での材料供給領域MSAの形状が、円形又は円形とみなすことが可能な形状(つまり、環状の形状とは異なる形状)となる」という条件を満たす一の材料供給面PLとZ軸方向における位置が同じになる点であるとみなしてもよい。 Because multiple virtual material supply axes SX each extending along multiple material supply directions intersect at the material control point MCP, as explained with reference to Figures 4(a) to 4(c), there is a relatively high possibility that the shape of the material supply area MSA will be circular or a shape that can be regarded as circular (i.e., a shape other than an annular shape) at the position of the material control point MCP. In this case, the material control point MCP may be regarded as a point whose position in the Z-axis direction is the same as one material supply surface PL that satisfies the condition that "the shape of the material supply area MSA within the material supply surface PL is circular or a shape that can be regarded as circular (i.e., a shape other than an annular shape)."

 再び図1及び図2において、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を進行してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を進行する加工光ELが、造形面MSに照射されてもよい。例えば、図1(更には、図4(a)から図4(c))に示す例において、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mが外縁となる円錐状の空間を進行してもよい。例えば、図1(更には、図4(a)から図4(c))に示す例において、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mが外縁となる円錐状の空間を進行してもよい。 1 and 2, the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. In this case, the processing light EL traveling through the space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 may be irradiated onto the modeling surface MS. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 1 (and further, in FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)), the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a cone-shaped space whose outer edge is the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 1 (and further, in FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)), the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a cone-shaped space whose outer edge is the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212.

 照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料ノズル212の複数箇所から供給される造形材料Mによって挟まれる空間を進行してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212の複数箇所から供給される造形材料Mによって挟まれる空間を進行する加工光ELが、造形面MSに照射されてもよい。例えば、図1(更には、図4(a)から図4(c))に示す例において、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料供給口2121の一部分である第1供給口部分2122から供給される造形材料Mと、材料供給口2121の他の一部分である第2供給口部分2123から供給される造形材料Mとによって挟まれる空間を進行してもよい。言い換えれば、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、複数の材料供給方向に沿ってそれぞれ延びる複数の材料供給軸SXを稜線とした錐状又は錐台状の空間を進行してもよい。 The processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space sandwiched between the modeling materials M supplied from multiple locations of the material nozzle 212. In this case, the processing light EL traveling through the space sandwiched between the modeling materials M supplied from multiple locations of the material nozzle 212 may be irradiated onto the modeling surface MS. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 1 (and further in FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)), the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space sandwiched between the modeling material M supplied from the first supply port portion 2122, which is a part of the material supply port 2121, and the modeling material M supplied from the second supply port portion 2123, which is another part of the material supply port 2121. In other words, the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a cone-shaped or frustum-shaped space with multiple material supply axes SX extending along multiple material supply directions as ridge lines.

 材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を加工光ELが進行する場合には、図1に示すように、加工光ELは、材料ノズル212の少なくとも一部によって囲まれる空間を進行してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212の少なくとも一部によって囲まれる空間を進行する加工光ELは、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成されている開口2124を介して、材料ノズル212の下方に向けて射出されてもよい。言い換えれば、加工光ELは、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成されている開口2124を介して、材料ノズル212の少なくとも一部によって囲まれる空間から、材料ノズル212の下方の空間に向けて射出されてもよい。 When the processing light EL travels through a space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212, as shown in FIG. 1, the processing light EL may travel through a space surrounded by at least a portion of the material nozzle 212. In this case, the processing light EL traveling through the space surrounded by at least a portion of the material nozzle 212 may be emitted toward the bottom of the material nozzle 212 through an opening 2124 formed in the bottom surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212. In other words, the processing light EL may be emitted from the space surrounded by at least a portion of the material nozzle 212 toward the space below the material nozzle 212 through an opening 2124 formed in the bottom surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212.

 再び図1及び図2において、ヘッド駆動系22は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、加工ヘッド21を移動させる。つまり、ヘッド駆動系22は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、照射光学系211及び材料ノズル212を移動させる。ヘッド駆動系22は、例えば、X軸方向、Y軸方向、Z軸方向、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿って加工ヘッド21を移動させる。尚、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿って加工ヘッド21を移動させる動作は、X軸に沿った回転軸、Y軸に沿った回転軸及びZ軸に沿った回転軸の少なくとも一つの周りに加工ヘッド21を回転させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 1 and 2, the head drive system 22 moves the processing head 21 under the control of the control unit 7. That is, the head drive system 22 moves the irradiation optical system 211 and the material nozzle 212 under the control of the control unit 7. The head drive system 22 moves the processing head 21, for example, along at least one of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, the Z-axis direction, the θX direction, the θY direction, and the θZ direction. Note that the operation of moving the processing head 21 along at least one of the θX direction, the θY direction, and the θZ direction may be considered equivalent to the operation of rotating the processing head 21 around at least one of the rotation axes along the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis.

 ヘッド駆動系22が加工ヘッド21を移動させると、加工ヘッド21とステージ31及びステージ31に載置されたワークWのそれぞれとの間の相対的な位置関係が変わる。その結果、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと加工ヘッド21が備える照射光学系211との間の相対的な位置関係が変わる。このため、ヘッド駆動系22は、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと照射光学系211との間の相対的な位置関係を変更可能な位置変更装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。更に、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと加工ヘッド21との間の相対的な位置関係が変わると、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれとワークWとの間の相対的な位置関係もまた変わる。つまり、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれが、ワークWの表面(より具体的には、付加加工が行われる造形面MS)上において、X軸方向、Y軸方向、Z軸方向、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿って移動する。この場合、ヘッド駆動系22は、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれが造形面MS上において移動するように、加工ヘッド21を移動させているとみなしてもよい。 When the head drive system 22 moves the machining head 21, the relative positional relationship between the machining head 21 and the stage 31 and the workpiece W placed on the stage 31 changes. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211 equipped in the machining head 21 changes. For this reason, the head drive system 22 may be considered to function as a position change device capable of changing the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211. Furthermore, when the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and the workpiece W and the machining head 21 changes, the relative positional relationship between the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 and the workpiece W also changes. In other words, each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves along at least one of the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, Z-axis direction, θX direction, θY direction, and θZ direction on the surface of the workpiece W (more specifically, the modeling surface MS on which additional processing is performed). In this case, the head drive system 22 may be considered to be moving the processing head 21 so that each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS.

 ステージユニット3は、ステージ31と、ステージ駆動系32とを備えている。 The stage unit 3 includes a stage 31 and a stage drive system 32.

 ステージ31には、ワークWが載置される。具体的には、ステージ31の一の表面(例えば、+Z側を向いた上面)であるステージ載置面311には、ワークWが載置される。ステージ31は、ステージ31に載置されたワークWを支持可能である。ステージ31は、ステージ31に載置されたワークWを保持可能であってもよい。この場合、ステージ31は、ワークWを保持するために、機械的なチャック、静電チャック及び真空吸着チャック等の少なくとも一つを備えていてもよい。或いは、ステージ31は、ステージ31に載置されたワークWを保持可能でなくてもよい。この場合、ワークWは、クランプレスでステージ31に載置されていてもよい。また、ワークWは、保持具に取り付けられていてもよく、ワークWが取り付けられた保持具がステージ31に載置されていてもよい。上述した照射光学系211は、ステージ31にワークWが載置されている期間の少なくとも一部において加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを射出する。更に、上述した材料ノズル212は、ステージ31にワークWが載置されている期間の少なくとも一部において造形材料Mを供給する。 The workpiece W is placed on the stage 31. Specifically, the workpiece W is placed on a stage placement surface 311, which is one surface of the stage 31 (for example, the upper surface facing the +Z side). The stage 31 is capable of supporting the workpiece W placed on the stage 31. The stage 31 may be capable of holding the workpiece W placed on the stage 31. In this case, the stage 31 may be equipped with at least one of a mechanical chuck, an electrostatic chuck, and a vacuum suction chuck, etc., to hold the workpiece W. Alternatively, the stage 31 may not be capable of holding the workpiece W placed on the stage 31. In this case, the workpiece W may be placed on the stage 31 without clamping. The workpiece W may also be attached to a holder, or the holder to which the workpiece W is attached may be placed on the stage 31. The above-mentioned irradiation optical system 211 emits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 during at least a portion of the period during which the workpiece W is placed on the stage 31. Furthermore, the above-mentioned material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M for at least part of the time that the workpiece W is placed on the stage 31.

 ステージ駆動系32は、ステージ31を移動させる。ステージ駆動系32は、例えば、X軸、Y軸、Z軸、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿ってステージ31を移動させる。尚、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿ってステージ31を移動させる動作は、X軸に沿った回転軸(つまり、A軸)、Y軸に沿った回転軸(つまり、B軸)及びZ軸に沿った回転軸(つまり、C軸)の少なくとも一つの周りにステージ31を回転させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 The stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31. For example, the stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31 along at least one of the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, θX direction, θY direction, and θZ direction. Note that the operation of moving the stage 31 along at least one of the θX direction, θY direction, and θZ direction may be considered equivalent to the operation of rotating the stage 31 around at least one of the rotation axis along the X-axis (i.e., A-axis), the rotation axis along the Y-axis (i.e., B-axis), and the rotation axis along the Z-axis (i.e., C-axis).

 ステージ駆動系32がステージ31を移動させると、加工ヘッド21とステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれとの間の相対的な位置関係が変わる。その結果、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと加工ヘッド21が備える照射光学系211との間の相対的な位置関係が変わる。このため、ステージ駆動系32は、ヘッド駆動系22と同様に、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと照射光学系211との間の相対的な位置関係を変更可能な位置変更装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。更に、ステージ31及びワークWのそれぞれと加工ヘッド21との間の相対的な位置関係が変わると、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれとワークWとの間の相対的な位置関係もまた変わる。つまり、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれが、ワークWの表面(より具体的には、造形面MS)上において、X軸方向、Y軸方向、Z軸方向、θX方向、θY方向及びθZ方向の少なくとも一つに沿って移動する。この場合、ステージ駆動系32は、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれが造形面MS上において移動するように、ステージ31を移動させているとみなしてもよい。 When the stage drive system 32 moves the stage 31, the relative positional relationship between the processing head 21 and each of the stage 31 and workpiece W changes. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211 equipped with the processing head 21 changes. For this reason, the stage drive system 32, like the head drive system 22, may be considered to function as a position change device that can change the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the irradiation optical system 211. Furthermore, when the relative positional relationship between the stage 31 and each of the workpiece W and the processing head 21 changes, the relative positional relationship between each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 and the workpiece W also changes. In other words, each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves along at least one of the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, Z-axis direction, θX direction, θY direction, and θZ direction on the surface of the workpiece W (more specifically, the printing surface MS). In this case, the stage drive system 32 may be considered to be moving the stage 31 so that each of the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS.

 光源4は、例えば、赤外光、可視光及び紫外光のうちの少なくとも一つを、加工光ELとして射出する。但し、加工光ELとして、その他の種類の光が用いられてもよい。加工光ELは、複数のパルス光(つまり、複数のパルスビーム)を含んでいてもよい。加工光ELは、レーザ光であってもよい。この場合、光源4は、レーザ光源(例えば、レーザダイオード(LD:Laser Diode)等の半導体レーザ)を含んでいてもよい。レーザ光源としては、ファイバ・レーザ、COレーザ、YAGレーザ及びエキシマレーザ等の少なくとも一つが用いられてもよい。但し、加工光ELはレーザ光でなくてもよい。光源4は、任意の光源(例えば、LED(Light Emitting Diode)及び放電ランプ等の少なくとも一つ)を含んでいてもよい。 The light source 4 emits, for example, at least one of infrared light, visible light, and ultraviolet light as the processing light EL. However, other types of light may be used as the processing light EL. The processing light EL may include multiple pulse lights (i.e., multiple pulse beams). The processing light EL may be laser light. In this case, the light source 4 may include a laser light source (for example, a semiconductor laser such as a laser diode (LD: Laser Diode)). As the laser light source, at least one of a fiber laser, a CO2 laser, a YAG laser, and an excimer laser may be used. However, the processing light EL does not have to be laser light. The light source 4 may include any light source (for example, at least one of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) and a discharge lamp).

 上述したように、加工システムSYSaは、複数の光源4(具体的には、光源4#1及び4#2)を備えている。この場合、光源4#1が射出する加工光EL#1の特性と、光源4#2が射出する加工光EL#2の特性とは、同一であってもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の波長(典型的には、加工光EL#1の波長帯域において強度が最大となる波長であるピーク波長)と、加工光EL#2の波長(典型的には、ピーク波長)とは、同一であってもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の波長帯域(典型的には、強度が一定値以上となる波長の範囲)と、加工光EL#2の波長帯域とは、同一であってもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の強度と、加工光EL#2の強度とは、同一であってもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1に対するワークWの吸収率(或いは、造形面MSが表面となる物体、以下同じ)と、加工光EL#2に対するワークWの吸収率とは、同一であってもよい。特に、加工光EL#1のピーク波長に対するワークWの吸収率と、加工光EL#2のピーク波長に対するワークWの吸収率とは、同一であってもよい。或いは、光源4#1が射出する加工光EL#1の特性と、光源4#2が射出する加工光EL#2の特性とは、異なっていてもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の波長(典型的には、ピーク波長)と、加工光EL#2の波長(典型的には、ピーク波長)とは、異なっていてもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の波長帯域と、加工光EL#2の波長帯域とは、異なっていてもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1の強度と、加工光EL#2の強度とは、異なっていてもよい。例えば、加工光EL#1に対するワークWの吸収率と、加工光EL#2に対するワークWの吸収率とは、異なっていてもよい。特に、加工光EL#1のピーク波長に対するワークWの吸収率と、加工光EL#2のピーク波長に対するワークWの吸収率とは、異なっていてもよい。 As described above, the processing system SYSa includes a plurality of light sources 4 (specifically, light sources 4#1 and 4#2). In this case, the characteristics of the processing light EL#1 emitted by the light source 4#1 and the characteristics of the processing light EL#2 emitted by the light source 4#2 may be the same. For example, the wavelength of the processing light EL#1 (typically, the peak wavelength, which is the wavelength at which the intensity is maximum in the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1) and the wavelength of the processing light EL#2 (typically, the peak wavelength) may be the same. For example, the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1 (typically, the range of wavelengths at which the intensity is equal to or greater than a certain value) and the wavelength band of the processing light EL#2 may be the same. For example, the intensity of the processing light EL#1 and the intensity of the processing light EL#2 may be the same. For example, the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#1 (or the object whose surface is the printing surface MS, the same applies below) and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#2 may be the same. In particular, the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#2 may be the same. Alternatively, the characteristics of the processing light EL#1 emitted by the light source 4#1 and the characteristics of the processing light EL#2 emitted by the light source 4#2 may be different. For example, the wavelength (typically, peak wavelength) of the processing light EL#1 and the wavelength (typically, peak wavelength) of the processing light EL#2 may be different. For example, the wavelength band of the processing light EL#1 and the wavelength band of the processing light EL#2 may be different. For example, the intensity of the processing light EL#1 and the intensity of the processing light EL#2 may be different. For example, the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the processing light EL#2 may be different. In particular, the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#1 and the absorptivity of the workpiece W for the peak wavelength of the processing light EL#2 may be different.

 尚、第1実施形態では、加工システムSYSaが複数の光源4を備えている例について説明されている。しかしながら、加工システムSYSaは、複数の光源4を備えていなくてもよい。加工システムSYSaは、単一の光源4を備えていてもよい。一例として、加工システムSYSaは、単一の光源4として、広波長帯域又は複数波長の光を射出(供給)する光源を備えていてもよい。この場合には、加工システムSYSaは、この光源から射出される光を波長分割することで、互いに異なる波長の加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを生成してもよい。また、この場合には、加工システムSYSaは、この光源から射出される光を振幅分割してもよいし、偏光分割してもよい。 In the first embodiment, an example is described in which the processing system SYSa is equipped with multiple light sources 4. However, the processing system SYSa does not have to be equipped with multiple light sources 4. The processing system SYSa may be equipped with a single light source 4. As an example, the processing system SYSa may be equipped with a light source that emits (supplies) light of a wide wavelength band or multiple wavelengths as the single light source 4. In this case, the processing system SYSa may generate processing light EL#1 and processing light EL#2 of different wavelengths by wavelength-dividing the light emitted from this light source. Also, in this case, the processing system SYSa may perform amplitude division or polarization division of the light emitted from this light source.

 気体供給源5は、筐体6の内部のチャンバ空間63INをパージするためのパージガスの供給源である。パージガスは、不活性ガスを含む。不活性ガスの一例として、窒素ガス又はアルゴンガスがあげられる。気体供給源5は、筐体6の隔壁部材61に形成された供給口62及び気体供給源5と供給口62とを接続する供給管51を介して、チャンバ空間63INに接続されている。気体供給源5は、供給管51及び供給口62を介して、チャンバ空間63INにパージガスを供給する。その結果、チャンバ空間63INは、パージガスによってパージされた空間となる。チャンバ空間63INに供給されたパージガスは、隔壁部材61に形成された不図示の排出口から排出されてもよい。尚、気体供給源5は、不活性ガスが格納されたボンベであってもよい。不活性ガスが窒素ガスである場合には、気体供給源5は、大気を原料として窒素ガスを発生する窒素ガス発生装置であってもよい。 The gas supply source 5 is a supply source of purge gas for purging the chamber space 63IN inside the housing 6. The purge gas includes an inert gas. Examples of the inert gas include nitrogen gas or argon gas. The gas supply source 5 is connected to the chamber space 63IN via a supply port 62 formed in the partition member 61 of the housing 6 and a supply pipe 51 connecting the gas supply source 5 and the supply port 62. The gas supply source 5 supplies purge gas to the chamber space 63IN via the supply pipe 51 and the supply port 62. As a result, the chamber space 63IN becomes a space purged by the purge gas. The purge gas supplied to the chamber space 63IN may be exhausted from an exhaust port (not shown) formed in the partition member 61. The gas supply source 5 may be a cylinder in which an inert gas is stored. When the inert gas is nitrogen gas, the gas supply source 5 may be a nitrogen gas generator that generates nitrogen gas using the air as a raw material.

 上述したように、材料ノズル212がパージガスと共に造形材料Mを供給する場合には、気体供給源5は、材料供給源1からの造形材料Mが供給される混合装置12にパージガスを供給してもよい。具体的には、気体供給源5は、気体供給源5と混合装置12とを接続する供給管52を介して混合装置12と接続されていてもよい。その結果、気体供給源5は、供給管52を介して、混合装置12にパージガスを供給する。この場合、材料供給源1からの造形材料Mは、供給管52を介して気体供給源5から供給されたパージガスによって、供給管11内を通って材料ノズル212に向けて供給(具体的には、圧送)されてもよい。つまり、気体供給源5は、供給管52、混合装置12及び供給管11を介して、材料ノズル212に接続されていてもよい。その場合、材料ノズル212は、造形材料Mを圧送するためのパージガスと共に造形材料Mを供給することになる。 As described above, when the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M together with the purge gas, the gas supply source 5 may supply the purge gas to the mixer 12 to which the modeling material M from the material supply source 1 is supplied. Specifically, the gas supply source 5 may be connected to the mixer 12 via a supply pipe 52 that connects the gas supply source 5 and the mixer 12. As a result, the gas supply source 5 supplies the purge gas to the mixer 12 via the supply pipe 52. In this case, the modeling material M from the material supply source 1 may be supplied (specifically, pressure-fed) through the supply pipe 11 toward the material nozzle 212 by the purge gas supplied from the gas supply source 5 via the supply pipe 52. In other words, the gas supply source 5 may be connected to the material nozzle 212 via the supply pipe 52, the mixer 12, and the supply pipe 11. In that case, the material nozzle 212 supplies the modeling material M together with the purge gas for pressure-fed the modeling material M.

 制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御する。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える加工ユニット2(例えば、加工ヘッド21及びヘッド駆動系22の少なくとも一方)を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備えるステージユニット3(例えば、ステージ駆動系32)を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える材料供給源1を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える光源4を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える気体供給源5を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える撮像装置8を制御してもよい。 The control unit 7 controls the operation of the processing system SYSa. For example, the control unit 7 may control the processing unit 2 (e.g., at least one of the processing head 21 and the head drive system 22) of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W. For example, the control unit 7 may control the stage unit 3 (e.g., the stage drive system 32) of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W. For example, the control unit 7 may control the material supply source 1 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W. For example, the control unit 7 may control the light source 4 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W. For example, the control unit 7 may control the gas supply source 5 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W. For example, the control unit 7 may control the imaging device 8 of the processing system SYSa to perform additional processing on the workpiece W.

 制御ユニット7は、例えば、演算装置71と、記憶装置72とを備えていてもよい。演算装置71及び記憶装置72のそれぞれは、少なくとも回路(例えば、電子回路及び電気回路の少なくとも一つ)を含むハードウェアである。このため、演算装置71及び記憶装置72は、それぞれ、演算回路及び記憶回路と称されてもよい。或いは、演算装置71及び記憶装置72のそれぞれを、単に回路と称してもよい。 The control unit 7 may include, for example, a calculation device 71 and a memory device 72. Each of the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 is hardware including at least a circuit (e.g., at least one of an electronic circuit and an electric circuit). Therefore, the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 may be referred to as a calculation circuit and a memory circuit, respectively. Alternatively, each of the calculation device 71 and the memory device 72 may be referred to simply as a circuit.

 演算装置71は、少なくとも一つのプロセッサ(つまり、一つのプロセッサ又は複数のプロセッサ)をハードウェアとして含む。プロセッサは、例えば、ノイマン型のコンピュータアーキテクチャに準拠したプロセッサを含んでいてもよい。ノイマン型のコンピュータアーキテクチャに準拠したプロセッサは、CPU(Central Processing Unit)及びGPU(Graphics Processing Unit)の少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。プロセッサは、例えば、非ノイマン型のコンピュータアーキテクチャに準拠したプロセッサを含んでいてもよい。非ノイマン型のコンピュータアーキテクチャに準拠したプロセッサは、FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)及びASIC(Application Specific Circuit)のうちの少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。プロセッサは、回路(例えば、電子回路)によって実現されていてもよい。 The arithmetic device 71 includes at least one processor (i.e., one processor or multiple processors) as hardware. The processor may include, for example, a processor conforming to a von Neumann type computer architecture. The processor conforming to a von Neumann type computer architecture may include at least one of a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit). The processor may include, for example, a processor conforming to a non-von Neumann type computer architecture. The processor conforming to a non-von Neumann type computer architecture may include at least one of an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) and an ASIC (Application Specific Circuit). The processor may be realized by a circuit (for example, an electronic circuit).

 演算装置71は、コンピュータプログラムコード及びコンピュータプログラム指令の少なくとも一つを含むコンピュータプログラム721を読み込む。例えば、演算装置71は、記憶装置72が記憶しているコンピュータプログラム321を読み込んでもよい。例えば、演算装置71は、コンピュータで読み取り可能であって且つ一時的でない記録媒体が記憶しているコンピュータプログラム721を、制御ユニット7が備える図示しない記録媒体読み取り装置を用いて読み込んでもよい。記録媒体から読み取られたコンピュータプログラム721は、記憶装置72に記憶されてもよい。演算装置71は、不図示の通信装置を介して、制御ユニット7の外部に配置される不図示の装置からコンピュータプログラム721を取得してもよい(つまり、ダウンロードしてもよい又は読み込んでもよい)。ダウンロードされたコンピュータプログラム721は、記憶装置72に記憶されてもよい。 The arithmetic device 71 reads a computer program 721 including at least one of computer program code and computer program instructions. For example, the arithmetic device 71 may read the computer program 321 stored in the storage device 72. For example, the arithmetic device 71 may read the computer program 721 stored in a computer-readable and non-transitory storage medium using a storage medium reading device (not shown) provided in the control unit 7. The computer program 721 read from the storage medium may be stored in the storage device 72. The arithmetic device 71 may obtain (i.e., download or read) the computer program 721 from a device (not shown) arranged outside the control unit 7 via a communication device (not shown). The downloaded computer program 721 may be stored in the storage device 72.

 演算装置71は、読み込んだコンピュータプログラム721を実行する。その結果、演算装置71内には、制御ユニット7が行うべき処理(動作)を実行するための論理的な機能ブロックが実現される。言い換えれば、演算装置71は、コンピュータプログラム721が記録された記憶装置72等と共に(言い換えれば、記憶装置72と記憶装置72等に記録されたコンピュータプログラム721と共に)、制御ユニット7が行うべき処理を実行するための論理的な機能ブロックを実現するためのコントローラ又はコンピュータとして機能可能である。つまり、演算装置71が備える少なくとも一つのプロセッサと共に、記憶装置72等が備えるメモリ(記録媒体)とコンピュータプログラム721とは、制御ユニット7が行うべき処理(例えば、上述したロボット制御処理)を制御ユニット7が行うように構成されている。 The arithmetic device 71 executes the loaded computer program 721. As a result, a logical functional block for executing the processing (operation) to be performed by the control unit 7 is realized within the arithmetic device 71. In other words, the arithmetic device 71, together with the storage device 72 etc. in which the computer program 721 is recorded (in other words, together with the storage device 72 and the computer program 721 recorded in the storage device 72 etc.), can function as a controller or computer for realizing a logical functional block for executing the processing to be performed by the control unit 7. In other words, the memory (recording medium) and computer program 721 in the storage device 72 etc., together with at least one processor provided in the arithmetic device 71, are configured so that the control unit 7 performs the processing to be performed by the control unit 7 (for example, the robot control processing described above).

 記憶装置72は、所望のデータを記憶可能な少なくとも一つのメモリを含む。言い換えれば、記憶装置72は、所望のデータを含む少なくとも一つのメモリを含む。メモリは、回路(例えば、電子回路)によって実現されていてもよい。例えば、記憶装置72は、演算装置71が実行するコンピュータプログラム721を記憶していてもよい。この場合、記憶装置72(メモリ)は、演算装置71が実行するコンピュータプログラム721を記録する上述した記録媒体として用いられてもよい。記憶装置72は、演算装置71がコンピュータプログラム721を実行している場合に演算装置71が一時的に使用するデータを一時的に記憶してもよい。記憶装置72は、制御ユニット7が長期的に保存するデータを記憶してもよい。尚、記憶装置72は、RAM(Random Access Memory)、ROM(Read Only Memory)、ハードディスク装置、光磁気ディスク装置、SSD(Solid State Drive)及びディスクアレイ装置のうちの少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。つまり、記憶装置72は、一時的でない記録媒体を含んでいてもよい。 The storage device 72 includes at least one memory capable of storing desired data. In other words, the storage device 72 includes at least one memory containing desired data. The memory may be realized by a circuit (e.g., an electronic circuit). For example, the storage device 72 may store a computer program 721 executed by the arithmetic device 71. In this case, the storage device 72 (memory) may be used as the above-mentioned recording medium for recording the computer program 721 executed by the arithmetic device 71. The storage device 72 may temporarily store data that is temporarily used by the arithmetic device 71 when the arithmetic device 71 is executing the computer program 721. The storage device 72 may store data that the control unit 7 stores for a long period of time. The storage device 72 may include at least one of a RAM (Random Access Memory), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a hard disk device, an optical magnetic disk device, an SSD (Solid State Drive), and a disk array device. In other words, the storage device 72 may include non-transitory recording media.

 制御ユニット7は、照射光学系211による加工光ELの射出態様を制御してもよい。射出態様は、例えば、加工光ELの強度及び加工光ELの射出タイミングの少なくとも一方を含んでいてもよい。加工光ELが複数のパルス光を含む場合には、射出態様は、例えば、パルス光の発光時間、パルス光の発光周期、及び、パルス光の発光時間の長さとパルス光の発光周期との比(いわゆる、デューティ比)の少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、ヘッド駆動系22による加工ヘッド21の移動態様を制御してもよい。制御ユニット7は、ステージ駆動系32によるステージ31の移動態様を制御してもよい。移動態様は、例えば、移動量、移動速度、移動方向及び移動タイミング(移動時期)の少なくとも一つを含んでいてもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212による造形材料Mの供給態様を制御してもよい。供給態様は、例えば、供給量(特に、単位時間あたりの供給量)及び供給タイミング(供給時期)の少なくとも一方を含んでいてもよい。 The control unit 7 may control the emission mode of the processing light EL by the irradiation optical system 211. The emission mode may include, for example, at least one of the intensity of the processing light EL and the emission timing of the processing light EL. When the processing light EL includes a plurality of pulsed lights, the emission mode may include, for example, at least one of the emission time of the pulsed light, the emission cycle of the pulsed light, and the ratio of the length of the emission time of the pulsed light to the emission cycle of the pulsed light (so-called duty ratio). Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the movement mode of the processing head 21 by the head drive system 22. The control unit 7 may control the movement mode of the stage 31 by the stage drive system 32. The movement mode may include, for example, at least one of the movement amount, the movement speed, the movement direction, and the movement timing (movement time). Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the supply mode of the modeling material M by the material nozzle 212. The supply mode may include, for example, at least one of the supply amount (particularly, the supply amount per unit time) and the supply timing (supply time).

 制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSaの内部に設けられていなくてもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSa外にサーバ等として設けられていてもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7と加工システムSYSaとは、有線及び/又は無線のネットワーク(或いは、データバス及び/又は通信回線)で接続されていてもよい。有線のネットワークとして、例えばIEEE1394、RS-232x、RS-422、RS-423、RS-485及びUSBの少なくとも一つに代表されるシリアルバス方式のインタフェースを用いるネットワークが用いられてもよい。有線のネットワークとして、パラレルバス方式のインタフェースを用いるネットワークが用いられてもよい。有線のネットワークとして、10BASE-T、100BASE-TX及び1000BASE-Tの少なくとも一つに代表されるイーサネット(登録商標)に準拠したインタフェースを用いるネットワークが用いられてもよい。無線のネットワークとして、電波を用いたネットワークが用いられてもよい。電波を用いたネットワークの一例として、IEEE802.1xに準拠したネットワーク(例えば、無線LAN及びBluetooth(登録商標)の少なくとも一方)があげられる。無線のネットワークとして、赤外線を用いたネットワークが用いられてもよい。無線のネットワークとして、光通信を用いたネットワークが用いられてもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7と加工システムSYSaとはネットワークを介して各種の情報の送受信が可能となるように構成されていてもよい。また、制御ユニット7は、ネットワークを介して加工システムSYSaにコマンドや制御パラメータ等の情報を送信可能であってもよい。加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7からのコマンドや制御パラメータ等の情報を、上記ネットワークを介して受信する受信装置を備えていてもよい。加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7に対してコマンドや制御パラメータ等の情報を、上記ネットワークを介して送信する送信装置(つまり、制御ユニット7に対して情報を出力する出力装置)を備えていてもよい。或いは、制御ユニット7が行う処理のうちの一部を行う第1制御装置が加工システムSYSaの内部に設けられている一方で、制御ユニット7が行う処理のうちの他の一部を行う第2制御装置が加工システムSYSaの外部に設けられていてもよい。 The control unit 7 does not have to be provided inside the processing system SYSa. For example, the control unit 7 may be provided outside the processing system SYSa as a server or the like. In this case, the control unit 7 and the processing system SYSa may be connected by a wired and/or wireless network (or a data bus and/or a communication line). As the wired network, for example, a network using a serial bus type interface represented by at least one of IEEE1394, RS-232x, RS-422, RS-423, RS-485, and USB may be used. As the wired network, a network using a parallel bus type interface may be used. As the wired network, a network using an interface compliant with Ethernet (registered trademark) represented by at least one of 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T may be used. As the wireless network, a network using radio waves may be used. An example of a network using radio waves is a network conforming to IEEE802.1x (for example, at least one of a wireless LAN and Bluetooth (registered trademark)). A network using infrared rays may be used as a wireless network. A network using optical communication may be used as a wireless network. In this case, the control unit 7 and the machining system SYSa may be configured to be able to transmit and receive various information via the network. The control unit 7 may be capable of transmitting information such as commands and control parameters to the machining system SYSa via the network. The machining system SYSa may include a receiving device that receives information such as commands and control parameters from the control unit 7 via the network. The machining system SYSa may include a transmitting device (i.e., an output device that outputs information to the control unit 7) that transmits information such as commands and control parameters to the control unit 7 via the network. Alternatively, a first control device that performs part of the processing performed by the control unit 7 may be provided inside the machining system SYSa, while a second control device that performs another part of the processing performed by the control unit 7 may be provided outside the machining system SYSa.

 制御ユニット7内には、演算装置71がコンピュータプログラムを実行することで、機械学習によって構築可能な演算モデルが実装されてもよい。機械学習によって構築可能な演算モデルの一例として、例えば、ニューラルネットワークを含む演算モデル(いわゆる、人工知能(AI:Artificial Intelligence))があげられる。この場合、演算モデルの学習は、ニューラルネットワークのパラメータ(例えば、重み及びバイアスの少なくとも一つ)の学習を含んでいてもよい。制御ユニット7は、演算モデルを用いて、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御してもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御する動作は、演算モデルを用いて加工システムSYSaの動作を制御する動作を含んでいてもよい。尚、制御ユニット7には、教師データを用いたオフラインでの機械学習により構築済みの演算モデルが実装されてもよい。また、制御ユニット7に実装された演算モデルは、制御ユニット7上においてオンラインでの機械学習によって更新されてもよい。或いは、制御ユニット7は、制御ユニット7に実装されている演算モデルに加えて又は代えて、制御ユニット7の外部の装置(つまり、加工システムSYSaの外部に設けられる装置)に実装された演算モデルを用いて、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御してもよい。 A computation model that can be constructed by machine learning may be implemented in the control unit 7 by the computation device 71 executing a computer program. An example of a computation model that can be constructed by machine learning is, for example, a computation model including a neural network (so-called artificial intelligence (AI)). In this case, learning of the computation model may include learning of parameters of the neural network (for example, at least one of weights and biases). The control unit 7 may use the computation model to control the operation of the processing system SYSa. In other words, the operation of controlling the operation of the processing system SYSa may include the operation of controlling the operation of the processing system SYSa using the computation model. Note that a computation model that has already been constructed by offline machine learning using teacher data may be implemented in the control unit 7. Furthermore, the computation model implemented in the control unit 7 may be updated on the control unit 7 by online machine learning. Alternatively, the control unit 7 may control the operation of the machining system SYSa using a computational model implemented in a device external to the control unit 7 (i.e., a device provided outside the machining system SYSa) in addition to or instead of the computational model implemented in the control unit 7.

 尚、制御ユニット7が実行するコンピュータプログラムを記録する記録媒体としては、CD-ROM、CD-R、CD-RWやフレキシブルディスク、MO、DVD-ROM、DVD-RAM、DVD-R、DVD+R、DVD-RW、DVD+RW及びBlu-ray(登録商標)等の光ディスク、磁気テープ等の磁気媒体、光磁気ディスク、USBメモリ等の半導体メモリ、及び、その他プログラムを格納可能な任意の媒体の少なくとも一つが用いられてもよい。記録媒体には、コンピュータプログラムを記録可能な機器(例えば、コンピュータプログラムがソフトウェア及びファームウェア等の少なくとも一方の形態で実行可能な状態に実装された汎用機器又は専用機器)が含まれていてもよい。更に、コンピュータプログラムに含まれる各処理や機能は、制御ユニット7(つまり、コンピュータ)がコンピュータプログラムを実行することで制御ユニット7内に実現される論理的な処理ブロックによって実現されてもよいし、制御ユニット7が備える所定のゲートアレイ(FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array)、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit)等のハードウェア)によって実現されてもよいし、論理的な処理ブロックとハードウェアの一部の要素を実現する部分的ハードウェアモジュールとが混在する形式で実現してもよい。 The recording medium for recording the computer program executed by the control unit 7 may be at least one of the following: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, flexible disk, MO, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, optical disks such as Blu-ray (registered trademark), magnetic media such as magnetic tape, magneto-optical disk, semiconductor memory such as USB memory, and any other medium capable of storing a program. The recording medium may include a device capable of recording a computer program (for example, a general-purpose device or a dedicated device in which a computer program is implemented in a state in which it can be executed in at least one of the forms of software and firmware, etc.). Furthermore, each process or function included in the computer program may be realized by a logical processing block realized in the control unit 7 by the control unit 7 (i.e., the computer) executing the computer program, or may be realized by a predetermined gate array (hardware such as an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit)) provided in the control unit 7, or may be realized in a form that combines logical processing blocks and partial hardware modules that realize some elements of the hardware.

 撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体を撮像可能である。撮像装置8は、撮像装置8が備える撮像素子81を用いて撮像対象物体からの光を受光する(言い換えれば、検出する又は撮像する、以下同じ)ことで、撮像対象物体を撮像可能であってもよい。言い換えれば、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体を介した光を受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像可能であってもよい。この場合、撮像対象物からの光(言い換えれば、撮像対象物を介した光、以下同じ)の像が、撮像装置8の撮像面(つまり、撮像素子81の撮像面)に形成されてもよい。つまり、撮像対象物からの光(つまり、撮像対象物を介した光、以下同じ)は、撮像装置8の撮像面に、撮像対象物の像を形成してもよい。尚、撮像面は、撮像対象物体からの光を検出する検出面である。その結果、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体が写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。このような撮像装置8の一例として、カメラがあげられる。尚、撮像装置8は、検出装置又は受光装置と称されてもよい。撮像素子81は、検出素子、検出器、受光素子又は受光器と称されてもよい。 The imaging device 8 is capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged. The imaging device 8 may be capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged by receiving (in other words, detecting or capturing, the same below) light from the object to be imaged using the imaging element 81 included in the imaging device 8. In other words, the imaging device 8 may be capable of capturing an image of an object to be imaged by receiving light through the object to be imaged. In this case, an image of the light from the object to be imaged (in other words, light through the object to be imaged, the same below) may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81). In other words, the light from the object to be imaged (i.e., light through the object to be imaged, the same below) may form an image of the object to be imaged on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8. The imaging surface is a detection surface that detects light from the object to be imaged. As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the object to be imaged is captured. An example of such an imaging device 8 is a camera. The imaging device 8 may be called a detection device or a light receiving device. The imaging element 81 may also be called a detection element, a detector, a light receiving element, or a light receiver.

 撮像対象物体からの光は、加工ユニット2から射出された加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光を含んでいてもよい。 The light from the object to be imaged may include light that passes through the object to be imaged and into which the processing light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 is incident.

 加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、加工ユニット2から撮像対象物体に向けて射出された後に撮像対象物体から加工ユニット2に向かって戻される光を含んでいてもよい。具体的には、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、加工ユニット2から撮像対象物体に向けて射出された加工光ELのうちの、撮像対象物体から加工ユニット2に向かって戻される光成分を含んでいてもよい。つまり、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、加工ユニット2から撮像対象物体に向けて射出された加工光ELの少なくとも一部を含んでいてもよい。例えば、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、撮像対象物体に入射した加工光ELのうちの撮像対象物体が反射した反射光成分を含んでいてもよい。例えば、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、撮像対象物体に入射した加工光ELのうちの撮像対象物体によって散乱された散乱光成分を含んでいてもよい。例えば、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、撮像対象物体に入射した加工光ELのうちの撮像対象物体を透過した透過光成分を含んでいてもよい。例えば、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、撮像対象物体に入射した加工光ELのうちの撮像対象物体によって回折された回折光成分を含んでいてもよい。 The light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include light that is emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object and then returned from the imaging target object toward the processing unit 2. Specifically, the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a light component of the processed light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object that is returned from the imaging target object toward the processing unit 2. In other words, the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include at least a portion of the processed light EL emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the imaging target object. For example, the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a reflected light component of the processed light EL that is reflected by the imaging target object and that is incident on the imaging target object. For example, the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a scattered light component of the processed light EL that is incident on the imaging target object and that is scattered by the imaging target object. For example, the light passing through the imaging target object on which the processed light EL is incident may include a transmitted light component of the processed light EL that is incident on the imaging target object and that is transmitted through the imaging target object. For example, the light passing through the image capture object on which the processed light EL is incident may include diffracted light components of the processed light EL incident on the image capture object that are diffracted by the image capture object.

 加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、加工ユニット2から撮像対象物体に向けて射出された後に撮像対象物体から加工ユニット2に向かって戻される光に加えて又は代えて、撮像対象物体に照射された加工光ELにより発生する光を含んでいてもよい。言い換えれば、加工光ELが入射する撮像対象物体を介した光は、加工ユニット2からの加工光ELによって生じて加工ユニット2に向かって戻される光を含んでいてもよい。 The light passing through the object to be imaged, into which the processing light EL is incident, may include light generated by the processing light EL irradiated onto the object to be imaged, in addition to or instead of the light emitted from the processing unit 2 toward the object to be imaged and then returned from the object to be imaged toward the processing unit 2. In other words, the light passing through the object to be imaged, into which the processing light EL is incident, may include light generated by the processing light EL from the processing unit 2 and returned toward the processing unit 2.

 撮像対象物体は、ワークWを含んでいてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、ワークWを撮像してもよい。具体的には、撮像装置8は、ワークWからの光を受光することで、ワークWを撮像してもよい。この場合、ワークWの像が、撮像装置8の撮像面(つまり、撮像素子81の撮像面)に形成されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、ワークWが写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。 The object to be imaged may include a workpiece W. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the workpiece W. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may image the workpiece W by receiving light from the workpiece W. In this case, an image of the workpiece W may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81). As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the workpiece W is captured.

 撮像対象物体は、ワークW上に形成された造形物を含んでいてもよい。例えば、撮像対象物体は、ワークW上に造形物として形成された構造層SLの少なくとも一部を含んでいてもよい。例えば、撮像対象物体は、ワークW上に造形物として形成された三次元構造物ST(つまり、複数の構造層SLが積層された三次元構造物ST)の少なくとも一部を含んでいてもよい。撮像装置8は、造形物を撮像してもよい。具体的には、撮像装置8は、造形物からの光を受光することで、造形物を撮像してもよい。この場合、造形物の像が、撮像装置8の撮像面(つまり、撮像素子81の撮像面)に形成されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、造形物が写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。 The image capturing target object may include a structure formed on the workpiece W. For example, the image capturing target object may include at least a portion of a structural layer SL formed as a structure on the workpiece W. For example, the image capturing target object may include at least a portion of a three-dimensional structure ST (i.e., a three-dimensional structure ST in which a plurality of structural layers SL are stacked) formed as a structure on the workpiece W. The imaging device 8 may capture an image of the structure. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the structure by receiving light from the structure. In this case, an image of the structure may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the imaging surface of the imaging element 81). As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the structure is captured.

 ここで、上述したように、構造層SL(つまり、造形物)の表面又はワークWの表面は、その上に構造層SLが造形される造形面MSに設定される。造形面MSに加工光ELが照射されると、造形面MSには、溶融池MPが形成される。この場合、ワークW又は造形物からの光は、加工光ELによって造形面MSに形成される溶融池MP(つまり、溶融した金属等)からの光を含んでいてもよい。溶融池MPからの光は、溶融した金属の熱放射(例えば、黒体放射)に起因した光を含んでいてもよい。尚、加工光ELによって溶融池MPが形成されるがゆえに、溶融池MPからの光は、上述した「撮像対象物体に照射された加工光ELにより発生する光」の一例であるとみなしてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体として、溶融池MPを撮像してもよい。つまり、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体として、ワークW又は造形物のうちの溶融池MPが形成されている部分を撮像してもよい。具体的には、撮像装置8は、溶融池MPからの光を受光することで、溶融池MPを撮像してもよい。この場合、溶融池MPの像が、撮像装置8の撮像面に形成されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、溶融池MPが写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。 Here, as described above, the surface of the structural layer SL (i.e., the molded object) or the surface of the workpiece W is set as the molded surface MS on which the structural layer SL is molded. When the processing light EL is irradiated onto the molded surface MS, a molten pool MP is formed on the molded surface MS. In this case, the light from the workpiece W or the molded object may include light from the molten pool MP (i.e., molten metal, etc.) formed on the molded surface MS by the processing light EL. The light from the molten pool MP may include light due to thermal radiation (e.g., blackbody radiation) of the molten metal. Since the molten pool MP is formed by the processing light EL, the light from the molten pool MP may be considered to be an example of the above-mentioned "light generated by the processing light EL irradiated onto the object to be imaged". In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the molten pool MP as the object to be imaged. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the part of the workpiece W or the molded object where the molten pool MP is formed as the object to be imaged. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the molten pool MP by receiving light from the molten pool MP. In this case, an image of the molten pool MP may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8. As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the molten pool MP is captured.

 撮像対象物体は、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mを含んでいてもよい。例えば、撮像対象物体は、材料ノズル212から供給され且つ加工光ELが照射される前の造形材料M(つまり、溶融していない造形材料M)を含んでいてもよい。例えば、撮像対象物体は、材料ノズル212から供給され且つ加工光ELが照射された後の造形材料M(つまり、溶融した造形材料M)を含んでいてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体として、造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。具体的には、撮像装置8は、造形材料Mからの光を受光することで、造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。例えば、造形材料Mが溶融していない場合には、撮像装置8は、造形材料Mに照射された加工光ELのうちの、造形材料から加工ユニット2に向かって戻される光成分(例えば、反射光成分)を受光することで、造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。例えば、造形材料Mが溶融している場合には、撮像装置8は、溶融した造形材料Mからの光として、溶融した造形材料Mの熱放射(例えば、黒体放射)に起因した光を受光することで、造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。尚、加工光ELによって造形材料Mが溶融するがゆえに、溶融した造形材料Mからの光は、上述した「撮像対象物体に照射された加工光ELにより発生する光」の一例であるとみなしてもよい。これらの場合、造形材料Mの像が、撮像装置8の撮像面に形成されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、造形材料Mが写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。 The object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. For example, the object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and before the processing light EL is irradiated (i.e., the unmelted modeling material M). For example, the object to be imaged may include the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and after the processing light EL is irradiated (i.e., the molten modeling material M). In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M as the object to be imaged. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving light from the modeling material M. For example, when the modeling material M is not melted, the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving the light component (e.g., the reflected light component) of the processing light EL irradiated to the modeling material M that is returned from the modeling material toward the processing unit 2. For example, when the modeling material M is molten, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the modeling material M by receiving light resulting from thermal radiation (e.g., blackbody radiation) of the molten modeling material M as light from the molten modeling material M. Since the modeling material M is melted by the processing light EL, the light from the molten modeling material M may be considered to be an example of the above-mentioned "light generated by the processing light EL irradiated to the imaged object." In these cases, an image of the modeling material M may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8. As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the modeling material M is captured.

 尚、後に加工システムSYSaが行う第1造形動作について説明する際に詳述するように、第1実施形態では、造形材料Mは、造形面MS上に到達した造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射されることで、造形面MS上において溶融してもよい。この場合、撮像対象物体は、造形面MS上において溶融した造形材料Mを含んでいてもよい。尚、造形面MS上において溶融した造形材料Mは、溶融池MPの少なくとも一部であるとみなしてもよい。更に、後に加工システムSYSaが行う第2造形動作について説明する際に詳述するように、第1実施形態では、造形材料Mは、造形材料Mが造形面MSに到達する前に造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射されることで、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の空間において溶融してもよい。この場合、撮像対象物体は、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の空間において溶融した造形材料Mを含んでいてもよい。 As will be described in detail later when describing the first modeling operation performed by the processing system SYSa, in the first embodiment, the modeling material M may be melted on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling material M that has reached the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL. In this case, the imaged object may include the modeling material M melted on the modeling surface MS. The modeling material M melted on the modeling surface MS may be considered to be at least a part of the molten pool MP. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later when describing the second modeling operation performed by the processing system SYSa, in the first embodiment, the modeling material M may be melted in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212 by irradiating the modeling material M with the processing light EL before the modeling material M reaches the modeling surface MS. In this case, the imaged object may include the modeling material M melted in the space between the modeling surface MS and the material nozzle 212.

 撮像対象物体は、加工システムSYSaの少なくとも一部を含んでいてもよい。第1実施形態では、撮像対象物体が、加工システムSYSaが備える材料ノズル212を含む例について説明する。この場合、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212を撮像してもよい。具体的には、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212からの光を受光することで、造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。例えば、撮像装置8は、環境光の材料ノズル212からの反射光を受光することで、材料ノズル212を撮像してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212の像が、撮像装置8の撮像面に形成されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212が写り込んだ画像IMGを生成してもよい。 The object to be imaged may include at least a part of the processing system SYSa. In the first embodiment, an example will be described in which the object to be imaged includes a material nozzle 212 provided in the processing system SYSa. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212. Specifically, the imaging device 8 may image the modeling material M by receiving light from the material nozzle 212. For example, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 by receiving reflected light from the material nozzle 212 of ambient light. In this case, an image of the material nozzle 212 may be formed on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8. As a result, the imaging device 8 may generate an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 is reflected.

 尚、以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、撮像装置8が撮像対象物体を撮像するために受光する撮像対象物体からの光を、“撮像光CL”と称する。 In the following explanation, for the sake of convenience, the light from the object to be imaged that is received by the imaging device 8 in order to image the object to be imaged is referred to as "imaging light CL."

 撮像対象物体を撮像する撮像装置8の一例を示す断面図である図5に示すように、撮像光CLの光路の少なくとも一部は、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELの光路の少なくとも一部と重複していてもよい。例えば、図5に示す例では、照射装置210は、ミラー2192と、ビームスプリッタ2193とを備えている。この場合、照射光学系211から射出された加工光ELは、ビームスプリッタ2193を通過し、ビームスプリッタ2193を通過した加工光ELが、材料ノズル212から造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)に供給された造形材料Mに照射されてもよい。つまり、照射光学系211は、ビームスプリッタ2193を介して、造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)に向けて加工光ELを射出してもよい。この場合、ビームスプリッタ2193は、照射光学系211からの加工光ELを造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)に向ける光学部材として機能しているとみなしてもよい。一方で、撮像対象物体(図5に示す例では、その表面が造形面MSに設定されているワークW又は構造層SL)からの撮像光CLは、ビームスプリッタ2193によって反射され、ビームスプリッタ2193によって反射された撮像光CLが、ミラー2192を介して撮像装置8に入射してもよい。つまり、撮像装置8は、加工光ELが通過するビームスプリッタ2193を介して、撮像光CLを受光してもよい。この場合、ビームスプリッタ2193は、撮像対象物体からの撮像光CLを撮像装置8に向ける光学部材として機能しているとみなしてもよい。この場合、図5に示すように、ビームスプリッタ2193と造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)との間における加工光ELの光路と、ビームスプリッタ2193と造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)との間における撮像光CLの光路とが重複していてもよい。但し、撮像光CLの光路の少なくとも一部は、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELの光路の少なくとも一部と重複していなくてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5, which is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an imaging device 8 that captures an image of an object to be imaged, at least a part of the optical path of the imaging light CL may overlap with at least a part of the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5, the irradiation device 210 includes a mirror 2192 and a beam splitter 2193. In this case, the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may pass through the beam splitter 2193, and the processing light EL that has passed through the beam splitter 2193 may be irradiated onto the forming material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 to the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later). In other words, the irradiation optical system 211 may emit the processing light EL toward the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) via the beam splitter 2193. In this case, the beam splitter 2193 may be considered to function as an optical member that directs the processing light EL from the irradiation optical system 211 toward the forming surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later). On the other hand, the imaging light CL from the object to be imaged (in the example shown in FIG. 5, the workpiece W or the structure layer SL whose surface is set to the printing surface MS) may be reflected by the beam splitter 2193, and the imaging light CL reflected by the beam splitter 2193 may be incident on the imaging device 8 via the mirror 2192. That is, the imaging device 8 may receive the imaging light CL via the beam splitter 2193 through which the processing light EL passes. In this case, the beam splitter 2193 may be considered to function as an optical member that directs the imaging light CL from the object to be imaged to the imaging device 8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5, the optical path of the processing light EL between the beam splitter 2193 and the printing surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the optical path of the imaging light CL between the beam splitter 2193 and the printing surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) may overlap. However, at least a portion of the optical path of the imaging light CL does not have to overlap with at least a portion of the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211.

 尚、図5に示す例では、照射光学系211から射出された(具体的には、照射光学系211が最終光学素子として備える後述のfθレンズ2162から射出された)加工光ELが、ビームスプリッタ2193に入射している。つまり、照射光学系211から射出された(具体的には、fθレンズ2162から射出された)加工光ELの光路上に、ビームスプリッタ2193が配置されている。言い換えれば、と造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)と照射光学系211(特に、fθレンズ2162)との間における加工光ELの光路上に、ビームスプリッタ2193が配置されている。しかしながら、ビームスプリッタ2193は、と造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)とビームスプリッタ2193との間における加工光ELの光路上にfθレンズ2162(或いは、照射光学系211の一部)が配置されるように、配置されていてもよい。この場合、ビームスプリッタ2193から射出された加工光ELが、fθレンズ2162に入射し、fθレンズ2162から射出された加工光ELが、と造形面MS(或いは、後述する材料照射面ES)に照射されてもよい。更に、造形材料Mからの撮像光CLは、fθレンズ2162を介してビームスプリッタ2193に入射してもよい。 5, the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 (specifically, emitted from the fθ lens 2162 described later that the irradiation optical system 211 has as the final optical element) is incident on the beam splitter 2193. In other words, the beam splitter 2193 is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 (specifically, emitted from the fθ lens 2162). In other words, the beam splitter 2193 is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL between the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the irradiation optical system 211 (particularly the fθ lens 2162). However, the beam splitter 2193 may be arranged so that the fθ lens 2162 (or a part of the irradiation optical system 211) is arranged on the optical path of the processing light EL between the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES described later) and the beam splitter 2193. In this case, the processing light EL emitted from the beam splitter 2193 may be incident on the fθ lens 2162, and the processing light EL emitted from the fθ lens 2162 may be irradiated onto the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES, which will be described later). Furthermore, the imaging light CL from the modeling material M may be incident on the beam splitter 2193 via the fθ lens 2162.

 ここで、照射光学系211から射出される加工光ELは、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を進行してもよいことは、上述したとおりである。この場合、撮像光CLの光路の少なくとも一部が加工光ELの光路の少なくとも一部と重複している場合には、図5に示すように、撮像光CLもまた、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を進行してもよい。例えば、図5に示すように、撮像光CLは、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mが外縁となる円錐状の空間を進行してもよい。一例として、撮像光CLは、材料供給口2121の第1供給口部分2122(図4(a)から図4(c)参照)から供給される造形材料Mと、材料供給口2121の第2供給口部分2123(図4(a)から図4(c)参照)から供給される造形材料Mとによって挟まれる空間を進行してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間の外側の空間を撮像光CLが進行する場合と比較して、撮像光CLが造形材料Mによって遮光される可能性が低くなる。このため、撮像装置84は、造形材料Mの影響を受けることなく、撮像光CLを適切に受光することができる。つまり、撮像装置84は、造形材料Mの影響を受けることなく、材料照射面ESに供給された造形材料Mを適切に撮像することができる。 As described above, the processing light EL emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 may travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. In this case, when at least a part of the optical path of the imaging light CL overlaps with at least a part of the optical path of the processing light EL, as shown in FIG. 5, the imaging light CL may also travel through a space at least partially surrounded by the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. For example, as shown in FIG. 5, the imaging light CL may travel through a conical space whose outer edge is the shaping material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. As an example, the imaging light CL may travel through a space sandwiched between the shaping material M supplied from the first supply port portion 2122 (see FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)) of the material supply port 2121 and the shaping material M supplied from the second supply port portion 2123 (see FIG. 4(a) to FIG. 4(c)). In this case, the imaging light CL is less likely to be blocked by the modeling material M compared to when the imaging light CL travels through a space outside the space at least partially surrounded by the modeling material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. Therefore, the imaging device 84 can properly receive the imaging light CL without being affected by the modeling material M. In other words, the imaging device 84 can properly image the modeling material M supplied to the material irradiation surface ES without being affected by the modeling material M.

 材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を撮像光CLが進行する場合には、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間から、撮像対象物体を撮像しているとみなしてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を通過し、その後、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成されている開口2124を通過する撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。言い換えれば、撮像装置8は、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212から供給される造形材料Mによって少なくとも部分的に囲まれる空間を通過し、その後、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成されている材料供給口2121の内側を通過する撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。このように、撮像光CLは、開口2124を通過する(つまり、材料供給口2121の内側を通過する)光路を進行し、撮像装置8は、開口2124を通過する(つまり、材料供給口2121の内側を通過する)撮像光路を有していてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212の下方に位置する一の撮像対象物体(例えば、その表面が造形面MSに設定されているワークW又は構造層SL)と共に、他の撮像対象物体である材料ノズル212を撮像してもよい。例えば、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212の下方にワークW又は構造層SLと共に、材料ノズル212の下端部(開口2124)を撮像してもよい。この場合、ビームスプリッタ2193は、材料ノズル212の下端部(開口2124)よりもfθレンズ2162側(第3光学系216側)に位置していてもよい。 When the imaging light CL travels through a space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212, the imaging device 8 may be considered to be imaging the object to be imaged from the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL that passes through the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and then passes through the opening 2124 formed on the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL that passes through the space at least partially surrounded by the molding material M supplied from the material nozzle 212 and then passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121 formed on the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212. In this way, the imaging light CL may travel along an optical path that passes through the opening 2124 (i.e., passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121), and the imaging device 8 may have an imaging optical path that passes through the opening 2124 (i.e., passes through the inside of the material supply port 2121). In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212, which is another imaging target object, together with one imaging target object (e.g., the workpiece W or the structure layer SL whose surface is set to the printing surface MS) located below the material nozzle 212. For example, the imaging device 8 may image the lower end (opening 2124) of the material nozzle 212 together with the workpiece W or the structure layer SL below the material nozzle 212. In this case, the beam splitter 2193 may be located closer to the fθ lens 2162 side (the third optical system 216 side) than the lower end (opening 2124) of the material nozzle 212.

 尚、ビームスプリッタ2193は、振幅分割型のビームスプリッタでもよく、偏光ビームスプリッタでもよく、ダイクロイックミラーでもよく、ピンホールミラーでもよい。また、振幅分割型のビームスプリッタをビームスプリッタ2193として用いる場合、その分割比は1:1である必要はなく、加工光ELの光路側の透過率が撮像光路側の反射率よりも高い分割比であってもよい。 Beam splitter 2193 may be an amplitude-splitting beam splitter, a polarizing beam splitter, a dichroic mirror, or a pinhole mirror. When an amplitude-splitting beam splitter is used as beam splitter 2193, the split ratio does not need to be 1:1, and may be a split ratio in which the transmittance on the optical path side of processing light EL is higher than the reflectance on the imaging optical path side.

 図5に示すように、照射装置210は、撮像対象物体を照明光ILで照明する照明装置213を備えていてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、照明装置213から射出される照明光ILで照明された撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。例えば、撮像装置8は、照明装置213から射出される照明光ILで照明された撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。例えば、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体を照明する照明光ILのうちの撮像対象物体が反射した反射光成分を撮像光CLとして受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。例えば、撮像装置8は、撮像対象物体を照明する照明光ILのうちの撮像対象物体によって散乱された散乱光成分を撮像光CLとして受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5, the irradiation device 210 may include an illumination device 213 that illuminates the object to be imaged with illumination light IL. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged illuminated with illumination light IL emitted from the illumination device 213. For example, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged illuminated with illumination light IL emitted from the illumination device 213. For example, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving, as imaging light CL, a reflected light component of the illumination light IL that illuminates the object to be imaged, reflected by the object to be imaged. For example, the imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged by receiving, as imaging light CL, a scattered light component of the illumination light IL that illuminates the object to be imaged, scattered by the object to be imaged.

 尚、図5は、照明装置213が、撮像対象物体の一例である、その表面が造形面MSに設定されているワークW又は構造層SLを照明光ILで照明する例を示している。しかしながら、照明装置213は、撮像対象物体の他の一例である材料ノズル212及び造形材料Mの少なくとも一つを照明光ILで照明してもよい。 Note that FIG. 5 shows an example in which the illumination device 213 illuminates the workpiece W or the structural layer SL, which is an example of an object to be imaged and whose surface is set as the printing surface MS, with the illumination light IL. However, the illumination device 213 may also illuminate at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the printing material M, which are other examples of an object to be imaged, with the illumination light IL.

 撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間において、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前に、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を終了した後に、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。尚、上述したように撮像装置8が溶融池MPを撮像する場合には、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間において溶融池MPを撮像してもよい。なぜならば、溶融池MPは、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間に形成されるからである。 The imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. The imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged before the processing system SYSa starts additional processing. The imaging device 8 may image the object to be imaged after the processing system SYSa has finished additional processing. Note that, as described above, when the imaging device 8 images the molten pool MP, the imaging device 8 may image the molten pool MP while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. This is because the molten pool MP is formed while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing.

 上述した制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8の撮像結果に基づいて、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8の撮像結果として撮像装置8が生成した画像IMGに基づいて、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御してもよい。言い換えれば、制御ユニット7は、撮像対象物体からの光の撮像装置8による受光結果(つまり、撮像結果又は検出結果、以下同じ)に基づいて、加工システムSYSaの動作を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、画像IMGに基づいて、ワークWに対して付加加工を行うように、加工システムSYSaが備える材料供給源1、加工ユニット2、ステージユニット3、光源4及び気体供給源5の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。 The above-mentioned control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8. That is, the control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8 as the imaging result of the imaging device 8. In other words, the control unit 7 may control the operation of the processing system SYSa based on the light reception result by the imaging device 8 of light from the object to be imaged (that is, the imaging result or the detection result, the same below). For example, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the material supply source 1, the processing unit 2, the stage unit 3, the light source 4, and the gas supply source 5 provided in the processing system SYSa so as to perform additional processing on the workpiece W based on the image IMG.

 (1-2)照射光学系211の構成
 続いて、図6を参照しながら、照射光学系211の構成について説明する。図6は、照射光学系211の構成を示す断面図である。
(1-2) Configuration of the Irradiation Optical System 211 Next, the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211.

 図6に示すように、照射光学系211は、第1光学系214と、第2光学系215と、第3光学系216とを備える。第1光学系214は、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1が入射する光学系である。第1光学系214は、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1を、第3光学系216に向けて射出する光学系である。第2光学系215は、光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2が入射する光学系である。第2光学系215は、光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2を、第3光学系216に向けて射出する光学系である。第3光学系216は、第1光学系214から射出される加工光EL#1と、第2光学系215から射出される加工光EL#2とが入射する光学系である。第3光学系216は、第1光学系214から射出される加工光EL#1及び第2光学系215から射出される加工光EL#2を、造形面MSに向けて射出する光学系である。以下、第1光学系214、第2光学系215及び第3光学系216について、順に説明する。 As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation optical system 211 includes a first optical system 214, a second optical system 215, and a third optical system 216. The first optical system 214 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is incident. The first optical system 214 is an optical system that outputs the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 toward the third optical system 216. The second optical system 215 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is incident. The second optical system 215 is an optical system that outputs the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 toward the third optical system 216. The third optical system 216 is an optical system into which the processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and the processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 are incident. The third optical system 216 is an optical system that emits the processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and the processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 toward the printing surface MS. Below, the first optical system 214, the second optical system 215, and the third optical system 216 will be described in order.

 第1光学系214は、コリメータレンズ2141と、平行平板2142と、パワーメータ2143と、ガルバノスキャナ2144とを備える。ガルバノスキャナ2144は、フォーカス制御光学系2145と、ガルバノミラー2146とを備える。但し、第1光学系214は、コリメータレンズ2141、平行平板2142、パワーメータ2143及びガルバノスキャナ2144の少なくとも一つを備えていなくてもよい。ガルバノスキャナ2144は、フォーカス制御光学系2145及びガルバノミラー2146の少なくとも一つを備えていなくてもよい。 The first optical system 214 includes a collimator lens 2141, a parallel plate 2142, a power meter 2143, and a galvanometer scanner 2144. The galvanometer scanner 2144 includes a focus control optical system 2145 and a galvanometer mirror 2146. However, the first optical system 214 does not have to include at least one of the collimator lens 2141, the parallel plate 2142, the power meter 2143, and the galvanometer scanner 2144. The galvanometer scanner 2144 does not have to include at least one of the focus control optical system 2145 and the galvanometer mirror 2146.

 光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1は、コリメータレンズ2141に入射する。コリメータレンズ2141は、コリメータレンズ2141に入射した加工光EL#1を平行光に変換する。尚、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1が平行光である(つまり、平行光である加工光EL#1が第1光学系214に入射する)場合には、第1光学系214は、コリメータレンズ2141を備えていなくてもよい。コリメータレンズ2141が平行光に変換した加工光EL#1は、平行平板2142に入射する。平行平板2142は、平行平板2142に入射する加工光EL#1の光路に対して、斜設されている。平行平板2142に入射した加工光EL#1の一部は、平行平板2142を通過する。平行平板2142に入射した加工光EL#1の他の一部は、平行平板2142によって反射される。 The processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is incident on the collimator lens 2141. The collimator lens 2141 converts the processing light EL#1 incident on the collimator lens 2141 into parallel light. Note that if the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 is parallel light (i.e., the processing light EL#1, which is parallel light, is incident on the first optical system 214), the first optical system 214 does not need to be equipped with the collimator lens 2141. The processing light EL#1 converted into parallel light by the collimator lens 2141 is incident on the parallel plate 2142. The parallel plate 2142 is obliquely disposed with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142. A part of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142 passes through the parallel plate 2142. The other part of the processing light EL#1 incident on the parallel plate 2142 is reflected by the parallel plate 2142.

 平行平板2142を通過した加工光EL#1は、ガルバノスキャナ2144に入射する。具体的には、平行平板2142を通過した加工光EL#1は、ガルバノスキャナ2144のフォーカス制御光学系2145に入射する。 The processing light EL#1 that passes through the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the galvanometer scanner 2144. Specifically, the processing light EL#1 that passes through the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the focus control optical system 2145 of the galvanometer scanner 2144.

 フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP(以降、“フォーカス位置CP#1”と称する)を変更可能な光学部材である。尚、第1実施形態では、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1は、加工光EL#1が集光される集光位置を意味していてもよい。加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1は、加工光EL#1の照射方向(進行方向)において加工光EL#1が最も収斂している収斂位置を意味していてもよい。 The focus control optical system 2145 is an optical member that can change the focus position CP of the processing light EL#1 (hereinafter referred to as "focus position CP#1"). In the first embodiment, the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#1 is focused. The focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may mean the convergence position where the processing light EL#1 is most convergent in the irradiation direction (travel direction) of the processing light EL#1.

 具体的には、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を、照射光学系211から射出される加工光EL#1の照射方向に沿って変更可能である。図6に示す例では、照射光学系211から射出される加工光EL#1の照射方向は、Z軸方向が主成分となる方向である。この場合、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1をZ軸方向に沿って変更可能である。また、照射光学系211がワークWの上方から加工光ELを造形面MSに照射するがゆえに、加工光EL#1の照射方向は、造形面MS(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SLの表面)に交差する方向である。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を、造形面MS(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SLの表面)に交差する方向に沿って変更可能であるとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を、照射光学系211(典型的には第3光学系216)の光軸AXの方向に沿って変更可能であるとみなしてもよい。 Specifically, the focus control optical system 2145 can change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 is a direction in which the Z-axis direction is the main component. In this case, the focus control optical system 2145 can change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the Z-axis direction. In addition, since the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing light EL from above the workpiece W to the printing surface MS, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 is a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL). For this reason, the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to be able to change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL). The focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to be capable of changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 along the direction of the optical axis AX of the irradiation optical system 211 (typically the third optical system 216).

 尚、加工光EL#1の照射方向は、第3光学系216から射出される加工光EL#1の照射方向を意味していてもよい。この場合、加工光EL#1の照射方向は、第3光学系216の光軸に沿った方向と同一であってもよい。加工光EL#1の照射方向は、第3光学系216を構成する光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される最終光学部材の光軸に沿った方向と同一であってもよい。最終光学部材は、後述するfθレンズ2162であってもよい。また、後述するfθレンズ2162が複数の光学部材で構成される場合、最終光学部材は、fθレンズ2162を構成する複数の光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される光学部材であってもよい。 The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may mean the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the third optical system 216. In this case, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the third optical system 216. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the final optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the optical members that make up the third optical system 216. The final optical member may be the fθ lens 2162 described later. Furthermore, when the fθ lens 2162 described later is composed of multiple optical members, the final optical member may be the optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the fθ lens 2162.

 尚、照射光学系211は、第3光学系216を備えていなくてもよい。照射光学系211が第3光学系216を備えていない場合には、最終光学部材は、第1光学系214を構成する複数の光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される光学部材(Y走査ミラー2146MY)であってもよい。照射光学系211が第3光学系216を備えていない場合には、最終光学部材は、第2光学系215を構成する複数の光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される光学部材(Y走査ミラー2156MY)であってもよい。 The irradiation optical system 211 does not have to include the third optical system 216. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical member may be the optical member (Y-scanning mirror 2146MY) that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the first optical system 214. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical member may be the optical member (Y-scanning mirror 2156MY) that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the second optical system 215.

 フォーカス制御光学系2145は、例えば、加工光EL#1の照射方向に沿って並ぶ複数の光学部材(例えば、複数枚のレンズ)を含んでいてもよい。つまり、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、例えば、加工光EL#1の照射方向に沿って並ぶ複数の屈折光学部材を含んでいてもよい。この場合、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、複数の光学部材(屈折光学部材)のうちの少なくとも一つをその光軸方向に沿って動かすことで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更してもよい。但し、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、ミラー等の反射光学系部材を備え、当該反射光学部材を動かすことで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更してもよい。 The focus control optical system 2145 may include, for example, multiple optical elements (e.g., multiple lenses) aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1. That is, the focus control optical system 2145 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1. In this case, the focus control optical system 2145 may change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 by moving at least one of the multiple optical elements (refractive optical elements) along its optical axis direction. However, the focus control optical system 2145 may include a reflective optical element such as a mirror, and the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 may be changed by moving the reflective optical element.

 フォーカス制御光学系2145が加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更すると、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。特に、加工光EL#1の照射方向(つまり、Z軸方向)における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係(特に、Z軸方向における位置関係)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の距離(特に、Z軸方向における距離)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。 When the focus control optical system 2145 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS changes. In particular, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the Z-axis direction) changes. For this reason, the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1. The focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the distance between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.

 フォーカス制御光学系2145が加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更すると、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係が変わる。特に、加工光EL#1の照射方向(つまり、Z軸方向)における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係(特に、Z軸方向における位置関係)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2145は、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と材料制御点MCPとの間の距離(特に、Z軸方向における距離)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。 When the focus control optical system 2145 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP changes. In particular, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the Z-axis direction) changes. For this reason, the focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1. The focus control optical system 2145 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1.

 尚、上述したように、ガルバノスキャナ2144は、フォーカス制御光学系2145を備えていなくてもよい。この場合であっても、加工光EL#1の照射方向における照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係が変わると、加工光EL#1の照射方向における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、ガルバノスキャナ2144がフォーカス制御光学系2145を備えていない場合であっても、加工システムSYSaは、加工光EL#1の照射方向における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更することができる。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、ヘッド駆動系22を用いて、加工光EL#1の照射方向に沿って加工ヘッド21を移動させることで、加工光EL#1の照射方向における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更してもよい。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、ステージ駆動系32を用いて、加工光EL#1の照射方向に沿ってステージ31を移動させることで、加工光EL#1の照射方向における加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更してもよい。 As described above, the galvano scanner 2144 may not have the focus control optical system 2145. Even in this case, when the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 changes, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS changes. Therefore, even if the galvano scanner 2144 does not have the focus control optical system 2145, the processing system SYSa can change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS. For example, the processing system SYSa may change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS by moving the processing head 21 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 using the head drive system 22. For example, the processing system SYSa may use the stage drive system 32 to move the stage 31 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1, thereby changing the positional relationship between the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the printing surface MS.

 フォーカス制御光学系2145から射出された加工光EL#1は、ガルバノミラー2146に入射する。ガルバノミラー2146は、加工光EL#1を偏向することで、ガルバノミラー2146から射出される加工光EL#1の射出方向を変更する。このため、ガルバノミラー2146は、偏向光学系と称されてもよい。 The processing light EL#1 emitted from the focus control optical system 2145 is incident on the galvanometer mirror 2146. The galvanometer mirror 2146 deflects the processing light EL#1, thereby changing the emission direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2146. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be referred to as a deflection optical system.

 ガルバノミラー2146から射出される加工光EL#1の射出方向が変更されると、加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#1が射出される位置が変更される。加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#1が射出される位置が変更されると、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1が照射される目標照射領域EA#1が移動する。つまり、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1が照射される照射位置が移動する。その結果、造形面MSが加工光EL#1によって走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2146は、造形面MS上での加工光EL#1の照射位置を造形面MS上で移動させることが可能な照射位置移動装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。ガルバノミラー2146は、造形面MS内で目標照射領域EA#1が移動するように加工光EL#1を走査する走査光学系(偏向走査光学系)として機能しているとみなしてもよい。 When the emission direction of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2146 is changed, the position from which the processing light EL#1 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed. When the position from which the processing light EL#1 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed, the target irradiation area EA#1 onto which the processing light EL#1 is irradiated on the printing surface MS moves. In other words, the irradiation position onto which the processing light EL#1 is irradiated on the printing surface MS moves. As a result, the printing surface MS is scanned by the processing light EL#1. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as an irradiation position moving device capable of moving the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS on the printing surface MS. The galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that scans the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves within the printing surface MS.

 更に、加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#1が射出される位置が変更されると、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#1が通過するビーム通過領域PA#1が移動する。つまり、材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#1が通過する通過位置が移動する。その結果、材料供給面PLが加工光EL#1によって実質的に走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2146は、材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#1の通過位置を移動させることが可能な通過位置移動装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。ガルバノミラー2146は、材料供給面PL内で加工光EL#1を実質的に走査する走査光学系(偏向走査光学系)として機能しているとみなしてもよい。 Furthermore, when the position at which processing light EL#1 is emitted from processing head 21 is changed, a beam passing area PA#1 through which processing light EL#1 passes moves within a virtual material supply plane PL that intersects with the Z-axis between material nozzle 212 and modeling surface MS. In other words, the passing position through which processing light EL#1 passes within the material supply plane PL moves. As a result, the material supply plane PL is essentially scanned by processing light EL#1. For this reason, galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as a passing position moving device that can move the passing position of processing light EL#1 within the material supply plane PL. Galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that essentially scans processing light EL#1 within the material supply plane PL.

 ガルバノミラー2146は、例えば、X走査ミラー2146MXと、X走査モータ2146AXと、Y走査ミラー2146MYと、Y走査モータ2146AYとを含む。フォーカス制御光学系2145から射出された加工光EL#1は、X走査ミラー2146MXに入射する。X走査ミラー2146MXは、X走査ミラー2146MXに入射した加工光EL#1を、Y走査ミラー2146MYに向けて反射する。Y走査ミラー2146MYは、Y走査ミラー2146MYに入射した加工光EL#1を、第3光学系216に向けて反射する。尚、X走査ミラー2146MX及びY走査ミラー2146MYのそれぞれが、ガルバノミラーと称されてもよい。 The galvanometer mirror 2146 includes, for example, an X-scanning mirror 2146MX, an X-scanning motor 2146AX, a Y-scanning mirror 2146MY, and a Y-scanning motor 2146AY. The processing light EL#1 emitted from the focus control optical system 2145 is incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX. The X-scanning mirror 2146MX reflects the processing light EL#1 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX toward the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY. The Y-scanning mirror 2146MY reflects the processing light EL#1 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY toward the third optical system 216. Each of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX and the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY may be referred to as a galvanometer mirror.

 X走査モータ2146AXは、X走査ミラー2146MXを、Y軸に沿った回転軸周りに揺動又は回転させる。その結果、X走査ミラー2146MXに入射する加工光EL#1の光路に対するX走査ミラー2146MXの角度が変更される。この場合、X走査ミラー2146MXの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#1は、造形面MSをX軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、目標照射領域EA#1(つまり、加工光EL#1の照射位置)は、造形面MS上をX軸方向に沿って移動する。更に、X走査ミラー2146MXの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#1は、材料供給面PLをX軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1(つまり、加工光EL#1の通過位置)は、材料供給面PL内をX軸方向に沿って移動する。 The X-scan motor 2146AX swings or rotates the X-scanning mirror 2146MX around a rotation axis along the Y-axis. As a result, the angle of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2146MX is changed. In this case, the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the printing surface MS along the X-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#1 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2146MX causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the material supply surface PL along the X-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the X-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.

 Y走査モータ2146AYは、Y走査ミラー2146MYを、X軸に沿った回転軸周りに揺動又は回転させる。その結果、Y走査ミラー2146MYに入射する加工光EL#1の光路に対するY走査ミラー2146MYの角度が変更される。この場合、Y走査ミラー2146MYの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#1は、造形面MSをY軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、目標照射領域EA#1(つまり、加工光EL#1の照射位置)は、造形面MS上をY軸方向に沿って移動する。更に、Y走査ミラー2146MYの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#1は、材料供給面PLをY軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1(つまり、加工光EL#1の通過位置)は、材料供給面PL内をY軸方向に沿って移動する。 The Y-scanning motor 2146AY swings or rotates the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY around a rotation axis along the X-axis. As a result, the angle of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#1 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY is changed. In this case, the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the printing surface MS along the Y-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#1 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2146MY causes the processing light EL#1 to scan the material supply surface PL along the Y-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#1) moves along the Y-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.

 第1実施形態では、ガルバノミラー2146が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる仮想的な領域を、加工単位領域PUA(特に、加工単位領域PUA#1)と称する。この場合、目標照射領域EA#1は、造形面MSのうち加工単位領域PUA#1と重複する面上を移動するとみなしてもよい。具体的には、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で(つまり、変更することなく)ガルバノミラー2146が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる仮想的な領域を、加工単位領域PUA(特に、加工単位領域PUA#1)と称する。加工単位領域PUA#1は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で加工ヘッド21が加工光EL#1を用いて実際に付加加工を行う仮想的な領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。加工単位領域PUA#1は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で加工ヘッド21が加工光EL#1で実際に走査する仮想的な領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。加工単位領域PUA#1は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で目標照射領域EA#1が実際に移動する領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。このため、加工単位領域PUA#1は、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#1は、造形面MS上において、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる位置に位置する仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。尚、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態でガルバノミラー2146が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を移動することが可能な最大領域を、加工単位領域PUA#1と称してもよい。 In the first embodiment, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#1). In this case, the target irradiation area EA#1 may be considered to move on the surface of the printing surface MS that overlaps with the processing unit area PUA#1. Specifically, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed (i.e., without changing) is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#1). The processing unit area PUA#1 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually performs additional processing using the processing light EL#1 while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. The processing unit area PUA#1 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually scans with the processing light EL#1 in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. The processing unit area PUA#1 indicates an area (in other words, a range) where the target irradiation area EA#1 actually moves in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. For this reason, the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered to be a virtual area located on the printing surface MS at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). Note that the maximum area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 can move the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed may be referred to as the processing unit area PUA#1.

 この場合、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させることができる。このため、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて加工光EL#1を偏向する動作は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。更に、目標照射領域EA#1に加工光EL#1が照射されることで、溶融池MP#1が形成されることは、上述したとおりである。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて、加工単位領域PUA#1内において溶融池MP#1を移動させているとみなしてもよい。このため、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて加工光EL#1を偏向する動作は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において溶融池MP#1を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる動作は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において溶融池MP#1を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 In this case, the machining system SYSa can use the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the target irradiation area EA#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. Furthermore, as described above, the molten pool MP#1 is formed by irradiating the target irradiation area EA#1 with the machining light EL#1. In this case, the machining system SYSa may be considered to use the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the molten pool MP#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#1 within the machining unit area PUA#1. In other words, the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1.

 尚、上述したように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動しても、目標照射領域EA#1が造形面MS上において移動する。しかしながら、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動する場合には、ガルバノミラー2146と造形面MSとの相対的な位置関係が変わる。その結果、加工ヘッド21を基準に定まる加工単位領域PUA#1(つまり、ガルバノミラー2146が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる加工単位領域PUA#1)が造形面MS上で移動する。このため、第1実施形態では、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させる動作は、造形面MSに対して加工単位領域PUA#1を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 As described above, when at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the target irradiation area EA#1 moves on the printing surface MS. However, when at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS changes. As a result, the processing unit area PUA#1 determined based on the machining head 21 (i.e., the processing unit area PUA#1 to which the galvanometer mirror 2146 moves the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS) moves on the printing surface MS. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the processing unit area PUA#1 relative to the printing surface MS.

 加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる動作の一例として、図7(a)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1が造形面MS上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、加工単位領域PUA#1内において、目標照射領域EA#1が、造形面MSに沿った単一の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。つまり、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1を基準に定まる座標系内において、目標照射領域EA#1が単一の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。特に、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1が単一の走査方向に沿って周期的に往復移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。つまり、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1が単一の走査方向に沿った軸上で周期的に往復移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。この場合、目標照射領域EA#1が移動する加工単位領域PUA#1の形状は、目標照射領域EA#1の移動方向が長手方向となる矩形の形状となっていてもよい。 7A, as an example of an operation for moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1, under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#1 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along a single scanning direction along the printing surface MS within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along a single scanning direction within a coordinate system defined based on the processing unit area PUA#1. In particular, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth periodically along a single scanning direction within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 periodically moves back and forth on an axis along a single scanning direction within the processing unit area PUA#1. In this case, the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be a rectangle whose longitudinal direction is the movement direction of the target irradiation area EA#1.

 加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させる動作の他の一例として、図8(a)及び図8(b)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1が造形面MS上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、加工単位領域PUA#1内において、目標照射領域EA#1が、造形面MSに沿った複数の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。つまり、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1を基準に定まる座標系内において、目標照射領域EA#1が複数の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。特に、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1が複数の走査方向のそれぞれに沿って周期的に往復移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。つまり、ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1が複数の走査方向のそれぞれに沿った軸上で周期的に往復移動するように、加工光EL#1を偏向してもよい。図8(a)は、加工単位領域PUA#1内における目標照射領域EA#1の移動軌跡が円形となるように、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1がX軸方向及びY軸方向のそれぞれに沿って往復移動する例を示している。この場合、目標照射領域EA#1が移動する加工単位領域PUA#1の形状は、円形となっていてもよい。図8(b)は、加工単位領域PUA#1内における目標照射領域EA#1の移動軌跡が網目状の形状となるように、加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1がX軸方向及びY軸方向のそれぞれに沿って往復移動する例を示している。この場合、目標照射領域EA#1が移動する加工単位領域PUA#1の形状は、矩形となっていてもよい。 As another example of the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1, as shown in Figures 8(a) and 8(b), under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#1 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along multiple scanning directions along the printing surface MS within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves along multiple scanning directions within a coordinate system defined based on the processing unit area PUA#1. In particular, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth periodically along each of the multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#1. That is, the galvanometer mirror 2146 may deflect the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 periodically moves back and forth on an axis along each of the multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#1. FIG. 8(a) shows an example in which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth along each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction within the processing unit area PUA#1 so that the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 is circular. In this case, the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be circular. FIG. 8(b) shows an example in which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves back and forth along each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction within the processing unit area PUA#1 so that the movement trajectory of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 is mesh-shaped. In this case, the shape of the processing unit area PUA#1 through which the target irradiation area EA#1 moves may be rectangular.

 尚、図7(a)、図8(a)及び図8(b)のそれぞれに示すように造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を周期的に移動させる動作を、ウォブリング動作と称してもよい。言い換えれば、造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1が周期的に移動するように加工光EL#1を周期的に移動させる(言い換えれば、偏向する)動作を、ウォブリング動作と称してもよい。 In addition, the operation of periodically moving the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS as shown in Figures 7(a), 8(a), and 8(b), respectively, may be referred to as a wobbling operation. In other words, the operation of periodically moving (in other words, deflecting) the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically on the printing surface MS may be referred to as a wobbling operation.

 制御ユニット7は、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させている期間中に、造形面MS上を加工単位領域PUA#1が移動するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて加工単位領域PUA#1内において目標照射領域EA#1を移動させている期間中に、造形面MS上を加工単位領域PUA#1が移動するように、ヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御してもよい。 The control unit 7 may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the machining unit area PUA#1 moves on the printing surface MS during the period when the target irradiation area EA#1 is being moved within the machining unit area PUA#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146. In other words, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the machining unit area PUA#1 moves on the printing surface MS during the period when the target irradiation area EA#1 is being moved within the machining unit area PUA#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146.

 例えば、図7(a)に示す例において、制御ユニット7は、加工単位領域PUA#1内での目標照射領域EA#1の移動方向(つまり、走査方向)と交差する(場合によっては、直交する)目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って、加工単位領域PUA#1が移動するように、ヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御してもよい。逆に言えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUA#1の目標移動軌跡MT0と交差する(場合によっては、直交する)走査方向に沿って、目標照射領域EA#1が周期的に移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146を制御してもよい。その結果、造形面MS上において、目標照射領域EA#1は、図7(b)に示す移動軌跡MT#1に沿って移動してもよい。具体的には、目標照射領域EA#1は、加工単位領域PUA#1の目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動しながら、目標移動軌跡MT0に交差する走査方向に沿って移動してもよい。つまり、目標照射領域EA#1は、目標移動軌跡MT0を中心に振動する波形状(例えば、正弦波形状)の移動軌跡MT#1に沿って移動してもよい。 For example, in the example shown in FIG. 7(a), the control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA#1 moves along a target movement trajectory MT0 that intersects (orthogonal in some cases) with the movement direction (i.e., the scanning direction) of the target irradiation area EA#1 in the processing unit area PUA#1. Conversely, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically along a scanning direction that intersects (orthogonal in some cases) with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS. As a result, on the printing surface MS, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along the movement trajectory MT#1 shown in FIG. 7(b). Specifically, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along a scanning direction that intersects with the target movement trajectory MT0 while moving along the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move along a wave-shaped (e.g., sinusoidal) movement trajectory MT#1 that oscillates around the target movement trajectory MT0.

 例えば、図8(a)又は図8(b)に示す例において、制御ユニット7は、加工単位領域PUA#1内での目標照射領域EA#1の移動方向(つまり、走査方向)に沿った方向及び加工単位領域PUA#1内での目標照射領域EA#1の移動方向に交差する(場合によっては、直交する)方向の少なくとも一つに沿って延びる目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って、加工単位領域PUA#1が移動するように、ヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御してもよい。逆に言えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUA#1の目標移動軌跡MT0に沿った走査方向及び目標移動軌跡MT0に交差する(場合によっては、直交する)走査方向のそれぞれに沿って、目標照射領域EA#1が周期的に移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146を制御してもよい。尚、図8(c)は、図8(a)に示す加工単位領域PUA#1が造形面MS上を目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動した場合の、造形面MS上での目標照射領域EA#1の移動軌跡MT#1を示している。 8(a) or 8(b), the control unit 7 may control at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA#1 moves along a target movement trajectory MT0 extending along at least one of a direction along the movement direction (i.e., scanning direction) of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1 and a direction intersecting (orthogonal in some cases) the movement direction of the target irradiation area EA#1 within the processing unit area PUA#1. Conversely, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves periodically along each of a scanning direction along the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS and a scanning direction intersecting (orthogonal in some cases) the target movement trajectory MT0. Note that FIG. 8(c) shows the movement trajectory MT#1 of the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS when the processing unit area PUA#1 shown in FIG. 8(a) moves along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS.

 加工単位領域PUA#1の単位で加工光EL#1が造形面MSに照射される場合には、加工単位領域PUA#1の少なくとも一部に溶融池MP#1が形成される。その結果、加工単位領域PUA#1内に造形物が造形される。ここで、上述したように、加工単位領域PUA#1は、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUA#1の移動方向(具体的には、目標移動軌跡MT0が延びる方向)と交差する方向に幅を有する領域である。この場合、加工単位領域PUA#1の目標移動軌跡MT0に交差する方向に沿って幅を有する造形物が造形面MS上に造形される。例えば、図7(a)及び図7(b)に示す例では、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。例えば、図8(a)及び図8(c)に示す例では、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。 When the processing light EL#1 is irradiated to the printing surface MS in units of the processing unit area PUA#1, a molten pool MP#1 is formed in at least a part of the processing unit area PUA#1. As a result, a molded object is molded in the processing unit area PUA#1. Here, as described above, the processing unit area PUA#1 is an area having a width in a direction intersecting with the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA#1 on the printing surface MS (specifically, the direction in which the target movement trajectory MT0 extends). In this case, a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#1 is molded on the printing surface MS. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 7(a) and FIG. 7(b), a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8(a) and FIG. 8(c), a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.

 加工単位領域PUA#1の単位で加工光EL#1が造形面MSに照射される場合には、ガルバノミラー2146によって加工単位領域PUA#1が加工光EL#1で走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2146を用いることなく加工光EL#1が造形面MSに照射される場合と比較して、加工光EL#1から加工単位領域PUA#1に伝達されるエネルギ量の大きさが、加工単位領域PUA#1内においてばらつく可能性が低くなる。つまり、加工光EL#1から加工単位領域PUA#1に伝達されるエネルギ量の分布の均一化を図ることができる。その結果、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに造形物を相対的に高い造形精度で造形することができる。 When the processing light EL#1 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#1, the processing unit area PUA#1 is scanned with the processing light EL#1 by the galvanometer mirror 2146. Therefore, compared to when the processing light EL#1 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2146, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#1 to the processing unit area PUA#1 is less likely to vary within the processing unit area PUA#1. In other words, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#1 to the processing unit area PUA#1. As a result, the processing system SYSa can form an object on the printing surface MS with relatively high printing accuracy.

 但し、加工システムSYSaは、加工単位領域PUA#1の単位で加工光EL#1を造形面MSに照射しなくてもよい。加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146を用いることなく、加工光EL#1を造形面MSに照射してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、ウォブリング動作を必ずしも行わなくてもよい。この場合、目標照射領域EA#1は、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方の移動に伴って、造形面MS上を移動してもよい。 However, the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the processing light EL#1 onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#1. The processing system SYSa may irradiate the processing light EL#1 onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2146. The processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation. In this case, the target irradiation area EA#1 may move on the printing surface MS in conjunction with the movement of at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31.

 尚、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#1を非周期的に移動させてもよい。 In addition, the processing system SYSa may non-periodically move the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS.

 再び図6において、平行平板2142によって反射された加工光EL#1は、パワーメータ2143に入射する。パワーメータ2143は、パワーメータ2143に入射した加工光EL#1の強度を検出可能である。例えば、パワーメータ2143は、加工光EL#1を光として検出する受光素子を含んでいてもよい。或いは、加工光EL#1の強度が高くなるほど、加工光EL#1が生成するエネルギ量が多くなる。その結果、加工光EL#1が発生する熱量が多くなる。このため、パワーメータ2143は、加工光EL#1を熱として検出することで、加工光EL#1の強度を検出してもよい。この場合、パワーメータ2143は、加工光EL#1の熱を検出する熱検出素子を含んでいてもよい。 In FIG. 6 again, the processing light EL#1 reflected by the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the power meter 2143. The power meter 2143 can detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143. For example, the power meter 2143 may include a light receiving element that detects the processing light EL#1 as light. Alternatively, the higher the intensity of the processing light EL#1, the greater the amount of energy generated by the processing light EL#1. As a result, the amount of heat generated by the processing light EL#1 increases. For this reason, the power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 by detecting the processing light EL#1 as heat. In this case, the power meter 2143 may include a heat detection element that detects the heat of the processing light EL#1.

 上述したように、パワーメータ2143には、平行平板2142によって反射された加工光EL#1が入射する。このため、パワーメータ2143は、平行平板2142によって反射された加工光EL#1の強度を検出する。平行平板2142が光源4#1とガルバノミラー2146との間における加工光EL#1の光路上に配置されているがゆえに、パワーメータ2143は、光源4#1とガルバノミラー2146との間における光路を進行する加工光EL#1の強度を検出しているとみなしてもよい。この場合、パワーメータ2143は、ガルバノミラー2146による加工光EL#1の偏向の影響を受けることなく、加工光EL#1の強度を安定的に検出することができる。但し、パワーメータ2143の配置位置が、図6に示す例に限定されることはない。例えば、パワーメータ2143は、ガルバノミラー2146と造形面MSとの間における光路を進行する加工光EL#1の強度を検出してもよい。パワーメータ2143は、ガルバノミラー2146内における光路を進行する加工光EL#1の強度を検出してもよい。 As described above, the processing light EL#1 reflected by the parallel plate 2142 is incident on the power meter 2143. Therefore, the power meter 2143 detects the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected by the parallel plate 2142. Since the parallel plate 2142 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#1 between the light source 4#1 and the galvanometer mirror 2146, the power meter 2143 may be considered to detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling on the optical path between the light source 4#1 and the galvanometer mirror 2146. In this case, the power meter 2143 can stably detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 without being affected by the deflection of the processing light EL#1 by the galvanometer mirror 2146. However, the position of the power meter 2143 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 6. For example, the power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling along the optical path between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS. The power meter 2143 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#1 traveling along the optical path within the galvanometer mirror 2146.

 パワーメータ2143の検出結果は、制御ユニット7に出力される。制御ユニット7は、パワーメータ2143の検出結果(つまり、加工光EL#1の強度の検出結果)に基づいて、加工光EL#1の強度を制御(言い換えれば、変更)してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MSにおける加工光EL#1の強度が所望強度となるように、加工光EL#1の強度を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の仮想的な材料供給面PLにおける加工光EL#1の強度が所望強度となるように、加工光EL#1の強度を制御してもよい。加工光EL#1の強度を制御するために、例えば、制御ユニット7は、パワーメータ2143の検出結果に基づいて、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1の強度を変更するように、光源4#1を制御してもよい。その結果、加工システムSYSaは、適切な強度を有する加工光EL#1を造形面MSに照射することで、造形面MSに造形物を適切に造形することができる。 The detection result of the power meter 2143 is output to the control unit 7. The control unit 7 may control (in other words, change) the intensity of the processing light EL#1 based on the detection result of the power meter 2143 (i.e., the detection result of the intensity of the processing light EL#1). For example, the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#1 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS becomes a desired intensity. For example, the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#1 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#1 on the virtual material supply surface PL between the printing surface MS and the material nozzle 212 becomes a desired intensity. To control the intensity of the processing light EL#1, for example, the control unit 7 may control the light source 4#1 so as to change the intensity of the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 based on the detection result of the power meter 2143. As a result, the processing system SYSa can appropriately print a model on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#1 having an appropriate intensity.

 上述したように、加工光EL#1は、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有している。このため、パワーメータ2143に入射する加工光EL#1が、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有する可能性がある。しかしながら、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有する加工光EL#1がパワーメータ2143に入射すると、パワーメータ2143が加工光EL#1によって損傷する可能性がある。このため、パワーメータ2143には、パワーメータ2143を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#1が入射してもよい。言い換えれば、第1光学系214は、パワーメータ2143を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#1がパワーメータ2143に入射するように、パワーメータ2143に入射する加工光EL#1の強度を弱めてもよい。 As described above, the processing light EL#1 has an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. Therefore, the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143 may have an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. However, when the processing light EL#1 having an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M is incident on the power meter 2143, the power meter 2143 may be damaged by the processing light EL#1. Therefore, the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 may be incident on the power meter 2143. In other words, the first optical system 214 may weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143 so that the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 is incident on the power meter 2143.

 例えば、パワーメータ2143に入射する加工光EL#1の強度を弱めるために、加工光EL#1に対する平行平板2142の反射率が適切な値に設定されていてもよい。具体的には、加工光EL#1に対する平行平板2142の反射率が低くなればなるほど、パワーメータ2143に入射する加工光EL#1の強度が低くなる。このため、平行平板2142の反射率は、パワーメータ2143を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#1がパワーメータ2143に入射する状態を実現することが可能な程度に低い値に設定されていてもよい。例えば、平行平板2142の反射率は、10%未満であってもよい。例えば、平行平板2142の反射率は、数%未満であってもよい。このような反射率が低い平行平板2142として、素ガラスが用いられてもよい。 For example, in order to weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 for the processing light EL#1 may be set to an appropriate value. Specifically, the lower the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 for the processing light EL#1, the lower the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143. For this reason, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be set to a value low enough to realize a state in which the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 is incident on the power meter 2143. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be less than 10%. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2142 may be less than a few percent. Plain glass may be used as the parallel plate 2142 with such low reflectance.

 例えば、パワーメータ2143に入射する加工光EL#1の強度を弱めるために、第1光学系214は、複数の平行平板2142を介して、加工光EL#1をパワーメータ2143に入射させてもよい。具体的には、複数の平行平板2142によってそれぞれ複数回反射された加工光EL#1が、パワーメータ2143に入射してもよい。この場合、複数の平行平板2142によってそれぞれ複数回反射された加工光EL#1の強度は、一枚の平行平板2142によって一回反射された加工光EL#1の強度よりも弱くなる。このため、パワーメータ2143を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#1がパワーメータ2143に入射する可能性が高くなる。 For example, in order to weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#1 incident on the power meter 2143, the first optical system 214 may cause the processing light EL#1 to be incident on the power meter 2143 via multiple parallel plates 2142. Specifically, the processing light EL#1 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2142 may be incident on the power meter 2143. In this case, the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2142 is weaker than the intensity of the processing light EL#1 reflected once by a single parallel plate 2142. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the processing light EL#1 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2143 will be incident on the power meter 2143.

 平行平板2142の表面(特に、加工光EL#1が入射する入射面及び加工光EL#1が反射される反射面の少なくとも一つ)には、所望のコーティング処理が施されていてもよい。例えば、平行平板2142の表面には、反射防止コーティング処理(AR:Anti Reflection Coating)が施されていてもよい。 The surface of the parallel plate 2142 (particularly, at least one of the incident surface on which the processing light EL#1 is incident and the reflecting surface on which the processing light EL#1 is reflected) may be subjected to a desired coating treatment. For example, the surface of the parallel plate 2142 may be subjected to an anti-reflection coating (AR).

 第2光学系215は、コリメータレンズ2151と、平行平板2152と、パワーメータ2153と、ガルバノスキャナ2154とを備える。ガルバノスキャナ2154は、フォーカス制御光学系2155と、ガルバノミラー2156とを備える。但し、第2光学系215は、コリメータレンズ2151、平行平板2152、パワーメータ2153及びガルバノスキャナ2154の少なくとも一つを備えていなくてもよい。ガルバノスキャナ2154は、フォーカス制御光学系2155及びガルバノミラー2156の少なくとも一つを備えていなくてもよい。 The second optical system 215 includes a collimator lens 2151, a parallel plate 2152, a power meter 2153, and a galvanometer scanner 2154. The galvanometer scanner 2154 includes a focus control optical system 2155 and a galvanometer mirror 2156. However, the second optical system 215 does not have to include at least one of the collimator lens 2151, the parallel plate 2152, the power meter 2153, and the galvanometer scanner 2154. The galvanometer scanner 2154 does not have to include at least one of the focus control optical system 2155 and the galvanometer mirror 2156.

 光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2は、コリメータレンズ2151に入射する。コリメータレンズ2151は、コリメータレンズ2151に入射した加工光EL#2を平行光に変換する。尚、光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2が平行光である(つまり、平行光である加工光EL#2が第2光学系215に入射する)場合には、第2光学系215は、コリメータレンズ2151を備えていなくてもよい。コリメータレンズ2151が平行光に変換した加工光EL#2は、平行平板2152に入射する。平行平板2152は、平行平板2152に入射する加工光EL#2の光路に対して、斜設されている。平行平板2152に入射した加工光EL#2の一部は、平行平板2152を通過する。平行平板2152に入射した加工光EL#2の他の一部は、平行平板2152によって反射される。 The processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is incident on the collimator lens 2151. The collimator lens 2151 converts the processing light EL#2 incident on the collimator lens 2151 into parallel light. Note that if the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 is parallel light (i.e., the processing light EL#2, which is parallel light, is incident on the second optical system 215), the second optical system 215 does not need to be equipped with the collimator lens 2151. The processing light EL#2 converted into parallel light by the collimator lens 2151 is incident on the parallel plate 2152. The parallel plate 2152 is obliquely disposed with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152. A portion of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152 passes through the parallel plate 2152. The other portion of the processing light EL#2 incident on the parallel plate 2152 is reflected by the parallel plate 2152.

 平行平板2152を通過した加工光EL#2は、ガルバノスキャナ2154に入射する。具体的には、平行平板2152を通過した加工光EL#2は、ガルバノスキャナ2154のフォーカス制御光学系2155に入射する。 Processing light EL#2 that passes through the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the galvanometer scanner 2154. Specifically, processing light EL#2 that passes through the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the focus control optical system 2155 of the galvanometer scanner 2154.

 フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP(以降、“フォーカス位置CP#2”と称する)を変更可能な光学部材である。尚、第1実施形態では、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2は、加工光EL#2が集光される集光位置を意味していてもよい。加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2は、加工光EL#2の照射方向(進行方向)において加工光EL#2が最も収斂している収斂位置を意味していてもよい。 The focus control optical system 2155 is an optical member capable of changing the focus position CP of the processing light EL#2 (hereinafter referred to as "focus position CP#2"). In the first embodiment, the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#2 is focused. The focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may mean the focusing position where the processing light EL#2 is most convergent in the irradiation direction (traveling direction) of the processing light EL#2.

 具体的には、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を、照射光学系211から射出される加工光EL#2の照射方向に沿って変更可能である。図6に示す例では、照射光学系211から射出される加工光EL#2の照射方向は、Z軸方向が主成分となる方向である。この場合、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2をZ軸方向に沿って変更可能である。また、照射光学系211がワークWの上方から加工光ELを造形面MSに照射するがゆえに、加工光EL#2の照射方向は、造形面MS(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SLの表面)に交差する方向である。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を、造形面MS(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SLの表面)に交差する方向に沿って変更可能であるとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を、照射光学系211(典型的には第3光学系216)の光軸AXの方向に沿って変更可能であるとみなしてもよい。 Specifically, the focus control optical system 2155 can change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the irradiation optical system 211 is a direction in which the Z-axis direction is the main component. In this case, the focus control optical system 2155 can change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the Z-axis direction. In addition, since the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing light EL from above the workpiece W to the printing surface MS, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 is a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL). For this reason, the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to be able to change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along a direction that intersects with the printing surface MS (e.g., the surface of the workpiece W or the structure layer SL). The focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to be capable of changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 along the direction of the optical axis AX of the irradiation optical system 211 (typically the third optical system 216).

 尚、加工光EL#2の照射方向は、第3光学系216から射出される加工光EL#2の照射方向を意味していてもよい。この場合、加工光EL#2の照射方向は、第3光学系216の光軸に沿った方向と同一であってもよい。加工光EL#2の照射方向は、第3光学系216を構成する光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される最終光学部材の光軸に沿った方向と同一であってもよい。最終光学部材は、後述するfθレンズ2162であってもよい。また、後述するfθレンズ2162が複数の光学部材で構成される場合、最終光学部材は、fθレンズ2162を構成する複数の光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される光学部材であってもよい。 The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may mean the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the third optical system 216. In this case, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the third optical system 216. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same as the direction along the optical axis of the final optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the optical members that make up the third optical system 216. The final optical member may be the fθ lens 2162 described later. Furthermore, when the fθ lens 2162 described later is composed of multiple optical members, the final optical member may be the optical member that is arranged closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical members that make up the fθ lens 2162.

 尚、照射光学系211は、第3光学系216を備えていなくてもよい。照射光学系211が第3光学系216を備えていない場合には、最終光学部材は、第2光学系215を構成する複数の光学部材のうち最も造形面MS側に配置される光学部材(Y走査ミラー2156MY)であってもよい。 The irradiation optical system 211 does not have to include the third optical system 216. If the irradiation optical system 211 does not have the third optical system 216, the final optical element may be the optical element (Y-scanning mirror 2156MY) that is located closest to the printing surface MS among the multiple optical elements that make up the second optical system 215.

 フォーカス制御光学系2155は、例えば、加工光EL#2の照射方向に沿って並ぶ複数の光学部材(例えば、複数枚のレンズ)を含んでいてもよい。つまり、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、例えば、加工光EL#2の照射方向に沿って並ぶ複数の屈折光学部材を含んでいてもよい。この場合、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、複数の光学部材(屈折光学部材)のうちの少なくとも一つをその光軸方向に沿って動かすことで、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更してもよい。但し、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、ミラー等の反射光学系部材を備え、当該反射光学部材を動かすことで、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更してもよい。 The focus control optical system 2155 may include, for example, multiple optical elements (e.g., multiple lenses) aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2. That is, the focus control optical system 2155 may include, for example, multiple refractive optical elements aligned along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2. In this case, the focus control optical system 2155 may change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 by moving at least one of the multiple optical elements (refractive optical elements) along its optical axis direction. However, the focus control optical system 2155 may include a reflective optical element such as a mirror, and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 may be changed by moving the reflective optical element.

 フォーカス制御光学系2155が加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更すると、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。特に、加工光EL#2の照射方向(つまり、Z軸方向)における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更することで、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係(特に、Z軸方向における位置関係)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更することで、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の距離(特に、Z軸方向における距離)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。 When the focus control optical system 2155 changes the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS changes. In particular, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the Z-axis direction) changes. For this reason, the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2. The focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.

 フォーカス制御光学系2155が加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更すると、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係が変わる。特に、加工光EL#2の照射方向(つまり、Z軸方向)における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#2と材料制御点MCPとの間の位置関係(特に、Z軸方向における位置関係)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2155は、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#2と材料制御点MCPとの間の距離(特に、Z軸方向における距離)を変更しているとみなしてもよい。 When the focus control optical system 2155 changes the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 and the material control point MCP changes. In particular, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the Z-axis direction) and the material control point MCP changes. For this reason, the focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the positional relationship (in particular, the positional relationship in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2. The focus control optical system 2155 may be considered to change the distance (in particular, the distance in the Z-axis direction) between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#1 and the material control point MCP by changing the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2.

 尚、上述したように、ガルバノスキャナ2154は、フォーカス制御光学系2155を備えていなくてもよい。この場合であっても、加工光EL#2の照射方向における照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係が変わると、加工光EL#2の照射方向における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係が変わる。このため、ガルバノスキャナ2154がフォーカス制御光学系2155を備えていない場合であっても、加工システムSYSaは、加工光EL#2の照射方向における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更することができる。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、ヘッド駆動系22を用いて、加工光EL#2の照射方向に沿って加工ヘッド21を移動させることで、加工光EL#2の照射方向における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更してもよい。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、ステージ駆動系32を用いて、加工光EL#2の照射方向に沿ってステージ31を移動させることで、加工光EL#2の照射方向における加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2と造形面MSとの間の位置関係を変更してもよい。 As described above, the galvano scanner 2154 may not have the focus control optical system 2155. Even in this case, when the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 changes, the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS changes. Therefore, even if the galvano scanner 2154 does not have the focus control optical system 2155, the processing system SYSa can change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS. For example, the processing system SYSa may change the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS by moving the processing head 21 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 using the head drive system 22. For example, the processing system SYSa may use the stage drive system 32 to move the stage 31 along the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2, thereby changing the positional relationship between the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 and the printing surface MS.

 フォーカス制御光学系2155から射出された加工光EL#2は、ガルバノミラー2156に入射する。ガルバノミラー2156は、加工光EL#2を偏向することで、ガルバノミラー2156から射出される加工光EL#2の射出方向を変更する。このため、ガルバノミラー2156は、偏向光学系と称されてもよい。ガルバノミラー2156から射出される加工光EL#2の射出方向が変更されると、加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#2が射出される位置が変更される。 The processing light EL#2 emitted from the focus control optical system 2155 is incident on the galvanometer mirror 2156. The galvanometer mirror 2156 deflects the processing light EL#2, thereby changing the emission direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2156. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be referred to as a deflection optical system. When the emission direction of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the galvanometer mirror 2156 is changed, the position at which the processing light EL#2 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed.

 加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#2が射出される位置が変更されると、造形面MS上において加工光EL#2が照射される目標照射領域EA#2が移動する。つまり、造形面MS上において加工光EL#2が照射される照射位置が移動する。つまり、造形面MS上において加工光EL#2が照射される照射位置が移動する。その結果、造形面MSが加工光EL#2によって走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2156は、造形面MS上での加工光EL#2の照射位置を移動させることが可能な照射位置移動装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。ガルバノミラー2156は、造形面MS内で目標照射領域EA#2が移動するように加工光EL#2を走査する走査光学系(偏向走査光学系)として機能しているとみなしてもよい。 When the position where the processing light EL#2 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed, the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves. In other words, the irradiation position on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves. In other words, the irradiation position on the printing surface MS onto which the processing light EL#2 is irradiated moves. As a result, the printing surface MS is scanned by the processing light EL#2. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as an irradiation position moving device capable of moving the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS. The galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that scans the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves within the printing surface MS.

 更に、加工ヘッド21から加工光EL#2が射出される位置が変更されると、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#2が通過するビーム通過領域PA#2が移動する。つまり、材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#2が通過する通過位置が移動する。その結果、材料供給面PLが加工光EL#2によって実質的に走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2156は、材料供給面PL内において加工光EL#2の通過位置を移動させることが可能な通過位置移動装置として機能しているとみなしてもよい。ガルバノミラー2156は、材料供給面PL内で加工光EL#2を実質的に走査する走査光学系(偏向走査光学系)として機能しているとみなしてもよい。 Furthermore, when the position at which processing light EL#2 is emitted from the processing head 21 is changed, the beam passing area PA#2 through which processing light EL#2 passes moves within the virtual material supply plane PL that intersects with the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the printing surface MS. In other words, the passing position through which processing light EL#2 passes within the material supply plane PL moves. As a result, the material supply plane PL is essentially scanned by processing light EL#2. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a passing position moving device that can move the passing position of processing light EL#2 within the material supply plane PL. The galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to function as a scanning optical system (deflection scanning optical system) that essentially scans processing light EL#2 within the material supply plane PL.

 ガルバノミラー2156は、例えば、X走査ミラー2156MXと、X走査モータ2156AXと、Y走査ミラー2156MYと、Y走査モータ2156AYとを含む。フォーカス制御光学系2155から射出された加工光EL#2は、X走査ミラー2156MXに入射する。X走査ミラー2156MXは、X走査ミラー2156MXに入射した加工光EL#2を、Y走査ミラー2156MYに向けて反射する。Y走査ミラー2156MYは、Y走査ミラー2156MYに入射した加工光EL#2を、第3光学系216に向けて反射する。尚、X走査ミラー2156MX及びY走査ミラー2156MYのそれぞれが、ガルバノミラーと称されてもよい。 The galvanometer mirror 2156 includes, for example, an X-scanning mirror 2156MX, an X-scanning motor 2156AX, a Y-scanning mirror 2156MY, and a Y-scanning motor 2156AY. The processing light EL#2 emitted from the focus control optical system 2155 is incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX. The X-scanning mirror 2156MX reflects the processing light EL#2 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX toward the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY. The Y-scanning mirror 2156MY reflects the processing light EL#2 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY toward the third optical system 216. Each of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX and the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY may be referred to as a galvanometer mirror.

 X走査モータ2156AXは、X走査ミラー2156MXを、Y軸に沿った回転軸周りに揺動又は回転させる。その結果、X走査ミラー2156MXに入射する加工光EL#2の光路に対するX走査ミラー2156MXの角度が変更される。この場合、X走査ミラー2156MXの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#2は、造形面MSをX軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、目標照射領域EA#2(つまり、加工光EL#2の照射位置)は、造形面MS上をX軸方向に沿って移動する。更に、X走査ミラー2156MXの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#2は、材料供給面PLをX軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2(つまり、加工光EL#2の通過位置)は、材料供給面PL内をX軸方向に沿って移動する。 The X-scan motor 2156AX swings or rotates the X-scanning mirror 2156MX around a rotation axis along the Y-axis. As a result, the angle of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the X-scanning mirror 2156MX is changed. In this case, the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the printing surface MS along the X-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#2 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the swing or rotation of the X-scanning mirror 2156MX causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the material supply surface PL along the X-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the X-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.

 Y走査モータ2156AYは、Y走査ミラー2156MYを、X軸に沿った回転軸周りに揺動又は回転させる。その結果、Y走査ミラー2156MYに入射する加工光EL#2の光路に対するY走査ミラー2156MYの角度が変更される。この場合、Y走査ミラー2156MYの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#2は、造形面MSをY軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、目標照射領域EA#2(つまり、加工光EL#2の照射位置)は、造形面MS上をY軸方向に沿って移動する。更に、Y走査ミラー2156MYの揺動又は回転により、加工光EL#2は、材料供給面PLをY軸方向に沿って走査する。つまり、加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2(つまり、加工光EL#2の通過位置)は、材料供給面PL内をX軸方向に沿って移動する。 The Y-scanning motor 2156AY swings or rotates the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY around a rotation axis along the X-axis. As a result, the angle of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY with respect to the optical path of the processing light EL#2 incident on the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY is changed. In this case, the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the printing surface MS along the Y-axis direction. That is, the target irradiation area EA#2 (i.e., the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the swing or rotation of the Y-scanning mirror 2156MY causes the processing light EL#2 to scan the material supply surface PL along the Y-axis direction. That is, the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 (i.e., the passing position of the processing light EL#2) moves along the X-axis direction within the material supply surface PL.

 第1実施形態では、ガルバノミラー2156が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を移動させる仮想的な領域を、加工単位領域PUA(特に、加工単位領域PUA#2)と称する。この場合、目標照射領域EA#2は、造形面MSのうち加工単位領域PUA#2と重複する面(第1面)上を移動するとみなしてもよい。具体的には、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で(つまり、変更することなく)ガルバノミラー2156が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を移動させる仮想的な領域を、加工単位領域PUA(特に、加工単位領域PUA#2)と称する。加工単位領域PUA#2は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で加工ヘッド21が加工光EL#2を用いて実際に付加加工を行う仮想的な領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。加工単位領域PUA#2は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で加工ヘッド21が加工光EL#2で実際に走査する仮想的な領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。加工単位領域PUA#2は、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態で目標照射領域EA#2が実際に移動する領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。このため、加工単位領域PUA#2は、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#2は、造形面MS上において、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる位置に位置する仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。尚、照射光学系211と造形面MSとの位置関係を固定した状態でガルバノミラー2146が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を移動することが可能な最大領域を、加工単位領域PUA#2と称してもよい。 In the first embodiment, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#2). In this case, the target irradiation area EA#2 may be considered to move on the surface (first surface) of the printing surface MS that overlaps with the processing unit area PUA#2. Specifically, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed (i.e., without changing) is called the processing unit area PUA (particularly, the processing unit area PUA#2). The processing unit area PUA#2 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually performs additional processing using the processing light EL#2 while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. The processing unit area PUA#2 indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) where the processing head 21 actually scans with the processing light EL#2 in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. The processing unit area PUA#2 indicates an area (in other words, a range) where the target irradiation area EA#2 actually moves in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed. For this reason, the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered to be a virtual area located on the printing surface MS at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). Note that the maximum area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 can move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS in a state where the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the printing surface MS is fixed may be referred to as the processing unit area PUA#2.

 この場合、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2156を用いて、加工単位領域PUA#2内において目標照射領域EA#2を移動させることができる。このため、ガルバノミラー2156を用いて加工光EL#2を偏向する動作は、加工単位領域PUA#2内において目標照射領域EA#2を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。更に、目標照射領域EA#2に加工光EL#2が照射されることで、溶融池MP#2が形成されることは、上述したとおりである。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2156を用いて、加工単位領域PUA#2内において溶融池MP#2を移動させているとみなしてもよい。このため、ガルバノミラー2156を用いて加工光EL#2を偏向する動作は、加工単位領域PUA#2内において溶融池MP#2を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#2内において目標照射領域EA#2を移動させる動作は、加工単位領域PUA#2内において溶融池MP#2を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 In this case, the machining system SYSa can use the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the target irradiation area EA#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. Furthermore, as described above, the molten pool MP#2 is formed by irradiating the target irradiation area EA#2 with the machining light EL#2. In this case, the machining system SYSa may be considered to use the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the molten pool MP#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the machining light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#2 within the machining unit area PUA#2. In other words, the operation of moving the target irradiation area EA#2 within the processing unit area PUA#2 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the molten pool MP#2 within the processing unit area PUA#2.

 尚、上述したように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動すると、目標照射領域EA#2が造形面MS上において移動する。しかしながら、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動する場合には、ガルバノミラー2146と造形面MSとの相対的な位置関係が変わる。その結果、加工ヘッド21を基準に定まる加工単位領域PUA#2(つまり、ガルバノミラー2156が造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を移動させる加工単位領域PUA#2)が造形面MS上で移動する。このため、第1実施形態では、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させる動作は、造形面MSに対して加工単位領域PUA#2を移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 As described above, when at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the target irradiation area EA#2 moves on the printing surface MS. However, when at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the printing surface MS changes. As a result, the processing unit area PUA#2 determined based on the machining head 21 (i.e., the processing unit area PUA#2 to which the galvanometer mirror 2156 moves the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS) moves on the printing surface MS. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the processing unit area PUA#2 relative to the printing surface MS.

 加工単位領域PUA#2の特徴(例えば、形状及び移動態様等)は、上述した加工単位領域PUA#1の特徴と同一であってもよい。加工単位領域PUA#2内での目標照射領域EA#2の移動態様(例えば、移動軌跡等)は、上述した加工単位領域PUA#1内での目標照射領域EA#1の移動態様と同一であってもよい。このため、加工単位領域PUA#2の特徴及び加工単位領域PUA#2内での目標照射領域EA#2の移動態様(例えば、移動軌跡等)の詳細な説明は省略するが、以下のその一例について簡単に説明する。図7(a)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2156は、加工単位領域PUA#2が造形面MS上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、加工単位領域PUA#2内において、目標照射領域EA#2が、造形面MSに沿った単一の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#2を偏向してもよい。図7(a)に示す加工単位領域PUA#2が造形面MS上で目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動することで、造形面MS上において、目標照射領域EA#2は、図7(b)に示す移動軌跡MT#2(例えば、目標移動軌跡MT0を中心に振動する波形状の移動軌跡MT#2)に沿って移動してもよい。図8(a)及び図8(b)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2156は、加工単位領域PUA#2が造形面MS上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、加工単位領域PUA#2内において目標照射領域EA#2が複数の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#2を偏向してもよい。 The characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#2 (e.g., shape and movement mode, etc.) may be the same as the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#1 described above. The movement mode of the target irradiation area EA#2 in the processing unit area PUA#2 (e.g., movement trajectory, etc.) may be the same as the movement mode of the target irradiation area EA#1 in the processing unit area PUA#1 described above. For this reason, detailed descriptions of the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#2 and the movement mode of the target irradiation area EA#2 in the processing unit area PUA#2 (e.g., movement trajectory, etc.) will be omitted, but an example will be briefly described below. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the galvanometer mirror 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves along a single scanning direction along the printing surface MS in the processing unit area PUA#2 under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#2 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS. As the processing unit area PUA#2 shown in FIG. 7A moves along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS, the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS may move along the movement trajectory MT#2 shown in FIG. 7B (for example, a wave-shaped movement trajectory MT#2 that vibrates around the target movement trajectory MT0). As shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, the galvanometer mirror 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves along multiple scanning directions within the processing unit area PUA#2 under the assumption that the processing unit area PUA#2 is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the printing surface MS.

 尚、図7(a)、図8(a)及び図8(b)のそれぞれに示すように造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を周期的に移動させる動作を、ウォブリング動作と称してもよい。言い換えれば、造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を周期的に移動させるように加工光EL#2を周期的に移動させる(言い換えれば、偏向する)動作を、ウォブリング動作と称してもよい。但し、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2が周期的に移動するように加工光EL#2を周期的に移動させなくてもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaは、ウォブリング動作を必ずしも行わなくてもよい。 In addition, the operation of periodically moving the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS as shown in Figures 7(a), 8(a), and 8(b), respectively, may be referred to as a wobbling operation. In other words, the operation of periodically moving (or deflecting) the processing light EL#2 so as to periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS may be referred to as a wobbling operation. However, the processing system SYSa does not have to periodically move the processing light EL#2 so as to periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS. In other words, the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation.

 典型的には、加工単位領域PUA#1と加工単位領域PUA#2とは一致している。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#1は、加工単位領域PUA#2と同一である。このため、ガルバノミラー2156は、加工単位領域PUA#1内で目標照射領域EA#2が移動するように加工光EL#2を偏向しているとみなしてもよい。ガルバノミラー2146は、加工単位領域PUA#2内で目標照射領域EA#1が移動するように加工光EL#1を偏向しているとみなしてもよい。但し、加工単位領域PUA#1と加工単位領域PUA#2とは、部分的に異なっていてもよい。 Typically, the processing unit area PUA#1 and the processing unit area PUA#2 are coincident. In other words, the processing unit area PUA#1 is the same as the processing unit area PUA#2. For this reason, the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be considered to be deflecting the processing light EL#2 so that the target irradiation area EA#2 moves within the processing unit area PUA#1. The galvanometer mirror 2146 may be considered to be deflecting the processing light EL#1 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 moves within the processing unit area PUA#2. However, the processing unit area PUA#1 and the processing unit area PUA#2 may be partially different.

 加工単位領域PUA#2の単位で加工光EL#2が造形面MSに照射される場合には、加工単位領域PUA#2の少なくとも一部に溶融池MP#2が形成される。その結果、加工単位領域PUA#2内に造形物が造形される。ここで、上述したように、加工単位領域PUA#2は、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUA#2の移動方向(具体的には、目標移動軌跡MT0が延びる方向)と交差する方向に幅を有する領域である。この場合、加工単位領域PUA#2の目標移動軌跡MT0に交差する方向に沿って幅を有する造形物が造形面MS上に造形される。例えば、図7(a)及び図7(b)に示す例では、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。例えば、図8(a)及び図8(c)に示す例では、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。 When the processing light EL#2 is irradiated to the printing surface MS in units of the processing unit area PUA#2, a molten pool MP#2 is formed in at least a part of the processing unit area PUA#2. As a result, a molded object is molded in the processing unit area PUA#2. As described above, the processing unit area PUA#2 is an area having a width in a direction intersecting with the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA#2 on the printing surface MS (specifically, the direction in which the target movement trajectory MT0 extends). In this case, a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting with the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit area PUA#2 is molded on the printing surface MS. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 7(a) and FIG. 7(b), a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8(a) and FIG. 8(c), a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded.

 加工単位領域PUA#2の単位で加工光EL#2が造形面MSに照射される場合には、ガルバノミラー2156によって加工単位領域PUA#2が加工光EL#2で走査される。このため、ガルバノミラー2156を用いることなく加工光EL#2が造形面MSに照射される場合と比較して、加工光EL#2から加工単位領域PUA#2に伝達されるエネルギ量の大きさが、加工単位領域PUA#2内においてばらつく可能性が低くなる。つまり、加工光EL#2から加工単位領域PUA#2に伝達されるエネルギ量の均一化を図ることができる。その結果、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに造形物を相対的に高い造形精度で造形することができる。 When the processing light EL#2 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#2, the processing unit area PUA#2 is scanned with the processing light EL#2 by the galvanometer mirror 2156. Therefore, compared to when the processing light EL#2 is irradiated onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2156, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#2 to the processing unit area PUA#2 is less likely to vary within the processing unit area PUA#2. In other words, the amount of energy transmitted from the processing light EL#2 to the processing unit area PUA#2 can be made uniform. As a result, the processing system SYSa can form an object on the printing surface MS with relatively high printing accuracy.

 但し、加工システムSYSaは、加工単位領域PUA#2の単位で加工光EL#2を造形面MSに照射しなくてもよい。加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2156を用いることなく、加工光EL#2を造形面MSに照射してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、ウォブリング動作を必ずしも行わなくてもよい。この場合、目標照射領域EA#2は、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方の移動に伴って、造形面MS上を移動してもよい。 However, the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the processing light EL#2 onto the printing surface MS in units of processing unit area PUA#2. The processing system SYSa may irradiate the processing light EL#2 onto the printing surface MS without using the galvanometer mirror 2156. The processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform a wobbling operation. In this case, the target irradiation area EA#2 may move on the printing surface MS in conjunction with the movement of at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31.

 尚、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で目標照射領域EA#2を非周期的に移動させてもよい。 In addition, the processing system SYSa may non-periodically move the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS.

 再び図6において、平行平板2152によって反射された加工光EL#2は、パワーメータ2153に入射する。パワーメータ2153は、加工光EL#2を制御するために用いられる電気部品の一具体例である。具体的には、パワーメータ2153は、パワーメータ2153に入射した加工光EL#2の強度を検出可能である。例えば、パワーメータ2153は、加工光EL#2を光として検出する受光素子を含んでいてもよい。或いは、加工光EL#2の強度が高くなるほど、加工光EL#2が生成するエネルギ量が多くなる。その結果、加工光EL#2が発生する熱量が多くなる。このため、パワーメータ2153は、加工光EL#2を熱として検出することで、加工光EL#2の強度を検出してもよい。この場合、パワーメータ2153は、加工光EL#2の熱を検出する熱検出素子を含んでいてもよい。 In FIG. 6 again, the processing light EL#2 reflected by the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the power meter 2153. The power meter 2153 is a specific example of an electrical component used to control the processing light EL#2. Specifically, the power meter 2153 can detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153. For example, the power meter 2153 may include a light receiving element that detects the processing light EL#2 as light. Alternatively, the higher the intensity of the processing light EL#2, the greater the amount of energy generated by the processing light EL#2. As a result, the amount of heat generated by the processing light EL#2 increases. For this reason, the power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 by detecting the processing light EL#2 as heat. In this case, the power meter 2153 may include a heat detection element that detects the heat of the processing light EL#2.

 上述したように、パワーメータ2153には、平行平板2152によって反射された加工光EL#2が入射する。このため、パワーメータ2153は、平行平板2152によって反射された加工光EL#2の強度を検出する。平行平板2152が光源4#2とガルバノミラー2156との間における加工光EL#2の光路上に配置されているがゆえに、パワーメータ2153は、光源4#2とガルバノミラー2156との間における光路を進行する加工光EL#2の強度を検出しているとみなしてもよい。この場合、パワーメータ2153は、ガルバノミラー2156による加工光EL#2の偏向の影響を受けることなく、加工光EL#2の強度を安定的に検出することができる。但し、パワーメータ2153の配置位置が、図6に示す例に限定されることはない。例えば、パワーメータ2153は、ガルバノミラー2156と造形面MSとの間における光路を進行する加工光EL#2の強度を検出してもよい。パワーメータ2153は、ガルバノミラー2156内における光路を進行する加工光EL#2の強度を検出してもよい。 As described above, the processing light EL#2 reflected by the parallel plate 2152 is incident on the power meter 2153. Therefore, the power meter 2153 detects the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected by the parallel plate 2152. Since the parallel plate 2152 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#2 between the light source 4#2 and the galvanometer mirror 2156, the power meter 2153 may be considered to detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling on the optical path between the light source 4#2 and the galvanometer mirror 2156. In this case, the power meter 2153 can stably detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 without being affected by the deflection of the processing light EL#2 by the galvanometer mirror 2156. However, the position of the power meter 2153 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 6. For example, the power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling along the optical path between the galvanometer mirror 2156 and the printing surface MS. The power meter 2153 may detect the intensity of the processing light EL#2 traveling along the optical path within the galvanometer mirror 2156.

 パワーメータ2153の検出結果は、制御ユニット7に出力される。制御ユニット7は、パワーメータ2153の検出結果(つまり、加工光EL#2の強度の検出結果)に基づいて、加工光EL#2の強度を制御(言い換えれば、変更)してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MSにおける加工光EL#2の強度が所望強度となるように、加工光EL#2の強度を制御してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、造形面MSと材料ノズル212との間の仮想的な材料供給面PLにおける加工光EL#2の強度が所望強度となるように、加工光EL#2の強度を制御してもよい。加工光EL#2の強度を制御するために、例えば、制御ユニット7は、パワーメータ2153の検出結果に基づいて、光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2の強度を変更するように、光源4#2を制御してもよい。その結果、加工システムSYSaは、適切な強度を有する加工光EL#2を造形面MSに照射することで、造形面MSに造形物を適切に造形することができる。 The detection result of the power meter 2153 is output to the control unit 7. The control unit 7 may control (in other words, change) the intensity of the processing light EL#2 based on the detection result of the power meter 2153 (i.e., the detection result of the intensity of the processing light EL#2). For example, the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#2 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS becomes a desired intensity. For example, the control unit 7 may control the intensity of the processing light EL#2 so that the intensity of the processing light EL#2 on the virtual material supply surface PL between the printing surface MS and the material nozzle 212 becomes a desired intensity. To control the intensity of the processing light EL#2, for example, the control unit 7 may control the light source 4#2 so as to change the intensity of the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 based on the detection result of the power meter 2153. As a result, the processing system SYSa can appropriately print a model on the printing surface MS by irradiating the printing surface MS with processing light EL#2 having an appropriate intensity.

 上述したように、加工光EL#2は、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有している。このため、パワーメータ2153に入射する加工光EL#2が、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有する可能性がある。しかしながら、造形材料Mを溶融させることが可能な強度を有する加工光EL#2がパワーメータ2153に入射すると、パワーメータ2153が加工光EL#2によって損傷する可能性がある。このため、パワーメータ2153には、パワーメータ2153を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#2が入射してもよい。言い換えれば、第2光学系215は、パワーメータ2153を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#2がパワーメータ2153に入射するように、パワーメータ2153に入射する加工光EL#2の強度を弱めてもよい。 As described above, the processing light EL#2 has an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. Therefore, the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153 may have an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M. However, when the processing light EL#2 having an intensity capable of melting the modeling material M is incident on the power meter 2153, the power meter 2153 may be damaged by the processing light EL#2. Therefore, the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 may be incident on the power meter 2153. In other words, the second optical system 215 may weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153 so that the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 is incident on the power meter 2153.

 例えば、パワーメータ2153に入射する加工光EL#2の強度を弱めるために、加工光EL#2に対する平行平板2152の反射率が適切な値に設定されていてもよい。具体的には、加工光EL#2に対する平行平板2152の反射率が低くなればなるほど、パワーメータ2153に入射する加工光EL#2の強度が低くなる。このため、平行平板2152の反射率は、パワーメータ2153を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#2がパワーメータ2153に入射する状態を実現することが可能な程度に低い値に設定されていてもよい。例えば、平行平板2152の反射率は、10%未満であってもよい。例えば、平行平板2152の反射率は、数%未満であってもよい。このような反射率が低い平行平板2152として、素ガラスが用いられてもよい。 For example, in order to weaken the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 for the processing light EL#2 may be set to an appropriate value. Specifically, the lower the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 for the processing light EL#2, the lower the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153. For this reason, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be set to a value low enough to realize a state in which the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 is incident on the power meter 2153. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be less than 10%. For example, the reflectance of the parallel plate 2152 may be less than a few percent. Plain glass may be used as the parallel plate 2152 with such low reflectance.

 例えば、パワーメータ2153に入射する加工光EL#2の強度を弱めるために、第2光学系215は、複数の平行平板2152を介して、加工光EL#2をパワーメータ2153に入射させてもよい。具体的には、複数の平行平板2152によってそれぞれ複数回反射された加工光EL#2が、パワーメータ2153に入射してもよい。この場合、複数の平行平板2152によってそれぞれ複数回反射された加工光EL#2の強度は、一枚の平行平板2152によって一回反射された加工光EL#2の強度よりも弱くなる。このため、パワーメータ2153を損傷させるほどには高くない強度を有する加工光EL#2がパワーメータ2153に入射する可能性が高くなる。 For example, in order to reduce the intensity of the processing light EL#2 incident on the power meter 2153, the second optical system 215 may cause the processing light EL#2 to be incident on the power meter 2153 via multiple parallel plates 2152. Specifically, the processing light EL#2 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2152 may be incident on the power meter 2153. In this case, the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected multiple times by each of the multiple parallel plates 2152 is weaker than the intensity of the processing light EL#2 reflected once by a single parallel plate 2152. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the processing light EL#2 having an intensity not high enough to damage the power meter 2153 will be incident on the power meter 2153.

 平行平板2152の表面(特に、加工光EL#2が入射する入射面及び加工光EL#2が反射される反射面の少なくとも一つ)には、所望のコーティング処理が施されていてもよい。例えば、平行平板2152の表面には、反射防止コーティング処理(AR:Anti Reflection Coating)が施されていてもよい。 The surface of the parallel plate 2152 (particularly, at least one of the incident surface on which the processing light EL#2 is incident and the reflecting surface on which the processing light EL#2 is reflected) may be subjected to a desired coating treatment. For example, the surface of the parallel plate 2152 may be subjected to an anti-reflection coating (AR).

 第3光学系216は、プリズムミラー2161と、fθレンズ2162とを備える。 The third optical system 216 includes a prism mirror 2161 and an fθ lens 2162.

 第1光学系214から射出された加工光EL#1及び第2光学系215から射出された加工光EL#2のそれぞれは、プリズムミラー2161に入射する。プリズムミラー2161は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを、fθレンズ2162に向けて反射する。プリズムミラー2161は、それぞれ異なる方向からプリズムミラー2161に入射してくる加工光EL#1及びEL#2を、ほぼ同じ方向に向けて(具体的には、fθレンズ2162に向けて)反射する。 Processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 each enter the prism mirror 2161. The prism mirror 2161 reflects processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward the fθ lens 2162. The prism mirror 2161 reflects processing light EL#1 and EL#2, which enter the prism mirror 2161 from different directions, in approximately the same direction (specifically, toward the fθ lens 2162).

 尚、第1光学系214から射出された加工光EL#1及び第2光学系215から射出された加工光EL#2のそれぞれが直接的にfθレンズ2162に入射可能である場合には、第3光学系216は、プリズムミラー2161を備えていなくてもよい。 In addition, if the processing light EL#1 emitted from the first optical system 214 and the processing light EL#2 emitted from the second optical system 215 can each be directly incident on the fθ lens 2162, the third optical system 216 does not need to be equipped with a prism mirror 2161.

 fθレンズ2162は、プリズムミラー2161が反射した加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを造形面MSに向けて射出するための光学系である。つまり、fθレンズ2162は、プリズムミラー2161が反射した加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを造形面MSに照射するための光学系である。その結果、fθレンズ2162を通過した加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、造形面MSに照射される。 The fθ lens 2162 is an optical system for emitting each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 reflected by the prism mirror 2161 toward the printing surface MS. In other words, the fθ lens 2162 is an optical system for irradiating each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 reflected by the prism mirror 2161 onto the printing surface MS. As a result, the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 that pass through the fθ lens 2162 are irradiated onto the printing surface MS.

 fθレンズ2162は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを、集光面に集光可能な光学素子であってもよい。この場合、fθレンズ2162は、集光光学系と称されてもよい。fθレンズ2162の集光面は、例えば、造形面MSに設定されてもよい。この場合、第3光学系216は、射影特性がfθとなる集光光学系を備えているとみなしてもよい。但し、第3光学系216は、射影特性がfθとは異なる特性となる集光光学系を備えていてもよい。例えば、第3光学系216は、射影特性がf・tanθとなる集光光学系を備えていてもよい。例えば、第3光学系216は、射影特性がf・sinθとなる集光光学系を備えていてもよい。 The fθ lens 2162 may be an optical element capable of focusing each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 on a focusing surface. In this case, the fθ lens 2162 may be referred to as a focusing optical system. The focusing surface of the fθ lens 2162 may be set, for example, on the printing surface MS. In this case, the third optical system 216 may be considered to have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is fθ. However, the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is different from fθ. For example, the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is f·tanθ. For example, the third optical system 216 may have a focusing optical system whose projection characteristic is f·sinθ.

 fθレンズ2162の光軸AXは、Z軸に沿った軸である。このため、fθレンズ2162は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを、ほぼZ軸方向に沿って射出する。この場合、加工光EL#1の照射方向と、加工光EL#2の照射方向とは、同一の方向であってもよい。加工光EL#1の照射方向と、加工光EL#2の照射方向とは、共にZ軸方向であってもよい。加工光EL#1の照射方向と、加工光EL#2の照射方向とは、共にfθレンズ2162の光軸AXに沿った方向であってもよい。但し、加工光EL#1の照射方向と、加工光EL#2の照射方向とは、同一の方向でなくてもよい。加工光EL#1の照射方向と、加工光EL#2の照射方向とは、互いに異なる方向であってもよい。 The optical axis AX of the fθ lens 2162 is an axis along the Z axis. Therefore, the fθ lens 2162 emits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 approximately along the Z axis direction. In this case, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be the same direction. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may both be the Z axis direction. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may both be directions along the optical axis AX of the fθ lens 2162. However, the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 do not have to be the same direction. The irradiation direction of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation direction of the processing light EL#2 may be different directions from each other.

 (1-3)加工システムSYSが行う造形動作
 続いて、加工システムSYSが行う造形動作(ワークWに対して付加加工を行う付加加工動作)について説明する。
(1-3) Modeling Operation Performed by the Machining System SYS Next, a modeling operation (additional machining operation for performing additional machining on the workpiece W) performed by the machining system SYS will be described.

 (1-3-1)造形動作の概要
 上述したように、加工システムSYSaは、レーザ肉盛溶接法に基づく付加加工を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形する。このため、加工システムSYSaは、レーザ肉盛溶接法に準拠した造形動作を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。
(1-3-1) Overview of the Modeling Operation As described above, the processing system SYSa performs additional processing based on the laser build-up welding method to model the three-dimensional structure ST. Therefore, the processing system SYSa may perform a modeling operation conforming to the laser build-up welding method to model the three-dimensional structure ST.

 加工システムSYSaは、造形するべき三次元構造物STの三次元モデルデータ(言い換えれば、三次元モデル情報)等に基づいて、ワークW上に三次元構造物STを造形する。三次元モデルデータとして、加工システムSYSa内に設けられた計測装置及び加工システムSYSaとは別に設けられた三次元形状計測機の少なくとも一方で計測された立体物の計測データが用いられてもよい。加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STを造形するために、例えば、Z軸方向に沿って並ぶ複数の構造層SLを順に造形していく。例えば、加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STの三次元モデルをZ軸方向に沿って輪切りにすることで得られる複数の層のデータに基づいて複数の構造層SLを1層ずつ順に造形していく。その結果、複数の構造層SLが積層された積層構造体である三次元構造物STが造形される。尚、構造層SLは、必ずしも層状の形状を有する造形物でなくてもよい。 The processing system SYSa forms a three-dimensional structure ST on the workpiece W based on three-dimensional model data (in other words, three-dimensional model information) of the three-dimensional structure ST to be formed. As the three-dimensional model data, measurement data of a solid object measured by at least one of a measuring device provided in the processing system SYSa and a three-dimensional shape measuring device provided separately from the processing system SYSa may be used. In order to form the three-dimensional structure ST, the processing system SYSa, for example, sequentially forms multiple structural layers SL arranged along the Z-axis direction. For example, the processing system SYSa sequentially forms multiple structural layers SL one by one based on multiple layer data obtained by slicing the three-dimensional model of the three-dimensional structure ST along the Z-axis direction. As a result, a three-dimensional structure ST that is a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked is formed. The structural layers SL do not necessarily have to be objects having a layered shape.

 第1実施形態では特に、加工システムSYSa(主として、加工ユニット2)は、造形動作として、第1造形動作及び第2造形動作の少なくとも一つを行ってもよい。第1造形動作及び第2造形動作は、第1造形動作によって三次元構造物STを造形するための方法が、第2造形動作によって三次元構造物STを造形するための方法とは異なるという点で互いに異なっていてもよい。特に、第1造形動作及び第2造形動作は、第1造形動作によって各構造層SLを造形するための方法が、第2造形動作によって各構造層SLを造形するための方法とは異なるという点で互いに異なっていてもよい。 In particular, in the first embodiment, the processing system SYSa (mainly, the processing unit 2) may perform at least one of a first modeling operation and a second modeling operation as a modeling operation. The first modeling operation and the second modeling operation may differ from each other in that a method for modeling a three-dimensional structure ST by the first modeling operation is different from a method for modeling a three-dimensional structure ST by the second modeling operation. In particular, the first modeling operation and the second modeling operation may differ from each other in that a method for modeling each structural layer SL by the first modeling operation is different from a method for modeling each structural layer SL by the second modeling operation.

 加工システムSYSaは、第1造形動作を行うことなく、第2造形動作を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、第1造形動作を行うことなく、第2造形動作を行うことで、各構造層SLを造形してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、第2造形動作を行うことなく、第1造形動作を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、第2造形動作を行うことなく、第1造形動作を行うことで、各構造層SLを造形してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、第1及び第2造形動作の双方を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。加工システムSYSaは、第1及び第2造形動作の双方を行うことで、各構造層SLを造形してもよい。 The processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing the second modeling operation without performing the first modeling operation. The processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing the second modeling operation without performing the first modeling operation. The processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing the first modeling operation without performing the second modeling operation. The processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing the first modeling operation without performing the second modeling operation. The processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing both the first and second modeling operations. The processing system SYSa may form each structural layer SL by performing both the first and second modeling operations.

 以下、第1造形動作と第2造形動作とについて順に説明する。 The first modeling operation and the second modeling operation will be explained below in order.

 (1-3-2)第1造形動作
 第1造形動作は、造形面MSに加工光ELを照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成すると共に、形成した溶融池MPに造形材料Mを供給することで、造形面MS上に造形物を造形する造形動作である。つまり、第1造形動作は、造形面MS上に造形物を造形するために、造形面MSに加工光ELを照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成し、形成した溶融池MPに造形材料Mを供給する造形動作である。
(1-3-2) First Modeling Operation The first modeling operation is a modeling operation in which a molten pool MP is formed on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with processing light EL, and modeling an object on the modeling surface MS by supplying modeling material M to the formed molten pool MP. In other words, the first modeling operation is a modeling operation in which, in order to model an object on the modeling surface MS, a molten pool MP is formed on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with processing light EL, and modeling material M is supplied to the formed molten pool MP.

 まず、第1造形動作を行うことで各構造層SLを造形する動作について、図9(a)から図9(e)を参照して説明する。加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、ワークWの表面又は造形済みの構造層SLの表面に相当する造形面MS上の所望領域に加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が設定されるように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させる。その後、照射光学系211は、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2に加工光EL#1及びEL#2をそれぞれ照射する。この際、Z軸方向において加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1及び加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2は、造形面MSに一致していてもよい。或いは、Z軸方向において、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1及び加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2は、造形面MSから離れていてもよい。その結果、図9(a)に示すように、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が照射された造形面MS上に溶融池MP#1及びMP#2がそれぞれ形成される。更に、図9(b)に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、材料ノズル212から造形材料Mを供給する。その結果、溶融池MP#1及びMP#2のそれぞれに造形材料Mが供給される。 First, the operation of forming each structural layer SL by performing the first forming operation will be described with reference to Fig. 9(a) to Fig. 9(e). Under the control of the control unit 7, the processing system SYSa moves at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set in the desired area on the forming surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W or the surface of the formed structural layer SL. After that, the irradiation optical system 211 irradiates the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 with the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, respectively. At this time, the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the Z-axis direction may coincide with the forming surface MS. Alternatively, the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 in the Z-axis direction may be away from the forming surface MS. As a result, as shown in Fig. 9(a), molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 are formed on the printing surface MS irradiated with the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, respectively. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 9(b), the processing system SYSa supplies printing material M from the material nozzle 212 under the control of the control unit 7. As a result, printing material M is supplied to each of the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2.

 溶融池MP#1に供給された造形材料Mは、溶融池MP#1に照射されている加工光EL#1によって溶融する。或いは、溶融池MP#1に供給された造形材料Mは、加工光EL#1によって形成された溶融池MP#1によって溶融する。尚、造形材料Mが溶融池MP#1によって溶融する場合においても、溶融池MP#1が加工光EL#1によって形成されているがゆえに、造形材料Mは、溶融池MP#1を形成した加工光EL#1によって溶融されているとみなしてもよい。つまり、造形材料Mは、加工光EL#1が形成した溶融池MP#1を介して、加工光EL#1によって間接的に溶融されているとみなしてもよい。いずれの場合も、造形材料Mが加工光EL#1のエネルギによって溶融されていることに変わりはない。 The modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#1 is melted by the processing light EL#1 irradiated onto the molten pool MP#1. Alternatively, the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#1 is melted by the molten pool MP#1 formed by the processing light EL#1. Even when the modeling material M is melted by the molten pool MP#1, since the molten pool MP#1 is formed by the processing light EL#1, the modeling material M may be considered to be melted by the processing light EL#1 that formed the molten pool MP#1. In other words, the modeling material M may be considered to be indirectly melted by the processing light EL#1 via the molten pool MP#1 formed by the processing light EL#1. In either case, the fact remains that the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL#1.

 同様に、溶融池MP#2に供給された造形材料Mは、溶融池MP#2に照射されている加工光EL#2によって溶融する。或いは、溶融池MP#2に供給された造形材料Mは、加工光EL#2によって形成された溶融池MP#2によって溶融する。尚、造形材料Mが溶融池MP#2によって溶融する場合においても、溶融池MP#2が加工光EL#2によって形成されているがゆえに、造形材料Mは、溶融池MP#2を形成した加工光EL#2によって溶融されているとみなしてもよい。つまり、造形材料Mは、加工光EL#2が形成した溶融池MP#2を介して、加工光EL#2によって間接的に溶融されているとみなしてもよい。いずれの場合も、造形材料Mが加工光EL#1のエネルギによって溶融されていることに変わりはない。 Similarly, the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#2 is melted by the processing light EL#2 irradiated onto the molten pool MP#2. Alternatively, the modeling material M supplied to the molten pool MP#2 is melted by the molten pool MP#2 formed by the processing light EL#2. Note that even when the modeling material M is melted by the molten pool MP#2, since the molten pool MP#2 is formed by the processing light EL#2, the modeling material M may be considered to be melted by the processing light EL#2 that formed the molten pool MP#2. In other words, the modeling material M may be considered to be indirectly melted by the processing light EL#2 via the molten pool MP#2 formed by the processing light EL#2. In either case, the fact remains that the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL#1.

 更に、照射光学系211は、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を用いて、それぞれ、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内で目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2を移動させる。つまり、照射光学系211は、それぞれ、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を用いて、それぞれ、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2を加工光EL#1及びEL#2で走査する。目標照射領域EA#1の移動に伴って溶融池MP#1に加工光EL#1が照射されなくなると、溶融池MP#1において溶融した造形材料Mは、冷却されて固化(つまり、凝固)する。同様に、目標照射領域EA#2の移動に伴って溶融池MP#2に加工光EL#2が照射されなくなると、溶融池MP#2において溶融した造形材料Mは、冷却されて固化(つまり、凝固)する。更に、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2の移動に伴って、溶融池MP#1及びMP#2もまた移動する。その結果、図9(c)に示すように、溶融池MP#1及びMP#2が移動する加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内において、固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物が造形面MS上に堆積される。 Furthermore, the irradiation optical system 211 uses the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 to move the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively. That is, the irradiation optical system 211 uses the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 to scan the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 with the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, respectively. When the processing light EL#1 is no longer irradiated to the molten pool MP#1 as the target irradiation area EA#1 moves, the molten modeling material M melted in the molten pool MP#1 is cooled and solidified (i.e., solidified). Similarly, when the processing light EL#2 is no longer irradiated to the molten pool MP#2 as the target irradiation area EA#2 moves, the molten modeling material M melted in the molten pool MP#2 is cooled and solidified (i.e., solidified). Furthermore, as the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 move, the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 also move. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9(c), within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 through which the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2 move, a molded object made of solidified molding material M is deposited on the molding surface MS.

 尚、図9(c)では、説明の便宜上、加工単位領域PUA#1内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物と、加工単位領域PUA#2内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物とが物理的に分離している。しかしながら、加工単位領域PUA#1内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物と、加工単位領域PUA#2内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物とが一体化していてもよい。特に、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が一致している(或いは、部分的に重複している)場合には、加工単位領域PUA#1内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物と、加工単位領域PUA#2内において固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物とが一体化していてもよい。 9(c), for ease of explanation, the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 are physically separated. However, the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 may be integrated together. In particular, when the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 coincide (or partially overlap), the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#1 and the object made of the solidified modeling material M in the processing unit area PUA#2 may be integrated together.

 加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内で目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2がそれぞれ移動している期間中において、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上を加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が移動するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaは、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内での目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2のそれぞれの移動と、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2の移動とを並行して行ってもよい。 During the period when the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 are moving within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively, the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move on the printing surface MS. In other words, the processing system SYSa may move the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively, and move the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 on the printing surface MS in parallel.

 或いは、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内で目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2がそれぞれ移動している期間中において、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上を加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が移動しないように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31を移動させなくてもよい。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内で目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2がそれぞれ移動している期間中において、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31が停止していてもよい。この場合、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内での付加加工(つまり、造形)が完了した後には、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上の別の領域に加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が設定されるように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaは、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2内での付加加工(つまり、造形)が完了した後に、造形面MS上において加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が移動するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で既に加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が設定された領域(つまり、付加加工が既に行われた領域)と、造形面MS上で加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が新たに設定された領域(つまり、付加加工が今から行われる領域)とが隣接するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。特に、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で既に加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が設定された領域と、造形面MS上で加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が新たに設定された領域とが重複しないように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。但し、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MS上で既に加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が設定された領域と、造形面MS上で加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が新たに設定された領域とが部分的に重複するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。 Alternatively, during the period when the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 are moving within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively, the processing system SYSa may not move the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 do not move on the printing surface MS. In other words, during the period when the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 are moving within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2, respectively, the processing head 21 and the stage 31 may be stopped. In this case, after the additional processing (i.e., printing) within the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 is completed, the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set in another area on the printing surface MS. That is, the machining system SYSa may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move on the printing surface MS after the additional machining (i.e., printing) in the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 is completed. In this case, the machining system SYSa may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set (i.e., the area where the additional machining has already been performed) and the area on the printing surface MS where the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set (i.e., the area where the additional machining is to be performed) are adjacent to each other. In particular, the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set does not overlap with the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set. However, the processing system SYSa may move at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have already been set partially overlaps with the area on the printing surface MS where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 have newly been set.

 加工システムSYSaは、加工単位領域PUA#1内での加工光EL#1の照射による溶融池MP#1の形成、加工単位領域PUA#2内での加工光EL#2の照射による溶融池MP#2の形成、溶融池MP#1及びMP#2への造形材料Mの供給、供給された造形材料Mの溶融及び溶融した造形材料Mの固化を含む一連の造形処理を、図9(d)に示すように、造形面MS上で加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2を目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動させながら繰り返す。この場合、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2のそれぞれの移動に伴い、目標移動軌跡MT0に交差する方向に沿って幅を有する造形物が造形面MS上に造形される。例えば、図7(a)及び図7(b)に示すように加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2のそれぞれが移動する場合には、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。例えば、図8(a)及び図8(c)に示すように加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2のそれぞれが移動する場合には、X軸方向に沿って幅を有すると共にY軸方向に沿って延びる造形物が造形される。 The machining system SYSa repeats a series of molding processes, including forming a molten pool MP#1 by irradiating the machining unit area PUA#1 with the machining light EL#1, forming a molten pool MP#2 by irradiating the machining unit area PUA#2 with the machining light EL#2, supplying the molding material M to the molten pools MP#1 and MP#2, melting the supplied molding material M, and solidifying the molten molding material M, while moving the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS, as shown in FIG. 9(d). In this case, as the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move, a molded object having a width along a direction intersecting the target movement trajectory MT0 is molded on the printing surface MS. For example, when the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move as shown in FIG. 7(a) and FIG. 7(b), a molded object having a width along the X-axis direction and extending along the Y-axis direction is molded. For example, when the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 move as shown in Figures 8(a) and 8(c), respectively, a structure that has a width along the X-axis direction and extends along the Y-axis direction is formed.

 その結果、図9(e)に示すように、造形面MS上に、溶融した後に固化した造形材料Mの集合体である造形物に相当する構造層SLが造形される。つまり、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2の目標移動軌跡MT0に応じたパターンで造形面MS上に造形された造形物の集合体に相当する構造層SLが造形される。つまり、平面視において、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2の目標移動軌跡MT0に応じた形状を有する構造層SLが造形される。 As a result, as shown in FIG. 9(e), a structural layer SL is formed on the printing surface MS, which corresponds to a structure that is an aggregate of the melted and then solidified printing material M. In other words, a structural layer SL is formed on the printing surface MS, which corresponds to an aggregate of objects printed in a pattern corresponding to the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2. In other words, in plan view, a structural layer SL having a shape corresponding to the target movement trajectory MT0 of the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 is formed.

 尚、造形物を造形したくない領域に目標照射領域EA#1が設定されている場合、加工システムSYSaは、目標照射領域EA#1に、加工光EL#1を照射しなくてもよい。或いは、加工システムSYSaは、加工光EL#1を目標照射領域EA#1に照射すると共に、造形材料Mの供給を停止してもよい。或いは、加工システムSYSaは、造形材料Mを目標照射領域EA#1に供給すると共に、溶融池MPができない強度の加工光EL#1を目標照射領域EA#1に照射してもよい。造形物を造形したくない領域に目標照射領域EA#2が設定されている場合も同様である。 In addition, when the target irradiation area EA#1 is set in an area where it is not desired to form an object, the processing system SYSa does not have to irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1. Alternatively, the processing system SYSa may irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1 and stop the supply of the forming material M. Alternatively, the processing system SYSa may supply the forming material M to the target irradiation area EA#1 and irradiate the target irradiation area EA#1 with the processing light EL#1 of an intensity that does not create a molten pool MP. The same applies when the target irradiation area EA#2 is set in an area where it is not desired to form an object.

 加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2のそれぞれの目標移動軌跡MT0は、加工パス(言い換えれば、ツールパス)と称されてもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7は、目標移動軌跡MT0を示すパス情報(つまり、加工パスを示すパス情報)に基づいて、造形面MS上において加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2のそれぞれが目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動するように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させてもよい。 The target movement trajectory MT0 of each of the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 may be referred to as a machining path (in other words, a tool path). In this case, the control unit 7 may move at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 based on path information indicating the target movement trajectory MT0 (i.e., path information indicating the machining path) so that each of the machining unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 moves along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the printing surface MS.

 加工システムSYSaは、このような構造層SLを造形するための動作を、制御ユニット7の制御下で、三次元モデルデータに基づいて繰り返し行う。具体的には、まず、制御ユニット7は、構造層SLを造形するための動作を行う前に、三次元モデルデータを積層ピッチでスライス処理してスライスデータを作成する。加工システムSYSaは、ワークWの表面に相当する造形面MS上に1層目の構造層SL#1を造形するための動作を、構造層SL#1に対応するスライスデータに基づいて行う。具体的には、制御ユニット7は、構造層SL#1に対応するスライスデータに基づいて生成された、1層目の構造層SL#1を造形するためのパス情報を取得する。その後、制御ユニット7は、パス情報に基づいて、1層目の構造層SL#1を造形するように加工ユニット2及びステージユニット3を制御する。その結果、造形面MS上には、図10(a)に示すように、構造層SL#1が造形される。その後、加工システムSYSaは、構造層SL#1の表面(つまり、上面)を新たな造形面MSに設定した上で、当該新たな造形面MS上に2層目の構造層SL#2を造形する。構造層SL#2を造形するために、制御ユニット7は、まず、ステージ31に対して加工ヘッド21がZ軸に沿って移動するように、ヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御する。具体的には、制御ユニット7は、ヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御して、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が構造層SL#1の表面(つまり、新たな造形面MS)に設定されるように、+Z側に向かって加工ヘッド21を移動させる及び/又は-Z側に向かってステージ31を移動させる。その後、加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、構造層SL#1を造形する動作と同様の動作で、構造層SL#2に対応するスライスデータに基づいて、構造層SL#1上に構造層SL#2を造形する。その結果、図10(b)に示すように、構造層SL#2が造形される。以降、同様の動作が、ワークW上に造形するべき三次元構造物STを構成する全ての構造層SLが造形されるまで繰り返される。その結果、図10(c)に示すように、複数の構造層SLが積層された積層構造物によって、三次元構造物STが造形される。 The processing system SYSa repeatedly performs operations for forming such a structural layer SL based on the three-dimensional model data under the control of the control unit 7. Specifically, first, before performing operations for forming the structural layer SL, the control unit 7 slices the three-dimensional model data at the layer pitch to create slice data. The processing system SYSa performs operations for forming the first structural layer SL#1 on the forming surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W based on the slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#1. Specifically, the control unit 7 acquires path information for forming the first structural layer SL#1, which is generated based on the slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#1. Then, the control unit 7 controls the processing unit 2 and the stage unit 3 to form the first structural layer SL#1 based on the path information. As a result, the structural layer SL#1 is formed on the forming surface MS, as shown in FIG. 10(a). Thereafter, the processing system SYSa sets the surface (i.e., the upper surface) of the structure layer SL#1 as a new printing surface MS, and then forms the second structure layer SL#2 on the new printing surface MS. In order to form the structure layer SL#2, the control unit 7 first controls at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing head 21 moves along the Z axis relative to the stage 31. Specifically, the control unit 7 controls at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 to move the processing head 21 toward the +Z side and/or move the stage 31 toward the -Z side so that the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 are set on the surface of the structure layer SL#1 (i.e., the new printing surface MS). Thereafter, under the control of the control unit 7, the processing system SYSa forms a structural layer SL#2 on the structural layer SL#1 based on slice data corresponding to the structural layer SL#2 in a manner similar to the operation for forming the structural layer SL#1. As a result, the structural layer SL#2 is formed as shown in FIG. 10(b). Thereafter, the same operation is repeated until all the structural layers SL constituting the three-dimensional structure ST to be formed on the workpiece W are formed. As a result, the three-dimensional structure ST is formed by a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked, as shown in FIG. 10(c).

 (1-3-3)第2造形動作
 上述した第1造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに加工光ELを照射することで、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成している。一方で、第2造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに溶融池MPを形成するために、造形面MSに加工光ELを必ずしも照射しなくてよい。第2造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに加工光ELを照射することで溶融池MPを形成する動作を必ずしも行わなくてもよい。更に、上述した第1造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSに形成した溶融池MPに対して造形材料Mを供給することで、溶融池MPにおいて造形材料Mを溶融させている。つまり、上述した第1造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSにおいて造形材料Mを溶融させている。一方で、第2造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形面MSにおいて造形材料Mを溶融させなくてもよい。
(1-3-3) Second Modeling Operation In the first modeling operation described above, the processing system SYSa forms a molten pool MP on the modeling surface MS by irradiating the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL. On the other hand, in the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to irradiate the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL in order to form a molten pool MP on the modeling surface MS. In the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa does not necessarily have to perform the operation of forming a molten pool MP by irradiating the modeling surface MS with the processing light EL. Furthermore, in the first modeling operation described above, the processing system SYSa supplies the modeling material M to the molten pool MP formed on the modeling surface MS, thereby melting the modeling material M in the molten pool MP. In other words, in the first modeling operation described above, the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M on the modeling surface MS. On the other hand, in the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa does not need to melt the modeling material M on the modeling surface MS.

 具体的には、第2造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、造形材料Mが造形面MSに到達する前に、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において造形材料Mを溶融させる。つまり、第2造形動作では、加工システムSYSaは、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において造形材料Mに加工光ELを照射することで、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において造形材料Mを溶融させる。言い換えれば、第2造形動作では、造形材料Mは、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において、加工光ELのエネルギによって溶融される。材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において溶融した造形材料Mは、造形面MSに供給される。このため、加工システムSYSaは、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において溶融した造形材料Mを、造形面MSに供給する。従って、以上説明した第2造形動作の説明をまとめると、第2造形動作は、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において造形材料Mに加工光ELを照射することで造形材料Mを溶融し、溶融した造形材料Mを造形面MSに供給することで造形面MS上に造形物を造形する動作であってもよい。 Specifically, in the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS before the modeling material M reaches the modeling surface MS. In other words, in the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa melts the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS by irradiating the processing light EL onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS. In other words, in the second modeling operation, the modeling material M is melted by the energy of the processing light EL in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS. The modeling material M melted in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS is supplied to the modeling surface MS. For this reason, the processing system SYSa supplies the modeling material M melted in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS to the modeling surface MS. Therefore, to summarize the above description of the second modeling operation, the second modeling operation may be an operation in which the modeling material M is melted by irradiating the processing light EL onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS, and the molten modeling material M is supplied to the modeling surface MS to form a model on the modeling surface MS.

 第2造形動作を行うことで各構造層SLを造形するために、加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、ワークWの表面又は造形済みの構造層SLの表面に相当する造形面MS上の所望領域に、溶融した造形材料Mが供給されるように、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させる。その後、図11(a)に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、照射光学系211から加工光EL#1及びEL#2を射出する。更に、図11(a)に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、制御ユニット7の制御下で、材料ノズル212から造形材料Mを供給する。 In order to form each structural layer SL by performing the second modeling operation, the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, moves at least one of the processing head 21 and the stage 31 so that molten modeling material M is supplied to a desired area on the modeling surface MS corresponding to the surface of the workpiece W or the surface of the modeled structural layer SL. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, emits processing light EL#1 and EL#2 from the irradiation optical system 211. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the processing system SYSa, under the control of the control unit 7, supplies modeling material M from the material nozzle 212.

 その結果、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において、造形材料Mに加工光EL#1及びEL#2の少なくとも一方が照射される。尚、以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間の空間において、造形材料Mに加工光EL#1及びEL#2の少なくとも一方が照射される位置に位置する仮想的な材料供給面PLを、材料照射面ESと称する。この場合、図11(a)に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、材料照射面ESに加工光EL#1及びEL#2を照射し、且つ、材料照射面ESに造形材料Mを供給しているとみなしてもよい。但し、材料照射面ESが物理的な面ではないがゆえに、材料照射面ESに照射された加工光EL#1及びEL#2は、材料照射面ESを通過し、材料照射面ESに供給された造形材料Mは、材料照射面ESを通過する。このため、加工システムSYSaは、材料照射面ESを加工光EL#1及びEL#2が通過するように、加工光EL#1及びEL#2を射出し、且つ、材料照射面ESを造形材料Mが通過するように、造形材料Mを供給しているとみなしてもよい。 As a result, at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is irradiated onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the virtual material supply surface PL located at the position where at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is irradiated onto the modeling material M in the space between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS is referred to as the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the processing system SYSa may be considered to irradiate the material irradiation surface ES with the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 and to supply the modeling material M to the material irradiation surface ES. However, since the material irradiation surface ES is not a physical surface, the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 irradiated onto the material irradiation surface ES pass through the material irradiation surface ES, and the modeling material M supplied to the material irradiation surface ES passes through the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the processing system SYSa may be considered to emit the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 so that they pass through the material irradiation surface ES, and to supply the modeling material M so that the modeling material M passes through the material irradiation surface ES.

 材料照射面ESにおいて造形材料Mに加工光EL#1及びEL#2の少なくとも一方が照射されると、図11(a)に示すように、材料照射面ESにおいて造形材料Mが溶融する。材料照射面ESにおいて溶融した造形材料Mは、材料照射面ESから造形面MSに供給される。その結果、造形面MS上に、材料照射面ESにおいて溶融した造形材料Mが付着する。この場合、造形面MS上に、材料照射面ESにおいて溶融した造形材料Mによって溶融池MPが形成されているとみなしてもよい。但し、第2造形動作では、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)が加工光ELによって直接的に溶融されることは殆どないがゆえに、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)の内部に溶融池MPが進入することは殆どない。或いは、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)の内部への溶融池MPの進入量は、相対的に少ない。一方で、第1造形動作では、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)が加工光ELによって溶融されるがゆえに、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)の内部に溶融池MPが進入する可能性が高い。更には、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)の内部への溶融池MPの進入量は、相対的に多い。このため、第2造形動作において溶融池MPが形成されるとみなす場合、形成される溶融池MPの深さは、典型的には、第1造形動作において形成される溶融池MPの深さよりも浅くなる。 When at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is irradiated onto the forming material M on the material irradiation surface ES, the forming material M melts on the material irradiation surface ES as shown in FIG. 11(a). The forming material M melted on the material irradiation surface ES is supplied from the material irradiation surface ES to the forming surface MS. As a result, the forming material M melted on the material irradiation surface ES adheres to the forming surface MS. In this case, it may be considered that a molten pool MP is formed on the forming surface MS by the forming material M melted on the material irradiation surface ES. However, in the second forming operation, since an object having the forming surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL) is rarely directly melted by the processing light EL, the molten pool MP rarely penetrates into the interior of an object having the forming surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL). Alternatively, the amount of penetration of the molten pool MP into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL) is relatively small. On the other hand, in the first printing operation, since the object having the printing surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL) is melted by the processing light EL, there is a high possibility that the molten pool MP will penetrate into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL). Furthermore, the amount of penetration of the molten pool MP into the interior of the object having the printing surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL) is relatively large. For this reason, when it is considered that the molten pool MP is formed in the second printing operation, the depth of the molten pool MP formed is typically shallower than the depth of the molten pool MP formed in the first printing operation.

 その後、造形面MSに供給された造形材料Mは、冷却されて固化(つまり、凝固)する。その結果、図11(b)に示すように、固化した造形材料Mから構成される造形物が造形面MS上に堆積される。 Then, the modeling material M supplied to the modeling surface MS is cooled and solidified (i.e., coagulated). As a result, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a model made of the solidified modeling material M is deposited on the modeling surface MS.

 加工システムSYSaは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2の照射による材料照射面ESでの造形材料Mの溶融、溶融した造形材料Mの造形面MSへの供給及び溶融した造形材料Mの造形面MSでの固化を含む一連の造形処理を、図11(c)に示すように、造形面MSに対して加工ヘッド21を移動させながら繰り返す。特に、加工システムSYSaは、一連の造形処理を、造形面MSに対して加工ヘッド21をX軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一方に沿って移動させながら繰り返す。この場合、加工ヘッド21の移動に伴い、加工ヘッド21の移動方向に交差する方向に沿って幅を有する造形物が造形面MS上に造形される。その結果、図11(d)に示すように、造形面MS上に、溶融した後に固化した造形材料Mの集合体である造形物に相当する構造層SLが造形される。加工ヘッド21の移動軌跡に応じたパターンで造形面MS上に造形された造形物の集合体に相当する構造層SLが造形される。つまり、平面視において、加工ヘッド21の移動軌跡に応じた形状を有する構造層SLが造形される。 The processing system SYSa repeats a series of modeling processes, including melting the modeling material M on the material irradiation surface ES by irradiating the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, supplying the molten modeling material M to the modeling surface MS, and solidifying the molten modeling material M on the modeling surface MS, while moving the processing head 21 relative to the modeling surface MS, as shown in FIG. 11(c). In particular, the processing system SYSa repeats a series of modeling processes while moving the processing head 21 relative to the modeling surface MS along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. In this case, as the processing head 21 moves, a model having a width along a direction intersecting the movement direction of the processing head 21 is modeled on the modeling surface MS. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11(d), a structure layer SL corresponding to a model that is an aggregate of the melted and then solidified modeling material M is formed on the modeling surface MS. A structure layer SL corresponding to an aggregate of the models formed on the modeling surface MS in a pattern according to the movement trajectory of the processing head 21 is formed. In other words, a structural layer SL is formed that has a shape corresponding to the movement trajectory of the processing head 21 in a plan view.

 その後は、第2造形動作を行う場合においても、第1造形動作を行う場合と同様に、加工システムSYSaは、このような構造層SLを造形するための動作を、制御ユニット7の制御下で、三次元モデルデータに基づいて繰り返し行う。その結果、複数の構造層SLが積層された積層構造物によって、三次元構造物STが造形される。 After that, when performing the second modeling operation, as in the case of performing the first modeling operation, the processing system SYSa repeatedly performs the operation for modeling such a structural layer SL based on the three-dimensional model data under the control of the control unit 7. As a result, a three-dimensional structure ST is formed by a laminated structure in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked.

 このような第2造形動作が行われる場合には、造形面MSを表面に有する物体(例えば、ワークW又は構造層SL)が加工光ELによって直接的に溶融されることが殆どないことは、上述したとおりである。このため、造形面MS上には、材料照射面ESにおいて溶融した造形材料Mによって、相対的に浅い溶融池MPが形成される。このため、相対的に深い溶融池MPが形成される場合と比較して、溶融した造形材料Mが冷却されて固化するまでに必要な時間が短くなる。このため、第2造形動作が行われる場合には、第1造形動作が行われる場合と比較して、三次元構造物STを造形するために必要な時間が短くなる。つまり、第2造形動作による造形速度は、第1造形動作による造形速度よりも速くなる。つまり、第2造形動作が行われる場合には、第1造形動作が行われる場合と比較して、加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STを高速に造形することができる。 As described above, when such a second modeling operation is performed, an object having a modeling surface MS on its surface (e.g., the workpiece W or the structural layer SL) is rarely directly melted by the processing light EL. Therefore, a relatively shallow molten pool MP is formed on the modeling surface MS by the modeling material M molten at the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the time required for the molten modeling material M to cool and solidify is shorter than when a relatively deep molten pool MP is formed. Therefore, when the second modeling operation is performed, the time required to model the three-dimensional structure ST is shorter than when the first modeling operation is performed. In other words, the modeling speed by the second modeling operation is faster than the modeling speed by the first modeling operation. In other words, when the second modeling operation is performed, the processing system SYSa can model the three-dimensional structure ST at higher speeds than when the first modeling operation is performed.

 このように第2造形動作によって三次元構造物STを高速に造形することができるがゆえに、第2造形動作は、超高速レーザ法(EHLA:Extreme High Speed Application)に準拠した造形動作と称してもよい。第2造形動作は、超高速レーザ法(EHLA:Extreme High Speed Application)に準拠した造形動作であるとみなしてもよい。 Because the three-dimensional structure ST can be formed at high speed by the second modeling operation in this manner, the second modeling operation may be referred to as a modeling operation conforming to the extreme high speed application (EHLA). The second modeling operation may be considered to be a modeling operation conforming to the extreme high speed application (EHLA).

 第2造形動作が行われる場合においても、第1造形動作が行われる場合と同様に、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を用いて、加工光EL#1及びEL#2をそれぞれ偏向してもよい。この場合、材料照射面ESを通過する加工光EL#1を示す図12に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146を用いて加工光EL#1を偏向することで、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料照射面ES内において加工光EL#1が通過するビーム通過領域PA#1を移動させてもよい。同様に、材料照射面ESを通過する加工光EL#2を示す図11に示すように、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2156を用いて加工光EL#2を偏向することで、材料ノズル212と造形面MSとの間においてZ軸に交差する仮想的な材料照射面ES内において加工光EL#2が通過するビーム通過領域PA#2を移動させてもよい。 When the second modeling operation is performed, the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 using the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, respectively, in the same manner as when the first modeling operation is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12, which shows the processing light EL#1 passing through the material irradiation surface ES, the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#1 using the galvanometer mirror 2146 to move the beam passing area PA#1 through which the processing light EL#1 passes within the virtual material irradiation surface ES intersecting the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 11, which shows the processing light EL#2 passing through the material irradiation surface ES, the processing system SYSa may deflect the processing light EL#2 using the galvanometer mirror 2156 to move the beam passing area PA#2 through which the processing light EL#2 passes within the virtual material irradiation surface ES intersecting the Z-axis between the material nozzle 212 and the modeling surface MS.

 第1実施形態では、説明の便宜上、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156が材料照射面ES上でビーム通過領域PA#k(尚、kは、1又は2を示す変数)を移動させる仮想的な領域を、照射単位領域MUA(特に、照射単位領域MUA#k)と称する。この場合、ビーム通過領域PA#kは、材料照射面ESのうち照射単位領域MUA#kと重複する面上を移動するとみなしてもよい。具体的には、照射光学系211と材料照射面ESとの位置関係を固定した状態で(つまり、変更することなく)ガルバノミラー2146又は2156が材料照射面ES上でビーム通過領域PA#kを移動させる仮想的な領域を、照射単位領域MUA(特に、照射単位領域MUA#k)と称する。照射単位領域MUA#kは、照射光学系211と材料照射面ESとの位置関係を固定した状態で加工ヘッド21から射出される加工光EL#kが実際に通過する仮想的な領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。照射単位領域MUA#kは、照射光学系211と材料照射面ESとの位置関係を固定した状態でビーム通過領域PA#kが実際に移動する領域(言い換えれば、範囲)を示す。このため、照射単位領域MUA#kは、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。つまり、照射単位領域MUA#kは、材料照射面ES上において、加工ヘッド21(特に、照射光学系211)を基準に定まる位置に位置する仮想的な領域であるとみなしてもよい。尚、照射光学系211と材料照射面ESとの位置関係を固定した状態でガルバノミラー2146又は2156が材料照射面ES上でビーム通過領域PA#kを移動することが可能な最大領域を、照射単位領域MUA#kと称してもよい。 In the first embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k (note that k is a variable indicating 1 or 2) on the material irradiation surface ES is referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA (particularly, the irradiation unit area MUA#k). In this case, the beam passing area PA#k may be considered to move on a surface of the material irradiation surface ES that overlaps with the irradiation unit area MUA#k. Specifically, the virtual area where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed (i.e., without changing) is referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA (particularly, the irradiation unit area MUA#k). The irradiation unit area MUA#k indicates a virtual area (in other words, a range) through which the processing light EL#k emitted from the processing head 21 actually passes while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed. The irradiation unit area MUA#k indicates an area (in other words, a range) through which the beam passing area PA#k actually moves while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed. For this reason, the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be considered to be a virtual area determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In other words, the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be considered to be a virtual area located on the material irradiation surface ES at a position determined based on the processing head 21 (particularly, the irradiation optical system 211). In addition, the maximum area over which the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 can move the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES while the positional relationship between the irradiation optical system 211 and the material irradiation surface ES is fixed may be referred to as the irradiation unit area MUA#k.

 この場合、加工システムSYSaは、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156を用いて、照射単位領域MUA#k内においてビーム通過領域PA#kを移動させることができる。このため、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156を用いて加工光EL#kを偏向する動作は、照射単位領域MUA#k内においてビーム通過領域PA#kを移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 In this case, the processing system SYSa can move the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k using the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156. Therefore, the operation of deflecting the processing light EL#k using the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k.

 尚、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動しても、ビーム通過領域PA#kが材料照射面ES上において移動する。しかしながら、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方が移動する場合には、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156と材料照射面ESとの相対的な位置関係が変わる。その結果、加工ヘッド21を基準に定まる照射単位領域MUA#k(つまり、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156が材料照射面ES上でビーム通過領域PA#kを移動させる照射単位領域MUA#k)が材料照射面ES上で移動する。このため、第1実施形態では、加工ヘッド21及びステージ31の少なくとも一方を移動させる動作は、材料照射面ESに対して照射単位領域MUA#kを移動させる動作と等価であるとみなしてもよい。 Note that even if at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the beam passing area PA#k moves on the material irradiation surface ES. However, when at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 moves, the relative positional relationship between the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 and the material irradiation surface ES changes. As a result, the irradiation unit area MUA#k determined based on the machining head 21 (i.e., the irradiation unit area MUA#k where the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 moves the beam passing area PA#k on the material irradiation surface ES) moves on the material irradiation surface ES. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the operation of moving at least one of the machining head 21 and the stage 31 may be considered equivalent to the operation of moving the irradiation unit area MUA#k relative to the material irradiation surface ES.

 照射単位領域MUA#kの特徴(例えば、形状及び移動態様等)は、上述した加工単位領域PUA#kの特徴と同一であってもよい。照射単位領域MUA#k内でのビーム通過領域PA#kの移動態様(例えば、移動軌跡)は、上述した加工単位領域PUA#k内での目標照射領域EA#kの移動態様と同じであってもよい。このため、照射単位領域MUA#kの特徴及び照射単位領域MUA#k内でのビーム通過領域PA#kの移動態様(例えば、移動軌跡等)の詳細な説明は省略するが、以下のその一例について、図13(a)から図13(e)を参照しながら簡単に説明する。図13(a)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156は、照射単位領域MUA#kが材料照射面ES上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、照射単位領域MUA#k内において、ビーム通過領域PA#kが、材料照射面ESに沿った単一の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#kを偏向してもよい。図13(a)に示す照射単位領域MUA#kが材料照射面ES上で目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動することで、材料照射面ES上において、ビーム通過領域PA#kは、図13(b)に示す移動軌跡MT#k(例えば、目標移動軌跡MT0を中心に振動する波形状の移動軌跡MT#k)に沿って移動してもよい。図13(c)及び図13(d)に示すように、ガルバノミラー2146又は2156は、照射単位領域MUA#kが材料照射面ES上で静止している(つまり、移動していない)と仮定した状況下において、照射単位領域MUA#k内においてビーム通過領域PA#kが複数の走査方向に沿って移動するように、加工光EL#kを偏向してもよい。図13(c)に示す照射単位領域MUA#kが材料照射面ES上で目標移動軌跡MT0に沿って移動することで、材料照射面ES上において、ビーム通過領域PA#kは、図13(e)に示す移動軌跡MT#kに沿って移動してもよい。 The characteristics of the irradiation unit area MUA#k (e.g., shape and movement pattern, etc.) may be the same as the characteristics of the processing unit area PUA#k described above. The movement pattern (e.g., movement trajectory) of the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k may be the same as the movement pattern of the target irradiation area EA#k within the processing unit area PUA#k described above. For this reason, a detailed description of the characteristics of the irradiation unit area MUA#k and the movement pattern (e.g., movement trajectory, etc.) of the beam passing area PA#k within the irradiation unit area MUA#k will be omitted, but an example will be briefly described below with reference to Figures 13(a) to 13(e). As shown in Fig. 13(a), under the assumption that the irradiation unit area MUA#k is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the material irradiation surface ES, the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#k so that the beam passing area PA#k moves along a single scanning direction along the material irradiation surface ES within the irradiation unit area MUA#k. By the irradiation unit area MUA#k shown in Fig. 13(a) moving along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the material irradiation surface ES, the beam passing area PA#k may move along the movement trajectory MT#k shown in Fig. 13(b) (for example, a wave-shaped movement trajectory MT#k oscillating around the target movement trajectory MT0) on the material irradiation surface ES. As shown in Figures 13(c) and 13(d), the galvanometer mirror 2146 or 2156 may deflect the processing light EL#k so that the beam passing area PA#k moves along multiple scanning directions within the irradiation unit area MUA#k under the assumption that the irradiation unit area MUA#k is stationary (i.e., not moving) on the material irradiation surface ES. By moving the irradiation unit area MUA#k shown in Figure 13(c) along the target movement trajectory MT0 on the material irradiation surface ES, the beam passing area PA#k may move along the movement trajectory MT#k shown in Figure 13(e) on the material irradiation surface ES.

 材料ノズル212は、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。この場合、材料ノズル212は、照射単位領域MUA内で造形材料Mが供給される材料供給領域MSAと照射単位領域MUAとの関係を示す平面図である図14(a)に示すように、材料供給領域MSAの全体が照射単位領域MUAに含まれるように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。つまり、材料ノズル212は、照射単位領域MUAの一部が材料供給領域MSAに含まれる一方で、照射単位領域MUAの他の一部が材料供給領域MSAに含まれないように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。或いは、材料ノズル212は、材料供給領域MSAと照射単位領域MUAとの関係を示す平面図である図14(b)に示すように、材料供給領域MSAの一部が照射単位領域MUAに含まれる一方で、材料供給領域MSAの他の一部が照射単位領域MUAに含まれないように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。つまり、材料ノズル212は、照射単位領域MUAの一部が材料供給領域MSAに含まれる一方で、照射単位領域MUAの他の一部が材料供給領域MSAに含まれないように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。或いは、材料ノズル212は、材料供給領域MSAと照射単位領域MUAとの関係を示す平面図である図14(c)に示すように、照射単位領域MUAの全体が材料供給領域MSAに含まれるように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。つまり、材料ノズル212は、材料供給領域MSAの一部が照射単位領域MUAに含まれる一方で、材料供給領域MSAの他の一部が照射単位領域MUAに含まれないように、照射単位領域MUAに造形材料Mを供給してもよい。 The material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA. In this case, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that the entire material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, as shown in FIG. 14(a), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA to which the modeling material M is supplied within the irradiation unit area MUA and the irradiation unit area MUA. In other words, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that a part of the irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, while another part of the irradiation unit area MUA is not included in the material supply area MSA. Alternatively, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA so that a part of the material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, while another part of the material supply area MSA is not included in the irradiation unit area MUA, as shown in FIG. 14(b), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA and the irradiation unit area MUA. That is, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that a part of the irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, while another part of the irradiation unit area MUA is not included in the material supply area MSA. Alternatively, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that the entire irradiation unit area MUA is included in the material supply area MSA, as shown in FIG. 14(c), which is a plan view showing the relationship between the material supply area MSA and the irradiation unit area MUA. That is, the material nozzle 212 may supply the modeling material M to the irradiation unit area MUA such that a part of the material supply area MSA is included in the irradiation unit area MUA, while another part of the material supply area MSA is not included in the irradiation unit area MUA.

 (1-4)加工システムSYSaが行うアライメント動作
 第1実施形態では、加工システムSYSa(特に、制御ユニット7)は、撮像装置8の撮像結果(つまり、撮像装置8が生成した画像IMG)に基づいて、アライメント動作を行ってもよい。第1実施形態では、制御ユニット7は、アライメント動作として、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作と、マルチビームアライメント動作との少なくとも一つを行ってもよい。
(1-4) Alignment Operation Performed by Machining System SYSa In the first embodiment, the machining system SYSa (particularly, the control unit 7) may perform an alignment operation based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8). In the first embodiment, the control unit 7 may perform at least one of a nozzle-beam alignment operation and a multi-beam alignment operation as the alignment operation.

 ノズル-ビームアライメント動作は、造形材料Mを供給する材料ノズル212と、造形材料Mを溶融する加工光EL(つまり、加工光EL#1及びEL#2の少なくとも一つ)との位置合わせを行うための動作である。一方で、マルチビームアライメント動作は、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行うための動作である。 The nozzle-beam alignment operation is an operation for aligning the material nozzle 212 that supplies the modeling material M with the processing light EL (i.e., at least one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2) that melts the modeling material M. On the other hand, the multi-beam alignment operation is an operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2.

 制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間において、アライメント動作を行ってもよい。制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前に、アライメント動作を行ってもよい。制御ユニット7は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を終了した後に、アライメント動作を行ってもよい。 The control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation while the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. The control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation before the processing system SYSa starts additional processing. The control unit 7 may perform the alignment operation after the processing system SYSa finishes additional processing.

 以下、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作と、マルチビームアライメント動作とについて順に説明する。  Below, we will explain nozzle-beam alignment operation and multi-beam alignment operation in order.

 (1-4-1)ノズル-ビームアライメント動作
 ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212を撮像する。つまり、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212からの撮像光CLを受光することで、材料ノズル212を撮像する。この場合、典型的には、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212の一部を撮像するが、材料ノズル212の全体を撮像してもよい。
(1-4-1) Nozzle-Beam Alignment Operation To perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212. That is, the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 by receiving the imaging light CL from the material nozzle 212. In this case, typically, the imaging device 8 images a part of the material nozzle 212, but the imaging device 8 may also image the entire material nozzle 212.

 ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は更に、材料ノズル212を撮像すると共に、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。つまり、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212からの撮像光CLを受光すると共に、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つからの撮像光CLを受光することで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、典型的には、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つの一部を撮像するが、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つの全体を撮像してもよい。 To perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 further images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, the imaging device 8 receives the imaging light CL from the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, thereby imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, typically, a portion of at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is imaged, but at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be imaged in its entirety.

 撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第1造形動作を行う場合には、造形面MSを撮像してもよい。一方で、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第2造形動作を行う場合には、材料照射面ESを撮像してもよい。但し、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第2造形動作を行う場合において、材料照射面ESに加えて又は代えて、造形面MSを撮像してもよい。 The imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS when the processing system SYSa performs the first printing operation. On the other hand, the imaging device 8 may image the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation. However, the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS in addition to or instead of the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation.

 撮像装置8が造形面MSを撮像する場合には、上述した照明装置213は、造形面MSを照明光ILで照明してもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、造形面MSを適切に撮像することができる。一方で、撮像装置8が材料照射面ESを撮像する場合には、上述した照明装置213は、材料照射面ESを照明光ILで照明してもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、造形面MSを適切に撮像することができる。 When the imaging device 8 images the printing surface MS, the above-mentioned illumination device 213 may illuminate the printing surface MS with illumination light IL. As a result, the imaging device 8 can properly image the printing surface MS. On the other hand, when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES, the above-mentioned illumination device 213 may illuminate the material irradiation surface ES with illumination light IL. As a result, the imaging device 8 can properly image the printing surface MS.

 尚、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESのそれぞれがZ軸に交差する面であるがゆえに、照明装置213は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに沿ったシート状の照明光ILで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを照明してもよい。照明装置213は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを包含するシート状の照明光ILで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを照明してもよい。このような照明装置213の一例として、シート光源があげられる。但し、照明装置213は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つと交差する面に沿ったシート状の照明光ILで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを照明してもよい。このとき、シート状の照明光ILに沿った面と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとのなす角度は鋭角であってもよい。 In addition, since the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES are each a surface that intersects with the Z axis, the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL along at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. The illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL that includes at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. An example of such an illumination device 213 is a sheet light source. However, the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with a sheet-like illumination light IL along a surface that intersects with at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, the angle between the surface along the sheet-like illumination light IL and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be an acute angle.

 撮像装置8は、加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光ELを射出している期間中に、材料ノズル212と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、撮像装置8は、ワークWに対して付加加工を実際に行うために加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光ELを射出している期間中に、材料ノズル212と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとを撮像してもよい。撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間において、材料ノズル212と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとを撮像してもよい。或いは、撮像装置8は、ワークWに対して付加加工を実際に行うことなく加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光ELを射出している期間中に、材料ノズル212と、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとを撮像してもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後において、材料ノズル212と、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとを撮像してもよい。 The imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES to actually perform additional processing on the workpiece W. The imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. Alternatively, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES without actually performing additional processing on the workpiece W. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing.

 尚、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後に撮像装置8が材料ノズル212と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つとを撮像する場合には、ステージ31には、ワークWに代えて、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作用に用いられるテスト用のワークが配置されていてもよい。この場合、テスト用のワークの表面が造形面MSとして用いられてもよい。 In addition, when the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing, a test workpiece used for nozzle-beam alignment operation may be placed on the stage 31 in place of the workpiece W. In this case, the surface of the test workpiece may be used as the printing surface MS.

 加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光ELを射出すると、上述したように、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つにおいて、造形材料Mが溶融する。撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つにおいて溶融した造形材料Mを撮像してもよい。つまり、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212と、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つ上において溶融した造形材料Mとを撮像してもよい。尚、造形面MS上において溶融した造形材料Mは、溶融池MPを形成する。このため、造形面MS上において溶融した造形材料Mを撮像することは、溶融池MPを撮像することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。尚、以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つ上において溶融した造形材料Mを、溶融材料M_meltと称する。 When the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, as described above, the printing material M melts on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. The imaging device 8 may image the molten printing material M on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, in order to perform a nozzle-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 may image the material nozzle 212 and the molten printing material M on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. The molten printing material M on the printing surface MS forms a molten pool MP. For this reason, imaging the molten printing material M on the printing surface MS may be considered equivalent to imaging the molten pool MP. In the following explanation, for the sake of convenience, the molding material M melted on at least one of the molding surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is referred to as the molten material M_melt.

 或いは、加工ユニット2が造形面MSに向けて加工光ELを射出すると、造形面MSには、加工光ELのビームスポットが形成される可能性がある。例えば、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後にノズル-ビームアライメント動作が行われる場合には、造形面MSに向けて射出される加工光ELの強度は、造形面MSを溶融させる強度よりも弱くてもよい。この場合、造形面MSには、溶融池MPに代えて、加工光ELのビームスポットが形成されてもよい。撮像装置8は、造形面MSを撮像することで、造形面MSに形成された加工光ELのビームスポットを撮像してもよい。言い換えれば、撮像装置8は、造形面MSを撮像することで、造形面MS上での加工光ELを撮像してもよい。 Alternatively, when the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL toward the printing surface MS, a beam spot of the processing light EL may be formed on the printing surface MS. For example, when a nozzle-beam alignment operation is performed before the processing system SYSa starts or after it finishes additional processing, the intensity of the processing light EL emitted toward the printing surface MS may be weaker than the intensity that melts the printing surface MS. In this case, a beam spot of the processing light EL may be formed on the printing surface MS instead of a molten pool MP. The imaging device 8 may image the beam spot of the processing light EL formed on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the processing light EL on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS.

 以下の説明では、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8が材料ノズル212と、溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する例について説明する。但し、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する動作を含む以下のノズル-ビームアライメント動作に関する説明は、「溶融材料M_melt」を「加工光ELのビームスポット(加工光EL)」に置き換えることで、材料ノズル212と加工光ELのビームスポットとを撮像する動作を含むノズル-ビームアライメント動作に関する説明の説明として流用可能である。 In the following explanation, an example will be described in which the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in order to perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation. However, the following explanation of the nozzle-beam alignment operation, including the operation of imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt, can be used as an explanation of the nozzle-beam alignment operation, including the operation of imaging the material nozzle 212 and the beam spot of the processing light EL, by replacing "molten material M_melt" with "beam spot of processing light EL (processing light EL)."

 撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを撮像することで、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとが写り込んだ画像IMGを生成する。材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとが写り込んだ画像IMGの一例が、図15に示されている。図15に示すように、画像IMGには、材料ノズル212の内壁面2125と、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成されている開口2124とが写り込んでいてもよい。尚、図15は、撮像装置8が材料ノズル212の開口2124を通過する撮像光CLを受光することで材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する場合(図5参照)に生成される画像IMGの一例を示している。この場合、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212の開口2124が撮像装置8の撮像視野に含まれるように、材料ノズル212に対して位置合わせされていてもよい。 The imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt to generate an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are reflected. FIG. 15 shows an example of an image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are reflected. As shown in FIG. 15, the image IMG may also capture the inner wall surface 2125 of the material nozzle 212 and the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212. FIG. 15 shows an example of an image IMG generated when the imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt by receiving imaging light CL passing through the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 (see FIG. 5). In this case, the imaging device 8 may be aligned with the material nozzle 212 so that the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 is included in the imaging field of view of the imaging device 8.

 制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する前に、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、加工ユニット2を制御する。具体的には、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、加工ユニット2が備えるガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御する。例えば、材料ノズル212と加工光EL#1との位置合わせが行われる場合には、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光EL#1との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、加工ユニット2が備えるガルバノミラー2146を制御してもよい。例えば、材料ノズル212と加工光EL#2との位置合わせが行われる場合には、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光EL#2との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、加工ユニット2が備えるガルバノミラー2156を制御してもよい。 The control unit 7 controls the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship before the imaging device 8 captures the image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt. Specifically, the control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship. For example, when the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#1 are aligned, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2146 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#1 becomes the desired positional relationship. For example, when the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#2 are aligned, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirror 2156 provided in the processing unit 2 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL#2 becomes the desired positional relationship.

 制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御するための駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を生成する。この場合、制御ユニット7は、生成した基準駆動指令値をガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つに出力することで、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御する。 The control unit 7 generates a drive command value (reference drive command value) for controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship. In this case, the control unit 7 outputs the generated reference drive command value to at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, thereby controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship.

 以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、図16に示すように、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態として、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成される開口2124の中心Cを加工光ELが通過する状態が用いられる例について説明する。つまり、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態として、加工光ELの進行方向に交差すると共に開口2124を含む面(つまり、XY平面に沿っており且つ開口2124を含む面)内において、開口2124の中心Cを加工光ELが通過する状態が用いられる例について説明する。但し、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態が、図16に示す例に限定されることは、ない。 In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, an example will be described in which the state in which the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 is used as the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship, as shown in FIG. 16. In other words, an example will be described in which the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 in a plane that intersects with the traveling direction of the processing light EL and includes the opening 2124 (i.e., a plane that is along the XY plane and includes the opening 2124) is used as the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship. However, the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 16.

 尚、ガルバノミラー2146の姿勢(回転角度)が基準姿勢(基準角度)となっている状況下で、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成される開口2124の中心Cを加工光EL#1が通過するように、材料ノズル212とガルバノミラー2146とが予め位置合わせされていてもよい。同様に、ガルバノミラー2156姿勢(回転角度)が基準姿勢(基準角度)となっている状況下で、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成される開口2124の中心Cを加工光EL#2が通過するように、材料ノズル212とガルバノミラー2156とが予め位置合わせされていてもよい。ガルバノミラー2146の姿勢が基準姿勢となる状態の一例として、ガルバノミラー2146のX走査ミラー2146MX及び2146MYのそれぞれの回転角度がゼロ度である状態があげられる。ガルバノミラー2156の姿勢が基準姿勢となる状態の一例として、ガルバノミラー2156のX走査ミラー2156MX及び2156MYのそれぞれの回転角度がゼロ度である状態があげられる。この場合、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つは、開口2124の中心Cを原点として加工光ELを偏向する。その結果、開口2124の中心Cから+X側への加工光ELの偏向量の最大値を、開口2124の中心Cから-X側への加工光ELの偏向量の最大値と同じにすることができる。同様に、開口2124の中心Cから+Y側への加工光ELの偏向量の最大値を、開口2124の中心Cから-Y側への加工光ELの偏向量の最大値と同じにすることができる。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御性が容易になる。 In addition, the material nozzle 212 and the galvanometer mirror 2146 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL#1 passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 when the attitude (rotation angle) of the galvanometer mirror 2146 is the reference attitude (reference angle). Similarly, the material nozzle 212 and the galvanometer mirror 2156 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL#2 passes through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 when the attitude (rotation angle) of the galvanometer mirror 2156 is the reference attitude (reference angle). An example of a state in which the attitude of the galvanometer mirror 2146 is the reference attitude is a state in which the rotation angles of the X-scanning mirrors 2146MX and 2146MY of the galvanometer mirror 2146 are zero degrees. An example of a state in which the attitude of the galvanometer mirror 2156 is the reference attitude is a state in which the rotation angles of the X-scanning mirrors 2156MX and 2156MY of the galvanometer mirror 2156 are zero degrees. In this case, at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 deflects the processing light EL with the center C of the aperture 2124 as the origin. As a result, the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the +X side can be made the same as the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the -X side. Similarly, the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the +Y side can be made the same as the maximum deflection amount of the processing light EL from the center C of the aperture 2124 to the -Y side. As a result, the controllability of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 becomes easier.

 また、材料ノズル212の下面2120に形成される開口2124の中心Cを通過する加工光ELが、造形材料Mが集まる上述した材料制御点MCPを通過するように、材料ノズル212とガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つとが予め位置合わせされていてもよい。この場合、開口2124の中心Cを通過する加工光ELが材料制御点MCPを通過しない場合と比較して、加工光ELのうちの造形材料Mに照射される光成分の光量を多くすることができる。その結果、造形材料Mの溶融効率が向上する。 In addition, the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 may be pre-aligned so that the processing light EL passing through the center C of the opening 2124 formed in the lower surface 2120 of the material nozzle 212 passes through the above-mentioned material control point MCP where the modeling material M gathers. In this case, the amount of light of the light component of the processing light EL irradiated onto the modeling material M can be increased compared to when the processing light EL passing through the center C of the opening 2124 does not pass through the material control point MCP. As a result, the melting efficiency of the modeling material M is improved.

 材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されている状態で、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する。その後、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとが写り込んだ画像IMGに基づいて、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置合わせを行う。 In a state where at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship, the imaging device 8 captures an image of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt. After that, the control unit 7 aligns the material nozzle 212 with the processing light EL based on the image IMG in which the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt are captured.

 具体的には、造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射されることで溶融材料M_meltが生成されるがゆえに、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射された位置と等価である。つまり、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、加工光ELの位置と等価である。具体的には、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、造形面MS上において加工光ELが照射された又は造形面MSと等価である材料照射面ESにおいて加工光ELが通過した位置と等価である。つまり、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、造形面MS又は造形面MSと等価である材料照射面ES上での加工光ELの位置と等価である。このため、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係は、加工システムSYSaにおける材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係と等価である。 Specifically, since the molten material M_melt is generated by irradiating the printing material M with the processing light EL, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position where the printing material M is irradiated with the processing light EL. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Specifically, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL is irradiated or the position where the processing light EL passes on the material irradiation surface ES that is equivalent to the printing surface MS. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES that is equivalent to the printing surface MS. For this reason, the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is equivalent to the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL in the processing system SYSa.

 従って、制御ユニット7は、画像IMGに基づいて、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することで、加工システムSYSaにおける材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係を実質的に特定してもよい。画像IMG内での材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定するために、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内で材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとを検出してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内で材料ノズル212の位置と溶融材料M_meltの位置とを検出してもよい。その結果、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することができる。尚、材料ノズル212の位置と溶融材料M_meltの位置とを検出するために画像IMGが用いられるがゆえに、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8(撮像素子81)は、材料ノズル212の位置と溶融材料M_meltの位置とを検出可能な検出装置(検出器)であるとみなしてもよい。更に、溶融材料M_meltの位置が加工光ELの位置と等価であるため、撮像装置8(撮像素子81)は、加工光ELの位置(照射位置)を検出可能な検出装置(検出器)であるとみなしてもよい。 Therefore, the control unit 7 may determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL in the processing system SYSa based on the image IMG by determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. In order to determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG, the control unit 7 may detect the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 may detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. As a result, the control unit 7 can determine the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG. Since the image IMG is used to detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) that generates the image IMG may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the position of the material nozzle 212 and the position of the molten material M_melt. Furthermore, since the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL.

 尚、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_meltの位置は、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置に対応する。このため、画像IMGに基づいて材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することは、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置に基づいて材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。更に、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_meltの位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光ELの位置)に対応する。つまり、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置と、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_meltの位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光ELの位置)とは、両者が互いに対応するという関係を有している。このため、画像IMGに基づいて材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することは、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置と、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_meltの位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光ELの位置)とが互いに対応しているという関係に基づいて、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係を特定することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。 The position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG. For this reason, determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8. Furthermore, the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 corresponds to the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e. the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES). That is, the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 and the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) correspond to each other. Therefore, specifying the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the image IMG may be considered equivalent to specifying the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt based on the relationship between the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 and the position of the molten material M_melt on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) correspond to each other.

 ここで、画像IMGの一例を示す図17(a)は、画像IMG内において、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となっている例を示している。具体的には、図17(a)は、画像IMG内において、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cに対応する位置に、溶融材料M_meltが写り込んでいる例を示している。この場合には、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が、所望の位置関係となっていると想定される。つまり、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cを加工光ELが実際に通過していると想定される。 Here, FIG. 17(a), which shows an example of an image IMG, shows an example in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is the desired positional relationship. Specifically, FIG. 17(a) shows an example in which the molten material M_melt is reflected in the image IMG at a position corresponding to the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212. In this case, it is assumed that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship. In other words, it is assumed that the processing light EL is actually passing through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212.

 一方で、画像IMGの一例を示す図17(b)は、画像IMG内において、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となっていない例を示している。具体的には、図17(b)は、画像IMG内において、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cに対応する位置から離れた位置に、溶融材料M_meltが写り込んでいる例を示している。この場合には、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係は、実際には所望の位置関係となっていないと想定される。つまり、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cを加工光ELが実際には通過していないと想定される。このように、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係が所望の関係となっていない場合には、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されているにも関わらず、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が、実際には所望の位置関係となっていないと想定される。この場合、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが生じている。つまり、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとが適切に位置合わせされてない。尚、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されているにも関わらず、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が実際には所望の位置関係とならない原因の一例として、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差があげられる。尚、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されているにも関わらず、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が実際には所望の位置関係とならない原因の他の一例として、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの位置ずれ(例えば、設計上の又は理想的な位置からの位置ずれ)があげられる。尚、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されているにも関わらず、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が実際には所望の位置関係とならない原因の他の一例として、材料ノズル212の位置ずれ(例えば、設計上の又は理想的な位置からの位置ずれ)があげられる。 On the other hand, FIG. 17(b), which shows an example of an image IMG, shows an example in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG is not the desired one. Specifically, FIG. 17(b) shows an example in which the molten material M_melt is reflected in the image IMG at a position away from the position corresponding to the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212. In this case, it is assumed that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is not actually the desired one. In other words, it is assumed that the processing light EL does not actually pass through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212. In this way, when the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt is not the desired one, it is assumed that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is not actually the desired one, even though at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired one. In this case, a positional deviation occurs between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. That is, the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL are not properly aligned. Although at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is a desired positional relationship, an example of a cause of the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL not actually being the desired positional relationship is a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. Although at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is a desired positional relationship, another example of a cause of the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL not actually being the desired positional relationship is a positional deviation (for example, a positional deviation from a designed or ideal position) of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. Incidentally, even though at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is the desired positional relationship, another example of a reason that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is not actually the desired positional relationship is a positional deviation of the material nozzle 212 (e.g., a positional deviation from the design or ideal position).

 そこで、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係と所望の位置関係との誤差(つまり、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれ)に基づいて、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。具体的には、上述したように、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる状態は、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cを加工光ELが通過するという状態である。このため、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとの位置ずれが、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれに相当する。 The control unit 7 may therefore calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship, based on the error between the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt and the desired positional relationship (i.e., the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL). Specifically, as described above, the state in which the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL becomes the desired positional relationship is the state in which the processing light EL passes through the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212. Therefore, the positional misalignment between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL.

 具体的には、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのX軸方向における位置ずれが、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのX軸方向における位置ずれに相当する。従って、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのX軸方向における位置ずれが小さくなれば、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのX軸方向における位置ずれが小さくなることが期待される。特に、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのX軸方向における位置ずれがなくなれば、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのX軸方向における位置ずれがなくなることが期待される。このため、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのX軸方向における位置ずれ量ΔX11(図17(b)参照)を算出し、位置ずれ量ΔX11が小さくなる(典型的には、ゼロになる)ように、駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。 Specifically, the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. Therefore, if the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt is reduced, it is expected that the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will also be reduced. In particular, if the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt is eliminated, it is expected that the positional deviation in the X-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will be eliminated. For this reason, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ΔX11 (see FIG. 17(b)) in the X-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 in the image IMG and the molten material M_melt, and calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional deviation amount ΔX11 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).

 同様に、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのY軸方向における位置ずれが、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのY軸方向における位置ずれに相当する。従って、材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのY軸方向における位置ずれが小さくなれば、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのY軸方向における位置ずれが小さくなることが期待される。材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのY軸方向における位置ずれがなくなれば、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとのY軸方向における位置ずれがなくなることが期待される。このため、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内での材料ノズル212の開口2124の中心Cと溶融材料M_meltとのY軸方向における位置ずれ量ΔY1(図17(b)参照)を算出し、位置ずれ量ΔY1が小さくなる(典型的には、ゼロになる)ように、駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。 Similarly, the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. Therefore, if the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt becomes smaller, it is expected that the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will also become smaller. If the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt is eliminated, it is expected that the positional deviation in the Y-axis direction between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL will also be eliminated. For this reason, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ΔY1 (see FIG. 17(b)) in the Y-axis direction between the center C of the opening 2124 of the material nozzle 212 in the image IMG and the molten material M_melt, and calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that the positional deviation amount ΔY1 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).

 この場合、制御ユニット7は、算出される位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)まで、上述した動作を繰り返してもよい。具体的には、第1期間において、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212及び溶融材料M_meltを撮像することで、第1の画像IMGを生成してもよい。その後、第1期間において、制御ユニット7は、第1の画像IMGに基づいて、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つを算出し、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが小さくなるように、第1の補正指令値を算出してもよい。その後、第1期間の後の第2期間において、制御ユニット7は、第1の補正指令値を用いて駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正し、補正された駆動指令値を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その後、第2期間において、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212及び溶融材料M_meltを再度撮像することで、第2の画像IMGを生成してもよい。その後、第2期間において、制御ユニット7は、第2の画像IMGに基づいて、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つを算出してもよい。位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になっている(或いは、ゼロになっている)場合には、制御ユニット7は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を終了してもよい。この場合、第1の補正指令値が、最終的に確定した補正指令値として用いられてもよい。一方で、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下でない(或いは、ゼロでない)場合には、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが更に小さくなるように、第2の補正指令値を算出してもよい。以降、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)まで、制御ユニット7は同様の動作を繰り返してもよい。 In this case, the control unit 7 may repeat the above-mentioned operation until at least one of the calculated positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero). Specifically, in the first period, the imaging device 8 may generate a first image IMG by imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt. Thereafter, in the first period, the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 based on the first image IMG, and calculate a first correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 becomes small. Thereafter, in the second period after the first period, the control unit 7 may correct the drive command value (reference drive command value) using the first correction command value, and control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the corrected drive command value. Thereafter, in the second period, the imaging device 8 may generate a second image IMG by imaging the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt again. Thereafter, in the second period, the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 based on the second image IMG. When at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 is equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or is equal to zero), the control unit 7 may end the nozzle-beam alignment operation. In this case, the first correction command value may be used as the finally determined correction command value. On the other hand, when at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 is not equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or is not equal to zero), the control unit 7 may calculate a second correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 is further reduced. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may repeat the same operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).

 尚、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1がゼロになる状態は、上述したように、画像IMG内において溶融材料M_meltが開口2124の中心Cに位置する状態である。ここで、材料ノズル212に対して撮像装置8が移動しない限りは、画像IMG内において開口2124の中心Cが写り込む位置は、固定されている。この場合、画像IMG内において開口2124の中心Cが写り込む位置が予め登録されていてもよい。制御ユニット7は、画像IMGに基づいて開口2124の中心Cの位置を算出することに代えて、画像IMG内において開口2124の中心Cが写り込む位置として、予め登録された位置を用いてもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、予め登録された位置に基づいて位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1を算出し、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)ように補正指令値を算出してもよい。或いは、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1を算出し且つ位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)ように補正指令値を算出することに加えて又は代えて、画像IMG内において予め登録された位置に溶融材料M_meltが位置するように補正指令値を算出してもよい。 Note that the state in which the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 are zero is the state in which the molten material M_melt is located at the center C of the opening 2124 in the image IMG, as described above. Here, unless the imaging device 8 moves relative to the material nozzle 212, the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected is fixed. In this case, the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected may be registered in advance. Instead of calculating the position of the center C of the opening 2124 based on the image IMG, the control unit 7 may use a position registered in advance as the position in the image IMG where the center C of the opening 2124 is reflected. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 based on the position registered in advance, and may calculate a correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 is equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or is zero). Alternatively, in addition to or instead of calculating the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 and calculating a correction command value so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 is equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or is zero), the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value so that the molten material M_melt is positioned at a preregistered position in the image IMG.

 補正指令値が算出された後は、制御ユニット7は、補正指令値を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。例えば、補正指令値が算出された後に加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間において、制御ユニット7は、補正指令値を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。 After the correction command value is calculated, the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. For example, during the period in which the machining system SYSa performs additional machining after the correction command value is calculated, the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156.

 一例として、制御ユニット7は、加工光ELを所望位置に照射するようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御するための駆動指令値を生成してもよい。但し、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合には、生成した駆動指令値に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されたとしても、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つは、加工光ELを所望位置に照射できない可能性がある。そこで、制御ユニット7は、生成した駆動指令値を、補正指令値を用いて補正してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合であっても、補正指令値を用いて補正された駆動指令値に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されれば、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つは、加工光ELを所望位置に照射することができる。 As an example, the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so as to irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position. However, if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, even if at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled based on the generated drive command value, at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 may not be able to irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position. Therefore, the control unit 7 may correct the generated drive command value using a correction command value. As a result, even if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, if at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled based on the drive command value corrected using the correction command value, at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 can irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position.

 他の一例として、制御ユニット7は、駆動指令値を生成した後に補正指令値を用いて駆動指令値を補正することに代えて、補正指令値に基づいて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等の影響が排除された駆動指令値を生成してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差が発生している場合であっても、補正指令値に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等の影響が排除されるように生成された駆動指令値に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つが制御されれば、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つは、加工光ELを所望位置に照射することができる。 As another example, instead of generating a drive command value and then correcting the drive command value using a correction command value, the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value based on the correction command value from which the influence of a control error, etc. of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is eliminated. As a result, even if a control error occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, if at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is controlled based on a drive command value generated based on the correction command value so as to eliminate the influence of a control error, etc. of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 can irradiate the processing light EL to the desired position.

 制御ユニット7は、第1期間において補正指令値を一旦算出した後であっても、所定のノズル-ビームアライメント条件が成立した場合には、第1期間よりも後の第2期間において補正指令値を再度算出してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、第1期間においてノズル-ビームアライメント動作を一旦行った後であっても、所定のノズル-ビームアライメント条件が成立した場合には、第2期間においてノズル-ビームアライメント動作を再度行ってもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7は、実質的には、第1期間と第2期間との間における材料ノズル212の位置の変動及び溶融材料M_meltの位置の変動(つまり、加工光ELの位置の変動)を考慮した上で、補正指令値を算出することができる。尚、所定のノズル-ビームアライメント条件の一例として、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作が最後に行われてから所定時間が経過したという条件があげられる。 Even after the control unit 7 has once calculated the correction command value in the first period, if a predetermined nozzle-beam alignment condition is satisfied, the control unit 7 may calculate the correction command value again in the second period after the first period. In other words, even after the control unit 7 has once performed the nozzle-beam alignment operation in the first period, if a predetermined nozzle-beam alignment condition is satisfied, the control unit 7 may perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation again in the second period. In this case, the control unit 7 can essentially calculate the correction command value after taking into consideration the fluctuation in the position of the material nozzle 212 and the fluctuation in the position of the molten material M_melt (i.e., the fluctuation in the position of the processing light EL) between the first period and the second period. An example of the predetermined nozzle-beam alignment condition is a condition in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the nozzle-beam alignment operation was last performed.

 以上説明したように、制御ユニット7は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことで、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御することができる。このため、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等に起因して材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが発生した場合であっても、加工システムSYSaは、加工光ELを所望の位置に適切に照射することができる。その結果、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれに起因して加工システムSYSaの造形精度が悪化する可能性が低くなる。つまり、加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STを精度よく造形することができる。 As described above, the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so as to reduce (particularly eliminate) the positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL by performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation. Therefore, even if a positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL occurs due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the processing system SYSa can appropriately irradiate the processing light EL at the desired position. As a result, there is a low possibility that the modeling accuracy of the processing system SYSa will deteriorate due to a positional misalignment between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. In other words, the processing system SYSa can accurately model a three-dimensional structure ST.

 一例として、図18(a)に示すように平面視において環状の形状を有する構造層SLを造形した場合の、加工システムSYSaの造形精度について、図18(b)を参照しながら説明する。図18(b)は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことなく図18(a)に示す構造層SLを造形した場合の構造層SLの高さと、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行った上で図18(a)に示す構造層SLを造形した場合の構造層SLの高さとを、構造層SLの円周方向における角度毎に示すグラフである。図18(b)に示すように、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行った上で造形した構造層SLの高さのばらつきは、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことなく造形した構造層SLの高さのばらつきよりも小さい。このため、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行った上で造形した構造層SLの造形精度は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことなく造形した構造層SLの造形精度よりも高い。 As an example, the modeling accuracy of the processing system SYSa when a structural layer SL having a ring shape in a plan view as shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled will be described with reference to FIG. 18(b). FIG. 18(b) is a graph showing the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, and the height of the structural layer SL when the structural layer SL shown in FIG. 18(a) is modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation, for each angle in the circumferential direction of the structural layer SL. As shown in FIG. 18(b), the variation in the height of the structural layer SL modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation is smaller than the variation in the height of the structural layer SL modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation. Therefore, the modeling accuracy of the structural layer SL modeled after performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation is higher than the modeling accuracy of the structural layer SL modeled without performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation.

 (1-4-2)マルチビームアライメント動作
 マルチビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。つまり、撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つからの撮像光CLを受光することで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、典型的には、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つの一部を撮像するが、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つの全体を撮像してもよい。
(1-4-2) Multi-beam alignment operation To perform the multi-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 images at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. That is, the imaging device 8 images at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by receiving imaging light CL from at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, typically, a part of at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES is imaged, but at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES may be imaged in its entirety.

 撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第1造形動作を行う場合には、造形面MSを撮像してもよい。一方で、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第2造形動作を行う場合には、材料照射面ESを撮像してもよい。但し、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが第2造形動作を行う場合において、材料照射面ESに加えて又は代えて、造形面MSを撮像してもよい。尚、撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する場合には、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作が行われる場合と同様に、照明装置213は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを照明光ILで照明してもよい。 The imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS when the processing system SYSa performs the first printing operation. On the other hand, the imaging device 8 may image the material irradiation surface ES when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation. However, when the processing system SYSa performs the second printing operation, the imaging device 8 may image the printing surface MS in addition to or instead of the material irradiation surface ES. Note that when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, the illumination device 213 may illuminate at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES with illumination light IL, similar to when a nozzle-beam alignment operation is performed.

 撮像装置8は、加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光EL#1及びEL#2の双方を射出している期間中に、材料ノズル212と造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、撮像装置8は、ワークWに対して付加加工を実際に行うために加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光EL#1及びEL#2の双方を射出している期間中に、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行っている期間において、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。或いは、撮像装置8は、ワークWに対して付加加工を実際に行うことなく、加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて#1及びEL#2の双方を射出している期間中に、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後において、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。 The imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212 and at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES to actually perform additional processing on the workpiece W. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing system SYSa is performing additional processing. Alternatively, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the processing unit 2 is emitting both #1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES without actually performing additional processing on the workpiece W. In this case, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing.

 尚、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後に撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する場合には、ステージ31には、ワークWに代えて、マルチビームアライメント動作用に用いられるテスト用のワークが配置されていてもよい。この場合、テスト用のワークの表面が造形面MSとして用いられてもよい。 In addition, when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES before or after the processing system SYSa starts or finishes additional processing, a test workpiece to be used for multi-beam alignment operation may be placed on the stage 31 instead of the workpiece W. In this case, the surface of the test workpiece may be used as the modeling surface MS.

 加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを射出すると、上述したように、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つにおいて、造形材料Mが溶融する。撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つにおいて溶融した造形材料M(つまり、溶融材料M_melt)を撮像してもよい。つまり、マルチビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は、溶融材料M_meltを撮像してもよい。 When the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, as described above, the printing material M melts on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. The imaging device 8 may image the printing material M (i.e., the molten material M_melt) melted on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the molten material M_melt in order to perform a multi-beam alignment operation.

 ここで、マルチビームアライメント動作が行われる場合には、加工ユニット2が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれが射出されるがゆえに、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つ上において、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltと、加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltとが存在する。この場合、撮像装置8は、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltと、加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltとを撮像する。但し、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つ上の同じ位置に加工光EL#1及び#EL#2が照射されている場合には、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltと、加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltとは、一体化する。尚、以下の説明では、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltと加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltとを区別する必要がある場合には、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltを、“溶融材料M_melt#1”と称し、加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltを、“溶融材料M_melt#2”と称する。一方で、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_meltと加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltとを区別する必要がない場合には、“溶融材料M_melt”は、加工光EL#1が溶融した溶融材料M_melt及び加工光EL#2が溶融した溶融材料M_meltの少なくとも一方を意味していてもよい。 Here, when the multi-beam alignment operation is performed, the processing unit 2 emits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, so that the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 are present on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, the imaging device 8 images the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2. However, when the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated at the same position on at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 are integrated. In the following description, when it is necessary to distinguish between the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2, the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 is referred to as "molten material M_melt#1", and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2 is referred to as "molten material M_melt#2". On the other hand, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2, "molten material M_melt" may mean at least one of the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#1 and the molten material M_melt melted by the processing light EL#2.

 或いは、加工ユニット2が造形面MSに向けて加工光EL#1及びEL#2を射出すると、造形面MSには、加工光EL#1のビームスポットと加工光EL#2のビームスポットとが形成される可能性がある。例えば、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を開始する前又は終了した後にマルチビームアライメント動作が行われる場合には、造形面MSに向けて射出される加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれの強度は、造形面MSを溶融させる強度よりも弱くてもよい。この場合、造形面MSには、溶融池MPに代えて、加工光EL#1のビームスポット及び加工光EL#2のビームスポットが形成されてもよい。撮像装置8は、造形面MSを撮像することで、造形面MSに形成された加工光EL#1のビームスポット及び加工光EL#2のビームスポットを撮像してもよい。言い換えれば、撮像装置8は、造形面MSを撮像することで、造形面MS上での加工光EL#1及びEL#2を撮像してもよい。 Alternatively, when the processing unit 2 emits the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward the printing surface MS, a beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and a beam spot of the processing light EL#2 may be formed on the printing surface MS. For example, when a multi-beam alignment operation is performed before or after the processing system SYSa starts additional processing, the intensity of each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 emitted toward the printing surface MS may be weaker than the intensity that melts the printing surface MS. In this case, instead of the molten pool MP, a beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and a beam spot of the processing light EL#2 may be formed on the printing surface MS. The imaging device 8 may image the beam spot of the processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of the processing light EL#2 formed on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image the processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS by imaging the printing surface MS.

 以下の説明では、マルチビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8が溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2を撮像する例について説明する。但し、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2を撮像する動作を含む以下のマルチビームアライメント動作に関する説明は、「溶融材料M_melt#1」を「加工光EL#1のビームスポット(加工光EL#1)」に置き換え、且つ、「溶融材料M_melt#2」を「加工光EL#2のビームスポット(加工光EL#2)」に置き換えことで、加工光EL#1のビームスポット及び加工光EL#2のビームスポットを撮像する動作を含むマルチビームアライメント動作に関する説明の説明として流用可能である。 In the following explanation, an example will be described in which the imaging device 8 images the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in order to perform the multi-beam alignment operation. However, the following explanation of the multi-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 can be used as an explanation of the multi-beam alignment operation including the operation of imaging the beam spot of processing light EL#1 and the beam spot of processing light EL#2 by replacing "molten material M_melt #1" with "beam spot of processing light EL#1 (processing light EL#1)" and "molten material M_melt #2" with "beam spot of processing light EL#2 (processing light EL#2)."

 撮像装置8は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2を撮像することで、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ画像IMGを生成する。溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ画像IMGの一例が、図19(a)に示されている。図19(a)に示すように、画像IMGには、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の双方(つまり、二つの溶融材料M_melt)が写り込んでいてもよい。但し、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つ上の同じ位置に加工光EL#1及び#EL#2が照射されている場合には、上述したように、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2は一体化する。この場合、図19(b)に示すように、画像IMGには、一体化した溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2(つまり、単一の溶融材料M_melt)が写り込んでいてもよい。 The imaging device 8 captures images of the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 to generate an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 are reflected. An example of an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 are reflected is shown in FIG. 19(a). As shown in FIG. 19(a), both the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 (i.e., two molten materials M_melt) may be reflected in the image IMG. However, when the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated to the same position on at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 are integrated as described above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the integrated molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 (i.e., a single molten material M_melt) may appear in the image IMG.

 制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ画像IMGに基づいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行う。具体的には、上述したように、造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射されることで溶融材料M_meltが生成されるがゆえに、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、造形材料Mに加工光ELが照射された位置と等価である。つまり、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、加工光ELの位置と等価である。具体的には、溶融材料M_melt#1の位置は、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1が照射された又は造形面MSと等価である材料照射面ESにおいて加工光EL#1が通過した位置と等価である。つまり、溶融材料M_melt#1の位置は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ES上での加工光EL#1の位置と等価である。同様に、溶融材料M_melt#2の位置は、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1が照射された又は造形面MSと等価である材料照射面ESにおいて加工光EL#2が通過した位置と等価である。つまり、溶融材料M_melt#2の位置は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ES上での加工光EL#2の位置と等価である。 The control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are captured. Specifically, as described above, since the molten material M_melt is generated by irradiating the processing light EL on the printing material M, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position where the processing light EL is irradiated on the printing material M. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Specifically, the position of the molten material M_melt#1 is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated or where the processing light EL#1 passes on the material irradiation surface ES, which is equivalent to the printing surface MS. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt#1 is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Similarly, the position of the molten material M_melt#2 is equivalent to the position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated or where the processing light EL#2 passes on the material irradiation surface ES, which is equivalent to the printing surface MS. In other words, the position of the molten material M_melt#2 is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.

 従って、制御ユニット7は、画像IMGに基づいて、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することで、加工システムSYSaにおける加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係を実質的に特定してもよい。画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定するために、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内で溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2を検出してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1の位置と溶融材料M_melt#2の位置とを検出してもよい。その結果、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することができる。尚、溶融材料M_melt#1の位置及び溶融材料M_melt#2の位置を検出するために画像IMGが用いられるがゆえに、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8(撮像素子81)は、溶融材料M_melt#1の位置及び溶融材料M_melt#2の位置を検出可能な検出装置(検出器)であるとみなしてもよい。更に、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置がそれぞれ加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置と等価であるため、撮像装置8(撮像素子81)は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置(照射位置)を検出可能な検出装置(検出器)であるとみなしてもよい。 Therefore, the control unit 7 may substantially identify the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the processing system SYSa by identifying the positional relationship between the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2 in the image IMG based on the image IMG. In order to identify the positional relationship between the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2 in the image IMG, the control unit 7 may detect the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the image IMG. That is, the control unit 7 may detect the position of the molten material M_melt#1 and the position of the molten material M_melt#2. As a result, the control unit 7 can identify the positional relationship between the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2 in the image IMG. Since the image IMG is used to detect the positions of the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) that generates the image IMG may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the positions of the molten material M_melt#1 and the molten material M_melt#2. Furthermore, since the positions of the molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are equivalent to the positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, respectively, the imaging device 8 (imaging element 81) may be considered to be a detection device (detector) that can detect the positions (irradiation positions) of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2.

 尚、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置は、それぞれ、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2からの撮像光CLが入射する位置に対応する。このため、画像IMGに基づいて溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することは、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2からの撮像光CLが入射する位置に基づいて溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。更に、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2からの撮像光CLが入射する位置は、それぞれ、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置)に対応する。つまり、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2からの撮像光CLが入射する位置と、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置)とは、それぞれ、両者が互いに対応するという関係を有している。このため、画像IMGに基づいて溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することは、撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2からの撮像光CLが入射する位置と、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置(つまり、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置)とが互いに対応しているという関係に基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1と溶融材料M_melt#2との位置関係を特定することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。 The positions of molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in image IMG correspond to the positions where imaging light CL from molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8 that generates image IMG. Therefore, determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt #1 and molten material M_melt #2 based on image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt #1 and molten material M_melt #2 based on the positions where imaging light CL from molten material M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8. Furthermore, the positions on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 where the imaging light CL from the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident correspond to the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES). In other words, the positions on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 where the imaging light CL from the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident and the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES) have a relationship in which they correspond to each other. For this reason, determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt#1 and molten material M_melt#2 based on image IMG may be considered equivalent to determining the positional relationship between molten material M_melt#1 and molten material M_melt#2 based on the relationship in which the positions where imaging light CL from molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is incident on the imaging surface of imaging device 8 correspond to the positions of molten material M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 on the printing surface MS or material irradiation surface ES (i.e., the positions of processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or material irradiation surface ES).

 その後、制御ユニット7は、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1とM_melt#2との位置関係(つまり、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係)に基づいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせする。尚、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせすることは、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1が照射される目標照射領域EA#1と、造形面MS上において加工光EL#2が照射される目標照射領域EA#2とを位置合わせすることを含んでいてもよい。加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせすることは、材料照射面ES上において加工光EL#1が通過するビーム通過領域PA#1と、材料照射面ES上において加工光EL#2が通過するビーム通過領域PA#2とを位置合わせすることを含んでいてもよい。 Then, the control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the positional relationship between the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the image IMG (i.e., the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2). Note that aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 may include aligning the target irradiation area EA#1 on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#1 is irradiated, and the target irradiation area EA#2 on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL#2 is irradiated. Aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 may include aligning the beam passing area PA#1 on the material irradiation surface ES where the processing light EL#1 passes, and the beam passing area PA#2 on the material irradiation surface ES where the processing light EL#2 passes.

 第1実施形態では、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに沿っており且つ互いに直交する二つの方向のうちの少なくとも一方において、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせしてもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向において、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせしてもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向において加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせすることに加えて又は代えて、Y軸方向において、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせしてもよい。 In the first embodiment, the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in at least one of two directions that are along at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES and are perpendicular to each other. For example, the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction. For example, in addition to or instead of aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction, the control unit 7 may align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the Y-axis direction.

 X軸方向において加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせするために、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する期間中に、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する期間中に、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のXオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Xオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動し、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のXオフセット量だけ離れ、且つ、Xオフセット量が変化するようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御するための駆動指令値を生成してもよい。 In order to align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 each move back and forth periodically along the Y-axis direction during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction and the X-offset amount changes during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 each move back and forth periodically along the Y-axis direction, and the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction and the X-offset amount changes.

 一例として、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MSを撮像する期間中に、造形面MSに沿ったY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1及び加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MSを撮像する期間中に、造形面MSに沿ったX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とが所定のXオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Xオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。 As an example, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the Y-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS, and the X-offset amount changes.

 他の一例として、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が材料照射面ESを撮像する期間中に、材料照射面ESに沿ったY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1及び加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が材料照射面ESを撮像する期間中に、材料照射面ESに沿ったX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とが所定のXオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Xオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。 As another example, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the Y-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined X-offset amount along the X-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES, and the X-offset amount changes.

 その上で、撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、制御ユニット7がXオフセット量を変化させている期間中において、撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを複数回連続して撮像する。その結果、撮像装置8が生成した画像IMGの一例を示す図20(a)に示すように、撮像装置8は、X軸方向に沿って離れた(或いは、場合によっては一体化した)溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ複数の画像IMGを生成する。この場合、制御ユニット7は、複数の画像IMGの中から、X軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった(言い換えれば、一体化した)画像IMGを選択する。つまり、制御ユニット7は、複数の画像IMGに基づいて、X軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出する。 Then, the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, during the period in which the control unit 7 is changing the X-offset amount, the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES multiple times in succession. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20(a) showing an example of an image IMG generated by the imaging device 8, the imaging device 8 generates multiple images IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated (or integrated in some cases) along the X-axis direction. In this case, the control unit 7 selects an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap (in other words, are integrated) along the X-axis direction from among the multiple images IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 detects the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction based on the multiple images IMG.

 尚、上述したように、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、加工光ELの位置と等価である。このため、画像IMGでのX軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出することは、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでのX軸方向に沿った加工光EL#1及びEL#2の重なりを検出することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。また、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_meltの位置は、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置に対応する。このため、画像IMG内でのX軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出することは、撮像装置8の撮像面内でのX軸方向に沿った加工光EL#1の入射位置及び加工光EL#2の入射位置の重なりを検出することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。 As described above, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the X-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the incident position of the processing light EL#1 and the incident position of the processing light EL#2 along the X-axis direction on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.

 図20(c)に示すように溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2がX軸方向に沿って重なっている場合には、図20(b)に示すように溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2がX軸方向に沿って離れている場合と比較して、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が高くなる。このため、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が最も高い画像IMGを、X軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった(言い換えれば、一体化した)画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 When the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction as shown in FIG. 20(c), the brightness of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is higher than when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated along the X-axis direction as shown in FIG. 20(b). Therefore, the control unit 7 may extract the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness as the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction (in other words, are integrated).

 ここで、上述したように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156は、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のXオフセット量だけ離れるように制御されている。この場合であっても、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはX軸方向に沿って所定のXオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。例えば、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のXオフセット量だけ離れるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156が制御されているにも関わらず、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差に起因して、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはX軸方向に沿って所定のXオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。例えば、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のXオフセット量だけ離れるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156が制御されているにも関わらず、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの位置ずれ(例えば、設計上の又は理想的な位置からの位置ずれ)に起因して、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはX軸方向に沿って所定のXオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。 Here, as described above, the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction. Even in this case, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction. For example, even though the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction, due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction. For example, even if the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction, due to a positional deviation (e.g., a positional deviation from a designed or ideal position) of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 may not actually be spaced apart by the predetermined X offset amount along the X-axis direction.

 そこで、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった場合に用いられていたXオフセット量を、Xオフセット量の基準値であるX基準オフセット量に設定してもよい。この場合、X基準オフセット量は、X軸方向において加工光EL#1の照射位置と加工光EL#2の照射位置とが実際に一致するXオフセット量である。つまり、X基準オフセット量は、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とがX軸方向に沿って実際に一致する及び/又は材料照射面ES上において加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とがX軸方向に沿って実際に一致するXオフセット量である。 The control unit 7 may therefore set the X offset amount used when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap to an X reference offset amount, which is a reference value of the X offset amount. In this case, the X reference offset amount is an X offset amount at which the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 and the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide in the X-axis direction. In other words, the X reference offset amount is an X offset amount at which the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS and/or the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the X-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.

 X基準オフセット量が設定された後には、制御ユニット7は、X基準オフセット量に基づいて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。例えば、X基準オフセット量が算出された後に加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間において、制御ユニット7は、X基準オフセット量に基づいて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。例えば、造形面MS上においてX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とを所望のX距離だけ離す場合には、制御ユニット7は、X基準オフセット量に対してX距離を加算する又は減算することで得られるXオフセット量を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合であっても、造形面MS上において、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とは、実際に所望のX距離だけ離れることになる。例えば、材料照射面ES上においてX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とを所望のX距離だけ離す場合には、制御ユニット7は、X基準オフセット量に対してX距離を加算する又は減算することで得られるXオフセット量を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合であっても、材料照射面ES上において、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とは、実際に所望のX距離だけ離れることになる。 After the X-reference offset amount is set, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the X-reference offset amount. For example, during the period in which the processing system SYSa performs additional processing after the X-reference offset amount is calculated, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the X-reference offset amount. For example, when the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are separated by a desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the X-offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the X distance to the X-reference offset amount. As a result, even if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are actually separated by the desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS. For example, when the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are separated by the desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the X offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the X distance from the X reference offset amount. As a result, even if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are actually separated by the desired X distance along the X-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.

 尚、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とが所定のX距離(Xオフセット量)だけ離れるようにX基準オフセット量に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御する駆動指令値が生成されるがゆえに、X基準オフセット量は、駆動指令値(特に、Xオフセット量を指定する駆動指令値)の基準値であるとみなしてもよい。 In addition, since the drive command value that controls the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 is generated based on the X reference offset amount so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 are separated by a predetermined X distance (X offset amount), the X reference offset amount may be considered to be a reference value for the drive command value (particularly the drive command value that specifies the X offset amount).

 或いは、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が最も高い画像IMGを選択することに加えて、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置に基づいて、X軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGを選択してもよい。具体的には、制御ユニット7は、各画像IMGに基づいて、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置(特に、X軸方向における位置)を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1の位置の算出結果とX軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#2の位置の算出結果とが一致する画像IMGを、X軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 Alternatively, the control unit 7 may select an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG, in addition to selecting the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness. Specifically, the control unit 7 may calculate the respective positions (particularly the positions in the X-axis direction) of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG based on each image IMG. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#1 in the X-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the X-axis direction.

 尚、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置に基づいてY軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGが選択される場合には、1枚の画像IMGに溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の双方が写り込んでいなくてもよい。例えば、Yオフセット量が所定量に設定されている状況において、加工ユニット2は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方を造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて射出し、その後、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方を造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて射出してもよい。撮像装置8は、Yオフセット量が所定量に設定されている状況において、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像し、その後、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで生成された画像IMGに基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のいずれか一方のY軸方向における位置を算出し、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで生成された画像IMGに基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のいずれか他方のY軸方向における位置を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、Y軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1の位置の算出結果とY軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#2の位置の算出結果とが一致する画像IMGを、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 Note that when an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction is selected based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in each image IMG, it is not necessary for both the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 to appear in one image IMG. For example, in a situation in which the Y offset amount is set to a predetermined amount, the processing unit 2 may emit either one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, and then emit the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In a situation where the Y offset amount is set to a predetermined amount, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and then image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted. After that, the control unit 7 may calculate the position of either one of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and may calculate the position of the other of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.

 Y軸方向において加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせするために、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する期間中に、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する期間中に、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のYオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Yオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動し、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のYオフセット量だけ離れ、且つ、Yオフセット量が変化するようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御するための駆動指令値を生成してもよい。 In order to align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in the Y-axis direction, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move back and forth periodically along the X-axis direction during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction and the Y offset amount changes during the period when the imaging device 8 images at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In other words, the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move back and forth periodically along the X-axis direction, and the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction and the Y offset amount changes.

 一例として、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MSを撮像する期間中に、造形面MSに沿ったX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1及び加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が造形面MSを撮像する期間中に、造形面MSに沿ったY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とが所定のYオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Yオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。 As an example, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the X-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction along the printing surface MS while the imaging device 8 is imaging the printing surface MS, and the Y offset amount changes.

 他の一例として、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が材料照射面ESを撮像する期間中に、材料照射面ESに沿ったX軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1及び加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が材料照射面ESを撮像する期間中に、材料照射面ESに沿ったY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とが所定のYオフセット量だけ離れると共に、Yオフセット量が変化するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。 As another example, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 periodically move back and forth along the X-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 move apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction along the material irradiation surface ES during the period when the imaging device 8 images the material irradiation surface ES, and the Y offset amount changes.

 その上で、撮像装置8は、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像する。この場合、制御ユニット7がYオフセット量を変化させている期間中において、撮像装置8は。造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを複数回連続して撮像する。その結果、撮像装置8が生成した画像IMGの一例を示す図21(a)に示すように、撮像装置8は、Y軸方向に沿って離れた(或いは、場合によっては一体化した)溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ複数の画像IMGを生成する。この場合、制御ユニット7は、複数の画像IMGの中から、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった(言い換えれば、一体化した)画像IMGを選択する。つまり、制御ユニット7は、複数の画像IMGに基づいて、Y軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出する。 Then, the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In this case, during the period in which the control unit 7 is changing the Y offset amount, the imaging device 8 captures an image of at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES multiple times in succession. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21(a) showing an example of an image IMG generated by the imaging device 8, the imaging device 8 generates multiple images IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated (or integrated in some cases) along the Y axis direction. In this case, the control unit 7 selects an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap (in other words, are integrated) along the Y axis direction from among the multiple images IMG. In other words, the control unit 7 detects the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y axis direction based on the multiple images IMG.

 尚、上述したように、溶融材料M_meltの位置は、加工光ELの位置と等価である。このため、画像IMGでのY軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出することは、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでのY軸方向に沿った加工光EL#1及びEL#2の重なりを検出することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。また、画像IMG内での溶融材料M_meltの位置は、画像IMGを生成する撮像装置8の撮像面において溶融材料M_meltからの撮像光CLが入射する位置に対応する。このため、画像IMG内でのY軸方向に沿った溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の重なりを検出することは、撮像装置8の撮像面内でのY軸方向に沿った加工光EL#1の入射位置及び加工光EL#2の入射位置の重なりを検出することと等価であるとみなしてもよい。 As described above, the position of the molten material M_melt is equivalent to the position of the processing light EL. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, the position of the molten material M_melt in the image IMG corresponds to the position where the imaging light CL from the molten material M_melt is incident on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8 that generates the image IMG. Therefore, detecting the overlap of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 along the Y-axis direction in the image IMG may be considered equivalent to detecting the overlap of the incident position of the processing light EL#1 and the incident position of the processing light EL#2 along the Y-axis direction on the imaging surface of the imaging device 8.

 図21(c)に示すように溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2がY軸方向に沿って重なっている場合には、図21(b)に示すように溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2がY軸方向に沿って離れている場合と比較して、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が高くなる。このため、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が最も高い画像IMGを、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった(言い換えれば、一体化した)画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 When the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction as shown in FIG. 21(c), the brightness of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 is higher than when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are separated along the Y-axis direction as shown in FIG. 21(b). Therefore, the control unit 7 may extract the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness as the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction (in other words, are integrated).

 ここで、上述したように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156は、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のYオフセット量だけ離れるように制御されている。この場合であっても、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはY軸方向に沿って所定のYオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。例えば、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のYオフセット量だけ離れるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156が制御されているにも関わらず、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差に起因して、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはY軸方向に沿って所定のYオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。例えば、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1及びEL#2が所定のYオフセット量だけ離れるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156が制御されているにも関わらず、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの位置ずれ(例えば、設計上の又は理想的な位置からの位置ずれ)に起因して、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が、実際にはY軸方向に沿って所定のYオフセット量だけ離れていない可能性がある。 Here, as described above, the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction. Even in this case, it is possible that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction. For example, even though the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction, it is possible that due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are not actually spaced apart by the predetermined Y offset amount along the Y-axis direction. For example, even though the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are spaced apart by a predetermined Y offset amount along the Y axis direction, due to a positional misalignment of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 (e.g., a positional misalignment from a designed or ideal position), the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 may not actually be spaced apart by the predetermined Y offset amount along the Y axis direction.

 そこで、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった場合に用いられていたYオフセット量を、Yオフセット量の基準値であるY基準オフセット量に設定してもよい。この場合、Y基準オフセット量は、Y軸方向において加工光EL#1の照射位置と加工光EL#2の照射位置とが実際に一致するYオフセット量である。つまり、Y基準オフセット量は、造形面MS上において加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とがY軸方向に沿って実際に一致する及び/又は材料照射面ES上において加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とがY軸方向に沿って実際に一致するYオフセット量である。 The control unit 7 may therefore set the Y offset amount used when the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap to a Y reference offset amount, which is a reference value of the Y offset amount. In this case, the Y reference offset amount is a Y offset amount at which the irradiation position of processing light EL#1 and the irradiation position of processing light EL#2 actually coincide in the Y-axis direction. In other words, the Y reference offset amount is a Y offset amount at which the target irradiation area EA#1 of processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS and/or the beam passing area PA#1 of processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of processing light EL#2 actually coincide along the Y-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.

 Y基準オフセット量が設定された後には、制御ユニット7は、Y基準オフセット量に基づいて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。例えば、Y基準オフセット量が算出された後に加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間において、制御ユニット7は、Y基準オフセット量に基づいて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。例えば、造形面MS上においてY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とを所望のY距離だけ離す場合には、制御ユニット7は、Y基準オフセット量に対してY距離を加算する又は減算することで得られるYオフセット量を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合であっても、造形面MS上において、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1の目標照射領域EA#1と加工光EL#2の目標照射領域EA#2とは、実際に所望のY距離だけ離れることになる。例えば、材料照射面ES上においてY軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とを所望のY距離だけ離す場合には、制御ユニット7は、Y基準オフセット量に対してY距離を加算する又は減算することで得られるYオフセット量を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その結果、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等が発生している場合であっても、材料照射面ES上において、Y軸方向に沿って加工光EL#1のビーム通過領域PA#1と加工光EL#2のビーム通過領域PA#2とは、実際に所望のY距離だけ離れることになる。 After the Y reference offset amount is set, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the Y reference offset amount. For example, during the period in which the processing system SYSa performs additional processing after the Y reference offset amount is calculated, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the Y reference offset amount. For example, when separating the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 by a desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using the Y offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the Y distance to the Y reference offset amount. As a result, even if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the target irradiation area EA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the target irradiation area EA#2 of the processing light EL#2 will actually be separated by the desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS. For example, when the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 are separated by the desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES, the control unit 7 may control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using a Y offset amount obtained by adding or subtracting the Y distance from the Y reference offset amount. As a result, even if a control error or the like occurs in at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the beam passing area PA#1 of the processing light EL#1 and the beam passing area PA#2 of the processing light EL#2 will actually be separated by the desired Y distance along the Y-axis direction on the material irradiation surface ES.

 尚、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とが所定のY距離(Yオフセット量)だけ離れるようにY基準オフセット量に基づいてガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御する駆動指令値が生成されるがゆえに、Y基準オフセット量は、駆動指令値(特に、Yオフセット量を指定する駆動指令値)の基準値であるとみなしてもよい。 In addition, since a drive command value is generated that controls the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 based on the Y reference offset amount so that the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 are separated by a predetermined Y distance (Y offset amount), the Y reference offset amount may be considered to be a reference value for the drive command value (particularly the drive command value that specifies the Y offset amount).

 或いは、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の輝度が最も高い画像IMGを選択することに加えて、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置に基づいて、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGを選択してもよい。具体的には、制御ユニット7は、各画像IMGに基づいて、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置(特に、Y軸方向における位置)を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、Y軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1の位置の算出結果とY軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#2の位置の算出結果とが一致する画像IMGを、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 Alternatively, the control unit 7 may select an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG, in addition to selecting the image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 have the highest brightness. Specifically, the control unit 7 may calculate the respective positions (particularly the positions in the Y-axis direction) of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in each image IMG based on each image IMG. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.

 尚、各画像IMG内での溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のそれぞれの位置に基づいてY軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGが選択される場合には、1枚の画像IMGに溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の双方が写り込んでいなくてもよい。例えば、Yオフセット量が所定量に設定されている状況において、加工ユニット2は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方を造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて射出し、その後、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方を造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて射出してもよい。撮像装置8は、Yオフセット量が所定量に設定されている状況において、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像し、その後、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで生成された画像IMGに基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のいずれか一方のX軸方向における位置を算出し、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像することで生成された画像IMGに基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2のいずれか他方のX軸方向における位置を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、Y軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1の位置の算出結果とY軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#2の位置の算出結果とが一致する画像IMGを、Y軸方向に沿って溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が重なった画像IMGとして抽出してもよい。 Note that when an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction is selected based on the respective positions of the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 in each image IMG, it is not necessary for both the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 to appear in one image IMG. For example, in a situation in which the Y offset amount is set to a predetermined amount, the processing unit 2 may emit either one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES, and then emit the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. In a situation where the Y offset amount is set to a predetermined amount, the imaging device 8 may image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and then image at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted. After that, the control unit 7 may calculate the position of either one of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted, and may calculate the position of the other of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction based on the image IMG generated by imaging at least one of the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 is emitted. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may extract an image IMG in which the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #1 in the Y-axis direction and the calculation result of the position of the molten material M_melt #2 in the Y-axis direction match as an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt #1 and M_melt #2 overlap along the Y-axis direction.

 以上説明したように、制御ユニット7は、マルチビームアライメント動作を行うことで、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等に起因して加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置ずれが発生した場合であっても、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御することができる。例えば、制御ユニット7は、マルチビームアライメント動作を行うことで、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一つにおいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御することができる。このため、加工システムSYSaは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを所望の位置に適切に照射することができる。その結果、加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STを精度よく造形することができる。 As described above, the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship even if a positional deviation occurs between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 due to a control error of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. For example, the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Therefore, the processing system SYSa can appropriately irradiate each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 to the desired position. As a result, the processing system SYSa can accurately form the three-dimensional structure ST.

 制御ユニット7は、上述したマルチビームアライメント動作を、造形面MS及び材料照射面ESを仮想的に分割することで得られる複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれで行ってもよい。例えば、複数の部分領域WPの一例が、図22に示されている。図22は、複数の部分領域WPが規則的に(例えば、マトリクス状に)配置される例を示している。但し、複数の部分領域WPは、任意の配置パターンで配置されていてもよい。このように複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれにおいてマルチビームアライメント動作が行われる場合には、制御ユニット7は、複数の部分領域WPにそれぞれ対応する複数のX基準オフセット量、及び/又は、複数の部分領域WPにそれぞれ対応する複数のY基準オフセット量を算出してもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7は、一の部分領域WPに向けて加工光ELを射出することで付加加工が行われる場合には、一の部分領域WPに対応する一のX基準オフセット量及び/又は一の部分領域WPに対応する一のY基準オフセット量を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御してもよい。 The control unit 7 may perform the above-mentioned multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial regions WP obtained by virtually dividing the printing surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. For example, an example of a plurality of partial regions WP is shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 22 shows an example in which a plurality of partial regions WP are arranged regularly (for example, in a matrix). However, the plurality of partial regions WP may be arranged in any arrangement pattern. When the multi-beam alignment operation is performed in each of the plurality of partial regions WP in this manner, the control unit 7 may calculate a plurality of X-reference offset amounts corresponding to the plurality of partial regions WP, and/or a plurality of Y-reference offset amounts corresponding to the plurality of partial regions WP. In this case, when additional processing is performed by emitting the processing light EL toward one partial region WP, the control unit 7 may control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 using one X-reference offset amount corresponding to one partial region WP and/or one Y-reference offset amount corresponding to one partial region WP.

 上述したように、造形面MS上において、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が一致する(つまり、重複する)がゆえに、制御ユニット7は、加工単位領域PUA#1及びPUA#2が一致する(つまり、重複する)領域に設定される複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれで、マルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#1の移動範囲である加工単位領域PUA#1と加工光EL#2の移動範囲である加工単位領域PUA#2とが一致する(つまり、重複する)領域に設定される複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれで、マルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。 As described above, since the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap) on the printing surface MS, the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the processing unit areas PUA#1 and PUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap). In other words, the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the processing unit area PUA#1, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#1, and the processing unit area PUA#2, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#2, coincide (i.e., overlap).

 同様に、上述したように、材料照射面ES上において、照射単位領域MUA#1及びMUA#2が一致する(つまり、重複する)がゆえに、制御ユニット7は、照射単位領域MUA#1及びMUA#2が一致する(つまり、重複する)領域に設定される複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれで、マルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。つまり、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#1の移動範囲である照射単位領域MUA#1と加工光EL#2の移動範囲である照射単位領域MUA#2とが一致する(つまり、重複する)領域に設定される複数の部分領域WPのそれぞれで、マルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。 Similarly, as described above, because the irradiation unit areas MUA#1 and MUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap) on the material irradiation surface ES, the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the irradiation unit areas MUA#1 and MUA#2 coincide (i.e., overlap). In other words, the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation in each of a plurality of partial areas WP set in the area where the irradiation unit area MUA#1, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#1, and the irradiation unit area MUA#2, which is the movement range of the processing light EL#2, coincide (i.e., overlap).

 上述した説明では、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一方において加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2とを位置合わせするために、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一方に沿って、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2(或いは、ビーム通過領域PA#1及びPA#2)のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御している。しかしながら、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一方に沿って、目標照射領域EA#1及びEA#2(或いは、ビーム通過領域PA#1及びPA#2)のそれぞれが周期的に往復移動するように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御しなくてもよい。例えば、Xオフセット量が第1所定量に設定され及び/又はYオフセット量が第2所定量に設定されている状況において、加工ユニット2は、加工光EL#1及びEL#2を造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つに向けて射出してもよい。撮像装置8は、Xオフセット量が第1所定量に設定され及び/又はYオフセット量が第2所定量に設定されている状況において、加工光EL#1及びEL#2が射出された造形面MS及び材料照射面ESの少なくとも一つを撮像してもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2が写り込んだ画像IMGを生成する。その後、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8が生成した画像IMGに基づいて、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置(例えば、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一方における位置)を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置の算出結果に基づいて、図23に示すように、X軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置ずれ量ΔX2、並びに、Y軸方向における溶融材料M_melt#1及びM_melt#2の位置ずれ量ΔY2の少なくとも一つを算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX2及びΔY2の少なくとも一つが小さくなる(典型的には、ゼロになる)ように、Xオフセット量及びYオフセット量の少なくとも一つを調整してもよい。その結果、位置ずれ量ΔX2及びΔY2の少なくとも一つが最小になる(典型的には、ゼロになる)状態を実現可能なXオフセット量及びYオフセット量の少なくとも一つが、X基準オフセット量及びY基準オフセット量の少なくとも一つとして用いられてもよい。 In the above description, in order to align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, the control unit 7 controls the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 (or the beam passing areas PA#1 and PA#2) move back and forth periodically along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. However, the control unit 7 does not have to control the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation areas EA#1 and EA#2 (or the beam passing areas PA#1 and PA#2) move back and forth periodically along at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. For example, in a situation where the X offset amount is set to a first predetermined amount and/or the Y offset amount is set to a second predetermined amount, the processing unit 2 may emit the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 toward at least one of the modeling surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES. The imaging device 8 may capture at least one of the forming surface MS and the material irradiation surface ES onto which the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are projected in a situation where the X offset amount is set to a first predetermined amount and/or the Y offset amount is set to a second predetermined amount. As a result, the imaging device 8 generates an image IMG in which the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 are captured. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may calculate the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 (e.g., positions in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction) based on the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amount ΔX2 of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the X-axis direction and the positional deviation amount ΔY2 of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2 in the Y-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 23, based on the calculation result of the positions of the molten materials M_melt#1 and M_melt#2. Thereafter, the control unit 7 may adjust at least one of the X offset amount and the Y offset amount so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX2 and ΔY2 is small (typically, becomes zero). As a result, at least one of the X offset amount and the Y offset amount that can realize a state in which at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX2 and ΔY2 is minimized (typically, becomes zero) may be used as at least one of the X reference offset amount and the Y reference offset amount.

 (1-5)加工システムSYSaの変形例
 続いて、第1実施形態における加工システムSYSaの変形例について説明する。
(1-5) Modifications of the Machining System SYSa Next, modifications of the machining system SYSa in the first embodiment will be described.

 (1-5-1)第1変形例
 上述した説明では、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212を撮像している。しかしながら、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うために、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212を撮像することに加えて又は代えて、材料ノズル212に対する相対位置が固定された位置固定部位を撮像してもよい。つまり、撮像装置8は、材料ノズル212と位置関係が固定された位置固定部位を撮像してもよい。
(1-5-1) First Modification In the above description, in order to perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation, the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212. However, in order to perform the nozzle-beam alignment operation, in addition to or instead of imaging the material nozzle 212, the imaging device 8 may image a fixed position portion whose relative position with respect to the material nozzle 212 is fixed. In other words, the imaging device 8 may image a fixed position portion whose positional relationship with the material nozzle 212 is fixed.

 材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間において固定されていてもよい。材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行わない期間において固定されていてもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間と加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行わない期間とで、材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係は同じであってもよい。言い換えれば、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行う期間における材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係は、加工システムSYSaが付加加工を行わない期間における材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係と同じであってもよい。 The positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be fixed during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing. The positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be fixed during the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing. In other words, the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part may be the same during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing and the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing. In other words, the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part during the period when the processing system SYSa performs additional processing may be the same as the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the fixed position part during the period when the processing system SYSa does not perform additional processing.

 材料ノズル212と位置固定部位との位置関係が固定されているため、ヘッド駆動系22によって加工ヘッド21が移動する(つまり、材料ノズル212が移動する)場合には、位置固定部位もまた、材料ノズル212と共に移動する(つまり、加工ヘッド21と共に移動する)。この場合、例えば、位置固定部位は、加工ヘッド21に取り付けられていてもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、加工ヘッド21に形成されていてもよい。位置固定部位は、加工ヘッド21のうちの一部の部位であってもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射装置210に取り付けられていてもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射装置210に形成されていてもよい。位置固定部位は、照射装置210のうちの一部の部位であってもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射光学系211に取り付けられていてもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射光学系211に形成されていてもよい。位置固定部位は、照射光学系211のうちの一部の部位であってもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射光学系211が備える光学部材に取り付けられていてもよい。例えば、位置固定部位は、照射光学系211が備える光学部材に形成されていてもよい。位置固定部位は、照射光学系211のうちの一部の部位であってもよい。 Since the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the position fixing portion is fixed, when the processing head 21 moves by the head drive system 22 (i.e., the material nozzle 212 moves), the position fixing portion also moves together with the material nozzle 212 (i.e., moves together with the processing head 21). In this case, for example, the position fixing portion may be attached to the processing head 21. For example, the position fixing portion may be formed on the processing head 21. The position fixing portion may be a part of the processing head 21. For example, the position fixing portion may be attached to the irradiation device 210. For example, the position fixing portion may be formed on the irradiation device 210. The position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation device 210. For example, the position fixing portion may be attached to the irradiation optical system 211. For example, the position fixing portion may be formed on the irradiation optical system 211. The position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation optical system 211. For example, the position fixing portion may be attached to an optical member provided in the irradiation optical system 211. For example, the position fixing portion may be formed on an optical member included in the irradiation optical system 211. The position fixing portion may be a part of the irradiation optical system 211.

 位置固定部位の一例として、撮像装置8が撮像可能な指標IDXがあげられる。指標IDXは、所定のパターン形状を有する指標であってもよい。このような指標IDXは、加工光ELの光路に配置される照射光学系211の光学部材2110に形成されていてもよい。例えば、指標IDXが形成される光学部材2110の一例を示す断面図である図24に示すように、指標IDXは、照射装置210(特に、照射光学系211のfθレンズ2162)と造形面MS(或いは、材料照射面ES)との間における加工光ELの光路上に配置される光学部材2110に形成されていてもよい。 An example of a positionally fixed portion is an index IDX that can be imaged by the imaging device 8. The index IDX may be an index having a predetermined pattern shape. Such an index IDX may be formed on an optical member 2110 of the irradiation optical system 211 that is arranged in the optical path of the processing light EL. For example, as shown in FIG. 24, which is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an optical member 2110 on which the index IDX is formed, the index IDX may be formed on an optical member 2110 that is arranged in the optical path of the processing light EL between the irradiation device 210 (particularly, the fθ lens 2162 of the irradiation optical system 211) and the modeling surface MS (or the material irradiation surface ES).

 尚、指標IDXは、照射光学系211の光軸上の位置に配置されていてもよいし、光軸から外れた位置に配置されていてもよい。指標IDXが光軸から外れた位置に配置される場合、指標IDXは、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156によって加工光ELが走査される範囲の外に配置されていてもよい。このとき、指標IDXが撮像装置8の撮像範囲内の位置に配置されていてもよい。 The index IDX may be located on the optical axis of the irradiation optical system 211, or off the optical axis. When the index IDX is located off the optical axis, the index IDX may be located outside the range scanned by the processing light EL by the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. In this case, the index IDX may be located within the imaging range of the imaging device 8.

 撮像装置8が位置固定部位を撮像する場合には、制御ユニット7は、位置固定部位の位置に基づいて、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。具体的には、材料ノズル212に対する位置固定部位の位置が固定されているため、制御ユニット7は、位置固定部位の位置と、材料ノズル212に対する位置固定部位の位置に関する情報とに基づいて、材料ノズル212の位置を算出することができる。その結果、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と溶融材料M_meltとの位置関係(つまり、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係)を特定することができる。このため、撮像装置8が位置固定部位を撮像する場合であっても、撮像装置8が材料ノズル212を撮像する場合と同様に、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係が所望の位置関係となる駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を適切に算出することができる。このため、撮像装置8が位置固定部位を撮像する場合であっても、撮像装置8が材料ノズル212を撮像する場合と同様に、上述したノズル-ビームアライメント動作によって享受可能な効果と同様の効果を享受することができる。 When the imaging device 8 images a fixed position part, the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) that will result in a desired positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL based on the position of the fixed position part. Specifically, since the position of the fixed position part relative to the material nozzle 212 is fixed, the control unit 7 can calculate the position of the material nozzle 212 based on the position of the fixed position part and information on the position of the fixed position part relative to the material nozzle 212. As a result, the control unit 7 can specify the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the molten material M_melt (i.e., the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL). Therefore, even when the imaging device 8 images a fixed position part, the control unit 7 can appropriately calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) that will result in a desired positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL, just as when the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212. Therefore, even when the imaging device 8 images a fixed position part, the same effect as that which can be obtained by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above can be obtained, just as when the imaging device 8 images the material nozzle 212.

 尚、材料ノズル212そのもの(つまり、材料ノズル212の少なくとも一部)は、材料ノズル212に対する相対位置が固定された位置固定部位であるとみなしてもよい。 In addition, the material nozzle 212 itself (i.e., at least a part of the material nozzle 212) may be considered to be a fixed position part whose relative position with respect to the material nozzle 212 is fixed.

 (1-5-2)第2変形例
 上述した説明では、制御ユニット7は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作を行うことで、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御している。つまり、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、材料ノズル212に対して加工光ELを移動させている。しかしながら、加工システムSYSaが、照射装置210に対して材料ノズル212を移動させることが可能なノズル駆動系を備えている場合には、制御ユニット7は、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、加工光ELに対して材料ノズル212を移動させてもよい。この場合であっても、上述したノズル-ビームアライメント動作によって享受可能な効果と同様の効果を享受することができる。
(1-5-2) Second Modification In the above description, the control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated) by performing a nozzle-beam alignment operation. In other words, the control unit 7 moves the processing light EL relative to the material nozzle 212 so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). However, if the processing system SYSa is equipped with a nozzle drive system capable of moving the material nozzle 212 relative to the irradiation device 210, the control unit 7 may move the material nozzle 212 relative to the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). Even in this case, it is possible to enjoy the same effect as that which can be enjoyed by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above.

 上述した説明では、制御ユニット7が、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの少なくとも一つを移動させている。つまり、制御ユニット7が、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係を調整している。しかしながら、加工システムSYSaのオペレータ(人)が、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの少なくとも一つを手動で移動させてもよい。つまり、加工システムSYSaのオペレータが、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置ずれが小さくなる(特に、なくなる)ように、材料ノズル212と加工光ELとの位置関係を手動で調整してもよい。この場合であっても、上述したノズル-ビームアライメント動作によって享受可能な効果と同様の効果を享受することができる。 In the above description, the control unit 7 moves at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). In other words, the control unit 7 adjusts the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). However, the operator (person) of the processing system SYSa may manually move at least one of the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL. In other words, the operator of the processing system SYSa may manually adjust the positional relationship between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL so that the positional deviation between the material nozzle 212 and the processing light EL is reduced (particularly, eliminated). Even in this case, it is possible to enjoy the same effect as that which can be enjoyed by the nozzle-beam alignment operation described above.

 (1-5-3)第3変形例
 上述した説明では、第1光学系214は、屈折光学系であるコリメータレンズ2141を用いて、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1を、平行光に変換している。第3変形例では、図25(a)に示すように、第1光学系214は、屈折光学系であるコリメータレンズ2141に代えて、反射光学系であるコリメータミラー2141-3を用いて、光源4#1から射出される加工光EL#1を、平行光に変換してもよい。コリメータミラー2141-3は、コリメータミラー2141-3に入射した加工光EL#1を反射することで、平行光に変換された加工光EL#1を射出可能である限りは、どのような構成を有していてもよい。図25(a)に示す例では、コリメータミラー2141-3は、二つのミラー21411-3及び21412-3を備えている。ここで、コリメータミラー2141-3のうち、入射側のミラー21411-3は凹面ミラーであってもよく、射出側のミラー21412-3は凸面ミラーであってもよい。尚、ミラー21412-3は平面ミラーであってもよい。また、入射側のミラー21411-3を凸面ミラー又は平面鏡にし、射出側のミラー21412-3を凹面ミラーにしてもよい。
(1-5-3) Third Modification In the above description, the first optical system 214 converts the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 into parallel light using the collimator lens 2141, which is a refractive optical system. In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the first optical system 214 may convert the processing light EL#1 emitted from the light source 4#1 into parallel light using a collimator mirror 2141-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the collimator lens 2141, which is a refractive optical system. The collimator mirror 2141-3 may have any configuration as long as it can reflect the processing light EL#1 incident on the collimator mirror 2141-3 and emit the processing light EL#1 converted into parallel light. In the example shown in FIG. 25(a), the collimator mirror 2141-3 includes two mirrors 21411-3 and 21412-3. Here, of the collimator mirror 2141-3, the incident side mirror 21411-3 may be a concave mirror, and the exit side mirror 21412-3 may be a convex mirror. The mirror 21412-3 may be a plane mirror. Also, the incident side mirror 21411-3 may be a convex mirror or a plane mirror, and the exit side mirror 21412-3 may be a concave mirror.

 尚、第1光学系214と同様に、第2光学系215もまた、屈折光学系であるコリメータレンズ2151に代えて、反射光学系(例えば、コリメータミラー2141-3と同様の反射光学系であるコリメータミラー)を用いて、光源4#2から射出される加工光EL#2を、平行光に変換してもよい。 In addition, like the first optical system 214, the second optical system 215 may also use a reflective optical system (for example, a collimator mirror that is a reflective optical system similar to the collimator mirror 2141-3) instead of the collimator lens 2151, which is a refractive optical system, to convert the processing light EL#2 emitted from the light source 4#2 into parallel light.

 上述した説明では、第1光学系214は、屈折光学系であるフォーカス制御光学系2145を用いて、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更している。第3変形例では、図25(b)に示すように、第1光学系214は、屈折光学系であるフォーカス制御光学系2145に代えて、反射光学系であるフォーカス制御光学系2145-3を用いて、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更してもよい。フォーカス制御光学系2145-3は、フォーカス制御光学系2145-3に入射した加工光EL#1を反射することで、加工光EL#1のフォーカス位置CP#1を変更可能である限りは、どのような構成を有していてもよい。図25(b)に示す例では、フォーカス制御光学系2145-3は、四つのミラー21451-3、21452-3、21453-3及び21454-3を備えている。ここで、フォーカス制御光学系2145-3のうち、第1ミラー21451-3及び第4ミラー21454-3を凹面ミラーに、第2ミラー21452-3及び第3ミラー21453-3を凸面ミラーにしてもよい。例えば、加工光ELの進行方向における第2ミラー21452-3の位置を変更することによって加工光ELのフォーカス位置CPを変更することができる。このとき、第2ミラー21452-3の位置の変更に応じて、第2ミラー21452-3、第3ミラー21453-3及び第4ミラー21454-3のうちうちの少なくとも一つの傾き(例えば紙面内の傾き)を変更してもよい。なお、第1ミラー21451-3及び第4ミラー21454-3を凸面ミラーにし、第2ミラー21452-3及び第3ミラー21453-3を凹面ミラーにしてもよい。また、第1ミラー21451-3から第4ミラー21454-3のうちの少なくとも一つは、平面鏡であってもよい。 In the above description, the first optical system 214 changes the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 using the focus control optical system 2145, which is a refractive optical system. In the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the first optical system 214 may change the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 using the focus control optical system 2145-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the focus control optical system 2145, which is a refractive optical system. The focus control optical system 2145-3 may have any configuration as long as it is capable of changing the focus position CP#1 of the processing light EL#1 by reflecting the processing light EL#1 incident on the focus control optical system 2145-3. In the example shown in FIG. 25(b), the focus control optical system 2145-3 includes four mirrors 21451-3, 21452-3, 21453-3, and 21454-3. Here, in the focus control optical system 2145-3, the first mirror 21451-3 and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be concave mirrors, and the second mirror 21452-3 and the third mirror 21453-3 may be convex mirrors. For example, the focus position CP of the processing light EL can be changed by changing the position of the second mirror 21452-3 in the traveling direction of the processing light EL. At this time, the inclination (for example, the inclination in the paper) of at least one of the second mirror 21452-3, the third mirror 21453-3, and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be changed according to the change in the position of the second mirror 21452-3. It is to be noted that the first mirror 21451-3 and the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be convex mirrors, and the second mirror 21452-3 and the third mirror 21453-3 may be concave mirrors. In addition, at least one of the first mirror 21451-3 to the fourth mirror 21454-3 may be a plane mirror.

 尚、第1光学系214と同様に、第2光学系215もまた、屈折光学系であるフォーカス制御光学系2155に代えて、反射光学系(例えば、フォーカス制御光学系2145-3と同様の構成を有する反射光学系であるフォーカス制御光学系)を用いて、加工光EL#2のフォーカス位置CP#2を変更してもよい。 In addition, like the first optical system 214, the second optical system 215 may also change the focus position CP#2 of the processing light EL#2 by using a reflective optical system (for example, a focus control optical system that is a reflective optical system having a configuration similar to that of the focus control optical system 2145-3) instead of the focus control optical system 2155, which is a refractive optical system.

 上述した説明では、第3光学系216は、屈折光学系であるfθレンズ2162を用いて、加工光ELを集光している。第3変形例では、図25(c)に示すように、第3光学系216は、屈折光学系であるfθレンズ2162に代えて、反射光学系である集光光学系2162-3を用いて、加工光ELを集光してもよい。集光光学系2162-3は、集光光学系2162-3に入射した加工光ELを反射することで、加工光ELを集光可能である限りは、どのような構成を有していてもよい。図25(c)に示す例では、集光光学系2162-3は、加工光ELを集光する凹面ミラー21621-3と、第1光学系214からの加工光EL#1を凹面ミラー21621-3に向けて反射するミラー21622-3と、第2光学系215からの加工光EL#2を凹面ミラー21621-3に向けて反射するミラー21623-3とを備えている。尚、図25(c)に示すように、第3光学系216が図25(c)に示す集光光学系2162-3を備えている場合には、第3光学系216は、プリズムミラー2161を備えていなくてもよい。 In the above description, the third optical system 216 focuses the processing light EL using the fθ lens 2162, which is a refractive optical system. In a third modified example, as shown in FIG. 25(c), the third optical system 216 may focus the processing light EL using a focusing optical system 2162-3, which is a reflective optical system, instead of the fθ lens 2162, which is a refractive optical system. The focusing optical system 2162-3 may have any configuration as long as it is capable of focusing the processing light EL by reflecting the processing light EL incident on the focusing optical system 2162-3. In the example shown in FIG. 25(c), the focusing optical system 2162-3 includes a concave mirror 21621-3 that focuses the processing light EL, a mirror 21622-3 that reflects the processing light EL#1 from the first optical system 214 toward the concave mirror 21621-3, and a mirror 21623-3 that reflects the processing light EL#2 from the second optical system 215 toward the concave mirror 21621-3. Note that, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the third optical system 216 includes the focusing optical system 2162-3 shown in FIG. 25(c), the third optical system 216 does not need to include a prism mirror 2161.

 このように反射光学系が用いられる場合には、屈折光学系が用いられる場合と比較して、加工光ELがレンズの熱膨張の影響を受ける可能性が低くなる。このため、反射光学系が用いられる場合には、屈折光学系が用いられる場合と比較して、加工システムSYSaの造形精度が向上する。 When a reflective optical system is used in this way, the processing light EL is less likely to be affected by the thermal expansion of the lens compared to when a refractive optical system is used. Therefore, when a reflective optical system is used, the modeling accuracy of the processing system SYSa is improved compared to when a refractive optical system is used.

 (1-5-4)第4変形例
 上述した説明では、撮像装置8は、ビームスプリッタ2193によって反射された撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像している。第4変形例では、第4変形例における撮像光CLの光路を示す断面図である図26(a)に示すように、撮像装置8は、プリズムミラー2161に形成された貫通孔(開口)2161AP及びfθレンズ2162に形成された貫通孔(開口)2162APを介して撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。貫通孔2161APは、プリズムミラー2161のうち加工光ELの光路と重複しない部分に形成されてもよい。貫通孔2162APは、fθレンズ2162のうち加工光ELの光路と重複しない部分に形成されてもよい。この場合、照射装置210は、ビームスプリッタ2193(更には、ミラー2192)を備えていなくてもよい。
(1-5-4) Fourth Modification In the above description, the imaging device 8 captures an image of an object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL reflected by the beam splitter 2193. In the fourth modification, as shown in FIG. 26(a), which is a cross-sectional view showing the optical path of the imaging light CL in the fourth modification, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of an object to be imaged by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (opening) 2161AP formed in the prism mirror 2161 and a through hole (opening) 2162AP formed in the fθ lens 2162. The through hole 2161AP may be formed in a portion of the prism mirror 2161 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL. The through hole 2162AP may be formed in a portion of the fθ lens 2162 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL. In this case, the irradiation device 210 may not include the beam splitter 2193 (and further the mirror 2192).

 尚、第3変形例で説明したようにfθレンズ2162に代えて反射光学系である集光光学系2162-3が用いられる場合においても、撮像装置8は、集光光学系2162-3が備える光学部材に形成された貫通孔(開口)を介して撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。例えば、第4変形例における撮像光CLの光路を示す断面図である図26(b)に示すように、撮像装置8は、集光光学系2162-3が備える凹面ミラー21621-3に形成された貫通孔(開口)2163APを介して撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体を撮像してもよい。貫通孔2163APは、凹面ミラー21621-3のうち加工光ELの光路と重複しない部分に形成されてもよい。 Note that even when the focusing optical system 2162-3, which is a reflective optical system, is used instead of the fθ lens 2162 as described in the third modified example, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the imaging target object by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (aperture) formed in an optical member of the focusing optical system 2162-3. For example, as shown in FIG. 26(b), which is a cross-sectional view showing the optical path of the imaging light CL in the fourth modified example, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of the imaging target object by receiving the imaging light CL through a through hole (aperture) 2163AP formed in the concave mirror 21621-3 of the focusing optical system 2162-3. The through hole 2163AP may be formed in a part of the concave mirror 21621-3 that does not overlap with the optical path of the processing light EL.

 (1-5-5)第5変形例
 第5変形例における照射光学系211の構成を示す断面図である図27に示すように、第5変形例では、第1光学系214は、メルトプールモニタ2147を備えていてもよい、及び/又は、第2光学系215は、メルトプールモニタ2157を備えていてもよい。
(1-5-5) Fifth Modification As shown in FIG. 27, which is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211 in the fifth modification, in the fifth modification, the first optical system 214 may be provided with a melt pool monitor 2147, and/or the second optical system 215 may be provided with a melt pool monitor 2157.

 メルトプールモニタ2147は、溶融池MP#1を撮像可能な撮像装置であってもよい。メルトプールモニタ2147には、溶融池MP#1からの戻り光RL(例えば、上述した撮像光CL)が、第3光学系216、ガルバノスキャナ2144及び平行平板2142を介して、入射してもよい。メルトプールモニタ2147による撮像結果は、制御ユニット7に出力されてもよい。制御ユニット7は、メルトプールモニタ2147による撮像結果に基づいて溶融池MP#1のサイズを算出し、溶融池MP#1のサイズの算出結果に基づいて、溶融池MP#1のサイズが所望サイズとなるように、加工ユニット2等を制御してもよい。 The melt pool monitor 2147 may be an imaging device capable of imaging the molten pool MP#1. Return light RL (e.g., the imaging light CL described above) from the molten pool MP#1 may be incident on the melt pool monitor 2147 via the third optical system 216, the galvanometer scanner 2144, and the parallel plate 2142. The imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147 may be output to the control unit 7. The control unit 7 may calculate the size of the molten pool MP#1 based on the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2147, and may control the processing unit 2, etc. based on the calculation result of the size of the molten pool MP#1 so that the size of the molten pool MP#1 becomes the desired size.

 メルトプールモニタ2157は、溶融池MP#2を撮像可能な撮像装置であってもよい。メルトプールモニタ2157には、溶融池MP#2からの戻り光RL(例えば、上述した撮像光CL)が、第3光学系216、ガルバノスキャナ2154及び平行平板2152を介して、入射してもよい。メルトプールモニタ2157による撮像結果は、制御ユニット7に出力されてもよい。制御ユニット7は、メルトプールモニタ2157による撮像結果に基づいて溶融池MP#2のサイズを算出し、溶融池MP#2のサイズの算出結果に基づいて、溶融池MP#2のサイズが所望サイズとなるように、加工ユニット2等を制御してもよい。 The melt pool monitor 2157 may be an imaging device capable of imaging the molten pool MP#2. Return light RL (e.g., the imaging light CL described above) from the molten pool MP#2 may be incident on the melt pool monitor 2157 via the third optical system 216, the galvanometer scanner 2154, and the parallel plate 2152. The imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2157 may be output to the control unit 7. The control unit 7 may calculate the size of the molten pool MP#2 based on the imaging results by the melt pool monitor 2157, and may control the processing unit 2, etc. based on the calculation result of the size of the molten pool MP#2 so that the size of the molten pool MP#2 becomes the desired size.

 尚、撮像装置8が、メルトプールモニタ2147及び2157の少なくとも一つが配置される位置に配置されていてもよい。この場合、撮像装置8は、第1光学系214及び第2光学系の少なくとも一つを介して撮像光CLを受光することで、撮像対象物体(例えば、溶融池MP)を撮像してもよい。具体的には、例えば、撮像装置8が溶融池MPを撮像する場合には、溶融池MPからの撮像光CLは、第3光学系216に入射してもよい。第3光学系216は、撮像光CLを第1光学系214及び第2光学系215の少なくとも一つに向けて射出してもよい。第1光学系214に入射した撮像光CLは、ガルバノスキャナ2144を通過し、平行平板2142によって撮像装置8に向けて反射されてもよい。第2光学系215に入射した撮像光CLもまた、ガルバノスキャナ2154を通過し、平行平板2152によって撮像装置8に向けて反射されてもよい。その結果、撮像装置8は、溶融池MPを撮像することができる。 The imaging device 8 may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed. In this case, the imaging device 8 may capture an image of an object to be imaged (e.g., the molten pool MP) by receiving the imaging light CL through at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system. Specifically, for example, when the imaging device 8 captures an image of the molten pool MP, the imaging light CL from the molten pool MP may be incident on the third optical system 216. The third optical system 216 may emit the imaging light CL toward at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system 215. The imaging light CL incident on the first optical system 214 may pass through the galvanometer scanner 2144 and be reflected by the parallel plate 2142 toward the imaging device 8. The imaging light CL incident on the second optical system 215 may also pass through the galvanometer scanner 2154 and be reflected by the parallel plate 2152 toward the imaging device 8. As a result, the imaging device 8 can capture an image of the molten pool MP.

 或いは、2色法を用いて物体の温度を検出可能な温度検出器が、メルトプールモニタ2147及び2157の少なくとも一つが配置される位置に配置されていてもよい。温度検出器は、第1光学系214及び第2光学系の少なくとも一つを介して、温度を検出するべき物体からの光を受光することで、物体の温度を検出してもよい。尚、2色法を用いて物体の温度を検出可能な温度検出器として、米国特許出願公開第2021/0268586号明細書に記載された温度検出器が用いられてもよい。 Alternatively, a temperature detector capable of detecting the temperature of an object using a two-color method may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed. The temperature detector may detect the temperature of the object by receiving light from the object whose temperature is to be detected via at least one of the first optical system 214 and the second optical system. In addition, the temperature detector described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2021/0268586 may be used as a temperature detector capable of detecting the temperature of an object using a two-color method.

 或いは、造形面MS上での加工光ELの照射位置を検出可能な照射位置検出器が、メルトプールモニタ2147及び2157の少なくとも一つが配置される位置に配置されていてもよい。照射位置検出器は、造形面MS上で加工光ELが照射された照射位置からの光(例えば、加工光ELの反射光及び散乱光の少なくとも一つ)を受光することで、加工光ELの照射位置を検出してもよい。照射位置検出器として、加工光ELのスポットの光量の重心を検出可能な光位置センサ(PSD:Position Sensitive Detector)があげられる。 Alternatively, an irradiation position detector capable of detecting the irradiation position of the processing light EL on the printing surface MS may be disposed at a position where at least one of the melt pool monitors 2147 and 2157 is disposed. The irradiation position detector may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL by receiving light (e.g., at least one of reflected light and scattered light of the processing light EL) from the irradiation position on the printing surface MS where the processing light EL is irradiated. An example of the irradiation position detector is a light position sensor (PSD: Position Sensitive Detector) capable of detecting the center of gravity of the light amount of the spot of the processing light EL.

 (1-5-6)第6変形例
 上述した説明では、加工システムSYSaは、レーザ肉盛溶接法に基づく付加加工を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形している。しかしながら、加工システムSYSaは、三次元構造物STを造形可能なその他の方式に準拠した付加加工を行うことで、三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。三次元構造物STを造形可能なその他の方式の一例として、粉末焼結積層造形法(SLS:Selective Laser Sintering)等の粉末床溶融結合法(Powder Bed Fusion)、結合材噴射法(バインダージェッティング方式:Binder Jetting)、材料噴射法(マテリアルジェッティング方式:Material Jetting)、光造形法及びレーザメタルフュージョン法(LMF:Laser Metal Fusion)のうちの少なくとも一つがあげられる。
(1-5-6) Sixth Modification In the above description, the processing system SYSa forms the three-dimensional structure ST by performing additive processing based on the laser build-up welding method. However, the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST by performing additive processing in accordance with other methods capable of forming the three-dimensional structure ST. Examples of other methods capable of forming the three-dimensional structure ST include at least one of powder bed fusion methods such as selective laser sintering (SLS), binder jetting, material jetting, stereolithography, and laser metal fusion (LMF).

 このようにレーザ肉盛り溶接法とは異なる方法で加工システムSYSaが三次元構造物STを造形する場合においても、加工システムSYSaは、複数の加工光ELを用いて三次元構造物STを造形してもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSaは、複数の加工光ELの位置合わせを行うマルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。その結果、このようにレーザ肉盛り溶接法とは異なる方法で加工システムSYSaが三次元構造物STを造形する場合においても、上述したマルチビームアライメント動作によって享受可能な効果と同様の効果を享受することができる。 Even when the processing system SYSa forms a three-dimensional structure ST using a method other than the laser build-up welding method, the processing system SYSa may form the three-dimensional structure ST using multiple processing lights EL. In this case, the processing system SYSa may perform a multi-beam alignment operation to align the multiple processing lights EL. As a result, even when the processing system SYSa forms a three-dimensional structure ST using a method other than the laser build-up welding method, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those that can be achieved by the multi-beam alignment operation described above.

 図28は、粉末床溶融結合法に準拠した付加加工を行う加工システムSYSa(以降、加工システムSYS-6と称する)の構成を示す断面図である。図28に示すように、加工システムSYSa-6は、加工ユニット2-6と、上述した制御ユニット7と、上述した撮像装置8とを備える。尚、説明の便宜上、図28は、制御ユニット7の断面を示しているわけではない。加工ユニット2-6は、加工ユニット2と同様に、付加加工を行うことで三次元構造物を造形可能な装置である。但し、加工ユニット2-6は、粉末床溶融結合法に準拠した付加加工を行うという点で、レーザ肉盛り溶接法に準拠した付加加工を行う加工ユニット2とは異なる。 FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a processing system SYSa (hereinafter referred to as processing system SYS-6) that performs additive processing in accordance with the powder bed fusion method. As shown in FIG. 28, the processing system SYSa-6 includes a processing unit 2-6, the above-mentioned control unit 7, and the above-mentioned imaging device 8. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 28 does not show a cross section of the control unit 7. The processing unit 2-6 is a device that can form a three-dimensional structure by performing additive processing, similar to the processing unit 2. However, the processing unit 2-6 differs from the processing unit 2 that performs additive processing in accordance with the laser build-up welding method in that it performs additive processing in accordance with the powder bed fusion method.

 加工ユニット2-6は、材料供給槽24-6と、リコーター25-6と、造形槽26-6と、加工ヘッド27-6とを備える。 The processing unit 2-6 includes a material supply tank 24-6, a recoater 25-6, a modeling tank 26-6, and a processing head 27-6.

 材料供給槽24-6は、三次元構造物を造形するための造形材料Mを収容するための収容容器である。材料供給槽24-6の底面241-6は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、駆動機構(不図示)によって上下方向(Z軸方向)に沿って移動する。造形材料Mは、例えば、粉末である。一例として、造形材料Mは、金属粉末及び樹脂粉末の少なくとも一つであってもよい。但し、造形材料Mは、粉末でなくてもよい。 The material supply tank 24-6 is a container for containing the modeling material M for forming a three-dimensional structure. The bottom surface 241-6 of the material supply tank 24-6 moves in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) by a drive mechanism (not shown) under the control of the control unit 7. The modeling material M is, for example, a powder. As an example, the modeling material M may be at least one of a metal powder and a resin powder. However, the modeling material M does not have to be a powder.

 リコーター25-6は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、材料供給槽24-6に収容された造形材料Mを、造形槽26-6に供給する。特に、リコーター25-6は、造形槽26-6に供給された造形材料Mの表面を平らにすることで、造形材料Mの層である材料層MLを形成する。造形槽26-6の底面は、昇降ステージ261-6となっている。昇降ステージ261-6は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、駆動機構(不図示)により上下方向(Z軸方向)に移動する。 Under the control of the control unit 7, the recoater 25-6 supplies the modeling material M contained in the material supply tank 24-6 to the modeling tank 26-6. In particular, the recoater 25-6 flattens the surface of the modeling material M supplied to the modeling tank 26-6 to form a material layer ML, which is a layer of the modeling material M. The bottom surface of the modeling tank 26-6 is the lifting stage 261-6. Under the control of the control unit 7, the lifting stage 261-6 moves in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) by a drive mechanism (not shown).

 加工ヘッド27-6は、造形槽26-6に形成された材料層MLの少なくとも一部に対して、加工光ELを照射する。具体的には、加工ヘッド27-6は、造形槽26-6に形成された材料層MLの表面の少なくとも一部である加工面MLsに対して、加工光ELを照射する。材料層MLの少なくとも一部に加工光ELが照射されると、材料層MLの少なくとも一部が溶融する。つまり、材料層MLに溶融池MPが形成される。言い換えれば、加工面MLsに溶融池MPが形成される。その後、溶融した材料層ML(つまり、溶融池MP)に加工光ELが照射されなくなると、溶融した材料層MLが凝固する。その結果、凝固した材料層MLに相当する構造層SLが形成される。構造層SLは、造形材料Mが焼結することで形成された焼結層と等価であってもよい。構造層SLは、溶融した造形材料Mが固化することで形成された固化層と等価であってもよい。 The processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL to at least a portion of the material layer ML formed in the modeling tank 26-6. Specifically, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL to a processing surface MLs, which is at least a portion of the surface of the material layer ML formed in the modeling tank 26-6. When the processing light EL is irradiated to at least a portion of the material layer ML, at least a portion of the material layer ML melts. That is, a molten pool MP is formed in the material layer ML. In other words, a molten pool MP is formed on the processing surface MLs. After that, when the processing light EL is no longer irradiated to the molten material layer ML (that is, the molten pool MP), the molten material layer ML solidifies. As a result, a structural layer SL equivalent to the solidified material layer ML is formed. The structural layer SL may be equivalent to a sintered layer formed by sintering the modeling material M. The structural layer SL may be equivalent to a solidified layer formed by solidifying the molten modeling material M.

 加工ヘッド27-6は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、材料層MLを選択的に凝固するために、材料層MLに選択的に加工光ELを照射する。材料層MLに選択的に加工光ELを照射するために、加工ヘッド27-6は、ガルバノミラーを用いて、加工光ELを偏向する。 Under the control of the control unit 7, the processing head 27-6 selectively irradiates the material layer ML with the processing light EL in order to selectively solidify the material layer ML. To selectively irradiate the material layer ML with the processing light EL, the processing head 27-6 uses a galvanometer mirror to deflect the processing light EL.

 構造層SLが造形された後に、昇降ステージ261-6が降下する。昇降ステージ261-6が降下した(図28に示す例では、昇降ステージ261-6が-Z側に向かって移動した)後に、リコーター25-6は、昇降ステージ261-6上に(より具体的には、造形済みの構造層SL及び既に形成済みの古い材料層MLの上に)新たな材料層MLを形成する。その後、加工ヘッド27-6は、新たに形成された材料層MLに加工光ELを照射する。つまり、加工ヘッド27-6は、新たに形成された材料層MLの表面の少なくとも一部である加工面MLsに加工光ELを照射する。言い換えれば、加工ヘッド27-6は、最上層の材料層MLに加工光ELを照射する。つまり、加工ヘッド27-6は、最上層の材料層MLの表面の少なくとも一部である加工面MLsに加工光ELを照射する。その結果、造形済みの構造層SL上に、新たな構造層SLが造形される。つまり、造形済みの構造層SL上に、新たな構造層SLが積層される。 After the structural layer SL is formed, the lifting stage 261-6 descends. After the lifting stage 261-6 descends (in the example shown in FIG. 28, the lifting stage 261-6 moves toward the -Z side), the recoater 25-6 forms a new material layer ML on the lifting stage 261-6 (more specifically, on the already formed structural layer SL and the already formed old material layer ML). The processing head 27-6 then irradiates the newly formed material layer ML with the processing light EL. In other words, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the processing surface MLs, which is at least a part of the surface of the newly formed material layer ML. In other words, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the uppermost material layer ML. In other words, the processing head 27-6 irradiates the processing light EL on the processing surface MLs, which is at least a part of the surface of the uppermost material layer ML. As a result, a new structural layer SL is formed on the already-formed structural layer SL. In other words, the new structural layer SL is stacked on the already-formed structural layer SL.

 以降、加工ユニット2-6は、制御ユニット7の制御下で、同様の動作を繰り返す。つまり、加工ユニット2-6は、主としてリコーター25-6を用いて材料層MLを形成する動作と、主として加工ヘッド27-6を用いて材料層MLの少なくとも一部を凝固して構造層SLを形成する動作と、昇降ステージ261-6を降下させる動作とを交互に繰り返す。その結果、昇降ステージ261-6上に、複数の構造層SLが積層された三次元構造物STが造形される。 Then, the processing unit 2-6 repeats the same operations under the control of the control unit 7. That is, the processing unit 2-6 alternately repeats an operation of forming a material layer ML mainly using the recoater 25-6, an operation of solidifying at least a portion of the material layer ML to form a structural layer SL mainly using the processing head 27-6, and an operation of lowering the lifting stage 261-6. As a result, a three-dimensional structure ST in which multiple structural layers SL are stacked is formed on the lifting stage 261-6.

 加工システムSYSa-6は、複数の加工光ELをそれぞれ射出する複数の加工ヘッド27-6を備えていてもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7は、複数の加工ヘッド27-6がそれぞれ射出する複数の加工光ELの位置合わせを行う上述したマルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。 The processing system SYSa-6 may be equipped with multiple processing heads 27-6 that each emit multiple processing beams EL. In this case, the control unit 7 may perform the above-mentioned multi-beam alignment operation to align the multiple processing beams EL emitted by the multiple processing heads 27-6.

 (2)第2実施形態の加工システムSYSb
 続いて、第2実施形態の加工システムSYSについて説明する。尚、以下の説明では、第2実施形態の加工システムSYSを、“加工システムSYSb”と称する。
(2) Machining system SYSb according to the second embodiment
Next, a machining system SYS according to a second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the machining system SYS according to the second embodiment will be referred to as a "machining system SYSb."

 (2-1)加工システムSYSbの全体構成
 初めに、第2実施形態の加工システムSYSbの構成について説明する。第2実施形態の加工システムSYSbは、上述した第1実施形態の加工システムSYSbと比較して、加工ユニット2に代えて加工ユニット2bを備えているという点で異なっていてもよい。更に、第2実施形態の加工システムSYSbは、上述した第1実施形態の加工システムSYSbと比較して、撮像装置8を備えていなくてもよいという点で異なっていてもよい。加工システムSYSbのその他の特徴は、照射光学系211のその他の特徴と同一であってもよい。加工ユニット2bは、加工ユニット2と比較して、照射装置210に代えて照射装置210bを備えているという点で異なっていてもよい。加工ユニット2bのその他の特徴は、加工ユニット2のその他の特徴と同一であってもよい。照射装置210bは、照射装置210と比較して、照射光学系211に代えて照射光学系211bを備えているという点で異なっていてもよい。照射装置210bのその他の特徴は、照射装置210のその他の特徴と同一であってもよい。
(2-1) Overall configuration of the machining system SYSb First, the configuration of the machining system SYSb of the second embodiment will be described. The machining system SYSb of the second embodiment may differ from the machining system SYSb of the first embodiment described above in that it includes a machining unit 2b instead of the machining unit 2. Furthermore, the machining system SYSb of the second embodiment may differ from the machining system SYSb of the first embodiment described above in that it does not need to include an imaging device 8. Other features of the machining system SYSb may be the same as other features of the irradiation optical system 211. The machining unit 2b may differ from the machining unit 2 in that it includes an irradiation device 210b instead of the irradiation device 210. Other features of the machining unit 2b may be the same as other features of the machining unit 2. The irradiation device 210b may differ from the irradiation device 210 in that it includes an irradiation optical system 211b instead of the irradiation optical system 211. Other features of the illumination device 210b may be the same as those of the illumination device 210.

 (2-2)照射光学系211bの構造
 続いて、図30を参照しながら、第2実施形態における照射光学系211bの構成について説明する。図30は、照射光学系211bの構成を示す断面図である。
(2-2) Structure of Irradiation Optical System 211b Next, the configuration of irradiation optical system 211b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of irradiation optical system 211b.

 図30に示すように、照射光学系211bは、照射光学系211と比較して、ダイクロイックミラー217bと、二つの照射位置検出装置218b(具体的には、照射位置検出装置218b#1及び照射位置検出装置218b#2)とを備えているという点で異なる。照射光学系211bのその他の特徴は、照射光学系211のその他の特徴と同一であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 30, the irradiation optical system 211b differs from the irradiation optical system 211 in that it includes a dichroic mirror 217b and two irradiation position detection devices 218b (specifically, irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and irradiation position detection device 218b#2). Other features of the irradiation optical system 211b may be the same as other features of the irradiation optical system 211.

 ダイクロイックミラー217bは、第3光学系216から射出された加工光EL(加工光EL#1及びEL#2)の光路上に配置される。ダイクロイックミラー217bは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2を通過させる。但し、ダイクロイックミラー217bに加工光EL#1及びEL#2を通過させる光学面(例えば、波長選択性を有する薄膜が形成されたダイクロイック面)が形成されるがゆえに、加工光EL#1及びEL#2を通過させるダイクロイックミラー217bは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2の一部を反射する。例えば、ダイクロイックミラー217bは、ダイクロイックミラー217bに入射した加工光EL#1及びEL#2の1%程度を反射する。このように、ダイクロイックミラー217bは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを分割するビームスプリッタとして機能する。尚、以下の説明では、ダイクロイックミラー217bが反射した加工光EL#1の一部を、“加工光EL#31”と称し、ダイクロイックミラー217bが反射した加工光EL#2の一部を、“加工光EL#32”と称する。 The dichroic mirror 217b is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL (processing light EL#1 and EL#2) emitted from the third optical system 216. The dichroic mirror 217b passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2. However, since the dichroic mirror 217b has an optical surface (e.g., a dichroic surface on which a thin film having wavelength selectivity is formed) that passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2, the dichroic mirror 217b that passes the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 reflects a portion of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2. For example, the dichroic mirror 217b reflects about 1% of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 that is incident on the dichroic mirror 217b. In this way, the dichroic mirror 217b functions as a beam splitter that splits each of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2. In the following description, the portion of the processed light EL#1 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b is referred to as "processed light EL#31," and the portion of the processed light EL#2 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b is referred to as "processed light EL#32."

 照射位置検出装置218b#1は、ダイクロイックミラー217bが反射した加工光EL#31の光路上に配置される。照射位置検出装置218b#1は、照射位置検出装置218b#1に入射した加工光EL#31を検出(具体的には、受光)する。具体的には、照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#31の進行方向を横切る(言い換えれば、交差する)検出面2181b#1を備えており、検出面2181b#1を用いて、加工光EL#31を検出する。照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#31を検出することで、加工光EL#31の進行方向を横切る検出面2181b#1内での加工光EL#31の照射位置を検出する。但し、照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#31を検出することで、加工光EL#31の進行方向を横切る任意の面内での加工光EL#31の照射位置を検出してもよい。 The irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#31 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b. The irradiation position detection device 218b#1 detects (specifically, receives) the processing light EL#31 incident on the irradiation position detection device 218b#1. Specifically, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 has a detection surface 2181b#1 that crosses (in other words, intersects) the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31, and detects the processing light EL#31 using the detection surface 2181b#1. By detecting the processing light EL#31, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 detects the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 within the detection surface 2181b#1 that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31. However, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 within any plane that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#31 by detecting the processing light EL#31.

 照射位置検出装置218b#2は、ダイクロイックミラー217bが反射した加工光EL#32の光路上に配置される。照射位置検出装置218b#2は、照射位置検出装置218b#2に入射した加工光EL#32を検出(具体的には、受光)する。具体的には、照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#32の進行方向を横切る(言い換えれば、交差する)検出面2181b#2を備えており、検出面2181b#2を用いて、加工光EL#32を検出する。照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#32を検出することで、検出面2181b#2内での加工光EL#32の照射位置を検出する。但し、照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#32を検出することで、加工光EL#32の進行方向を横切る任意の面内での加工光EL#32の照射位置を検出してもよい。 The irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is disposed on the optical path of the processing light EL#32 reflected by the dichroic mirror 217b. The irradiation position detection device 218b#2 detects (specifically, receives) the processing light EL#32 incident on the irradiation position detection device 218b#2. Specifically, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 has a detection surface 2181b#2 that crosses (in other words, intersects) the traveling direction of the processing light EL#32, and detects the processing light EL#32 using the detection surface 2181b#2. The irradiation position detection device 218b#2 detects the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 within the detection surface 2181b#2 by detecting the processing light EL#32. However, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 within any plane that crosses the traveling direction of the processing light EL#32 by detecting the processing light EL#32.

 尚、照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2の一例として、加工光ELのスポットの光量の重心を検出することで、加工光ELの照射位置可能な光位置センサ(PSD:Position Sensitive Detector)があげられる。照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2の一例として、加工光ELを検出する検出面が四分割されたフォトディテクタがあげられる。照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2の一例として、スリットを介して加工光ELを受光することで、加工光ELの照射位置可能なビームプロファイラがあげられる。 An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is an optical position sensor (PSD: Position Sensitive Detector) that can determine the irradiation position of the processing light EL by detecting the center of gravity of the light amount of the spot of the processing light EL. An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is a photodetector with a detection surface divided into four parts that detects the processing light EL. An example of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 is a beam profiler that can determine the irradiation position of the processing light EL by receiving the processing light EL through a slit.

 照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#31を検出する一方で、加工光EL#32を検出しなくてもよい。同様に、照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#32を検出する一方で、加工光EL#31を検出しなくてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2のそれぞれは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか一方を選択的に検出する。 The irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the processed light EL#31 but not necessarily detect the processed light EL#32. Similarly, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the processed light EL#32 but not necessarily detect the processed light EL#31. In other words, each of the irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 selectively detects either the processed light EL#31 or EL#32.

 ここで、上述したように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156がそれぞれ加工光EL#1及び#2を偏向するがゆえに、図31に示すように、加工光EL#31及びEL#32もまた偏向される。この場合、図31に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲に配置される。一方で、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲には配置されなくてもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲とは異なる位置に配置されてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲と、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲とが重複しない位置に配置される。その結果、照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#32を検出することなく、加工光EL#31を検出することができる。 Here, as described above, since the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 deflect the processing light EL#1 and #2, respectively, the processing light EL#31 and EL#32 are also deflected, as shown in FIG. 31. In this case, as shown in FIG. 31, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. On the other hand, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. The detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may be arranged at a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. In other words, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is positioned at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 does not overlap with the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. As a result, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 can detect the processing light EL#31 without detecting the processing light EL#32.

 同様に、図31に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲に配置される。一方で、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲には配置されなくてもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲とは異なる位置に配置されてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲と、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲とが重複しない位置に配置される。その結果、照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#31を検出することなく、加工光EL#32を検出することができる。 31, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. On the other hand, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. The detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may be arranged at a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. In other words, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap. As a result, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 can detect the processed light EL#32 without detecting the processed light EL#31.

 (2-3)加工システムSYSbが行うビームアライメント動作
 第2実施形態では、加工システムSYSb(特に、制御ユニット7)は、上述した加工システムSYSaと同様に、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行うためのマルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。但し、第2実施形態では、制御ユニット7は、撮像装置8の撮像結果(つまり、撮像装置8が生成した画像IMG)に基づくことに代えて、照射位置検出装置218b#1による加工光EL#31の照射位置の検出結果及び照射位置検出装置218b#2による加工光EL#32の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行うためのマルチビームアライメント動作を行ってもよい。このため、以下では、第1実施形態におけるマルチビームアライメント動作と第2実施形態におけるマルチビームアライメント動作との違いを主として説明することで、第2実施形態におけるマルチビームアライメント動作について説明する。特段の説明がない場合には、第2実施形態においても、第1実施形態におけるマルチビームアライメント動作と同様の動作が行われてもよい。
(2-3) Beam alignment operation performed by the processing system SYSb In the second embodiment, the processing system SYSb (particularly, the control unit 7) may perform a multi-beam alignment operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2, similar to the above-mentioned processing system SYSa. However, in the second embodiment, the control unit 7 may perform a multi-beam alignment operation for aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2, instead of based on the imaging result of the imaging device 8 (i.e., the image IMG generated by the imaging device 8). For this reason, the multi-beam alignment operation in the second embodiment will be described below by mainly describing the difference between the multi-beam alignment operation in the first embodiment and the multi-beam alignment operation in the second embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, in the second embodiment, an operation similar to the multi-beam alignment operation in the first embodiment may be performed.

 具体的には、上述したように、照射位置検出装置218b#1が検出する加工光EL#31が加工光EL#1の一部であるがゆえに、図32(a)に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1上での加工光EL#31の照射位置の検出結果は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の位置(照射位置)を間接的に示している。このため、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#1による加工光EL#31の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の照射位置を算出してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#1による加工光EL#31の照射位置の検出結果と、検出面2181b#1と造形面MS又は材料照射面ESとの位置関係に関する情報とに基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の照射位置を算出してもよい。 Specifically, as described above, since the processing light EL#31 detected by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is a part of the processing light EL#1, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 on the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1. For example, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 and information on the positional relationship between the detection surface 2181b#1 and the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.

 同様に、上述したように、照射位置検出装置218b#2が検出する加工光EL#32が加工光EL#2の一部であるがゆえに、図32(b)に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2上での加工光EL#32の照射位置の検出結果は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の位置(照射位置)を間接的に示している。このため、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#2による加工光EL#32の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の照射位置を算出してもよい。例えば、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#2による加工光EL#32の照射位置の検出結果と、検出面2181b#2と造形面MS又は材料照射面ESとの位置関係に関する情報とに基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の照射位置を算出してもよい。 Similarly, as described above, since the processing light EL#32 detected by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is a part of the processing light EL#2, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 on the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2. For example, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 and information on the positional relationship between the detection surface 2181b#2 and the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.

 その後、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれの照射位置の算出結果に基づいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行う。 Then, the control unit 7 aligns the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 based on the calculation results of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES.

 加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行う第1の例として、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESの同じ位置に加工光EL#1及びEL#2が照射されるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156を制御するための駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を生成してもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2は、この基準駆動指令値に従ってガルバノミラー2146及び2156が加工光EL#31及びEL#32をそれぞれ偏向している間に、加工光EL#31及びEL#32をそれぞれ検出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#31及びEL#32の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2の照射位置をそれぞれ算出してもよい。その後、図33に示すように、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれの照射位置の算出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでのX軸方向における加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置ずれ量ΔX3を算出してもよい。更に、図33に示すように、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX3を算出することに加えて又は代えて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれの照射位置の算出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでのY軸方向における加工光EL#1及びEL#2の位置ずれ量ΔY3を算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX3及びΔY3の少なくとも一つが小さくなる(典型的には、ゼロになる)ように駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。 As a first example of aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2, the control unit 7 may generate a drive command value (reference drive command value) for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated at the same position on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. The irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 may detect the processing light EL#31 and EL#32, respectively, while the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are deflecting the processing light EL#31 and EL#32, respectively, according to this reference drive command value. Then, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, respectively, based on the detection results of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#31 and EL#32. Then, as shown in FIG. 33, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ΔX3 of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 in the X-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 33, in addition to or instead of calculating the positional deviation amount ΔX3, the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount ΔY3 of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 in the Y-axis direction on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Then, the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX3 and ΔY3 becomes small (typically becomes zero).

 尚、第1実施形態において位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)までノズル-ビームアライメント動作が繰り返される場合と同様に、第2実施形態において、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX3及びΔY3の少なくとも一つが所定の第2許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)まで、マルチビームアライメント動作を繰り返してもよい。 In the same way as in the first embodiment where the nozzle-beam alignment operation is repeated until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero), in the second embodiment, the control unit 7 may repeat the multi-beam alignment operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX3 and ΔY3 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined second allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).

 加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを行う第2の例として、まずは、マルチビームアライメント動作を行う前に、制御ユニット7は、初期キャリブレーション動作を行ってもよい。初期キャリブレーション動作は、加工光ELの照射位置を検出可能な照射位置検出装置を造形面MS又は材料照射面ESに配置し、照射位置検出装置による加工光ELの検出結果に基づいて、「造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける所望位置に加工光EL#1及びEL#2が照射されるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156が制御された場合に、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける所望位置に実際に加工光EL#1及びEL#2が照射される」という条件を満たすように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を較正する動作である。初期キャリブレーション動作が行われた後、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける所望の第1及び第2目標位置に加工光EL#1及びEL#2がそれぞれ照射されるようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156をそれぞれ制御するための駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を生成してもよい。尚、第1目標位置と第2目標位置とは、同じであってもよいし、異なっていてもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2は、この基準駆動指令値に従ってガルバノミラー2146及び2156が加工光EL#31及びEL#32をそれぞれ偏向している間に、加工光EL#31及びEL#32をそれぞれ検出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#31及びEL#32の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1及びEL#2の照射位置をそれぞれ算出してもよい。その後、図34(a)に示すように、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の照射位置の算出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでの所望の第1目標位置に対する加工光EL#1の照射位置の位置ずれ量を算出してもよい。具体的には、図34(a)に示すように、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向における加工光EL#1の照射位置と第1目標位置との位置ずれ量ΔX4、及び、Y軸方向における加工光EL#1の照射位置と第1目標位置との位置ずれ量ΔY4の少なくとも一つを算出してもよい。更に、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX4及びΔY4の少なくとも一つを算出することに加えて又は代えて、図34(b)に示すように、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の照射位置の算出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESでの所望の第2目標位置に対する加工光EL#2の照射位置の位置ずれ量を算出してもよい。具体的には、図34(b)に示すように、制御ユニット7は、X軸方向における加工光EL#2の照射位置と第2目標位置との位置ずれ量ΔX5、及び、Y軸方向における加工光EL#2の照射位置と第2目標位置との位置ずれ量ΔY5の少なくとも一つを算出してもよい。その後、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX4、ΔY4、ΔX5及びΔY5の少なくとも一つが小さくなる(典型的には、ゼロになる)ように駆動指令値(基準駆動指令値)を補正するための補正指令値を算出してもよい。 As a second example of aligning the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2, the control unit 7 may first perform an initial calibration operation before performing the multi-beam alignment operation. The initial calibration operation is an operation in which an irradiation position detection device capable of detecting the irradiation position of the processing light EL is disposed on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, and the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are calibrated based on the detection result of the processing light EL by the irradiation position detection device so as to satisfy the condition that "when the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are controlled so that the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated to the desired position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES, the processing light EL#1 and EL#2 are actually irradiated to the desired position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES." After the initial calibration operation is performed, the control unit 7 may generate drive command values (reference drive command values) for controlling the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 are irradiated to the desired first and second target positions on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. The first target position and the second target position may be the same or different. The irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2 may detect the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32 while the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 are deflecting the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32 according to the reference drive command values. After that, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation positions of the processing beams EL#1 and EL#2 on the modeling surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection results of the irradiation positions of the processing beams EL#31 and EL#32. Thereafter, as shown in Fig. 34(a), the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 relative to the desired first target position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 34(a), the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of the positional deviation amount ΔX4 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 in the X-axis direction and the first target position, and the positional deviation amount ΔY4 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 in the Y-axis direction and the first target position. Furthermore, in addition to or instead of calculating at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX4 and ΔY4, as shown in Fig. 34(b), the control unit 7 may calculate the positional deviation amount of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 relative to the desired second target position on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the calculation result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34B, the control unit 7 may calculate at least one of a positional deviation amount ΔX5 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 in the X-axis direction and the second target position, and a positional deviation amount ΔY5 between the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 in the Y-axis direction and the second target position. After that, the control unit 7 may calculate a correction command value for correcting the drive command value (reference drive command value) so that at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX4, ΔY4, ΔX5, and ΔY5 becomes small (typically, becomes zero).

 尚、第1実施形態において位置ずれ量ΔX1及びΔY1の少なくとも一つが所定の第1許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)までノズル-ビームアライメント動作が繰り返される場合と同様に、第2実施形態において、制御ユニット7は、位置ずれ量ΔX4、ΔY4、ΔX5及びΔY5の少なくとも一つが所定の第3許容上限値以下になる(或いは、ゼロになる)まで、マルチビームアライメント動作を繰り返してもよい。 In the same way as in the first embodiment where the nozzle-beam alignment operation is repeated until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX1 and ΔY1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined first allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero), in the second embodiment, the control unit 7 may repeat the multi-beam alignment operation until at least one of the positional deviation amounts ΔX4, ΔY4, ΔX5, and ΔY5 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined third allowable upper limit value (or becomes zero).

 補正指令値が算出された後は、ノズル-ビームアライメント動作で補正指令値が算出された場合と同様に、制御ユニット7は、補正指令値を用いて、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御してもよい。その結果、制御ユニット7は、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つの制御誤差等に起因して加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置ずれが発生した場合であっても、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御することができる。例えば、制御ユニット7は、マルチビームアライメント動作を行うことで、X軸方向及びY軸方向の少なくとも一つにおいて、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置関係が所望の位置関係となるように、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一つを制御することができる。このため、加工システムSYSbは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを所望の位置に適切に照射することができる。その結果、加工システムSYSbは、三次元構造物STを精度よく造形することができる。 After the correction command value is calculated, the control unit 7 may use the correction command value to control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, in the same manner as when the correction command value is calculated in the nozzle-beam alignment operation. As a result, even if a positional deviation occurs between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 due to a control error or the like of at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156, the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship. For example, the control unit 7 can control at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 by performing a multi-beam alignment operation so that the positional relationship between the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2 becomes a desired positional relationship in at least one of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. Therefore, the processing system SYSb can appropriately irradiate each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 at a desired position. As a result, the processing system SYSb can accurately model the three-dimensional structure ST.

 (2-4)加工システムSYSbの変形例
 続いて、第2実施形態における加工システムSYSbの変形例について説明する。
(2-4) Modifications of the Machining System SYSb Next, modifications of the machining system SYSb in the second embodiment will be described.

 (2-4-1)第1変形例
 上述した説明では、照射光学系211bは、二つの照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2を備えている。第1変形例では、第1変形例における照射光学系211bの構成を示す断面図である図35に示すように、照射光学系211bは、単一の照射位置検出装置218bを備えていてもよい。この場合、照射位置検出装置218bは、加工光EL#31の照射位置を検出し、且つ、加工光EL#32の照射位置を検出してもよい。
(2-4-1) First Modification In the above description, the irradiation optical system 211b includes two irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2. In the first modification, as shown in Fig. 35, which is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211b in the first modification, the irradiation optical system 211b may include a single irradiation position detection device 218b. In this case, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 and also detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32.

 照射位置検出装置218bが加工光EL#31及びEL#32のそれぞれの照射位置を検出する場合には、図36に示すように、照射位置検出装置218bの検出面2181bは、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲に配置されていてもよい。更に、照射位置検出装置218bの検出面2181bは、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲に配置されていてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218bの検出面2181bは、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#31の走査範囲と、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#32の走査範囲とが重複する(重畳する)位置に配置されていてもよい。 When the irradiation position detection device 218b detects the irradiation positions of the processing light EL#31 and EL#32, as shown in FIG. 36, the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. Furthermore, the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. In other words, the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b may be arranged at a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#31 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#32 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 overlap (overlap).

 但し、この場合には、照射位置検出装置218bは、検出面2181bに加工光EL#31が照射される一方で、検出面2181bに加工光EL#32が照射されない第1期間中に、加工光EL#31の照射位置を検出してもよい。更に、照射位置検出装置218bは、検出面2181bに加工光EL#32が照射される一方で、検出面2181bに加工光EL#31が照射されない第2期間中に、加工光EL#32の照射位置を検出してもよい。尚、第2期間は、典型的には、第1期間とは異なる期間である。つまり、照射位置検出装置218bは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか一方を選択的に検出してもよい。その結果、照射光学系211bが単一の照射位置検出装置218bを備えている場合であっても、照射光学系211bが二つの照射位置検出装置218b#1及び218b#2を備えている場合と同様に、照射位置検出装置218bは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32のそれぞれの照射位置を検出することができる。このため、第1変形例においても、制御ユニット7は、上述したマルチビームアライメント動作を適切に行うことができる。 However, in this case, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#31 during a first period in which the processing light EL#31 is irradiated to the detection surface 2181b, while the processing light EL#32 is not irradiated to the detection surface 2181b. Furthermore, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#32 during a second period in which the processing light EL#32 is irradiated to the detection surface 2181b, while the processing light EL#31 is not irradiated to the detection surface 2181b. Note that the second period is typically a period different from the first period. In other words, the irradiation position detection device 218b may selectively detect either the processing light EL#31 or EL#32. As a result, even if the irradiation optical system 211b includes a single irradiation position detection device 218b, the irradiation position detection device 218b can detect the irradiation positions of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, just as in the case where the irradiation optical system 211b includes two irradiation position detection devices 218b#1 and 218b#2. Therefore, even in the first modified example, the control unit 7 can appropriately perform the multi-beam alignment operation described above.

 照射位置検出装置218bが加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか一方を選択的に検出できるように、第1変形例における照射光学系211bの構成を示す断面図である図37(a)及び図37(b)に示すように、照射光学系211bは、減光部材2182bを備えていてもよい。減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか一方を減光可能な光学部材である。減光部材2182bが加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか一方を減光している場合には、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32のいずれか他方を減光しなくてもよい。 As shown in Figs. 37(a) and 37(b), which are cross-sectional views showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211b in the first modified example, the irradiation optical system 211b may include a dimming member 2182b so that the irradiation position detection device 218b can selectively detect either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32. The dimming member 2182b is an optical member that can dim either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32. When the dimming member 2182b dims either one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, the dimming member 2182b does not need to dim the other one of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32.

 一例として、図37(a)に示すように、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#31の光路上の位置であって且つ加工光EL#32の光路から離れた位置に配置されていてもよい。この場合、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#31を減光する一方で、加工光EL#32を減光しない。その結果、照射位置検出装置218bの検出面2181bには、減光されていない加工光EL#32が入射する一方で、減光された加工光EL#31が入射しなくてもよい。その結果、照射位置検出装置218bは、減光されていない加工光EL#32を検出する一方で、減光された加工光EL#31を検出しなくてもよい。 As an example, as shown in FIG. 37(a), the dimming member 2182b may be disposed at a position on the optical path of the processing light EL#31 but away from the optical path of the processing light EL#32. In this case, the dimming member 2182b dims the processing light EL#31 but does not dim the processing light EL#32. As a result, the non-dimmed processing light EL#32 may be incident on the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b, but the dimmed processing light EL#31 may not be incident thereon. As a result, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the non-dimmed processing light EL#32 but may not detect the dimmed processing light EL#31.

 他の一例として、図37(b)に示すように、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#32の光路上の位置であって且つ加工光EL#31の光路から離れた位置に配置されていてもよい。この場合、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#32を減光する一方で、加工光EL#31を減光しない。その結果、照射位置検出装置218bの検出面2181bには、減光されていない加工光EL#31が入射する一方で、減光された加工光EL#32が入射しなくてもよい。その結果、照射位置検出装置218bは、減光されていない加工光EL#31を検出する一方で、減光された加工光EL#32を検出しなくてもよい。 As another example, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the dimming member 2182b may be disposed at a position on the optical path of the processing light EL#32 but away from the optical path of the processing light EL#31. In this case, the dimming member 2182b dims the processing light EL#32 but does not dim the processing light EL#31. As a result, the non-dimmed processing light EL#31 may be incident on the detection surface 2181b of the irradiation position detection device 218b, but the dimmed processing light EL#32 may not be incident thereon. As a result, the irradiation position detection device 218b may detect the non-dimmed processing light EL#31 but may not detect the dimmed processing light EL#32.

 減光部材2182bの状態は、図37(a)に示す状態と図37(b)に示す状態との間で切り替えられてもよい。例えば、減光部材2182bは、加工光EL#31及びEL#32の光路に対して移動可能であってもよい。減光部材2182bが加工光EL#31及びEL#32の光路に対して移動することで、減光部材2182bの状態が、図37(a)に示す状態と図37(b)に示す状態との間で切り替えられてもよい。 The state of the dimming member 2182b may be switched between the state shown in FIG. 37(a) and the state shown in FIG. 37(b). For example, the dimming member 2182b may be movable relative to the optical paths of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32. By moving the dimming member 2182b relative to the optical paths of the processing lights EL#31 and EL#32, the state of the dimming member 2182b may be switched between the state shown in FIG. 37(a) and the state shown in FIG. 37(b).

 尚、照射光学系211bは、ダイクロイックミラー217bに代えて、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを分割する任意のビームスプリッタを備えていてもよい。つまり、照射光学系211bは、ダイクロイックミラー217bに代えて、加工光EL#1の一部を加工光EL#31として照射位置検出装置218bに向け、且つ、加工光EL#2の一部を加工光EL#32として照射位置検出装置218bに向けるように、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のそれぞれを分割する任意のビームスプリッタを備えていてもよい。 In addition, the irradiation optical system 211b may be provided with any beam splitter that splits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 instead of the dichroic mirror 217b. In other words, the irradiation optical system 211b may be provided with any beam splitter that splits each of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2 instead of the dichroic mirror 217b so that a part of the processing light EL#1 is directed to the irradiation position detection device 218b as processing light EL#31, and a part of the processing light EL#2 is directed to the irradiation position detection device 218b as processing light EL#32.

 (2-4-2)第2変形例
 第2変形例では、加工システムSYSbは、第1実施形態の加工システムSYSaが備える撮像装置8を更に備えていてもよい。この場合、第2変形例における照射光学系211bの構成を示す断面図である図38に示すように、ダイクロイックミラー217bが、撮像対象物体からの撮像光CLを撮像装置8に向けて導くビームスプリッタ2193として用いられてもよい。この場合、制御ユニット7は、第2実施形態で説明したマルチビームアライメント動作に加えて又は代えて、第1実施形態で説明したノズル-ビームアライメント動作及びマルチビームアライメント動作の少なくとも一つを行ってもよい。
(2-4-2) Second Modification In the second modification, the processing system SYSb may further include the imaging device 8 included in the processing system SYSa of the first embodiment. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38, which is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an irradiation optical system 211b in the second modification, a dichroic mirror 217b may be used as a beam splitter 2193 that guides imaging light CL from an object to be imaged toward the imaging device 8. In this case, the control unit 7 may perform at least one of the nozzle-beam alignment operation and the multi-beam alignment operation described in the first embodiment in addition to or instead of the multi-beam alignment operation described in the second embodiment.

 (2-4-3)第3変形例
 第3変形例では、第3変形例における照射光学系211bの構成を示す断面図である図38に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#31を検出することに加えて又は代えて、加工光EL#1のうちのプリズムミラー2161を通過した光成分である加工光EL#33を検出してもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#1は、加工光EL#33を検出することで、加工光EL#33の照射位置を検出してもよい。同様に、図38に示すように、照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#32を検出することに加えて又は代えて、加工光EL#2のうちのプリズムミラー2161を通過した光成分である加工光EL#34を検出してもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#2は、加工光EL#34を検出することで、加工光EL#34の照射位置を検出してもよい。
(2-4-3) Third Modification In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 38, which is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the irradiation optical system 211b in the third modification, the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the processing light EL#33, which is a light component of the processing light EL#1 that has passed through the prism mirror 2161, in addition to or instead of detecting the processing light EL#31. The irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 by detecting the processing light EL#33. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 38, the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the processing light EL#34, which is a light component of the processing light EL#2 that has passed through the prism mirror 2161, in addition to or instead of detecting the processing light EL#32. The irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may detect the irradiation position of the processing light EL#34 by detecting the processing light EL#34.

 この場合、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#33の走査範囲に配置される。一方で、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#34の走査範囲には配置されなくてもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#34の走査範囲とは異なる位置に配置されてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#33の走査範囲と、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#34の走査範囲とが重複しない位置に配置される。 In this case, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. On the other hand, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. The detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 may be arranged in a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. In other words, the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 is arranged in a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap.

 同様に、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#34の走査範囲に配置される。一方で、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#33の走査範囲には配置されなくてもよい。照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#33の走査範囲とは異なる位置に配置されてもよい。つまり、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2は、ガルバノミラー2146によって偏向される加工光EL#33の走査範囲と、ガルバノミラー2156によって偏向される加工光EL#34の走査範囲とが重複しない位置に配置される。 Similarly, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156. On the other hand, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 does not have to be arranged in the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. The detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 may be arranged in a position different from the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146. In other words, the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 is arranged in a position where the scanning range of the processing light EL#33 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2146 and the scanning range of the processing light EL#34 deflected by the galvanometer mirror 2156 do not overlap.

 この場合、照射位置検出装置218b#1の検出面2181b#1上での加工光EL#33の照射位置の検出結果は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の位置(照射位置)を間接的に示している。このため、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#1による加工光EL#33の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#1の照射位置を算出してもよい。同様に、照射位置検出装置218b#2の検出面2181b#2上での加工光EL#34の照射位置の検出結果は、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の位置(照射位置)を間接的に示している。このため、制御ユニット7は、照射位置検出装置218b#2による加工光EL#34の照射位置の検出結果に基づいて、造形面MS又は材料照射面ESにおける加工光EL#2の照射位置を算出してもよい。その結果、第3変形例においても、制御ユニット7は、加工光EL#1と加工光EL#2との位置合わせを適切に行うことができる。 In this case, the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 on the detection surface 2181b#1 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#1 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#1 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#33 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#1. Similarly, the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#34 on the detection surface 2181b#2 of the irradiation position detection device 218b#2 indirectly indicates the position (irradiation position) of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES. Therefore, the control unit 7 may calculate the irradiation position of the processing light EL#2 on the printing surface MS or the material irradiation surface ES based on the detection result of the irradiation position of the processing light EL#34 by the irradiation position detection device 218b#2. As a result, even in the third modified example, the control unit 7 can properly align the processing light EL#1 and the processing light EL#2.

 (3)その他の変形例
 上述した説明では、加工ユニット2は、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156を用いて加工光ELの射出方向を変更している。しかしながら、加工ユニット2は、ガルバノミラー2146及び2156とは異なる光学系(光学部材)を用いて、加工光ELの射出方向を変更してもよい。例えば、加工ユニット2は、ポリゴンミラー及びレゾナントミラーの少なくとも一つを用いて加工光ELの射出方向を変更してもよい。例えば、加工ユニット2は、一対のトーションバーによって両端から支持されたミラーを共振振動させるレゾナントスキャナを用いて加工光ELの射出方向を変更してもよい。例えば、加工ユニット2は、音響光学偏向器(AOD:Acoustic Optical Diflector)を用いて加工光ELの射出方向を変更してもよい。
(3) Other Modifications In the above description, the processing unit 2 changes the emission direction of the processing light EL using the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. However, the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using an optical system (optical member) different from the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156. For example, the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using at least one of a polygon mirror and a resonant mirror. For example, the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using a resonant scanner that resonates and vibrates a mirror supported from both ends by a pair of torsion bars. For example, the processing unit 2 may change the emission direction of the processing light EL using an acousto-optical deflector (AOD).

 上述した説明では、加工ユニット2は、複数の加工光ELの照射位置をそれぞれ変えるために、複数のガルバノミラーを備えている。しかしながら、加工ユニット2は、一つのガルバノミラーを用いて複数の加工光ELの射出方向をまとめて変更してもよい。つまり、一つのガルバノミラーに複数の加工光ELが入射してもよい。 In the above description, the processing unit 2 is equipped with multiple galvanometer mirrors to change the irradiation positions of the multiple processing light beams EL, respectively. However, the processing unit 2 may use one galvanometer mirror to change the emission directions of the multiple processing light beams EL collectively. In other words, multiple processing light beams EL may be incident on one galvanometer mirror.

 また、加工ユニット2の照射光学系211は、単一の加工光ELの照射位置を変えるために一つのガルバノミラー(一つのX走査ミラー及び一つのY走査ミラー)を備えていてもよい。別の言い方をすると、加工ユニット2の照射光学系211は、第2光学系215を備えていなくてもよく、第2及び第3光学系215及び216を備えていなくてもよい。なお、加工ユニット2の照射光学系は、単一の加工光ELの照射位置を変えるために、一つのX走査ミラーまたは一つのY走査ミラーを備えていてもよい。 The irradiation optical system 211 of the processing unit 2 may also be equipped with one galvanometer mirror (one X-scanning mirror and one Y-scanning mirror) to change the irradiation position of the single processing light EL. In other words, the irradiation optical system 211 of the processing unit 2 may not be equipped with the second optical system 215, and may not be equipped with the second and third optical systems 215 and 216. The irradiation optical system of the processing unit 2 may also be equipped with one X-scanning mirror or one Y-scanning mirror to change the irradiation position of the single processing light EL.

 上述した説明では、制御ユニット7は、造形面MS上に設定される加工単位領域PUA内において目標照射領域EAが移動するようにガルバノミラー2146及び2156の少なくとも一方を制御しながら、造形面MS上を加工単位領域PUAが移動するようにヘッド駆動系22及びステージ駆動系32の少なくとも一方を制御することで、造形面MS上での加工単位領域PUAの移動方向に沿って延びる造形物を造形面MS上に造形している。しかしながら、制御ユニット7は、加工単位領域PUA内において、所望の形状パターンを有する造形物が造形されるように、加工ユニット2を制御してもよい。 In the above description, the control unit 7 controls at least one of the galvanometer mirrors 2146 and 2156 so that the target irradiation area EA moves within the processing unit area PUA set on the printing surface MS, while controlling at least one of the head drive system 22 and the stage drive system 32 so that the processing unit area PUA moves on the printing surface MS, thereby forming an object on the printing surface MS that extends along the movement direction of the processing unit area PUA on the printing surface MS. However, the control unit 7 may also control the processing unit 2 so that an object having a desired shape pattern is formed within the processing unit area PUA.

 上述した説明では、加工ユニット2は、造形材料Mに加工光ELを照射することで、造形材料Mを溶融させている。しかしながら、加工ユニット2は、任意のエネルギビームを造形材料Mに照射することで、造形材料Mを溶融させてもよい。任意のエネルギビームの一例として、荷電粒子ビーム及び電磁波等の少なくとも一つがあげられる。荷電粒子ビームの一例として、電子ビーム及びイオンビーム等の少なくとも一つがあげられる。 In the above description, the processing unit 2 melts the modeling material M by irradiating the modeling material M with the processing light EL. However, the processing unit 2 may melt the modeling material M by irradiating the modeling material M with any energy beam. An example of the any energy beam is at least one of a charged particle beam and an electromagnetic wave. An example of a charged particle beam is at least one of an electron beam and an ion beam.

 加工システムSYSは、付加加工と除去加工との双方を行ってもよい。例えば、加工システムSYSは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方を用いて付加加工を行うと共に、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方を用いて除去加工を行ってもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSは、付加加工と除去加工とを同時に行うことができる。尚、加工システムSYSが付加加工と除去加工とを同時に行わなくてもよい場合には、加工システムSYSは、同じ加工光ELを用いて、付加加工と除去加工とを行ってもよい。 The processing system SYS may perform both additive processing and removal processing. For example, the processing system SYS may perform additive processing using one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, and perform removal processing using the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2. In this case, the processing system SYS can perform additive processing and removal processing simultaneously. Note that, in cases where the processing system SYS does not need to perform additive processing and removal processing simultaneously, the processing system SYS may perform additive processing and removal processing using the same processing light EL.

 加工システムSYSは、付加加工及び除去加工の少なくとも一方に加えて、付加加工又は除去加工によって加工されたワークW(或いは、ワークWに造形された造形物)の表面の平面度を小さくする(つまり、表面粗さを小さくする、表面を平面に近づける)ためのリメルト加工を行ってもよい。例えば、加工システムSYSは、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか一方を用いて付加加工及び除去加工の少なくとも一方を行うと共に、加工光EL#1及びEL#2のいずれか他方を用いてリメルト加工を行ってもよい。この場合、加工システムSYSは、付加加工及び除去加工の少なくとも一方とリメルト加工とを同時に行うことができる。尚、加工システムSYSが付加加工及び除去加工の少なくとも一方とリメルト加工とを同時に行わなくてもよい場合には、加工システムSYSは、同じ加工光ELを用いて、付加加工及び除去加工の少なくとも一方とリメルト加工とを行ってもよい。 The processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing, as well as a remelt processing to reduce the flatness of the surface of the workpiece W (or a molded object formed on the workpiece W) processed by the additive processing or the subtractive processing (i.e., to reduce the surface roughness, to make the surface closer to a flat surface). For example, the processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing using one of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2, and may perform the remelt processing using the other of the processing lights EL#1 and EL#2. In this case, the processing system SYS can perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing and the remelt processing simultaneously. Note that, in cases where the processing system SYS does not need to perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing and the remelt processing simultaneously, the processing system SYS may perform at least one of the additive processing and the subtractive processing and the remelt processing using the same processing light EL.

 上述した加工ユニット2(特に、加工ヘッド21)は、ロボット(典型的には多関節ロボット)に取り付けられてもよい。加工ヘッド21がロボットによって移動される場合、ヘッド駆動系22がロボットであってもよい。例えば、加工ユニット2(特に、加工ヘッド21)は、溶接を行うための溶接ロボットに取り付けられてもよい。例えば、加工ユニット2(特に、加工ヘッド21)は、自走可能なモバイルロボット、典型的にはAGV(Automatic Guided Vehicle)やAMR(Autonomous Mobile Robot)等の自走装置と当該自走装置に設けられたロボットアームに取り付けられてもよい。 The above-mentioned processing unit 2 (particularly, the processing head 21) may be attached to a robot (typically, a multi-joint robot). When the processing head 21 is moved by a robot, the head drive system 22 may be a robot. For example, the processing unit 2 (particularly, the processing head 21) may be attached to a welding robot for performing welding. For example, the processing unit 2 (particularly, the processing head 21) may be attached to a self-propelled mobile robot, typically a self-propelled device such as an AGV (Automatic Guided Vehicle) or an AMR (Autonomous Mobile Robot), and a robot arm provided on the self-propelled device.

 (4)付記
 以上説明した実施形態に関して、更に以下の付記を開示する。
(4) Supplementary Notes The following supplementary notes are further disclosed with respect to the embodiment described above.

[付記1]
 供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、
 前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームの位置を検出する第1検出装置と、前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームが前記物体及び前記造形材料のうち少なくとも一方に照射されることによって生じる光を検出する第2検出装置と、前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームの少なくとも一部を前記第1検出装置に導くと共に、前記エネルギビームが前記物体及び前記造形材料のうち少なくとも一方に照射されることによって生じる前記光の少なくとも一部を前記第2検出装置に導く光分割部材とを備える検出装置と
 を備える加工システム。
[Appendix 1]
a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
A processing system comprising: a first detection device that detects the position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device; a second detection device that detects light generated by the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material; and a detection device comprising a light dividing member that guides at least a portion of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device to the first detection device and guides at least a portion of the light generated by the energy beam being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material to the second detection device.

[付記2]
 材料供給部材の供給口から供給された造形材料を照射装置から射出されたエネルギビームで溶融して、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、
 前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームの位置を第1検出装置を用いて検出することと、
 前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームが前記物体及び前記造形材料のうち少なくとも一方に照射されることによって生じる光を第2検出装置を用いて検出することと、
 光分割部材を用いて、前記照射装置から射出される前記エネルギビームの少なくとも一部を前記第1検出装置に導くと共に、前記エネルギビームが前記物体及び前記造形材料のうち少なくとも一方に照射されることによって生じる前記光の少なくとも一部を前記第2検出装置に導くことと
 を含む加工方法。
[Appendix 2]
performing additional processing to form a model on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device;
Detecting a position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device using a first detection device;
Detecting light generated by irradiation of at least one of the object and the building material with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device using a second detection device;
A processing method comprising: using a light dividing member to guide at least a portion of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device to the first detection device, and to guide at least a portion of the light generated by the energy beam being irradiated onto at least one of the object and the building material to the second detection device.

[付記3]
 第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて物体を加工する加工装置と、
 前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割する光分割部材を備え、前記光分割部材を介した前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る面内での照射位置と、前記光分割部材を介した前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る面内での照射位置とを検出する検出装置と、
 前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する制御装置と
 を備え、
 前記照射装置は、前記面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、
 前記検出装置は、前記第2エネルギビームが前記面に照射されないときに前記第1エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出し、前記第1エネルギビームが前記面に照射されないときに前記第2エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出する
 加工システム。
[Appendix 3]
a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams, the processing device processing an object using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device;
a detection device including a light splitting member that splits a portion of the first and second energy beams, and that detects an irradiation position in a plane that crosses a traveling direction of the first energy beam via the light splitting member and an irradiation position in a plane that crosses a traveling direction of the second energy beam via the light splitting member;
a control device that controls the processing device based on a detection result of the detection device,
the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the plane, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the plane,
The detection device detects the irradiation position of the first energy beam when the second energy beam is not irradiated to the surface, and detects the irradiation position of the second energy beam when the first energy beam is not irradiated to the surface.

[付記4]
 前記検出装置は、前記検出装置の検出面へ向かう前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一方を選択的に減光する減光部材を備える
 付記3に記載の加工システム。
[Appendix 4]
4. The processing system of claim 3, wherein the detection device includes an attenuation member that selectively attenuates one of the first and second energy beams directed toward a detection surface of the detection device.

[付記5]
 前記第1エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出する第1期間と、前記第2エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出する第2期間とは異なる期間である
 付記3又は4に記載の加工システム。
[Appendix 5]
The processing system according to claim 3 or 4, wherein a first period for detecting the irradiation position of the first energy beam and a second period for detecting the irradiation position of the second energy beam are different periods.

[付記6]
 前記検出装置の検出面は、前記第1走査光学系による前記第1エネルギビームの走査範囲と前記第2走査光学系による前記第2エネルギビームの走査範囲との少なくとも一部同士が重畳する位置に設けられる
 付記3から5のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
[Appendix 6]
The processing system according to any one of appendixes 3 to 5, wherein a detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where at least a portion of a scanning range of the first energy beam by the first scanning optical system and a scanning range of the second energy beam by the second scanning optical system overlap with each other.

[付記7]
 照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて物体を加工することと、
 光分割部材を用いて前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割することと、
 前記光分割部材を介した前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る面内での照射位置と、前記光分割部材を介した前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る面内での照射位置とを、検出装置を用いて検出することと、
 前記面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査することと、
 前記面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査することと、
 前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて物体を加工する加工装置を制御することと
 を含み、
 前記照射位置を検出することは、
 前記第2エネルギビームが前記面に照射されないときに前記第1エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出することと、
 前記第1エネルギビームが前記面に照射されないときに前記第2エネルギビームの前記照射位置を検出することと
 を含む加工方法。
[Appendix 7]
Processing an object using the first and second energy beams emitted from an irradiation device;
splitting a portion of the first and second energy beams using a light splitting member;
Detecting, using a detection device, an irradiation position in a plane transverse to a traveling direction of the first energy beam via the light splitting member and an irradiation position in a plane transverse to a traveling direction of the second energy beam via the light splitting member;
scanning the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the plane;
scanning the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the plane;
and controlling a processing device that processes an object using the first and second energy beams based on a detection result of the detection device;
Detecting the irradiation position includes:
detecting the position of the first energy beam when the second energy beam is not irradiated onto the surface;
detecting the irradiation position of the second energy beam when the first energy beam is not irradiated onto the surface.

 上述の各実施形態の構成要件の少なくとも一部は、上述の各実施形態の構成要件の少なくとも他の一部と適宜組み合わせることができる。上述の各実施形態の構成要件のうちの一部が用いられなくてもよい。また、法令で許容される限りにおいて、上述の各実施形態で引用した全ての公開公報及び米国特許の開示を援用して本文の記載の一部とする。 At least some of the constituent elements of each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be appropriately combined with at least some of the other constituent elements of each of the above-mentioned embodiments. Some of the constituent elements of each of the above-mentioned embodiments may not be used. In addition, to the extent permitted by law, the disclosures of all publications and U.S. patents cited in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are incorporated by reference into the present text.

 本発明は、上述した実施例に限られるものではなく、特許請求の範囲及び明細書全体から読み取れる発明の要旨或いは思想に反しない範囲で適宜変更可能であり、そのような変更を伴う加工方法及び造形方法もまた本発明の技術的範囲に含まれるものである。 The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, but may be modified as appropriate within the scope of the claims and the overall specification of the invention without violating the spirit or concept of the invention, and processing and shaping methods involving such modifications are also included within the technical scope of the present invention.

 SYS 加工システム
 2 加工ユニット
 21 加工ヘッド
 211 照射光学系
 212 材料ノズル
 2146、2156 ガルバノミラー
 2162 fθレンズ
 212 材料ノズル
 22 ヘッド駆動系
 3 ステージユニット
 31 ステージ
 32 ステージ駆動系
 8 撮像装置
 W ワーク
 M 造形材料
 MS 造形面
 PL 材料供給面
 ES 材料照射面
 EL 加工光
 MP 溶融池
SYS Machining system 2 Machining unit 21 Machining head 211 Irradiation optical system 212 Material nozzle 2146, 2156 Galvanometer mirror 2162 fθ lens 212 Material nozzle 22 Head drive system 3 Stage unit 31 Stage 32 Stage drive system 8 Imaging device W Workpiece M Building material MS Building surface PL Material supply surface ES Material irradiation surface EL Processing light MP Molten pool

Claims (49)

 供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と、前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光とを撮像する撮像装置と、
 前記撮像装置の撮像結果に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する制御装置と
 を備える加工システム。
a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
an imaging device that images a portion whose positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed, and the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam;
and a control device that controls the processing device based on an imaging result of the imaging device.
 前記撮像装置の撮像面には、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位の像と前記エネルギビームの像又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する前記光の像とが形成される
 請求項1に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein an image of the portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member and an image of the energy beam or an image of the light generated by the energy beam are formed on an imaging surface of the imaging device.
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位は、前記材料供給部材の一部である
 請求項1又は2に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supplying member is a part of the material supplying member.
 前記材料供給部材は、前記供給口の第1部分から第1方向に向けて前記造形材料を供給すると共に、前記供給口の前記第1部分とは異なる第2部分から前記第1方向とは異なる第2方向に向けて前記造形材料を供給し、
 前記撮像装置は、前記第1部分と前記第2部分との間から前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する前記光を撮像する
 請求項1から3までのいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
the material supply member supplies the modeling material from a first portion of the supply port in a first direction, and supplies the modeling material from a second portion of the supply port different from the first portion in a second direction different from the first direction,
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein the imaging device images the energy beam or the light generated by the energy beam from between the first portion and the second portion.
 前記材料供給部材の前記供給口は輪帯形状であり、
 前記撮像装置は、前記輪帯形状の前記供給口の内側に撮像光路を有する
 請求項4に記載の加工システム。
The supply port of the material supply member has an annular shape,
The processing system according to claim 4 , wherein the imaging device has an imaging optical path inside the annular supply port.
 前記撮像結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , further comprising: a processing device that controls the processing device based on the image pickup result.
 前記照射装置は、前記エネルギビームを偏向走査可能な偏向走査光学系を含み、
 前記制御装置は、前記撮像結果に基づいて前記偏向光学系を制御する
 請求項6に記載の加工システム。
the irradiation device includes a deflection scanning optical system capable of deflecting and scanning the energy beam,
The processing system according to claim 6 , wherein the control device controls the deflection optical system based on the imaging result.
 前記制御装置は、前記撮像結果に基づいて、前記偏向走査光学系への駆動指令値を生成する
 請求項7に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 7 , wherein the control device generates a drive command value for the deflection scanning optical system based on the imaging result.
 前記制御装置は、前記撮像装置の撮像面に入射する前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する前記光の入射位置に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項6から8のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 6 , wherein the control device controls the processing device based on an incident position of the energy beam incident on an imaging surface of the imaging device or the light generated by the energy beam.
 前記制御装置は、前記造形物が造形される面である造形面又は前記造形面と等価な面上での前記エネルギビームの照射位置と、前記撮像面上での前記入射位置との関係に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項9に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 9 , wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a relationship between an irradiation position of the energy beam on a printing surface, which is a surface on which the object is printed, or a surface equivalent to the printing surface, and the incidence position on the imaging surface.
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位は、前記照射装置からの前記エネルギビームの光路に配置される光学部材に設けられる指標部分を含む
 請求項1から9のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein the portion whose positional relationship with the material supplying member is fixed includes an index portion provided on an optical member arranged in an optical path of the energy beam from the irradiation device.
 前記付加加工が行われる期間と前記付加加工が行われない期間とで前記部位と前記材料供給部材の前記供給口との位置関係は固定されている
 請求項1から10のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein a positional relationship between the site and the supply port of the material supply member is fixed during a period in which the additional processing is performed and a period in which the additional processing is not performed.
 前記撮像装置は、前記エネルギビームが通過する前記照射装置の光学系の少なくとも一部を通過する光を用いて撮像する
 請求項1から12のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein the imaging device captures an image using light passing through at least a part of an optical system of the irradiation device through which the energy beam passes.
 前記撮像装置は、前記エネルギビームによって形成される溶融池を前記加工装置が前記付加加工を行っている期間において撮像する
 請求項1から13のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 1 , wherein the imaging device images the molten pool formed by the energy beam while the processing device is performing the additional processing.
 供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位と、前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームの像及び前記エネルギビームにより発生する光の像のうち少なくとも一方の像とを撮像面で撮像する撮像装置と
 を備える加工システム。
a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
A processing system comprising: a portion whose positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed; and an imaging device that captures at least one of an image of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device and an image of light generated by the energy beam on an imaging surface.
 材料供給部材の供給口から供給された造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光とを撮像することと、
 前記撮像することによる撮像結果に基づいて、前記付加加工を制御することと
 を含む加工方法。
performing additional processing to form a model on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam;
capturing an image of a portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member and the energy beam or light generated by the energy beam;
and controlling the additional processing based on an imaging result obtained by imaging the image.
 材料供給部材の供給口から供給された造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位と前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光との間の位置関係を検出することと、
 前記検出することによる検出結果を用いて、前記位置関係を調整することと
 を含む加工方法。
performing additional processing to form a model on an object by melting a modeling material supplied from a supply port of a material supply member with an energy beam;
Detecting a positional relationship between a portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member and the energy beam or light generated by the energy beam;
and adjusting the positional relationship using a detection result obtained by the detecting.
 供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位の位置と前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光の位置とを検出する検出装置と、
 前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する制御装置と
 を備える加工システム。
a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
a detection device that detects the position of a portion whose positional relationship with the material supply member is fixed and the position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or the position of light generated by the energy beam;
and a control device that controls the processing device based on a detection result of the detection device.
 前記制御装置は、第1の期間における前記部位の位置の検出結果と、前記第1の期間よりも後の第2の期間における前記部位の位置の検出結果とに基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項18に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 18 , wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a detection result of the position of the part in a first period and a detection result of the position of the part in a second period after the first period.
 前記制御装置は、第3の期間における前記光の位置の検出結果と、前記第3の期間よりも後の第4の期間における前記光の位置の検出結果とに基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項18又は19に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a detection result of the position of the light in a third period and a detection result of the position of the light in a fourth period after the third period.
 前記照射装置は、前記エネルギビームを偏向走査可能な偏向走査光学系を含み、
 前記制御装置は、前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて前記偏向光学系を制御する
 請求項18から20のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
the irradiation device includes a deflection scanning optical system capable of deflecting and scanning the energy beam,
The processing system according to claim 18 , wherein the control device controls the deflection optical system based on a detection result of the detection device.
 前記制御装置は、前記部位の位置の検出結果に基づいて、前記偏向走査光学系への駆動指令値を生成する
 請求項21に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 21 , wherein the control device generates a drive command value for the deflection scanning optical system based on a detection result of the position of the part.
 前記検出装置は、前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する光を検出する検出面を備え、
 前記制御装置は、前記照射装置から射出されて前記検出面に入射する前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生して前記検出面に入射する光の入射位置に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項18から22のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
the detection device includes a detection surface that detects the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam,
The processing system according to any one of claims 18 to 22, wherein the control device controls the processing device based on an incident position of the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device and incident on the detection surface, or light generated by the energy beam and incident on the detection surface.
 前記制御装置は、前記造形物が造形される面である造形面又は前記造形面と等価な面上での前記エネルギビームの照射位置と、前記検出面上での前記入射位置との関係に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項23に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 23 , wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a relationship between an irradiation position of the energy beam on a printing surface, which is a surface on which the object is printed, or a surface equivalent to the printing surface, and the incidence position on the detection surface.
 前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された前記部位は、前記材料供給部材の一部である
 請求項18から24までのいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 18 , wherein the portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supplying member is a part of the material supplying member.
 前記材料供給部材は、前記供給口の第1部分から第1方向に向けて前記造形材料を供給すると共に、前記供給口の前記第1部分とは異なる第2部分から前記第1方向とは異なる第2方向に向けて前記造形材料を供給し、
 前記検出装置は、前記第1部分と前記第2部分との間から前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生する前記光とを検出する
 請求項18から25までのいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
the material supply member supplies the modeling material from a first portion of the supply port in a first direction, and supplies the modeling material from a second portion of the supply port different from the first portion in a second direction different from the first direction,
26. The processing system according to claim 18, wherein the detection device detects the energy beam or the light generated by the energy beam from between the first portion and the second portion.
 材料供給部材の供給口から造形材料を供給することと、
 前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料をエネルギビームで溶融して、物体上に造形物を付加造形することと、
 第1の期間において、前記材料供給部材と位置関係が固定された部位の位置を検出することと、
 前記第1の期間の後の第2の期間において、前記位置関係が固定された前記部位の位置を検出することと、
 前記第1の期間において前記エネルギビームの位置を検出することと、
 前記第2の期間において前記エネルギビームの位置を検出することと
 を含む造形方法。
Supplying a modeling material from a supply port of a material supply member;
Additively forming a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port with an energy beam; and
Detecting a position of a portion having a fixed positional relationship with the material supply member during a first period;
detecting a position of the part in which the positional relationship is fixed during a second period after the first period;
detecting a position of the energy beam during the first period of time;
detecting a position of the energy beam during the second period.
 前記付加造形することは、前記第1及び第2の期間における前記部位の位置検出結果と、前記第1及び第2の期間における前記エネルギビームの位置検出結果とに基づいて、前記物体に対する前記エネルギビームの照射位置を変化させつつ付加造形することを含む
 請求項27に記載の造形方法。
The molding method according to claim 27, wherein the additive modeling includes additive modeling while changing an irradiation position of the energy beam with respect to the object based on a position detection result of the portion in the first and second time periods and a position detection result of the energy beam in the first and second time periods.
 前記付加造形することは、第3の期間における前記光の位置の検出結果と、前記第3の期間よりも後の第4の期間における前記光の位置の検出結果とに基づいて、前記物体に対する前記エネルギビームの照射位置を変化させつつ付加造形することを含む
 請求項27又は28に記載の造形方法。
The molding method according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the additive modeling includes additive modeling while changing an irradiation position of the energy beam with respect to the object based on a detection result of the position of the light in a third period and a detection result of the position of the light in a fourth period after the third period.
 前記検出することは、検出装置の検出面に入射する前記エネルギビーム又は前記エネルギビームにより発生して前記検出面に入射する光を検出することを含み、
 前記付加造形することは、前記検出面に入射する前記エネルギビームの入射位置又は前記エネルギビームにより発生して前記検出面に入射する光の入射位置に基づいて、前記物体に対する前記エネルギビームの照射位置を変化させつつ付加造形することを含む
 請求項27から29のいずれか一項に記載の造形方法。
the detecting includes detecting the energy beam incident on a detection surface of a detection device or light generated by the energy beam and incident on the detection surface;
The method for manufacturing according to any one of claims 27 to 29, wherein the additive manufacturing includes additive manufacturing while changing an irradiation position of the energy beam with respect to the object based on an incident position of the energy beam incident on the detection surface or an incident position of light generated by the energy beam and incident on the detection surface.
 前記付加造形することは、前記造形物が造形される面である造形面又は前記造形面と等価な面上での前記エネルギビームの照射位置と、前記検出面上での前記入射位置との関係に基づいて、前記物体に対する前記エネルギビームの照射位置を変化させつつ付加造形することを含む
 請求項30に記載の造形方法。
The molding method according to claim 30, wherein the additive molding includes additive molding while changing the irradiation position of the energy beam with respect to the object based on a relationship between the irradiation position of the energy beam on a printing surface, which is a surface on which the object is to be molded, or a surface equivalent to the printing surface, and the incident position on the detection surface.
 第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、
 前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割するビームスプリッタを備え、前記ビームスプリッタを介した前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第1面内での照射位置と、前記ビームスプリッタを介した前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第2面内での照射位置とを検出する検出装置と、
 前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する制御装置と
 を備え、
 前記照射装置は、前記第1面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記第2面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、
 前記検出装置の検出面は、前記第1走査光学系による前記第1エネルギビームの走査範囲と前記第2走査光学系による前記第2エネルギビームの走査範囲とが重畳しない位置に設けられる
 加工システム。
a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams, the processing device processing a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device;
a detection device including a beam splitter that splits a portion of the first and second energy beams, and that detects an irradiation position in a first plane that crosses a traveling direction of the first energy beam via the beam splitter and an irradiation position in a second plane that crosses a traveling direction of the second energy beam via the beam splitter;
a control device that controls the processing device based on a detection result of the detection device,
the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the first plane, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the second plane,
A processing system, wherein a detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where a scanning range of the first energy beam by the first scanning optical system and a scanning range of the second energy beam by the second scanning optical system do not overlap.
 前記制御装置は、前記ビームスプリッタを介して前記物体側へ向かう前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第3面における、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの照射位置の検出結果と、前記検出装置からの検出結果とに基づいて前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項32に記載の加工システム。
33. The processing system according to claim 32, wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a detection result of the irradiation positions of the first and second energy beams on a third plane intersecting a traveling direction of the first and second energy beams toward the object side via the beam splitter and a detection result from the detection device.
 前記制御装置は、前記照射装置から射出されて前記検出面に入射する前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの入射位置に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項32又は33に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the control device controls the processing device based on incident positions of the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device and incident on the detection surface.
 前記制御装置は、前記物体の被加工面又は前記被加工面と等価な面上での前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの照射位置と、前記検出面上での前記入射位置との関係に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する
 請求項34に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 34, wherein the control device controls the processing device based on a relationship between irradiation positions of the first and second energy beams on a surface to be processed of the object or a surface equivalent to the surface to be processed and the incidence position on the detection surface.
 前記検出装置は、前記加工装置からの前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて前記ワークを加工している期間の少なくとも一部の期間において、前記照射位置を検出する
 請求項32から35のいずれか一項に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to any one of claims 32 to 35, wherein the detection device detects the irradiation position during at least a portion of a period during which the workpiece is processed using the first and second energy beams from the processing device.
 前記制御装置は、前記少なくとも一部の期間において、前記検出結果の検出結果に基づいて、前記第1及び第2走査光学系による前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの照射位置を定める
 請求項36に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 36 , wherein the control device determines irradiation positions of the first and second energy beams by the first and second scanning optical systems based on the detection results during the at least part of the period.
 照射装置から射出された第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いて物体を加工することと、
 前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの一部を分割することと、
 前記分割することによって分割された前記第1エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第1面内での照射位置を検出装置で検出することと、
 前記分割することによって分割された前記第2エネルギビームの進行方向を横切る第2面内での照射位置を検出することと
 を含み、
 前記加工することは、前記第1面内で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査することと、前記第2面内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査することとを含み、
 前記検出装置の検出面は、前記第1エネルギビームを走査することによる前記第1エネルギビームの走査範囲と前記第2エネルギビームを走査することによる前記第2エネルギビームの走査範囲とが重畳しない位置に設けられる
 加工方法。
Processing an object using first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device;
splitting a portion of the first and second energy beams;
detecting, by a detection device, an irradiation position of the first energy beam divided by the division within a first plane transverse to a traveling direction of the first energy beam;
detecting an irradiation position of the second energy beam divided by the division within a second plane transverse to a traveling direction of the second energy beam,
the processing includes scanning the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves within the first plane, and scanning the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the second plane,
A processing method, wherein a detection surface of the detection device is provided at a position where a scanning range of the first energy beam by scanning the first energy beam and a scanning range of the second energy beam by scanning the second energy beam do not overlap.
 供給口から造形材料を供給する材料供給部材と、エネルギビームを射出する照射装置とを備え、前記材料供給部材の前記供給口から供給された前記造形材料を前記照射装置から射出された前記エネルギビームで溶融することで、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行う加工装置と、
 前記照射装置から射出された後に前記照射装置に向かって戻される光又は前記照射装置からの前記エネルギビームによって生じて前記照射装置に向かって戻される光と、前記材料供給部材の少なくとも一部を介した前記照射装置からの光とを検出する検出装置と
 を備える加工システム。
a processing device including a material supplying member that supplies a modeling material from a supply port and an irradiation device that emits an energy beam, and performs additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material supplied from the supply port of the material supplying member with the energy beam emitted from the irradiation device;
a detection device that detects light that is emitted from the irradiation device and then returned toward the irradiation device, or light that is generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device and returned toward the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device through at least a portion of the material supply member.
 前記照射装置は、前記造形材料を溶融するためのエネルギビームと前記検出装置で検出するための光とを射出する
 請求項39に記載の加工システム。
40. The processing system of claim 39, wherein the irradiation device emits an energy beam for melting the build material and light for detection by the detection device.
 前記検出装置の検出結果に基づいて、前記加工装置を制御する制御装置を更に備える
 請求項39又は40に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 39 or 40, further comprising a control device that controls the processing device based on a detection result of the detection device.
 材料供給部材の供給口から噴出された造形材料を照射装置から射出されたエネルギビームで溶融して、物体上に造形物を造形する付加加工を行うことと、
 前記照射装置から射出された後に前記照射装置に向かって戻される光又は前記照射装置からの前記エネルギビームによって生じる光と、前記材料供給部材の少なくとも一部を介した前記照射装置からの光とを検出することと
 を含む加工方法。
performing additional processing to form a model on an object by melting the modeling material ejected from a supply port of the material supply member with an energy beam emitted from an irradiation device;
detecting light that is emitted from the irradiation device and then returned toward the irradiation device or light generated by the energy beam from the irradiation device, and light from the irradiation device through at least a portion of the material supply member.
 第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、
 前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する物体を介した光を受光する受光装置と、
 前記受光装置の受光結果に基づいて前記加工装置を制御する制御装置と
 を備え、
 前記照射装置は、前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記物体上内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、
 前記制御装置は、前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったときの前記第1及び第2偏向走査光学系への駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行う、
 加工システム。
a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams, the processing device processing a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device;
a light receiving device that receives light through an object on which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident;
a control device that controls the processing device based on a light receiving result of the light receiving device,
the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object,
the control device performs drive control of the first scanning optical system and drive control of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second deflection scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.
Processing system.
 前記第1及び第2走査光学系と前記物体との間に配置され、前記第1及び第2走査光学系からの前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを前記物体に向け、且つ前記物体を介した前記光を前記受光装置に向けるビームスプリッタを更に備える
 請求項43に記載の加工システム。
44. The processing system of claim 43, further comprising a beam splitter disposed between the first and second scanning optical systems and the object, the beam splitter directing the first and second energy beams from the first and second scanning optical systems to the object and directing the light through the object to the light receiving device.
 前記受光装置は、前記物体に照射される前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの照射位置を検出する検出器を備える
 請求項43又は44に記載の加工システム。
The processing system according to claim 43 or 44, wherein the light receiving device includes a detector that detects irradiation positions of the first and second energy beams irradiated onto the object.
 前記制御装置は、前記物体上における前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置の移動範囲と、前記物体上における前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置の移動範囲とが重畳する領域における複数の箇所で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを重ねるように前記第1及び第2走査光学系を駆動し、前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったときの前記第1及び第2走査光学系への複数の駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行う
 請求項45に記載の加工システム。
46. The processing system of claim 45, wherein the control device drives the first and second scanning optical systems so as to overlap the first and second energy beams at multiple locations in an area where a movement range of the irradiation position of the first energy beam on the object and a movement range of the irradiation position of the second energy beam on the object overlap, and performs drive control of the first scanning optical system and drive control of the second scanning optical system based on multiple drive command values to the first and second scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap.
 前記制御装置は、前記検出器の検出面における前記第1及び第2エネルギビームの入射位置が重なったときの前記第1及び第2走査光学系への駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行う
 請求項45又は46に記載の加工システム。
The processing system described in claim 45 or 46, wherein the control device controls the drive of the first scanning optical system and the drive of the second scanning optical system based on drive command values for the first and second scanning optical systems when the incident positions of the first and second energy beams on the detection surface of the detector overlap.
 第1及び第2エネルギビームを射出する照射装置を備え、前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームを用いてワークを加工する加工装置と、
 前記照射装置から射出された前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する物体を介した光を検出する検出装置と
 を備え、
 前記照射装置は、前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第1エネルギビームを走査する第1走査光学系と、前記物体上内で前記第2エネルギビームの照射位置が移動するように前記第2エネルギビームを走査する第2走査光学系とを含み、
 前記検出装置は、前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったことを検出する
 加工システム。
a processing device including an irradiation device that emits first and second energy beams, the processing device processing a workpiece using the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device;
a detection device that detects light passing through an object onto which the first and second energy beams emitted from the irradiation device are incident,
the irradiation device includes a first scanning optical system that scans the first energy beam so that an irradiation position of the first energy beam moves on the object, and a second scanning optical system that scans the second energy beam so that an irradiation position of the second energy beam moves within the object,
The detection device detects overlap of the first and second energy beams on the object.
 物体上で第1エネルギビームの照射位置を移動させる第1走査光学系を用いて、前記第1エネルギビームを前記物体上で走査することと、
 前記物体上で前記第1エネルギビームとは異なる第2エネルギビームの照射位置を移動させる第2走査光学系を用いて、前記第2エネルギビームを前記物体上で走査することと、
 前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが入射する前記物体を介した光を受光することと、
 前記物体上で前記第1及び第2エネルギビームが重なったときの前記第1及び第2走査光学系への駆動指令値に基づいて、前記第1走査光学系の駆動制御と前記第2走査光学系の駆動制御とを行うことと
 を含む加工方法。
Scanning the first energy beam on the object using a first scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of the first energy beam on the object;
Scanning the second energy beam on the object using a second scanning optical system that moves an irradiation position of a second energy beam different from the first energy beam on the object;
receiving light through the object onto which the first and second energy beams are incident;
and controlling the driving of the first scanning optical system and the second scanning optical system based on driving command values for the first and second scanning optical systems when the first and second energy beams overlap on the object.
PCT/JP2023/042768 2023-11-29 2023-11-29 Processing system, processing method, and shaping method Pending WO2025115135A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2023/042768 WO2025115135A1 (en) 2023-11-29 2023-11-29 Processing system, processing method, and shaping method

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2023/042768 WO2025115135A1 (en) 2023-11-29 2023-11-29 Processing system, processing method, and shaping method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025115135A1 true WO2025115135A1 (en) 2025-06-05

Family

ID=95896566

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/042768 Pending WO2025115135A1 (en) 2023-11-29 2023-11-29 Processing system, processing method, and shaping method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025115135A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000263261A (en) * 1999-03-16 2000-09-26 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Laser processing apparatus and laser processing method using the apparatus
JP2018138694A (en) * 2014-11-14 2018-09-06 株式会社ニコン Modeling apparatus and modeling method
JP2019076937A (en) * 2017-10-26 2019-05-23 住友重機械工業株式会社 Laser processing device
JP2020171968A (en) * 2020-06-22 2020-10-22 株式会社ニコン Shaping apparatus and shaping method
JP2021009126A (en) * 2019-07-03 2021-01-28 株式会社ジェイテクト Quality estimation device for additional products
JP2022057039A (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-11 株式会社ジェイテクト Additive manufacturing apparatus
JP2022185291A (en) * 2021-06-02 2022-12-14 株式会社ニコン Molding device and molding method, and, processing device and processing method

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000263261A (en) * 1999-03-16 2000-09-26 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Laser processing apparatus and laser processing method using the apparatus
JP2018138694A (en) * 2014-11-14 2018-09-06 株式会社ニコン Modeling apparatus and modeling method
JP2019076937A (en) * 2017-10-26 2019-05-23 住友重機械工業株式会社 Laser processing device
JP2021009126A (en) * 2019-07-03 2021-01-28 株式会社ジェイテクト Quality estimation device for additional products
JP2020171968A (en) * 2020-06-22 2020-10-22 株式会社ニコン Shaping apparatus and shaping method
JP2022057039A (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-11 株式会社ジェイテクト Additive manufacturing apparatus
JP2022185291A (en) * 2021-06-02 2022-12-14 株式会社ニコン Molding device and molding method, and, processing device and processing method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7639823B2 (en) Processing System
CN106922135A (en) Molding device and molding method
TW201838746A (en) Processing method and processing system
JP6765569B1 (en) Laminated modeling equipment, laminated modeling method, and laminated modeling program
CN116133784A (en) Laminate forming device
CN119057083A (en) Modeling system and modeling method
JP7186898B2 (en) Additive manufacturing equipment
US20240375219A1 (en) Build system
WO2023188005A1 (en) Shaping system, radiation condition setting method, input system, computer program, and recording medium
WO2025115135A1 (en) Processing system, processing method, and shaping method
US20250339921A1 (en) Processing system and processing method
JP2024038158A (en) Processing system and optical equipment
KR101948587B1 (en) 3D printer using glass fiber
US20250214177A1 (en) Processing apparatus
EP4588607A1 (en) Processing system, data structure, and processing method
JP7786586B2 (en) Modeling System
WO2024013930A1 (en) Modeling system, processing system, modeling method, and processing method
US20250050582A1 (en) Device for the additive manufacturing of components
WO2024189768A1 (en) Processing system and processing method
WO2023248458A1 (en) Shaping method and shaping device
WO2024189765A1 (en) Processing system and processing method
WO2024189767A1 (en) Processing system and processing method
WO2025027849A1 (en) Shaping system and shaping method
WO2025069364A1 (en) Beam scanning device, processing device, and processing method
WO2025203459A1 (en) Shaping method and shaping device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23960155

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1